d5 Ueq User Doc 3 0 1 Std (Arris Ipqam d5用户手册)

D5 Universal Edge QAM
User Documentation
Release 3.0.1
Standard
July 22, 2010
2003-2010 ARRIS Group, Inc.
All rights reserved.
Copyright and Trademark Information
ARRIS D5 Universal Edge QAM
The capabilities, system requirements and/or compatibility with third-party products described
herein are subject to change without notice. ARRIS, the ARRIS logo, Auspice, C3, C4, C4c,
Cadant, C-COR, CHP Max, CHP Max5000, ConvergeMedia, Cornerstone, CORWave,
CXM, D5, Digicon, ENCORE, Flex Max, HEMi, Keystone, MONARCH, MOXI, n5,
nABLE, nVision, OpsLogic, OpsLogic Service Visibility Portal, PLEXiS, PowerSense,
QUARTET, Regal, ServAssure, Service Visibility Portal, TeleWire Supply, TLX,
Touchstone, EGT VIPr, VoiceAssure, VSM, and WorkAssure are all trademarks of ARRIS
Group, Inc. Other trademarks and trade names may be used in this document to refer to either
the entities claiming the marks and the names of their products. ARRIS disclaims proprietary
interest in the marks and names of others. Copyright 2010 ARRIS Group, Inc. All rights
reserved. Reproduction in any manner whatsoever without the express written permission of
ARRIS Group, Inc. is strictly forbidden. For more information, contact ARRIS.
STANDARD LICENSE AGREEMENT AND LIMITED WARRANTY
This Standard License Agreement and Limited Warranty (Agreement) applies to all ARRIS manu-
factured or otherwise ARRIS provided products (Products) and the corresponding current and
subsequently provided versions of software or firmware, if any, whether embedded in the Products
or used in conjunction with the Products, (Software). The Product, without the Software, is
referred to in this Agreement as the (Hardware). The Software and Hardware are ARRIS Products
and may be referred to in this Agreement as the (System).
If you (You or Purchaser) and ARRIS Group, Inc. (ARRIS) have entered into a separate written
agreement, then, inconsistent terms between this Agreement and the separate agreement shall be
governed by such separate agreement.
If you do not agree to be bound by this Agreement, please return the Products to the Party from
whom You acquired the Products. Use of the Products shall constitute acceptance of the terms
hereof.
1. License Terms
Subject to the terms herein, ARRIS grants You a royalty-free, non-exclusive, non-transferable,
non-sublicensable license to use the Software with the Products, in binary object code form only.
You may use third party software products or modules supplied by ARRIS solely with the System,
unless the licensing terms of the third party software specify otherwise. You may not disclose the
results of Software performance benchmarks to any third party without ARRIS prior written
consent. All rights not specifically granted to You herein are retained by ARRIS.
2. Restrictions
You and/or any third party agree not to (i) make any copies of the Software, (ii) modify,
decompile, disassemble, separate, reverse engineer or otherwise attempt to derive any source
code from the Software; (iii) transfer the Software to any third party without ARRIS written
consent; (iv) export the Software or any of its underlying technology in contravention of U.S. and
foreign export laws and regulations, or (v) if Products are included, use the Software other than in
connection with the System.
3. Use
The right to use the Software, or any individual feature thereof, may be restricted by a measure of
usage. An expansion beyond a commercially reasonable usage level may require payment of an
additional fee to ARRIS.
4. Software Developed at Private Expense
The Software provided under this Agreement is commercial computer software developed
exclusively at private expense, and in all respects are proprietary data belonging solely to ARRIS
and/or it licensors.
5. Limitations on Liability
NEITHER ARRIS NOR ITS LICENSORS SHALL BE LIABLE FOR INDIRECT, INCIDENTAL, PUNITIVE,
CONSEQUENTIAL, EXEMPLARY, OR SPECIAL DAMAGES UNDER ANY THEORY OF LIABILITY,
WHETHER ALLEGED AS A BREACH OF CONTRACT, TORT (INCLUDING NEGLIGENCE), STRICT
LIABILITY OR OTHERWISE AND REGARDLESS OF WHETHER YOU, ANY OTHER SOFTWARE USER,
OR ANY THIRD PARTY SUFFERED SUCH DAMAGES, EVEN IF ARRIS AND/OR ITS LICENSORS
HAVE BEEN ADVISED OF THE POSSIBILITY OF SUCH DAMAGES. IN NO EVENT WILL ARRIS
TOTAL LIABILITY TO YOU OR ANY THIRD PARTY ARISING OUT OF OR PURSUANT TO THIS
AGREEMENT EXCEED THE AMOUNT PAID BY PURCHASER TO ARRIS FOR THE SOFTWARE AND/
OR SYSTEM.
6. Term & Termination
This Agreement takes effect upon Your acceptance of the terms hereof or Your first use of the
Software and will remain in force until terminated in accordance hereunder. ARRIS may terminate
this Agreement upon fifteen (15) days prior written notice upon Your material breach of this
Agreement if such breach is not cured within such fifteen (15) day period. Notwithstanding the
foregoing, this Agreement shall terminate immediately upon Your breach of any of the provisions
of Section 2 above.
7. Ownership
Title, ownership rights, and all intellectual property rights in and to the Software and/or System
and any accompanying materials or documentation, and any copy of the foregoing, shall remain
the sole and exclusive property of ARRIS and/or its licensors. You agree to abide by copyright laws
and all other applicable laws, and acknowledge that the Software contains valuable confidential
information and trade secrets of ARRIS and/or its licensors.
8. Your Indemnification to ARRIS
You agree to defend, indemnify and hold ARRIS harmless from and against any costs, losses,
liabilities and expenses (including attorneys fees) arising out of or relating to third party claims
arising out of or related to Your use of the Software and/or System in contravention to the terms
of this Agreement, including without limitation, any and all claims, actions, suits, or proceedings
alleging fraud, breach of security, non-compliance with laws, breach of contract or negligence.
9. Patent I ndemnification
9.1 ARRIS will indemnify, defend and hold You harmless against damages, liabilities and costs,
excluding consequential and exemplary damages finally awarded against You and will, at
ARRIS expense, defend any claim, suit or proceeding (Claim) brought against You insofar as
such Claim is based on an allegation that the Products as provided to You directly infringe a
United States patent or copyright. ARRIS will pay those costs and damages, including settle-
ment costs awarded or agreed-upon, as applicable, as the result of the Claim, provided (i) You
promptly notify ARRIS of the Claim (ii) You give ARRIS all applicable evidence in Your posses-
sion, custody or control, (iii) You give ARRIS reasonable assistance in and sole control of the
defense and all negotiations for its settlement or compromise, and (iv) You have paid all fees
due to ARRIS under this Agreement and continue to pay all such fees as such become due.
9.2 In the event of an infringement allegation for which ARRIS is obligated to indemnify You,
ARRIS may at its discretion: (i) obtain a license that allows You to continue to use the accused
Products, (ii) replace or modify the accused Products with changes that reasonably meet the
ARRIS specification, so as to be non-infringing, or (iii) if (i) and (ii) are not commercially rea-
sonable, repurchase ARRIS provided Products at its depreciated value based on a three-year
amortization rate. If ARRIS provides any one of the options set forth in clauses (i) through (iii)
above, ARRIS indemnity obligation under this Agreement shall be entirely fulfilled. ARRIS lia-
bility for patent infringement indemnification in this section shall not exceed the amount You
paid for the Products finally found to infringe a valid US patent.
10. Limited Warranty
IF YOU ACQUIRED THE PRODUCTS FROM ANYONE OTHER THAN ARRIS YOU DO NOT RECEIVE
ANY OF THE WARRANTIES DIRECTLY FROM ARRIS. YOUR EXCLUSIVE WARRANTY, IF ANY,
COMES FROM THE PARTY FROM WHOM YOU ACQUIRED THE PRODUCTS: IN WHICH CASE THE
REMAINDER OF THIS DOCUMENT, EXCEPT FOR THE ARRIS TOUCHSTONE PRODUCTS SAFETY
INFORMATION, DOES NOT APPLY TO YOU.
11. Software Warranty
ARRIS warrants to the original purchaser that for ninety (90) days from the ship date of the
original ARRIS branded Software (the Software Warranty Period), the Software will perform in
substantial conformance with the technical specifications for such Software set forth in the
Documentation. Your sole and exclusive remedy, and ARRIS sole and exclusive liability under this
Section 11 (Software Warranty) shall be, at ARRIS option: (i) to use commercially reasonable
efforts to correct any reproducible errors that You identify in writing during the Software Warranty
Period which renders the Software non-conforming, (ii) to replace the Software with functionally
equivalent software or (iii) to accept Your return of the Software, if applicable. ARRIS does not
warrant that the Software will work in combination with any hardware or application software
products provided by third parties not supplied or approved by ARRIS, that the operation of the
Software will be uninterrupted or error free, or that all defects in the Software can be corrected.
ARRIS shall not have any obligation or liability with respect to this Section 11 for any errors or any
defects in the Software upon expiration of the Software Warranty Period.
12. Hardware Warranty
12.1 ARRIS warrants to the original Purchaser of the hardware that under normal use and ser-
vice, for twelve (12) months from the ship date (the Hardware Warranty Period) of the Hard-
ware, it will be free from defects in material and workmanship. Your sole and exclusive remedy
and ARRIS sole and exclusive liability under this Section 12 shall be, at ARRIS option: (i) to
use commercially reasonable efforts to correct any reproducible Hardware errors that You iden-
tify in writing during the Hardware Warranty Period which renders the Hardware non-con-
forming, (ii) to replace the Hardware or (iii) accept return of the Hardware from Purchaser.
ARRIS shall not be responsible for any of Your or third party software, firmware, information
or memory data contained in, stored on, or integrated with any Hardware Products returned to
ARRIS pursuant to any Warranty provided under this Agreement. Warranty for separately iden-
tified third party supplier hardware products included as part of the Product shall be only that
warranty which is provided directly from the third party supplier.
12.2 ARRIS does not warrant (1) physical damage to the surface of the products, including
cracks or scratches on the casing; (2) damage caused by misuse, neglect, improper installation
or testing, unauthorized attempts to open, repair or modify the products, or any other cause
beyond the range of the intended use; (3) damage caused by accident, fire, power changes,
other hazards, or acts of God.
12.3 Battery Pack. If Your product has a battery pack, ARRIS warrants that the battery pack
will be free from defects in workmanship and materials, under normal use, for twelve (12)
months from its ship date. This warranty is void if the ARRIS battery pack is used in any other
vendors equipment.
13. Warranty Claims
To make a return under the Warranty above, You must contact the ARRIS Repair Services center
within the applicable warranty period, in writing, by sending an E-mail to support@arrisi.com to
obtain an ARRIS Return Material Authorization number (RMA). The authorized RMA number You
receive from ARRIS must be marked on the outside package and sent prepaid and packaged
appropriately for safe shipment. ARRIS will use commercially reasonable efforts to ship any
repaired or replaced Product to You, at ARRIS expense, not later than thirty (30) days after ARRIS
receives the defective Product. ARRIS warrants the repaired or replaced Hardware or Software for
the longer of the remainder of the unexpired applicable Warranty Period or 90 days.
Notwithstanding the above, if any return is due to errors or defects for which ARRIS is not
responsible or not otherwise covered by the Warranty, You shall be liable for and reimburse ARRIS
for shipping and related expenses.
14. Disclaimer of Warranty
EXCEPT AS AGREED TO IN A SEPARATE WRITING BETWEEN THE PARTIES, THESE WARRANTIES
ARE IN LIEU OF ALL OTHER WARRANTIES WITH RESPECT TO THE SOFTWARE AND/OR SYSTEM
DELIVERED TO YOU HEREUNDER, WHETHER STATUTORY, BY OPERATION OF LAW, EXPRESS OR
IMPLIED, INCLUDING, WITHOUT LIMITATION, ANY IMPLIED WARRANTY OF MERCHANTABILITY,
FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE, NON-INFRINGEMENT, TITLE AND ANY WARRANTIES
ARISING OUT OF USAGE OR TRADE. THIS WARRANTY IS APPLICABLE SOLELY TO YOU AND NOT
TO ANY SUCCESSOR IN INTEREST OR ANY OTHER THIRD PARTY. NO WAIVER, ALTERATION, OR
MODIFICATION OF THIS WARRANTY SHALL BE BINDING AGAINST ARRIS UNLESS IN WRIT-ING
AS A SEPARATE AMENDMENT HERETO AND SIGNED BY AN ARRIS AUTHORIZED EXECUTIVE.
15. Warranty Limitations
ARRIS shall be relieved of all obligations and liability under the Warranty provisions set forth
herein, if:
a The Hardware or Software is operated with, or the error or defect is due to, any accessory,
equipment, software or part not approved or sold by ARRIS; or
b The Product is operated with a battery pack not sold or approved by ARRIS; or
c The Hardware or Software was not installed, operated and maintained in accordance with
ARRIS instructions and Documentation; or
d The Hardware or Software has been repaired, altered or modified by someone other than
ARRIS; or
e You do not notify ARRIS in writing of the error or defect within the applicable Warranty Period
with sufficient information for ARRIS to identify and reproduce such error or defect, or fail to
return the defective Hardware or Software according to the terms of this Agreement; or
f ARRIS demonstrates that the alleged error or defect in the Software or Hardware does not exist
or was caused by Your or any third partys misuse, neglect, improper installation or testing, or
negligent repair or any other cause beyond the range of the intended use, or by accident, fire,
lightening or other hazard or act of God.
16. Miscellaneous
16.1 If any term, condition, or provision in this Agreement is found to be invalid, unlawful or
unenforceable to any extent, the remaining terms, conditions and provisions will continue to be
valid and enforceable to the fullest extent permitted by law.
16.2 You may not assign or transfer this Agreement nor any rights hereunder, in whole or in
part, whether voluntary or by operation of law without ARRIS prior written consent. Subject to
the foregoing, this Agreement will be binding upon and will inure to the benefit of the parties
and their respective successors and assigns.
16.3 This Agreement (including any addenda hereto signed by both parties) represents the
entire agreement of the parties with respect to the subject matter of this Agreement and super-
sedes all previous communications, representations, understandings and agreements, either
oral or written, between the parties with respect to said subject matter.
16.4 This Agreement may not be amended, except in writing, signed by both parties. No terms,
provisions or conditions of any purchase order, acknowledgment or other business form that
You may use in connection with the acquisition or licensing of the Software will have any effect
on the rights, duties or obligations of the parties under, or otherwise modify, this Agreement,
regardless of any failure of ARRIS to object to such terms, provisions or conditions.
16.5 The laws of the State of Georgia, USA shall govern and construe this Agreement. Any suit
brought in connection with this Agreement shall be subject to the exclusive jurisdiction of the
State Court of Georgia or the Federal Courts for the Northern District of Georgia and You hereby
agree and submit to the personal jurisdiction and venue thereof.
17. Safety I nformation for ARRIS Touchstone Products
ARRIS telephony modems and cable modems comply with the applicable requirements for
performance, construction, labeling, and information when used as outlined in this Section 17:
17.1 Caution: Only a professional installer may connect the telephony modem to the homes
existing telephone wiring. Physical connections to the previous telephone provider must be
removed and the wiring must be checked; there must not be any voltages. Cancellation of tele-
phone service is not sufficient to ensure there is no power to the telephony modem. Failure to
do so may result in loss of service and/or permanent damage to the telephony modem.
17.2 Do not use the product near water (e.g., wet basement, bathtub, sink or near a swimming
pool), to avoid risk of electrocution.
17.3 Avoid using and/or connecting the equipment during an electrical storm, to avoid risk of
electrocution.
17.4 Do not locate the product within 6 feet (2 m) of a flame or ignition source, to avoid
damage or injury from battery explosion, or heat damage.
17.5 Use only the power supply and/or power cord included with the Product. Install the
Product near and easily accessible to the power outlet. Ground the RF drop cables shield at the
building/residence either close to the point of entrance or at the point of attachment. Grounding
as close as practical to the building/residence AC ground is required to minimize grounding con-
nector length and thereby limit the potential voltage differences between the cable TV coaxial
cable and other grounding system. Refer to the individual countrys National Electric Code for
further details.
17.6 In areas of high AC power surge events or poor AC power grounding situations and areas
prone to lightning strikes additional AC power surge protection may be required on the AC, RF,
Ethernet, USB and phone lines.
17.7 If connecting the telephony modem or cable modem to a local computer through the
Ethernet or USB cable the computer must be properly grounded to the building/residence AC
ground network. All plug-in cards within the computer must be properly installed and grounded
to the computer frame per the manufacturers specifications.
D5 UEQ
Release 3.0.1 ARRIS PROPRIETARY All Rights Reserved 1
Features and Fixes for Release 3.0.1
(3.0.1) Added Appendix B - Upgrade Procedures B-1
(3.0.1) Added Appendix C - Downgrade Procedures C-1
(3.0.1) Appendix B - Added Release 3.0.1 to the Overview section. B-1
(3.0.1) Chapter 1 - List of new features/enhancements. 1-5
(3.0.1) Chapter 1 - Updated the Technical Support contact number for the
J apan-Tokyo office. 1-7
(3.0.1) Chapter 2 - Added note regarding linearity below 91 MHz on the DPM. 2-4
(3.0.1) Chapter 2 - Added Table 2-9 - Software Functionality Cross Reference 2-6
(3.0.1) Chapter 3 - Removed alarm contacts and increased Mgt Port in Figure 3-1 3-2
(3.0.1) Chapter 3 - Added section on Demodulator support on the Quad-Port QAM
module (QPM 8DX4) 3-8
(3.0.1) Chapter 3 - SI-Data insertion/removal and SPTS stream replacement handling
Backup/redundancy Configuration simplicity 3-14
(3.0.1) Chapter 3 - Updated GigE MAC Redundancy with extra redundant backup port,
FE01, information. Also, added cross-reference to 4+1 GE MAC Redundancy
section for detailed information. 3-13
(3.0.1) Chapter 4 - Added additional functionality of Fast Ethernet Management
Interface (FE01). 4-12
(3.0.1) Chapter 4 - Added additional functionality of Fast Ethernet Management
Interface (FE02). 4-12
(3.0.1) Chapter 4 - Added information on the new Fan Converter Module (FMOD). 4-7
(3.0.1) Chapter 4 - Added new figure on 8 QAM channel per RF port 4-19
(3.0.1) Chapter 4 - Added note to Chapter 4 regarding replacing QPM QAMs with
DPM QAMs and removing unused QAM ports from the configuration script. 4-17
(3.0.1) Chapter 4 - Added section on demodulator features. 4-17
(3.0.1) Chapter 4 - Added section on Dual Interleavers per RF Port. 4-18
(3.0.1) Chapter 4 - Added statements regarding the redundant GE port options up to
4+1 to the WAN module features. 4-12
(3.0.1) Chapter 4 - Added the Fan Converter Module (FMOD) to list of supported
module types. 4-4
(3.0.1) Chapter 4 - Reworded the Dual WAN section for clarification. 4-13
(3.0.1) Chapter 4 - Updated Figure 4-3 to show PSU1 and PSU2 DC terminal
designation and not plug. 4-3
(3.0.1) Chapter 4 - Updated wording and graphic for new Fan Converter Module (FMOD1). 4-3
(3.0.1) Chapter 5 - Added FMOD reference toinstalled equipment 6-3
(3.0.1) Chapter 5 - Added graphic for location of mounting ears for flush and
mid-mount on D5 UEQ racking. 6-10
(3.0.1) Chapter 5 - Added mid-mount racking recommendation. 6-4
(3.0.1) Chapter 5 - Added Procedure 5-2 for mid-mounting the D5 UEQ 6-10
(3.0.1) Chapter 5 - Added RoHS Compliancy statement. 6-2
(3.0.1) Chapter 5 - Added section on DTI port/dongle installation. 6-16
(3.0.1) Chapter 5 - Added step to Procedure 5-10 to shutdown the QAM port/module
prior to connecting or disconnecting cables to avoid triggering fault detection
2 ARRIS PROPRIETARY All Rights Reserved J uly 22, 2010
D5 UEQ
feature which would shutdown the QAM. 6-25
(3.0.1) Chapter 5 - Updated table with approved SFP modules. 6-14
(3.0.1) Chapter 6 - Added procedure and graphic for ETH1/ETH2 cables. 6-24
(3.0.1) Chapter 7 - Added note explaining support for multiple sessions. 7-10
(3.0.1) Chapter 7 - Added statement regarding the use of ETH2 for management
access if you are planning to use ETH1 for gigabitEthernet MAC redundancy. 7-4
(3.0.1) Chapter 7 - Added Web Manager AAA Implementation for Release 3.0.1. 7-13
(3.0.1) Chapter 9 - Changed heading from DVP MPTS Pass-Through to MPTS
Pass-Through 9-13
(3.0.1) Chapter 12 - Added note to EMMG Configuration Table (Table 12-1)
regarding optional IP address behavior. 12-7
(3.0.1) Chapter 12 - Corrected Figure 12-2 12-21
(3.0.1) Chapter 13 - Added section on GQI/RPC GigE Load Balancing 13-22
(3.0.1) Chapter 13 - Changed heading to include Release 3.0.1 13-8
(3.0.1) Chapter 13 - Expanded GigabitEthernet MAC Redundancy section. 13-14
(3.0.1) Chapter 13 - Reworded first sentence for clarity. 13-8
(3.0.1) Chapter 14 - Added cross-reference to GigabitEthernet Mac Redundancy in
Chapter 13. 14-10
(3.0.1) Chapter 15 - Added HTTP interfaces for authorization. 15-1
(3.0.1) Chapter 15 - Added section on Global Enable Password on SecureID Systems 15-19
(3.0.1) Chapter 15 - Updated Table 15-1: Commands with Privilege Level 0 15-6
(3.0.1) Chapter 18 - Updated output for show logging history detail command 18-6
(3.0.1) Chapter 18 - Updated the section listing the MIBs supported by the WAN agent. 18-8
(3.0.1) CLI - Added note recommending setting the video timeout session close to
20 seconds for SDV services. 17-535
(3.0.1) CLI - Added note to video video-si-stream ghost-pid command regarding
explicit PID reserved range rule. 17-540
(3.0.1) CLI - [no] authorization exec {default | <input>} 17-22
(3.0.1) CLI - [no] debug module timerlib <1-6> <string> 17-106
(3.0.1) CLI - [no] enable authentication default 17-139
(3.0.1) CLI - [no] enable-login 17-140
(3.0.1) CLI - [no] enable-login 17-140
(3.0.1) CLI - [no] exception auto-reboot mon 17-146
(3.0.1) CLI - [no] exception auto-reboot 17-145
(3.0.1) CLI - [no] ip bundle fastethernet<0/1> 17-155
(3.0.1) CLI - [no] ip bundle gigabitethernet <0/1> 17-156
(3.0.1) CLI - [no] login authentication {default | <input>} 17-205
(3.0.1) CLI - [no] video pass-through mpts 17-498
(3.0.1) CLI - [no] video pcr-drift-correction 17-499
(3.0.1) CLI - [no] video revert-static-group <name> 17-509
(3.0.1) CLI - [no] video sdv alt-wildcard prog 17-514
(3.0.1) CLI - aaa authentication fail-message 17-7
(3.0.1) CLI - added additional parameters to the enable command. 17-138
(3.0.1) CLI - Added note If no bandwidth signalled in the SDV session create,
then the actual bandwidth displayed by the show video sdv session verbose
will appear as zero (0). to show video sdv command. 17-398
(3.0.1) CLI - Added note to tcp port command regarding the optional IP address
D5 UEQ
Release 3.0.1 ARRIS PROPRIETARY All Rights Reserved 3
behavior. 17-440
(3.0.1) CLI - Added note to udp port command regarding the optional IP address
behavior. 17-452
(3.0.1) CLI - Added optional parameter [remap-tsid] to the video src-ip video-si-stream
command. 17-533
(3.0.1) CLI - Added theforce-nit-entry option to the video generate-psi pat command. 17-483
(3.0.1) CLI - added the parameter [announce-messages] to the video sdv rpc command.17-519
(3.0.1) CLI - arp * * fastethernet 17-18
(3.0.1) CLI - arp * * gigabitethernet 17-19
(3.0.1) CLI - corrected syntax for video sdv rpc qam-model command. 17-520
(3.0.1) CLI - diagnostics su qam <1-6> do 17-126
(3.0.1) CLI - diagnostics su qam <1-6> show 17-127
(3.0.1) CLI - Ghost-PID range was improved to allow the full range of DVB PIDs to
be included. New range for ghost-pids are from 1 to 8191 in the video
video-si-stream ghost-pid command. 17-540
(3.0.1) CLI - ip http authentication aaa login-authentication [no] 17-161
(3.0.1) CLI - logging override event * trap [none] 17-193
(3.0.1) CLI - logging override event * trap none 17-194
(3.0.1) CLI - show aaa line http [<0-3>] [<0-3>] 17-258
(3.0.1) CLI - show interfaces qam * video ghost-pid 17-328
(3.0.1) CLI - show video ghost-pid 17-386
(3.0.1) CLI - show video sdv load-balance [verbose] 17-399
(3.0.1) CLI - video dest-ip - changed PIDs range from 16-8191 to now allow PIDs
from 1 to 8191 to be filtered. 17-466
(3.0.1) CLI - video ghost-pid 17-485
(3.0.1) CLI - video sdv interface gigabitethernet 0/1 [primary | secondary | none] 17-516
(3.0.1) CLI - video sdv policy-load-balance forced [no] 17-518
(3.0.1) CLI - video src-ip - changed PIDs range from 16-8191 to now allow PIDs
(3.0.1) CLI - video udp - changed PIDs range from 16-8191 to now allow PIDs
(3.0.1) PD152457 - Added note on what is causing D5 UEQ to close all SDV sessions
and not being able to recover. 11-4
(3.0.1) PD154619 - Added note to tcp port command regarding the optional IP
address behavior. 17-440
(3.0.1) PD154619 - Added note to udp port command regarding the optional IP
address behavior. 17-452
(3.0.1) PD154928 - Reworded definition of first-available parameter of video sdv
session setup-policy command for clarity. 17-522
(3.0.1) PD155173- Corrected MPTS configuration command 9-14
(3.0.1) PD155421 - Added step to Procedure 5-10 to shutdown the QAM port/module
prior to connecting or disconnecting cables to avoid triggering fault detection
feature which would shutdown the QAM. 6-25
(3.0.1) PD155438 - Added note recommending setting the video timeout session
close to 20 seconds for SDV services. 17-535
(3.0.1) PD156359 - Added note to Chapter 4 regarding replacing QPM QAMs with
DPM QAMs and removing unused QAM ports from the configuration script. 4-17
4 ARRIS PROPRIETARY All Rights Reserved J uly 22, 2010
D5 UEQ
(3.0.1) PD156577 - Added note If no bandwidth signalled in the SDV session create,
then the actual bandwidth displayed by the show video sdv session verbose
will appear as zero (0). to show video sdv command. 17-398
(3.0.1) PD156691 - Added note explaining support for multiple sessions. 7-10
(3.0.1) PD157022 - Added 4+1 to the GigabitEthernet Redundancy specification in
Table 2-3. 2-3
(3.0.1) PD157025 - Made changes in documentation from 4DX2 QAM module in hex
mode to 6DX2 QAM module in hex mode. 2-4
(3.0.1) PD157026 - Reworded first two sentences on GigE MAC Redundancy for clarity. 3-13
(3.0.1) PD157028 - Added Octal to the statement in the Note. 11-4
(3.0.1) PD157029 - Corrected typo from RCP to RPC. 13-2
(3.0.1) PD157030 - Changed commands to reflect using the fastEthernet 0/1 rather than
gigiabitEthernet 0/4 as the spare port for the IP bundle. 13-22
(3.0.1) PD157032 - Corrected number of QAM channels now available on a WAM
card and fully loaded D5 UEQ. 13-2
J uly 22, 2010 1
List of Figures
3 Product Overview
Figure 3-1: D5 UEQ Logical Overview 3-2
Figure 3-2: Setting RF Center Frequency on the Dual-Port QAM Module
(DPM 4DX2) in Quad Mode 3-6
Figure 3-3: RF Center Frequencies on the Dual-Port QAM Module (DPM 6DX2)
in Hex Mode 3-7
Figure 3-4: RF Center Frequencies on the Quad-Port QAM Module (QPM 8DX4) 3-8
Figure 3-5: DVB SimulCrypt 3-17
4 System Components
Figure 4-1: D5 UEQ Front Panel Face Plate 4-2
Figure 4-2: D5 UEQ Front Chassis 4-3
Figure 4-3: D5 UEQ Rear Chassis View with QPMs and Dual WAN 4-3
Figure 4-4: D5 UEQ Rear Chassis View (DPM 6DX2 based Rear view) 4-4
Figure 4-5: D5 UEQ Module Assignments 4-5
Figure 4-6: D5 UEQ Airflow direction 4-6
Figure 4-7: Location of D5 UEQ Power Supply Units 4-8
Figure 4-8: Example of the 780280 AC PSU 4-9
Figure 4-9: Example of the 780281 DC PSU 4-9
2 Release 3.0.1
List of Figures
Figure 4-10: 716630 - AC PSU, Telkoor (two styles) 4-10
Figure 4-11: 722058 - AC PSU, Power-One 4-10
Figure 4-12: Wide Area Network Card (WAN V4) 4-11
Figure 4-13: QAM Modules 4-13
Figure 4-14: Dual-Port QAM Module (DPM 4DX2) in Quad Mode Bonded Channels 4-16
Figure 4-15: Dual-Port QAM Module (DPM 6DX2) in Hex Mode Bonded Channels 4-16
Figure 4-16: Quad-Port QAM Module (QPM 8DX4) Bonded Channels 4-17
Figure 4-17: 8 QAM Channel per RF Port 4-19
Figure 4-18: Chassis Monitor Module (MON) 4-20
Figure 4-19: MON Auto Shutdown Recovery Button 4-21
5 Dual WAN
Figure 5-1: QAM Provisioning Warning 5-4
Figure 5-2: Show Interface Warning 5-5
6 Installing the D5 UEQ
Figure 6-1: Open Rack Configuration and Components 6-6
Figure 6-2: Decision Tree Summary for Rack Types 6-9
Figure 6-3: Location of Mounting Ears 6-10
Figure 6-4: Location of M4 Grounding Studs 6-11
Figure 6-5: Securing the Grounding Wire 6-12
Figure 6-6: Slot Numbering Order 6-12
Figure 6-7: Example of Fiber Optic and Copper SFPs 6-13
Figure 6-8: Installing the SPF 6-15
Figure 6-9: Fiber Optic Cable Connector 6-16
Figure 6-10: Dual DTI Adapter 6-17
Figure 6-11: DTI Port Pinout 6-18
Figure 6-12: D5 UEQ AC Power Connection Panels 6-20
Figure 6-13: Connector Pin and Locations 6-22
Figure 6-14: Terminal Block Wiring for DC PSU 6-23
ARRI S D5 Universal Edge QAM
J uly 22, 2010 3
Figure 6-15: FastEthernet cabling 6-24
Figure 6-16: Cable Management 6-26
7 Initial System Configuration
Figure 7-1: RJ -45-to-DB9 Cable and Pin-out 7-2
Figure 7-2: Web Browser 7-12
Figure 7-3: AAA Default Login Page (Radius example) 7-14
Figure 7-4: AAA Login Prompt (Radius example) 7-14
Figure 7-5: AAA Password Prompt (Radius example) 7-15
Figure 7-6: Successful AAA Login (Radius example) 7-15
Figure 7-7: Failed AAA Login Attempt (Radius example) 7-16
Figure 7-8: Web Manager Device Status 7-16
Figure 7-9: Web Manager Main Menu Components 7-17
Figure 7-10: Web Manager Drop-down Navigation Menus 7-17
Figure 7-11: D5 System Summary/Home Page 7-18
Figure 7-12: CLI Account Screen 7-20
Figure 7-13: SNMP Configuration Screen 7-21
Figure 7-14: GigabitEthernet Configuration Screen 7-23
Figure 7-15: Initial QAM Configuration Screen 7-26
Figure 7-16: QAM Configuration Screen 7-27
Figure 7-17: Ethernet Configuration Screen 7-30
8 Video on Demand
Figure 8-1: VoD Server, Multiple MPEG TS over UDP to STB 8-2
Figure 8-2: NSG Port Mapping Scheme 8-6
9 Digital Video Broadcast
Figure 9-1: Example of DVB Hierarchy 9-2
Figure 9-2: D5 UEQ MPTS Pass-Through 9-13
4 Release 3.0.1
List of Figures
10 IGMP Client
Figure 10-1: ASM Example - Directly Connected to a Video Server 10-3
Figure 10-2: SSM Example - Directly Connected to a Video Server 10-4
Figure 10-3: ASM Example - Connected to an IGMP-enabled Switch or Router 10-6
Figure 10-4: SSM Example - Connected to an IGMP-enabled Switch or Router 10-8
11 Switched Digital Video
Figure 11-1: Switched Digital Architecture Example 11-2
12 Conditional Access
Figure 12-1: D5 UEQ in a Conditional Access System 12-2
Figure 12-2: D5 UEQ in a Simulcrypt Environment 12-21
13 Redundancy
Figure 13-1: Example of HOT/WARM Redundancy 13-3
Figure 13-2: Example of HOT/HOT Redundancy 13-4
Figure 13-3: Example of 1:1 QAM Sparing 13-8
Figure 13-4: Example of 2:1 QAM Sparing (Option 1) 13-9
Figure 13-5: Example of 2:1 QAM Sparing (Option 2) 13-9
Figure 13-6: Example of 5:1 QAM Sparing 13-9
Figure 13-7: GE MAC Redundancy Normal Mode, External View 13-18
Figure 13-8: Failover using GE MAC redundancy, GE0/1 moved to GE0/4 13-20
Figure 13-9: Expanded GE MAC Redundancy, Failover Scenario 13-21
Figure 13-10: Expanded GE MAC Redundancy, External View 13-21
Figure 13-11: GigE Link Trunking Redundancy Example 13-32
14 M-CMTS Support
Figure 1: Example of the D5 UEQ in an M-CMTS Configuration 14-2
15 Security
Figure 15-1: Full AAA Security Model 15-2
J uly 22, 2010 5
Figure 15-2: Radius Authentication Model on the D5 UEQ 15-3
19 Service Procedures
Figure 19-1: Front Panel 19-2
Figure 19-2: Power Supply Units 1 and 2 (AC or DC Power) 19-3
Figure 19-3: PMOD 1 and 2 19-4
Figure 19-4: PMOD Thumb Lock and Lock Screws 19-4
Figure 19-5: Location of Fuses 19-6
Figure 19-6: D5 UEQ Fan Tray Assembly 19-7
Figure 19-7: Avoiding Damage to the D5 UEQ 19-8
Figure 19-8: Fan Tray Locking Device 19-8
Figure 19-9: Removing WAN or QAM Modules 19-9
Figure 19-10: MON Card and Locking Screw 19-10
Figure 19-11: Compact Flash Card 19-14
Figure 19-12: Compact Flash Release Button 19-15
6 Release 3.0.1
List of Figures
J uly 22, 2010 1
Contents
Features and Fixes for Release 3.0.1
List of Figures
Contents
1 About This Manual
Purpose 1-1
Intended Audience 1-2
Prerequisite Skill and Knowledge 1-2
System Features 1-3
Conventions Used in this Document 1-6
Admonishments 1-6
Textual Conventions 1-6
How to Contact Us 1-7
2 Specifications
Environmental Characteristics 2-2
Electrical 2-2
WAN Module 2-3
PSU Redundancy 2-3
QAM Module 2-4
Quad-Port QAM Module
(QPM 8DX4) 2-5
MPEG Processing 2-5
2 Release 3.0.1
Contents
Control Interfaces 2-6
Software Functionality Cross Reference 2-6
General 2-7
3 Product Overview
Product Overview 3-1
Transport Stream Processing 3-2
Internal Operations 3-2
Module Identification 3-3
Environment Monitoring 3-3
Image Management - Compact Flash 3-3
External Interfaces 3-4
Protocols 3-4
Edge QAM 3-5
Video/UDP/MPEG Management 3-5
QAM/RF Management 3-5
GigE Link Trunking Redundancy 3-12
GigE MAC Redundancy 3-13
IGMP Client v1, v2, v3 3-13
Digital Video Broadcasting 3-14
Content Protection 3-14
Privacy Mode 3-15
DVB SimulCrypt 3-15
DVB PSI/SI Processing 3-16
DVB SimulCrypt User Interface 3-17
Web Manager 3-17
Application Manager 3-18
4 System Components
System Overview 4-2
Front Panel 4-2
Hardware Locations 4-3
Hardware Functions 4-4
EMI Shielding 4-5
Blanking Plates 4-6
J uly 22, 2010 3
Fan Tray 4-6
D5 UEQ Airflow 4-6
Power Converter Module (PMOD) 4-7
Fan Converter Module (FMOD) 4-7
Power Supply Unit (PSU) 4-8
Wide Area Network Module (WAN) 4-11
Dual WAN 4-13
Quadrature Amplitude Modulation Module (QAM) 4-13
Demodulator Features 4-17
Dual Interleavers per RF Port 4-18
Chassis Monitoring Module (MON) 4-20
5 Dual WAN
Overview 5-1
Configuration Management 5-2
QAM Management 5-4
WAN Synchronization in Dual WAN Configuration 5-5
Dual WAN Configuration 5-6
Web Manager Support for the Dual WAN 5-7
Application Manager Support 5-7
Feature Compatibility 5-8
System Commissioning 5-8
6 Installing the D5 UEQ
Safety Measures 6-2
FCC Statement 6-2
RoHS Compliancy 6-2
Unpacking and Inspecting the D5 UEQ 6-2
Visual Inspection 6-3
Main Hardware Components 6-4
Racking Recommendations 6-4
Recommended Rack-type for the D5 UEQ 6-5
Considerations for Shared-racks and Cabinets 6-7
Grounding 6-11
4 Release 3.0.1
Contents
Inserting QAM and WAN Modules 6-12
Slot Requirements 6-12
Fiber Optic Small Form Factor Pluggable (SFP) Card 6-13
Dual DOCSIS Timing Interface (DTI) 6-16
Power Considerations 6-18
Connecting Cables 6-19
AC Power Cables 6-19
DC Power Cables 6-21
Management Connections 6-24
Video Connections 6-24
RF Connections 6-25
Cable Management 6-25
7 Initial System Configuration
Configuration Overview 7-1
Configuring the D5 UEQ with CLI 7-2
Setup-Mode Configuration Script 7-2
Serial Port Connection for the D5 UEQ Configuration 7-2
Initial Configuration for WAN and QAM Modules 7-3
General Configuration 7-4
Ethernet Port Configuration 7-4
Gigabit Ethernet Port Configuration 7-6
Dual WAN Configuration 7-7
QAM Configuration 7-7
Configuring SNMP Service 7-9
Configuring the D5 UEQ with the Web Manager 7-10
Overview 7-10
Setting up the D5 UEQ 7-11
Web Manager AAA Implementation 7-13
Web Manager Toolbars 7-16
Setting up a Host Name 7-19
Configuring a CLI Account 7-19
Configuring SNMP 7-21
Enabling a GigabitEthernet Interface 7-22
Configuring a QAM Module 7-24
Enabling the Dual WAN 7-28
J uly 22, 2010 5
Enabling an Ethernet Interface 7-29
Logging Out of the Web Manager 7-31
8 Video on Demand
Video on Demand 8-1
UDP Port Management 8-2
Overview 9-1
Handling SI Table Streams, Injection and Configuration 9-2
SI Table Editing with the PSI Wizard 9-6
PSIG<>Configuration & Monitoring 9-7
PSI Table Auto-Generation 9-9
SPTS Pass-Through 9-11
MPTS Pass-Through 9-13
Filtering MPTS in Non Pass-Through Mode 9-14
Handling Pre-scrambled Content 9-15
Video Session PSI Show Command 9-16
10 IGMP Client
Overview 10-1
IGMP Client in the Network 10-3
Directly Connected to a Video Server(s) 10-3
Connected to IGMP Enabled Switch/Router 10-6
Limitations 10-9
IGMP CLI Commands 10-10
IGMP Show Commands 10-10
Example IGMP Configurations 10-13
Overview 11-1
Switched Digital Architecture 11-2
Setting up SDV on the D5 UEQ 11-2
SDV Load Balancing 11-4
6 Release 3.0.1
Contents
Conditional Access 12-2
EMMG Configuration 12-4
ECMG Configuration 12-8
EIS Configuration 12-12
Redundancy Group Configuration 12-14
Channel Container Configuration 12-15
SCG Configuration 12-15
CAS (P)SIG Configuration 12-18
DVB Simulcrypt Configuration 12-20
13 Redundancy
Multicast Redundancy 13-1
HOT/WARM Redundancy 13-2
HOT/HOT Redundancy 13-3
Redundant Stream Groups 13-5
QAM Redundancy 13-8
Release 3.0 and 3.0.1 13-8
Release 2.6 and earlier 13-8
Failover Procedure 13-11
Failback procedure 13-12
GigabitEthernet (GE) MAC Redundancy 13-14
Expanded Operation in Release 3.0.1 13-17
GQI/RPC GigE Load Balancing 13-22
Release 3.0.0 Operation 13-23
Release 3.0.1 Behavior 13-24
Load Balancing Support 13-25
HOT/HOT and HOT/WARM Support 13-25
HOT/WARM Link Redundancy 13-26
Forced Load Balancing 13-26
Support for 2+ Gbps SDV Tier 13-26
CLI Support 13-27
Overview of Options Release 3.0.0 to 3.0.1 13-28
GigE Link Trunking Redundancy 13-31
14 M-CMTS Support
J uly 22, 2010 7
Overview 14-1
System Overview 14-2
DEPI DMPT Mode 14-3
DEPI L2TP Control Plane 14-4
Primary/Secondary Downstreams 14-4
UDP/IP and L2TPv3 14-5
Downstream Channel Configuration 14-5
Configuration Examples 14-6
Status commands 14-14
Dual DOCSIS Timing Interface (DTI) 14-14
Operational Parameters/Limitations 14-18
15 Security
Overview 15-1
TACACS+ Authentication 15-4
Radius 15-7
Setting up RADIUS 15-7
AAA Configuration 15-10
16 CLI Overview
Accessing the D5 UEQ 16-2
CLI Command Modes 16-2
Command Completion and Parameter Prompting 16-5
Keyboard Shortcuts 16-6
NO Commands 16-8
Local Authorization 16-8
CLI Output Filtering 16-10
Filtering Previous Lines 16-11
Including Matching Lines 16-11
Excluding Matching Lines 16-11
CLI Syntax Conventions 16-12
17 CLI Command Descriptions
List of CLI Commands
8 Release 3.0.1
Contents
18 System Monitoring
Introduction 18-1
How Event Messages are Generated 18-2
How Event Messages are Routed 18-2
Priority-based Event Routing 18-2
Event Management Subsystems 18-3
Support for Alarms 18-4
Event Management CLI 18-4
Displaying Logging Information 18-4
Displaying Logging History 18-5
About Centralized Management 18-7
SNMP MIBs Used for Monitoring 18-7
MIB Overview 18-8
SNMP Traps and Notifications 18-11
Removing Power Before Servicing 19-2
Front Panel Removal and Replacement 19-2
Replacing a Power Supply (PSU) 19-3
Power Converter Module Installation/Replacement 19-4
Replacing Fuses 19-5
Fan Tray Replacement 19-7
Replacing Modules 19-9
MON Module Replacement 19-10
Reconfiguring the MON to Boot from Image on Compact Flash 19-10
Compact Flash Card 19-14
A D5 UEQ Event Logs
Event Logs A-1
B D5 UEQ Upgrade Procedures
Overview B-1
J uly 22, 2010 9
Upgrade Preparations B-2
Performing the Software Upgrade via CLI B-3
Performing the Software Upgrade via the Web Manager B-5
C D5 UEQ Downgrade Procedures
Reverting to Prior Software Load C-1
Downgrading to pre-3.0 Release Software Loads C-1
GL Glossary
Comments & Feedback Form
10 Release 3.0.1
Contents
Release 3.0.1 ARRIS PROPRIETARY All Rights Reserved 1-41
1. About This Manual
Topics Page
Purpose 1
I ntended Audience 2
Prerequisite Skill and Knowledge 2
System Features 3
Conventions Used in this Document 6
How to Contact Us 7
Purpose
This document provides a comprehensive view of the ARRIS D5
Universal Edge QAM (D5 UEQ) including reference and procedural infor-
mation required to manage and control the D5 UEQ in support of the
Digital Video Broadcast (DVB) standard and Video on Demand (VoD)
services.
1-2 ARRIS PROPRIETARY All Rights Reserved J uly 22, 2010
1 About This Manual
Intended Audience
This document is intended for cable operators and system administrators
who will configure and operate the D5 UEQ. It is designed to give the
reader a general overview of configuration options for the D5 UEQ. It is
assumed that the reader is familiar with day-to-day operations and main-
tenance functions in TCP/IP networks and hybrid fiber/coax (HFC) cable
networks.
Prerequisite Skill and Knowledge
This document serves as an introduction to the D5 UEQ for all administra-
tors and users of cable modem termination systems. Ideally, users of this
documentation and equipment should have a basic knowledge of the
following:
RF measuring equipment
Provisioning servers
Command Line Interface (CLI)
RF cable plant and operating methods
System Features
Release 2.1 The D5 UEQ Release 2.1 features include:
Simultaneous delivery of MPEG-2TS/DVB-C traffic
Support of Annex A, B, and C for digital video applications
Four RF QAM channel bonding
48 6 MHz or 8 MHz downstream links
Integrated downstream multiplexer and block converted QAM chan-
nels
Eight slot modular architecture
Rear panel loaded modules
Hot-swappable modules
Multiple management interfaces
Secure Shell (SSH) support
Telnet
IGMPv1,v2 support
Four electrical or optical GigE connection interfaces via removable SFP
(WAN)
Redundant AC/DC PSUs
Front panel RS-232, |0|0| interface, CLI interface port
Front panel LCD display with keypad
Field upgradeable / configurable
DVB SI processing
Broadcast digital programming support
SimulCrypt / Conditional Access System (CAS)
(P)SI/SI table injection
Multicast support
CAS broadcast support
Nodal Element Manager (Web interface - J ava Desktop interface)
1 About This Manual
Switched Digital Video (SDV)
IGMPv3
Gigabit Ethernet 2+2 redundancy
Dynamic Host Configuration Protocol (DHCP)
MAC address change procedures
Startup configuration tool updated
D5 Nodal Manager update
- Web Tool Manager
- DVB-S1 configuration and generation tool
All functionality included in Release 2.0 and 2.1
Real-Time Streaming Protocol (RTSP) support
DOCSIS 3.0 DRFI support
Privacy Mode support
Dual-Port QAM Module (DPM 4DX2) in Hex Mode
Control plane redundancy (Hot/Hot)
Batch Configuration Tool (BCT) extension to the D5 Application
Manager
M-CMTS MPT and DMPT/L2TPv3 support
RADIUS [Authentication]
TACACS [Authentication]
Web Manager GUI and CLI updates for above
TACACS+ Authorization & RADIUS Access Challenge enhancements
QAM Redundancy
IGMP Stream Redundancy enhancement
Support for Annex A profile on 6MHz channels
Support for 6MHz bonded Annex B channels, with 8MHz channel
spacing
D5 UEQ CLI video and audio scramble options
Support for additional M-OSSI MIBS for M-CMTS/DOCSIS 3.0
MCMTS DOCSIS debug feature
Support for 1Gb Flash and Long Haul CWDM SFP support
CLI updates for above.
Quad-Port QAM Module (QPM 8DX4)
600W PSU support in the existing chassis
Dual 4GbE WAN Operation (8 Gb/sec total ingress)
QAM port to GigabitEthernet port provisioning
CLI updates for above.
Release 3.0.1 The D5 UEQ Release 3.0.1 features include:
Dual port QAM with dual WAN operation
GigabitEthernet load balancing in SDV RPC mode
Upgraded SDV protocol handling
Improved PID filtering and management in DVB applications
MAC redundancy from gigabitEthernet interface
Dual Interleavers per RF port for QPM module
QPM demodulator functionality
Enhancements include:
- Support for up to 1488 SDV sessions per WAN module (2976 for
a dual-WAN setup)
- Improved MPTS pass-thru handling/null dropping
- Modification of the AAA support, allowing direct enable access to
the D5 UEQ
- Additional SFP devices
- Fully ROHs compliant
1 About This Manual
Conventions Used in this Document
This section presents the textual conventions used in this documentation
set.
Admonishments
There are three levels of admonishments used in this documentation. The
first is a simple note.
NOTE
Notes are intended to highlight additional references or general
information related to a procedure, product, or system.
The international symbols, Caution and Warning, appear in this book when
you must perform procedures involving risk.
CAUTI ON
Cautions indicate risk of dropping traffic, losing data, or damaging
equipment. Read the accompanying instructions and proceed with
caution.
WARNI NG
The warning symbol represents a risk of bodily injury or serious damage
to the equipment. Before you work on any equipment, be aware of the
hazards involved with electrical circuitry and fiber optics and follow
standard procedures for preventing accidents and serious damage.
Textual Conventions
The conventions used in this guide are shown in the following table:
Table 1-1: Examples of Textual Conventions
Type of text Description Example
CLI commands and other user
input
Monospaced bold
(courier)
assign slot <1-6> type WAN <7-8>
Names of chapters and
manuals
Italicized text chapter 1, About This Manual
Menu selections Plain-faced text bold From the File>Set-up menu choose
How to Contact Us
Product I nformation and
Support
Please direct your ARRIS D5 UEQ technical support requests to
ask.arrisi.com.
The Technical Support Contact information is summarized in the following
table. Contact information is also available from our Web site at
http://www.arrisi.com/contact_us/support/index.asp.
System responses and screen
display
Monospaced f ont
( cour i er )
Ti me si nce t he D5 UEQ was l ast boot ed:
12 days, 2: 8: 14 <hr : mi n: sec>
Table 1-1: Examples of Textual Conventions
Type of text Description Example
D5 UEQ Support Information
NORTH AMERI CA
E-mail techsupport.na@arrisi.com
Telephone
1+888 221 9797 (US toll free)
1+678 473 5656 (Worldwide)
Latin America
E-mail techsupport.cala@arrisi.com
Telephone +56 2 678 4500
Hours
9 am to 6 pm (09:00 to 18:00)
(Santiago, Chile local time)
EUROPE
E-mail techsupport.europe@arrisi.com
Telephone
+31 20 311 2525
(English, Spanish, French and German)
Hours 08:30 to 17:30 pm CET
J APAN - Tokyo
E-mail techsupport.japan@arrisi.com
Telephone +81 (0) 3 5461-7320
Hours
9:30 am to 6 pm (09:30 to 18:00)
(Tokyo local time)
Asia
E-mail techsupport.asia@arrisi.com
Telephone +82 2 2183 2371
1 About This Manual
Emergency support is available after normal business hours via the listed
contact information. Additional contact information can be obtained from
the ARRIS web page at http://www.arrisi.com and clicking on the link to
the Customer Center.
Training I nformation ARRIS Training is the authorized organization for training on voice, data,
and provisioning products. Web-based, instructor-led, and customized
courses are available at our U.S. training center in Atlanta. On-site training
is available.To obtain pricing for on-site training and other training infor-
mation, visit our web site:
http://www.arrisi.com
Comments on this Document Our goal has been to create a document that best fits your needs. We are
interested in your suggestions for improving this document. Please use the
form at the back of this book to address any comments or questions you
may have regarding this documentation.
Hours 9:30 am to 6 pm (09:30 to 18:00) (Seoul local time)
Korea
E-mail techsupport.korea@arrisi.com
Telephone +82 2 2183 2371
Hours 9:30 am to 6 pm (09:30 to 18:00) (Seoul local time)
D5 UEQ Support Information
2. Specifications
Topics Page
Environmental Characteristics 2
Electrical 2
WAN Module 3
PSU Redundancy 3
QAM Module 4
Quad-Port QAM Module (QPM 8DX4) 5
MPEG Processing 5
Control I nterfaces 6
General 7
The following are specifications for the D5 UEQ.
2 Specifications
Environmental Characteristics
Table 2-1: Environmental Characteristics
Electrical
Table 2-2: Electrical Specifications
Characteristic Ranges
Operating Temperature Range F (C)
32 to 122
(0 to 50)
Storage Temperature Range F (C)
40 to 158
(40 to 70)
Relative Humidity (non-condensing) Up to 90%
Dimensions (H x W x D) in inches
in centimeters (cm)
3.5" x 19" x 24"
(8.9 x 48 x 61)
Extension from 19 rack:
Front
Rear
2 (5.08cm)
23 (58.42cm)
Recommended minimum rack clearance:
Rear
Side
16 (40.64cm)
2 (5.08cm)
Weight of
Fully loaded chassis
WAN card
QAM cards
Power Supply Unit
Power Module
50 lbs (22.7 kg)
1-1/4 lbs (0.56kg)
1-3/4 lbs (0.79kg)
3-3/4 lbs (1.70kg)
1-1/4 lbs (0.56kg)
Input Voltage AC 90-256 VAC, 50-60 Hz
Input Voltage DC 42 to 56 Vdc
Maximum Power Consumption
AC - 420 watts (DPM cards)
AC - 550 watts (QPM cards)
DC - 400 watts (DPM cards)
DC - 520watts (QPM cards)
WAN Module
Table 2-3: WAN Module Specifications
PSU Redundancy
Table 2-4: PSU Redundancy
Standard Gigabit Ethernet input
interfaces
up to 8 (4 per WAN module)
Maximum aggregate input rate 4.0 Gbps
Gigabit Ethernet Redundancy 2X (1+1), 2+1, 3+1, 4+1
DOCSIS Timing Interface
Onboard DTI-clock SATA connector
(per CableLabs ATP requirement)
UDP encapsulated packets 1 to 7
External Interfaces
Optical SFP or 1000BaseT options
(IEEE802.3z or IEEE802.3ab)
IP Unicast and Multicast IGMPv2/3
PSU Slot 1 PSU Slot 2 Redundancy
AC PSU Vacant No Redundancy
DC PSU Vacant No Redundancy
AC PSU AC PSU
PSU Redundancy plus potential
Power source redundancy
DC PSU DC PSU
PSU Redundancy plus potential
Power source redundancy
AC PSU DC PSU
PSU Redundancy (high capacity
chassis only)
DC PSU AC PSU
PSU Redundancy (high capacity
chassis only)
2 Specifications
QAM Module
Table 2-5: Dual-Port QAM Module (DPM 6DX2) Specifications
NOTE
When setting a center frequency below 91MHz, the following message
appears: Frequencies below 91MHz may impair RF signal quality. This
refers to the 2nd order harmonic distortion. 2nd harmonics appear at two
times the carrier frequency. For example, if the carrier frequency is
90MHz, then the 2nd harmonic would appear at 180MHz. 2nd harmonics
below 91MHz can measure up to 3dB higher than the DRFI specification
of -63dBc. The signal quality of the output carrier itself is not affected.
Two External F type
female connectors
75 ohm (ISO-169-24)
Six block-converted
adjacent channels per RF
output port
Two RF output ports per module for a total
of 12 downstream channels per QAM
Frequency range 57-867 MHz (see Note below)
Minimum Frequency Step 10 Hz
Modulation Type 64 QAM, 256 QAM
Power per channel
single carrier - 52 to 60 dBmV
dual carrier - 48 to 56 dBmV
quad carrier - 44 to 55 dBmV
hex carrier (Annex B only)- 42 to 53 dBmV
Power Level resolution 0.2 dB steps
Output Return loss
active channel 88-750MHz - > 14 dB
active channel 750-870MHz - > 13 dB
inactive channel - >12 dB
MER
> 43 dB (equalized)
> 35 dB (unequalized)
Annex A, B, C
(QPM 8DX4)
Table 2-6: Quad-Port QPM Module (QPM 8DX4) Specifications
MPEG Processing
Table 2-7: MPEG Processing Specifications
Four External F type
female connectors
75 ohm (ISO-169-24)
Eight block-converted
adjacent channels per RF
output port
Four RF output ports per module for a total
of 32 downstream channels per QAM
Center Frequency range 54 MHz - 1002 MHz
Minimum Frequency Step 62.5kHz
Modulation Type 64 QAM, 256 QAM
Power per channel
single carrier - 52 to 60 dBmV
dual carrier - 48 to 56 dBmV
hex carrier (Annex B only) - 42 to 50 dBmV
octal carrier - 41 to 49 dBmV
Extended power levels
hex carrier - 44 to 53 dBmV
octal carrier - 41 to 51 dBmV
Power Level resolution 15 dB in 0.1 dB steps
Output Return loss (in
channel)
> 15 dB
MER
> 46 dB (equalized)
> 40 dB (unequalized)
Annex A, B, C
One WAN can receive up to 1488 MPEG2 SPTS input streams (RFC768)
A full system can generate up to 192 MPTS in Annex B and 144 MPTS in
Annex A using all QPM 8DX4 modules.
Open-standards Switched Digital Video support (SDV)
MPTS and SPTS pass-thru
PID filtering/remapping when required
2 Specifications
Control I nterfaces
Table 2-8: Control I nterfaces
Software Functionality Cross Reference
Table 2-9: Software Functionality
Stream Replication of multicast streams
Support for up to 63 SPTS per QAM channel
Variable bit rate (VBR) of an input stream supported is 4:1 (max.)
Input jitter up to 500 msec
Re-multiplexing/routing of any input stream to any output within each
WAN/assigned-QAMs domain
PCR de-jittering and restamping of input streams
PSI extraction, automatic generation and insertion as required
Program and elementary stream-level encryption
DVB-SI table handling from external SI generators
Two independent 10/100BaseTX per WAN for CAS and NMS
RS-232 serial port debug console connection
In-band or out-of-band management (Radius, TACACS+)
Ethernet test/loop port for external analysis of any MPTS
Comprehensive GUI-based, Bulk D5 Element Management System
Complete Web Browser tool for configuration and Ops management
Protocols SNMP, XML, HTTP, DTI, CLI (telnet/ssh, RS323), TFTP,
IGMPv2/v3(+SSM)
Embedded, late-stage QAM demod for RF real-time health reporting
Module Order Code
Product
Code
Prod.
Rev VOD
Broad
cast SDV
Modular
CMTS
Single
DTI
Dual
DTI
Privacy
Mode
Simul
crypt
RF Mode Annex
Quad Hex Octal A B C
WAN (LX80) 716657 WAN_4G2F BA Y Y N N N N N
WAN (LX100)722 012 WAN_4G2F CA Y Y Y Y Y N Y
WAN (Dual DTI) 728906 WAN_4G2F CB Y Y Y Y Y Y Y
DPM QAM (ENIG,
SX25/LX60)
716604 QAM_4DX2 AC Y Y Y N Y Y N N Y Y Y
General
Table 2-10: General
DPM QAM (DRFI)
Annex B only)
71936 QAM_6DX2 CB Y Y Y Y N Y Y N N Y N
DPM QAM (DRFI,
Universal
771080 QAM_6DX2 EB Y Y Y Y Y Y Y N Y Y Y
QPM QAM 780274 QAM_8DX2 BA Y Y Y Y Y Y Y Y Y Y Y
Module Order Code
Product
Code
Prod.
Rev VOD
Broad
cast SDV
Modular
CMTS
Single
DTI
Dual
DTI
Privacy
Mode
Simul
crypt
RF Mode Annex
Quad Hex Octal A B C
Field-upgradeable software download support (Compact Flash)
Front Panel LCD display - four line alpha-numeric with keypad control
Hot-swappable, field-upgradeable eight slot modular design
Redundancy: Power supplies, gigabitEthernet, Gigabit Module, Fans
Field Upgradeable: M-CMTS, DOCSIS 3.0, Broadcast Mode Pass-through
2 Specifications
3. Product Overview
Topics Page
Product Overview 1
Internal Operations 2
External I nterfaces 4
Edge QAM 5
Web Manager 17
Application Manager 18
The following describes the D5 UEQ operating modes.
Product Overview
The D5 UEQ is a two rack unit (RU), high-density Edge QAM. Its modular,
hot-swappable design supports a flexible system with built in compatibility,
redundancy and scalability for current and next generation services. This
overview describes the system interactions that comprise a basic D5 UEQ
Edge QAM.
3 Product Overview
Transport Stream Processing
The D5 UEQ processes MPEG over IP streams received over Gigabit
Ethernet (GigE) connections. From these GigE connections, the D5 UEQ
extracts MPEG Transport Streams (TS) that are subsequently multiplexed
onto individual QAM channels and upconverted to desired RF frequencies
for delivery.
Figure 3-1: D5 UEQ Logical Overview
I nternal Operations
The D5 UEQ provides flexible control interfaces, via the Command Line
Interface (CLI), the Web Manager, and the Simple Network Management
Protocol (SNMP). These interfaces support configuration and reporting of
all aspects of the D5 UEQ.
The CLI is the primary user interface. It can be accessed via the CLI port
or Telnet. The Web Manager and SNMP are secondary user interfaces.
Although not all CLI commands are duplicated in the Web Manager, most
operations can be performed.
CA Port, (100 BT)
Mgt Port, (100,1000 BT)
Test Output, (100 BT)
WAN
(Quad
GigE)
Serial/Console Port
Downstream RF
Carriers
D5 Universal
Edge QAM
Flash Card
OAM&P The WAN module provides OAM&P (Operations, Administration, Mainte-
nance and Provisions) functions for chassis management, environment
controls, Ethernet connectivity, MPEG, and QAM multiplexing functionality.
Module I dentification
The D5 UEQ utilizes the Chassis Monitor Module (MON) to retrieve factory
configured information from modules installed within the chassis. This
information is gathered via the EEPROM on a per module basis for identi-
fication. The EEPROM information includes:
Product Code - Name for a type of card (e.g. WAN module D5_4G2F)
Product Version - Version for a type of card (e.g. AA)
Serial Number - Unique code for a specific card (of the chassis, for the
Midplane EEPROM)
Manufacturing Date - Date indicating start of warranty period
Assembly Code - Engineering code uniquely identifying a specific
assembly, example ARCT00012
Assembly Revision Code - Engineering code that uniquely identifies a
specific version of an assembly, example = A.
Environment Monitoring
Environment monitoring (e.g. power, thermals, fan rotation) is handled by
the environment manager and logging system. The MON maintains envi-
ronment control and signals out-of-tolerance information internally and
then processes these events and updates appropriate SNMP MIB and
Syslog information. The events are also reported via Webserver to the
Application Manager status screens.
Some default limits and parameters may be adjusted via the CLI or Appli-
cation Manager.
Image Management - Compact Flash
The compact flash (CF) is the only bulk storage drive in the D5 UEQ. It
contains software images for all the available modules within the D5 UEQ.
It also contains the operating system and configuration files from which
the D5 UEQ boots. The CF is the location of non-volatile (NV) event infor-
mation.
At startup, the events in the NV log are read and then stored in the volatile
log (RAM on the WAN). If the MON is removed, the compact flash is not
accessible and events will no longer be saved to the NV log.
3 Product Overview
CAUTI ON
If the compact flash becomes full, the system will not boot up. If this
happens, clear out extraneous files to free up disk space (do not delete
the system or config files).
External I nterfaces
The D5 UEQ supports the following external interfaces and protocols:
Protocols
HTTP
SNMPv1, v2, v3
SSH
Telnet
FTP
TFTP
DHCP
IGMPv1, v2, v3
Interfaces Modules
# Per
Module Label Type Location Function
Downstream RF Connector QPM 4
RF1, RF2,
RF3, RF4
F Connector 75 Ohm Rear, Slot 1-6 RF to HFC Network
Downstream RF Connector
DPM
6DX2
2 RF1, RF2 F Connector 75 Ohm Rear, Slot 1-6 RF to HFC Network
GigE SFP Slot WAN 4 GigE 1-4 SFP Rear, Slot 7-8
Incoming Video over
IP Streams
Management Port WAN 1 ETH1
RJ 45, 10/100/1000
Base-T
Rear, Slot 7-8
SNMP/CLI
Management
Conditional Access Port WAN 1 ETH2 RJ 45, 10/100, Base T Rear, Slot 7-8
DVB Conditional
Access; SNMP/CLI
Management
Compact Flash MON 1
Compact
Flash
CF Type 1 MON Module
Removable Memory
Device
Serial Console Port Front 1 |0|0| RJ 45 Front Panel CLI via MON
Video Test Port Front 1 ,-'-, RJ 45, 10/100, Base T Front Panel
Test Port via MON
(Future)
DOCSIS Timing Interface WAN
1 (or 2 DTI per
WAN using DTI
dongle)
DTI CL RJ 45 Rear, Slot 7-8
DTI server connection
to provide third party
DOCSIS timing.
Edge QAM
Video/ UDP/ MPEG Management
The D5 UEQ system terminates MPEG video streams ingested over UDP IP
GigE ports. The D5 UEQ must associate UDP ports to QAM channels for
coherent mapping of MPEG traffic to QAM/RF outputs.
Most video servers reply on a static session resource philosophy that
provides the appropriate IP address and UDP port numbers to get a video
source to its final destination. In this model, the Session Resource
Manager (SRM) is configured manually without any protocols that nego-
tiate between the SRM and the Edge QAM devices. To simplify this config-
uration, blocks of UDP port numbers are associated (mapped) to the QAM
channels of the D5 UEQ.
Each QAM channel has a set of 127 default UDP ports mapped to them and
are directed to specific slots within the D5 UEQ (for more information, see
Chapter 8, Video on Demand).
QAM/ RF Management
Setting the frequency of the RF connector sets the center frequency of the
lowest QAM channel and the other QAM channels move accordingly. The
following diagram illustrates the frequencies where the QAM channels will
appear.
Dual-Port QAM Module (DPM
4DX2) in Quad Mode
The standard offsets are +6, +12 and +18MHz for Annex B or Annex C
and +8, +16, +24MHz for Annex A. These may be modified using the
channel-width and video symbol-rate commands
3 Product Overview
Each Dual-Port QAM Module (DPM 4DX2) in Quad Mode supports:
Two independent 75-OHM RF-connectors that carry four adjacent
QAM channels each
Maximum of eight QAM channels per module in ANNEX A/B/C modes
Total of 48 channels per chassis
RF port may run in single, dual or quad mode
Adjacent channels may be muted.
Figure 3-2: Setting RF Center Frequency on the Dual-Port QAM
Module (DPM 4DX2) in Quad Mode
Dual-Port QAM Module (DPM
6DX2) in Hex Mode
Each Dual-Port QAM Module (DPM 6DX2) in Hex Mode supports:
Two independent 75-OHM RF-connectors that carry six adjacent QAM
channels each
A maximum of twelve QAM channels per module in Annex B mode only
Annex A and C have a maximum of eight QAM channels per module
And a total of 72 channels per chassis
The RF ports may run in single dual quad or hex modes
Adjacent channels may be muted
CF (center frequency)
+ 6/+ 8M Hz
+12/+ 16M Hz
+ 18/+24M Hz
qam 1 qam 2 qam 4 qam 3
The following illustrates the center frequencies on the Dual-Port QAM
Module (DPM 6DX2) in Hex Mode:
Figure 3-3: RF Center Frequencies on the Dual-Port QAM Module
(DPM 6DX2) in Hex Mode
(QPM 8DX4)
Each Quad-Port QAM Module (QPM 8DX4) supports:
Four independent 75 ohm RF-connectors that carry eight adjacent
QAM channels each
Total of 32 QAM channels per module
Total of 192 QAM channels per full-fill chassis
Supports Annex A/B/C
RF port may run in single, dual, quad, hex, or octal mode
Simultaneous support of multiple services
- within a QAM carrier
- within a bonded QAM channel group
Arbitrary QAM channel muting allows non-continguous channel
assignments.
Configuring the frequency of the RF connectors sets the center frequency
of the lowest QPM channel with frequencies for the other QAM channels
moving accordingly.
QAM Channel Frequencies
1/1.2 1/1.3 1/1.4 1/1.5 1/1.6
qam2 qam3 qam4 qam5 qam6
+6/+8MHz
+12/+16MHz
+18/+24MHz
+24MHz
+30MHz
DS PHY/Upconverter DOCISIS DRFI (QAM) Module
RF1 RF2
QAM
Chan 2
QAM
Chan 3
QAM
Chan 4
QAM
Chan 5
QAM
Chan 1
QAM
Chan 6
QAM
Chan 2
QAM
Chan 3
QAM
Chan 4
QAM
Chan 5
QAM
Chan 1
QAM
Chan 6
QAM 1
1/1.1
qam1
3 Product Overview
The following illustrates the center frequencies on the Quad-Port QAM
Module (QPM 8DX4):.
Figure 3-4: RF Center Frequencies on the Quad-Port QAM Module
(QPM 8DX4)
Demodulator Support The Demodulator support added in release 3.0.1 allows the QPM module
to provide RF related performance statistics to the user, either through the
CLI, Web Manager or Application Manager.
There is a single demodulator circuit per QPM module, serving the full set
of 32 possible QAM channels on the module. The demodulator works in
conjunction with a silicon tuner and an RF switch that allows a single input
from the 4 unique RF outputs to be tuned and demodulated.
The demodulator allows for the monitoring of Bit Error Rate (BER), Signal
to Noise Ratio (SNR) and counts Forward Error Correction (FEC) informa-
tion. The monitoring/counting is performed on a periodic basis, where
configured QAM channels on any of the 4 RF ports can be monitored for a
maximum of 60 seconds before moving to the next QAM channel. Control
of the monitoring is enabled on a per QAM channel or per RF port basis,
and QAM channels can be included or excluded.
The demodulator also allows for the recovery of the QAM channel
MPEG2TS stream from the RF output. This MPEG2TS stream may be
snooped in the same way as the existing video snoop qam x/y.z post-
mux command operates, replacing post-mux with post-rf. The peri-
odic scanning of the QAM channels is halted when a post-rf snoop is
running on a specific QAM channel in the QPM.
QPM 1 DS PHY/Upconverter DOCISIS DRFI (QPM
RF1 RF2 RF3 RF4
1/1.1 1/1.4 1/1.3 1/1.2 1/1.51/1.61/1.71/1.8 1/3.1 1/4.1 1/2.11/2.21/2.3 1/2.41/2.51/2.61/2.71/2.8 1/3.2 1/3.8 1/3.7 1/3.6 1/3.5 1/3.4 1/3.3 1/4.8 1/4.7 1/4.6 1/4.5 1/4.4 1/4.3 1/4.2
1/1.2 1/1.3 1/1.4 1/1.5 1/1.6
channel 2 channel 3 channel 4 channel 5 channel 6
+6/+8MHz
+12/+16MHz
+18/+24MHz
+24MHz
+30MHz
1/1.1
channel 1
1/1.7 1/1.8
channel 7 channel 8
+36MHz
+42MHz
QPM Channel Frequencies
Center
Frequency
To enable the demodulator function, the video monitoring rf-
channel scan command must be entered at the RF port or QAM channel
level. When executed at RF Port level, all active QAM channels are included
in the periodic scanning. To enable the demodulator for the entire module,
the video monitoring rf-signal scan command must be config-
ured on all four QPM RF ports.
To exclude a QAM channel from the scanning, use the [no] format of the
command.
The scanning algorithm demodulates every included QAM channel for a
period of 1 second before moving to the next available QAM channel. To
allow the demodulator to collect more statistics per QAM channel, the
delay parameter, for the video monitoring rf-signal command can be
used to extend the length of time, in milliseconds, the demodulator should
dwell on the QAM channel before proceeding to the next QAM channel.
The delay interval is called the scan window, and is used to collect the
post-FEC BER measurement. The maximum interval is 60000 milliseconds
(60 seconds). It is also possible to calculate the pre-FEC BER measurement
using the unerrored/corrected/uncorrected values retrieved from the
demodulated QAM RF signal.
In the case of monitoring a single QAM channel, it is possible to remove
all but one video monitoring rf-signal scan command. This causes the
scanning to remain on the same QAM channel, allowing the uninterrupted
collection of FEC codewords and allows for a longer BER measurement.
The FEC codeword related statistics are aggregating for the entire time the
demodulator is scanning QAM channels. To reset the codeword counts, the
QAM channel must be disabled from the demodulator and reenabled.
The D5 UEQ also provides an extension to the show interfaces qam X/Y.Z
command to monitor the results of the demodulated statistics gathering.
The following example shows how the output of this command might look:
D5(config)#show interfaces qam 3/2 stats
QAM 3/ 2. 1:
Channel RF out put i s l ockabl e
BER: 0. 0E- 08
FEC codewor ds:
466672 uner r or ed
0 cor r ect ed
0 uncor r ect abl es
SNR: ~39 dB
Cur r ent vi deo out put ut i l i zat i on: 0%,
bi t r at e: 0. 015040 Mbps, packet r at e: 10 pps
Aver age vi deo out put ut i l i zat i on: 0%,
3 Product Overview
For t he l ast 5 mi nut es:
Mi ni mumvi deo out put ut i l i zat i on: 0%,
Maxi mumvi deo out put ut i l i zat i on: 0%,
QAM 3/ 2. 2:
BER: 0. 0E- 08
FEC codewor ds:
465769 uner r or ed
0 cor r ect ed
SNR: ~37 dB
QAM 3/ 2. 3:
BER: 0. 0E- 08
FEC codewor ds:
443397 uner r or ed
0 cor r ect ed
SNR: ~39 dB
D5( conf i g) #show i nt qam3/ 2 st at s
QAM 3/ 2. 1:
BER: 0. 0E- 08
FEC codewor ds:
517174 uner r or ed
0 cor r ect ed
SNR: ~39 dB
QAM 3/ 2. 2:
BER: 0. 0E- 08
FEC codewor ds:
465769 uner r or ed
0 cor r ect ed
SNR: ~37 dB
QAM 3/ 2. 3:
BER: 0. 0E- 08
FEC codewor ds:
465682 uner r or ed
0 cor r ect ed
SNR: ~39 dB
3 Product Overview
QAM 3/ 2. 4:
BER: 0. 0E- 08
FEC codewor ds:
582218 uner r or ed
0 cor r ect ed
SNR: ~39 dB
D5( conf i g) #i nt qam3/ 2
GigE Link Trunking Redundancy
The D5 UEQ has several layers of internal redundancy and fault tolerance
including GigE link trunking redundancy.
Trunking allows multiple Ethernet links to be combined together to form a
single logical link, with a total bandwidth equivalent to the aggregate of all
the physical Ethernet links. In the case of the D5 UEQ, those logical links
are the GigE Small Form Factor Pluggable cards (SFPs). The single logical
GigE link of SFPs is treated as one interface and is normally configured with
a single IP address. This can then be used to perform loopback testing on
the interface. Any traffic sent by the sender to the destination IP address
is automatically load balanced over all of the physical SFPs in the trunk.
Redundancy is achieved by redirection of ingested traffic from a failed SFP
to one that is configured to support a failure. If the failure is resolved, the
D5 UEQ software will allow the reactivated SFP to work within the trunking
configuration again.
The D5 UEQ can combine up to four GigE SFP ports into a trunk to create
a single logical link capable of delivering 2.6 Gbps to the D5 UEQ.
GigE MAC Redundancy
GigabitEthernet MAC Redundancy is a feature developed on the D5 UEQ
to support configuring an unused gigabitEthernet port as a backup for
active gigabitEthernet ports. In Release 3.0.1, this feature further exploits
the use of one of the fastEthernet ports, 0/1, being configured as a redun-
dant backup port to support all four active gigabitEthernet SFP ports. The
MAC Redundancy feature is transparent to the services running on the D5
UEQ, meaning that it can be applied to VOD, SDV (RPC/NGOD), BCAST,
and DOCSIS/DEPI applications. Each of the four gigabitEthernet ports on
the D5 UEQ have full Ethernet MAC functionality. When a gigabitEthernet
port is used as a spare, it must be connected to the same switch/vlan as
the gigabitEthernet ports it is sparing for. The MAC redundancy feature is
configured through the use of the ip bundle gigabitethernet x/y
command entered on any active gigabitEthernet port. For detailed infor-
mation, please refer to the Expanded Operation in Release 3.0.1 section
on page 13-17.
IGMP Client v1, v2, v3
In certain topologies, it is not necessary to run a multicast routing protocol
because the D5 UEQ can be utilized to learn group membership informa-
tion and forward streams based upon that information. The Internet Group
Management Protocol (IGMP) is used for this purpose.
Multicast video traffic received by the D5 UEQ uses the same UDP port
mapping rules as unicast video traffic. These forwarding rules dictate
which QAM channels will receive video stream(s). Therefore, the same
multicast group address can be reused for multiple video streams once a
unique UDP destination port is used in each stream.
IGMP can be employed to the network architecture either by directly
connecting the D5 UEQ to a video server or remotely connecting via a
switch, series of switches, routers, or a combination thereof.
The IGMP client operates on either a gigabit subinterface or a loopback
subinterface that is a member of a trunk. It does not operate on any fast
Ethernet ports. IGMP interfaces are initiated when a port is configured in
a video mode, this includes when a loopback is added to a trunk. IGMP
3 Product Overview
interfaces are removed when a port is configured in a non video mode, this
includes when a loopback is removed from a trunk. There are a maximum
of 253 groups that can be configured on the D5 UEQ. A group can only be
configured against a single subinterface.
When a group is statically configured, the WANs switch is programmed to
allow packets destined to the multicast address to be passed whether
IGMP is enabled or disabled on that subinterface.
Digital Video Broadcasting
The D5 UEQ provides the normal DVB Broadcast table processing that
includes program and Packet Identifier (PID) filtering, remapping of PIDs
and Single Program Transport Stream (SPTS) multiplexing. It also
supports all the normal DVB SI (Service Information) tables. The ARRIS D5
Application Manager also provides the ability to create and inject Program
Specific Information (P)SI table via the DVB Program Specific Information
Generator (P)SIG interfaces. Some additional functions the D5 UEQ
provides:
Support for DVB-SI tables not just MPEG (P)SI
Controls automatic (P)SI table generation
Deterministic use of PIDs
Support of DVB-SimulCrypt pre-scrambled content
Support of DVB-SimulCrypt without the EIS<>SCS interface
Supports scrambling of multiple programs with one ECM stream
GUI interface (ARRIS D5 Web Manager) for editing SI tables (refer-
ence Application Manager)
SI-Data insertion/removal and SPTS stream replacement handling
Backup/redundancy
Configuration simplicity
Content Protection
The D5 UEQ employs standards-based digital TV solutions and works
closely with leading conditional access system (CAS) vendors to ensure
that content is securely distributed. The D5 UEQs SimulCrypt System solu-
tion is a simple, easy-to-manage, powerful implementation of today's DVB
encryption standards. It gives broadcasters significantly more flexibility in
delivering reliable inter-operability between complex, interrelated systems,
including set-top boxes (STBs), middleware, scheduling applications, CAS,
and compression equipment.
Privacy Mode
The application of Privacy-Mode technology enables the D5 UEQ device to
seamlessly integrate with more conditional access systems and set-top
boxes in addition to its existing DVB SimulCrypt support. The D5 UEQs
session- and tier-based encryption capability provides greater flexibility
than the common practice of pre-encrypting VOD content as well as
reducing the overall complexity, cost of implementing and managing a
Video on Demand service.
The Privacy Mode deliverable for the D5 UEQ covers a number of different
elements. The D5 UEQ is equipped with the correct scrambling technology
to enable incoming streams to be encrypted in real-time with the correct
CAS parameters. The D5 UEQ will dynamically retrieve the necessary
secure CAS information to support this real time scrambling. It does this
through a separate proxy application that is supplied as part of the D5
Application Manager platform. In a similar way to DVB SimulCrypt condi-
tional access systems, multiple D5 UEQs are expected to communicate via
the proxy application for this secure CAS information. The proxy applica-
tion is a secure application that is protected from unauthorized use and
must be unlocked before it can be used. It off loads any direct D5 UEQ
communication to the Privacy Mode ERS element and as such acts as the
central authority that enables Privacy Mode to operate on D5 UEQs.
DVB SimulCrypt
The Digital Video Broadcasting (DVB) SimulCrypt standard is the dominant
Conditional Access (CAS) standard deployed by European cable operators.
Its open nature allows various headend devices to work together
seamlessly to provide secure delivery of broadcast and event content to
cable customers.
The DVB SimulCrypt specification relies on a DVB common scrambling
algorithm for the encryption and decryption of MPEG information. A secure
system of Electronic Keys, Control Words (CW), Subscriber Management
Systems (SMS), Entitlement Control Messages (ECM), Entitlement
Management Messages (EMM) and external event scheduling systems are
used to protect content in the Multiple Service Operator (MSO) network.
The D5 UEQs SimulCrypt solution allows an Operator to support multiple
CAS solutions which gives them greater freedom and flexibility in the
implementation of content protection within their networks. It supports
the handling of vendor-specific pre-encrypted content and stream encryp-
tion by adding descriptor pointers and Program Identifiers (PIDS) into D5
UEQ Program Map Tables (PMT), Program Association Tables (PAT), and
Network Information Tables (NIT). The D5 UEQ accepts scrambling
session information, interfaces with ECM generators, creates, then
supplies CWs, and receives prepared ECM messages. It also ensures
3 Product Overview
synchronization of CWs and transmission time, for ECMs, and interfaces
with SMS systems so that it can forward EMM messages and Private Data
messages to subscriber STBs.
An example of this scrambling session begins when a signal is sent to the
D5 UEQ Edge QAM before the MPEG content is transmitted. This allows the
D5 UEQ to setup the necessary sessions needed to send CWs in exchange
for ECMs. The D5 UEQ schedules the transmission of ECMs with respect to
the receipt of MPEG content. It also coordinates timing for scrambling
MPEG content. The subscribers set top box (STB) then receives the ECMs
and uses service keys (SK) to descramble them and recover CWs. The
subscribers STB uses the CWs to then descramble the received MPEG
content.
DVB PSI/ SI Processing
The D5 UEQ PSI/SI processing ensures the integrity of video streams
received and forwarded to output QAM channels. PSI information
contained within PAT and PMT tables gets dynamically updated as a result
of SPTS multiplexing to output QAMs. Automatic program numbering for
received SPTS streams can be used, with the resultant PAT and PMTs
updated with the new numbering. PID filtering and remapping also results
in changes to these PSI tables. The D5 UEQ also creates CAT tables as
required for any EMMs that may be added to an output multiplex and
updates descriptors within PMT tables for any ECMs that may be present.
DVB SI information is also handled by the D5 UEQ, from updating of NIT
tables, to the handling of external configured SI information provisioned
on the D5 UEQ using the (P)SIG SimulCrypt interface from the D5 Appli-
cation Manager PSI/SI generator. The D5 UEQ also supports importing
Teleste CatVisor files for provisioning of PSI/SI information. The D5 UEQ
also supports the insertion of DVB SI information presented to it from an
Ortikon SI generator using a dedicated MPEG-2 TS stream; all partial SI
information is replaced with the dedicated received SI stream.
DVB SimulCrypt User Interface
CLI The D5 UEQ DVB SimulCrypt feature (Figure 3-5) contains extensive CLI
support to configure and monitor the operation of the major components
that comprise this feature. The different areas: EIS, ECMG, EMMG/PDG
(Private Data Group), Code Word Generator (CWG), Scrambler, and
Synchronizer all have CLI commands to control their operation.
Figure 3-5: DVB SimulCrypt
Web Manager
The ARRIS D5 UEQ Web Manager (Web Manager) is a comprehensive
graphical user interface (GUI) element manager that enables a user to
configure, monitor and troubleshoot an ARRIS D5 Universal Edge QAM.
The Web Manager is intuitive and powerful. It reports D5 UEQ inventory
via auto detection and allows GUI control over many commands found in
the CLI; thereby expediting and simplifying common configurations that
could take considerably longer utilizing the CLI exclusively.
The Web Manager focuses on a specific subset of features which allows an
operator to manage MPEG configuration, monitor bandwidth and perfor-
mance, monitor events in real-time and provision QAM modules.
D5 UEQ
EMMG
PDG
A
C
G
PSI/ SI
Generator
SCS
CWG
M
U
X
S
c
r
a
m
b
l
e
r
SI Tables
PSI Tables
Private Data
EMMs
AC
CW
CW
ECMs
E
C
M
s
C
W
A
C
E
C
M
G
Content
&
Tables
SCG
S
I
/
I
F
A
g
e
n
t
3 Product Overview
The Web Manager utilizes Hyper Text Markup Language (HTML), Dynamic
Hyper Text Markup Language (DHTML), J avaScript, and Cascading Style
Sheets (CSS).
NOTE
For detailed instructions, see the Configuring the D5 UEQ with the Web
Manager section on page 7-10
Application Manager
The ARRIS D5 Application Manager supports large-scale D5 UEQ deploy-
ments with management tools and surveillance.
The Application Manager automates the complete D5 UEQ management
life cycle ranging from discovery, simple logical interface configuration,
software deployment, QAM configuration on third party SDV Servers,
event management in a hybrid setup within the full NMS solution, privacy
mode encryption, to complex PSI/SI table editing & section provisioning
for broadcast support.
A suite of user-friendly, versatile and robust worksheets enable operators
to deploy network wide D5 UEQ configuration changes, rules and filters for
Broadcast, VOD, SDV and M-CMTS video applications.
A broad range of server functionality supports real-time communications
with D5 UEQs in the managed network and ensures the server performs
network facing tasks, such as topology, inventory, fault management
tasks, configuration tasks, status polling, performance management and
report generation seamlessly within its framework. The server provides the
communication link between multiple clients connected to it in a distrib-
uted setup where individual updates are broadcast to all registered clients.
Ancillary to the core batch configuration features, the Application Manager
will help in capacity planning with real-time QAM utilization triggered
events along with historical data, plus facilitate the edge of the network
event filtering, aggregation and forwarding to third party NMS systems.
Batch Configuration Tool
(BCT)
The Batch Configuration Tool (BCT) worksheets mask the associated video
application rules and policies with easy to use workflows with validation for
network wide D5 UEQ configuration.
Privacy Mode Encryption
Provisioning (This feature is
provided to U.S. operators
only.)
Motorola Privacy Mode encryption of Video on Demand (VoD) content can
be performed by D5 UEQs in the network. Application Manager provides a
secure method to provision Privacy Mode encryption across many D5
UEQs. The provisioning capability is granular enough to select the partic-
ular QAM channels and video streams to be encrypted.
Advanced Provisioning The Application Manager enables the user to bulk provision many D5 UEQs
from within the one work flow using the BCT. The tool configures input to
output interfaces, multi-cast setup, M-CMTS integration, ERM configura-
tion, video application, rules and filters for SDV, Broadcast and VOD,
redundancy, Motorola Privacy Mode Encryption and D5 UEQ user access.
Software Management The Application Manager provides graphical display of the software images
active on the population of discovered D5 UEQs. It provides the ability to
change boot configuration, image change control, multiple device
upgrades and automated configuration back-up per D5 UEQ.
PSI/ SI Editor The Application Manager PSI/SI Editor can edit the contents of PAT, PMT,
CAT, NIT, SDT (actual and other), TOT and TDT.
Network-Wide Fault
Management
The Application Manager comes with extensive monitoring capability of all
discovered D5 UEQs. The operator can monitor traps, event logs, transport
streams and individual programs.
The Application Manager provides hardware inventory, environmental
telemetry and software audit reports.
The Application Manager receives, correlates, and reports alarms, across
multiple D5 UEQ devices utilizing embedded trap/event filters, forwarding,
and aggregation algorithms.
Network Reports The Application Manager provides statistical data collections with triggers,
pre-configured by the user, to generate various reports. Network wide
reports cover inventory audits, software image audits and environmental
telemetry test point measurements.
SDV Third Party QAM
Configuration Support
The Application Manager supports a dedicated view for RPC/GQI and
NGOD/ERM configuration, session and stream view, SDV QAM Statistics
and export functionality that generates the third party QAM configuration
files that integrates with the CISCO USRM or BigBand SDV Server.
Embedded Help System The Help System is integrated into the Application Manager GUI. Guidance
on how to navigate and use the Application Manager tool set is only a few
mouse clicks away.
3 Product Overview
4. System Components
Topics Page
System Overview 2
Front Panel 2
Hardware Locations 3
Hardware Functions 4
EMI Shielding 5
D5 UEQ Airflow 6
Blanking Plates 6
Fan Tray 6
Power Converter Module (PMOD) 7
Fan Converter Module (FMOD) 7
Power Supply Unit (PSU) 8
Wide Area Network Module (WAN) 11
Dual WAN 13
Quadrature Amplitude Modulation Module (QAM) 13
Chassis Monitoring Module (MON) 20
4 System Components
System Overview
The ARRIS D5 UEQ Edge QAM is an MPEG-2 transport and digital video
over cable delivery system. It can be variably configured to meet any
users unique requirements. The following describes the D5 UEQ Edge
QAM components.
Front Panel
The front panel includes:
Four line, 20 character, read-only, LCD user information display
Five button keypad (up/down/left/right/enter)
RJ -45 local craft access port (CLI interface port)
RJ -45 10/100 Ethernet test port (reserved for future use)
Figure 4-1: D5 UEQ Front Panel Face Plate
The CLI interface port is the RS/232 connector (labeled |0|0|) on the front
of the D5 UEQ. It is the only direct physical connection for executing CLI
commands.
CLI sessions can also be setup via telnet, SSH over the IP network, or
launched from the Telnet DMTS icon (Navigation Window) in the D5 UEQ
Web Manager desktop client program. The maximum concurrent sessions
allowed are four telnet, four SSH and one front panel session.
The Ethernet video test port (right) is labeled with the standard Ethernet
network icon. It is reserved for future use.
The front panel display includes a LCD and LEDs that communicate
connection status to the user. The front panel also includes a simple
five-button keypad. This keypad is used by the operator to drive a simple,
read-only, user interface.
CLI Interface
Port RJ -45 10/ 100
Ethernet Test Port
(Reserved for
Future Use)
LCD User
Information Display
Read Only
4 Line, 20 Character
5 Button Keypad
(Up/Down/Left/Right/Enter)
Hardware Locations
Behind the front panel face plate to the left, is the fan tray (Figure 4-2).
To the right, are two PSU slots that can accept either AC or DC PSUs. Adja-
cent to the PSUs, on the left, are three slots. The bottom slot is dedicated
to the Chassis Monitor Module (MON). The upper two slots are dedicated
to the Power Converter Modules (PMOD1 and PMOD 2) or a combination
of a Power Converter Module (PMOD2) and a Fan Converter Module
(FMOD1).
Figure 4-2: D5 UEQ Front Chassis
On the rear of the D5 UEQ chassis are eight slots (Figure 4-3 and Figure
4-4) numbered from left to right in descending order. Slot numbers one
through six are for QAM modules. Slot number seven is for the WAN
module. If you plan to run in Dual WAN mode, use slot eight for the second
WAN card. If not, this slot should contain a blanking plate.
Figure 4-3: D5 UEQ Rear Chassis View with QPMs and Dual WAN
MON Module
PMOD Fan Tray
Power Plug
FMOD/PMOD Fan Tray
Power Plug
FMOD/PMOD 1
Fan Tray
PSU 1 PSU 2
PMOD 2
Compact
Flash Card
Fan Tray Mates
FMOD/PMOD 1 Here
for Power
RF1
RF1
RF2
RF1
RF2
RF2
RF3
RF3
RF3
RF4
RF4
RF4
RF1
RF1
RF2
RF1
RF2
RF2
RF3
RF3
RF3
RF4
RF4
RF4
O
O
S
P
O
W
E
R
O
O
S
P
O
W
E
R
O
O
S
P
O
W
E
R
A
R
R
I
S
A
R
R
I
S
A
R
R
I
S
D
5
Q
A
M
8
D
X
4
O
O
S
P
O
W
E
R
D
5
Q
A
M
8
D
X
4
O
O
S
P
O
W
E
R
D
5
Q
A
M
8
D
X
4
O
O
S
P
O
W
E
R
A
R
R
I
S
A
R
R
I
S
A
R
R
I
S
D
5 Q
A
M
8D
X
4
D
5 Q
A
M
8D
X
4
D
5 Q
A
M
8D
X
4
PSU1 DC
Terminal
QAM
RF1
Port
AC
PSU1
Plug
AC
PSU2
Plug
QAM
RF2
Port
PSU2
Fuse
PSU1
Fuse
DC
Grounding
Stud
QAM
RF3
Port
QAM
RF4
Port
Fast
Ethernet
Port (FE01)
DTI
Port
GbE
Ports
PSU2 DC
Terrminal
Fast
Ethernet
Port (FE02)
4 System Components
Figure 4-4: D5 UEQ Rear Chassis View (DPM 6DX2 based Rear
view)
NOTE
Execute the show linecard status command in the CLI or launch the
Line Card Status window from the Monitor drop down menu, in the D5
UEQ Web Manager to view the status of all modules within the unit.
Hardware Functions
There are six module types currently supported by the D5 UEQ (Figure
4-5):
Wide Area Network module (WAN) - handles the IP interfacing
and processing plus DOCSIS timing synchronization
DS PHY/ Upconverter DOCSI S DRFI -based QAM module
(QAM) - handles MPEG Multiplexing, channel coding, modulation,
channel bonding and RF upconversion
Chassis Monitor module (MON) - centralizes chassis monitoring,
chassis control, system non-volatile memory, and houses the bulk
storage Compact Flash (CF) card
Power Supply module (PSU) - nominally rated at 500W for systems
containing Dual-Port QAM Modules (DPM 4DX2) in Quad Mode, Dual-
Port QAM Modules (DPM 6DX2) in Hex Mode with a single WAN or
Conditional
Access
Port
Fast
Ethernet
Mgmt Port
DTI
Port
Reserved
for
Future Use
QAM
RF1
Port
AC
PSU1
Plug
GbE
Ports
AC
PSU2
Plug
QAM
RF2
Port
PSU2
Fuse
PSU1
Fuse
Reserved
for Future
DC
Grounding
Stud
DC PSU
1&2 Plug
600W for systems containing Quad-Port QAM Modules (QPM 8DX4)
and Dual WANs, to provide conditioned continuous voltage for the D5
UEQ chassis
Power Converter module (PMOD) - provides additional voltage
rails for the QAM module as well as power and a telemetry interface
to the fan tray.
Fan Converter module (FMOD) - provides an interface to the fan
tray as well as telemetry monitoring and alarms for individual fan revo-
lutions per minute (RPMs).
Figure 4-5: D5 UEQ Module Assignments
EMI Shielding
The chassis construction itself forms an EMI shield. Openings in the
chassis, such as front/rear slots are suitably gasketed so as to complete
the EMI seal as long as blanking plates are installed in those open spaces
that do not contain cards or modules.
QAM Module
slot #1
QAM Module
slot #4
QAM Module
slot #5
QAM Module
slot #6
QAM Module
slot #3
QAM Module
slot #2
M
i
d
p
l
a
n
e
WAN Module
WAN Module
8 Adjacent QAM Channels
4 System Components
Blanking Plates
Blanking plates serve three important functions. They prevent exposure to
hazardous voltages and currents inside the chassis; they inhibit electro-
magnetic interference (EMI) that might disrupt other equipment; and they
direct the flow of cooling air through the chassis.
CAUTI ON
It is critical that all blanking plates remain installed where there are no
modules so that air flow will circulate correctly.
Fan Tray
The fan tray is accessible after removing the front panel. Air vents are
located on the left and right sides of the chassis. It is critical that these
vents remain unobstructed after the chassis is mounted so the D5 UEQ
does not overheat.
D5 UEQ Airflow
The D5 UEQ operates with side-to-side cooling. Fans located on the left of
the unit (from the front fascia perspective) exhaust hot air from the D5
UEQ, pulling cool air from the right hand side of the unit. Markings on the
D5 UEQ indicate the direction of air flow.
Figure 4-6: D5 UEQ Airflow direction
The D5 UEQ requires side to side airflow of greater than 200 cubic-feet-
per-minute (CFM) aggregate, when measured in a cross-section along its
side profile. Airflow is then channeled appropriately at higher speed
through PSUs and line cards through the D5 UEQs integral fans.
Air Re-circulation Re-circulating air is a consideration for the installation of all equipment
whether it employs side-to-side or front-to-back cooling. Re-circulating air
from an equipments air exhaust to the air intake causes the equipment to
experience effective ambient temperatures elevated above those which it
would otherwise experience. This may lead to reduced MTBF for the equip-
ment if the resulting operating temperature of the equipment is higher
than normal. It may also limit the amount of equipment that can be
installed within a rack. Refer to Racking Recommendations on page 6-4 for
various racking configurations and recommendations.
Power Converter Module (PMOD)
The Power Converter Module (PMOD) generates power rails required by
the QAM module.
The D5 UEQ can support two PMODs running simultaneously in a load-
sharing configuration similar to the main PSUs. Either PMOD can supply
sufficient power for the entire chassis, though the lower unit must be in
place to provide power and monitoring signals to the fans.
Fan Converter Module (FMOD)
The Fan Converter Module (FMOD) provides an interface to the fan tray
for both power and monitoring individual fan speeds. The FMOD must be
inserted in the bottom PMOD slot since the fan tray only plugs into the
bottom slot. The FMOD is used instead of the PMOD in D5 UEQ systems
which are running exclusively with QPM QAM cards, i.e. no DPM QAM
cards.
If there are one or more DPM QAM cards in the D5 UEQ system, then it is
necessary to have a PMOD card (which can be inserted into the top PMOD
slot). This is required in order to supply the required voltage rails to the
DPM cards.
CAUTI ON
The chassis thermal monitoring protection system may shut down the D5
UEQ if the fan tray is unplugged for more than two minutes as the chassis
may reach the fatal temperature threshold limit.
4 System Components
The show lincard status command will show the Card Type as a
PMOD, but will indicate FMOD in the Product Code column, as shown in
the sample output below:
D5#show l i necar d st at us

Car d Admi n Oper Dupl ex Ser i al Pr oduct Pr oduct Pr ov
Type St at e St at e St at e Number Code Rev Type
- - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - -
MON I S C41530A50006 MON_8 AD MON
QAM 1 UP I S Si mpl ex C188A0G90174 QAM_6DX2 EB QAM
QAM 4 UP I S Si mpl ex C179A081E017 QAM_8DX4 BA QAM
WAN 7 I S C038B0B1B062 WAN_4G2F CA WAN
PMOD 1 I S C228B0D60013 FMOD AB PMOD
PMOD 2 I S C367B0D60117 PWR_CNV8 AB PMOD
PSU 1 I S PSU
PSU 2 I S AC- 0609005 PSU_AC AA PSU
CHAS I S T14900E3005 CHA_8 AA CHAS
Power Supply Unit (PSU)
The D5 UEQ operates on one or two redundant, load-sharing power supply
units (PSUs) (Figure 4-7). PSUs are available in AC or DC versions. Each
PSU can provide full load requirements at 1:1 optional redundancy (refer
to following section on AC PSU compatibility). The load share is nominally
at 50% during normal operation when both power supplies are utilized.
NOTE
If you are only running one Power Supply Unit, it must be installed in the
bottom slot (Slot 1).
Figure 4-7: Location of D5 UEQ Power Supply Units
PSU 1 PSU 2
High Capacity AC Chassis
Part Number 780276
In Release 3.0, the new high capacity AC Chassis will be shipped with one
of the AC PSUs (part number 780280) shown in Figure 4-8 below. If you
need to replace a single PSU or run redundant PSUs, you must use this
PSU.
Figure 4-8: Example of the 780280 AC PSU
High Capacity DC Chassis
Part Number 780277
The high capacity DC Chassis will be shipped with one of the DC PSUs (part
number 780281) shown in Figure 4-9 below. If you need to replace a single
PSU or run redundant PSUs, you must use this PSU.
Figure 4-9: Example of the 780281 DC PSU
Also new with the high capacity chassis, it will be possible to mix the
780280 AC PSU in a chassis with the 780281 DC PSU.
AC PSU Compatibility -
Release 2.6 or earlier ONLY
Please note the following compatibility rules when replacing or adding AC
PSUs to the earlier D5 UEQ Chassis.
The original AC chassis (Part Number 716625) has a Telkoor PSU with two
types of face plates depending on when it was shipped. The two face
plates, shown below, have the same part number. If you are running the
original D5 UEQ with only one PSU, it may be replaced with either of these
AC PSU. A redundant configuration in the original chassis requires that
both PSUs are the same part number. The newer AC PSU can be installed
in the original chassis but cannot be mixed with the original AC PSUs in a
redundant configuration.
P
O
W
E
R
A
L
A
R
M
P
O
W
E
R
A
L
A
R
M
780281 DC PSU, Telkoor High Capacity Chassis
4 System Components
CAUTI ON
If you plan to add a redundant PSUs, it must match the presently
installed PSU type. You cannot mix PSUs in the earlier chassis.
Figure 4-10: 716630 - AC PSU, Telkoor (two styles)
The AC Chassis (Part Number 722050) contains the PSU shown in Figure
4-11. If you need to replace a single PSU or run redundant PSUs in this
unit, they must be the 722058 AC PSU.
Figure 4-11: 722058 - AC PSU, Power-One
NOTE
If there is a PSU failure, the D5 UEQ logs this as a PSU removal event.
Equally, on insertion of a PSU, a log is generated of the insertion event.
If there is no physical removal of the PSU then a PSU removal event in a
load-sharing configuration would provide alarm capability to deal with the
PSU failure.
WARNI NG
The D5 UEQ is designed to automatically shut down on detection of
abnormal voltages on the internal rails. To recover from this shutdown
condition, the Auto Shutdown Recovery Button must be pressed on
the MON while the unit is installed in the chassis to enable the system to
P
O
W
E
R
A
L
A
R
M
P
O
W
E
R
A
L
A
R
M
F
a
u
l
t
I
n
p
u
t

O
K
reset and boot up (Figure 4-19, MON Auto Shutdown Recovery Button, on
page 4-21). This is a safety feature to ensure that the D5 UEQ does not
run with unsafe power conditions. The D5 UEQ checks for PSU over-
voltage and sets the system into such a shutdown state. It will not allow a
boot up if the PSU over-voltage condition continues after a reset.
Wide Area Network Module (WAN)
The WAN is the heart of the D5 UEQ. It provides many of the non-RF inter-
faces for the system, inter-module connectivity to the QAMs via a GigE
switch, and houses the DOCSIS Timing Interface (DTI).
Figure 4-12: Wide Area Network Card (WAN V4)
The WAN Module ingests video from multiple IP sources from the GigE
interfaces and primarily provides MPEG PID remapping and preparation for
processing in the QAM Module Video MUX processing.
DVB Conditional Access Key
Exchange Interface ETH2
(See * below)
Fast Ethernet Management
Interface ETH1
(See * below)
DTI Clock
Interface
Gigabit Ethernet
SFP Slots
*... In Release 3.0.1, ETH1 can be configured as a redundant gigabitEthernet port for any of the other
SFP GE ports. ETH2 must then be reconfigured with the ETH1 settings in order to provide the exact
functionality and maintain management access to the D5 UEQ.
4 System Components
The WAN module features include:
Four external, removable GigE small form factor pluggable (SFP)
modules (labeled GbE 1-4)
One external 100BaseT management interface (labeled ETH1). ETH1
can also be configured as a redundant gigabitEthernet port for any of
the other SFP GE ports.
One external 100BaseT DVB Conditional Access Key Exchange inter-
face support (labeled ETH2). If ETH1 is configured as a redundant GE
port, then ETH2 must be reconfigured with the ETH1 settings to main-
tain management access.
One DOCSIS DTI clock interface (labeled DTI CI). Note: using DTI
dongle/2 DTI per WAN,
Hardware support of MPEG-2 video transport over IP sessions
IP Unicast and Multicast (IGMPv1,v2,v3) support (defaults to IMGPv2)
GigabitEthernet I nterfaces
(GigE)
The WAN's internal switch fabric serves as the communication pipeline
between its four SFP GigE interfaces and the D5 UEQ's QAM modules. It
supports the ability to receive up to 1488 individual SPTSs simultaneously.
These are subsequently disseminated across up to 96 QAM channels (in
Annex B only) with a maximum of 63 programs per channel.
Each of the GigE interfaces can be configured for system management
though it is not a procedure recommended by ARRIS.
Fast Ethernet Management
I nterface (FE01)
The fastEthernet network management interface supports the ability to
remotely access the CLI via telnet or SSH. This interface is also used to
communicate via SNMP with external NMS and EMS systems. It can also
be used to download logging information to a remote Syslog server.
The fastEthernet port 0/1 can be used as a redundant GE port for any of
the four active SFP GE ports. The fastEthernet port, 0/1, is capable of
1Gbps operation,1000BT Copper mode only. The fastEthernet port 0/1
CANNOT be used as an active GE port (i.e., a video carrying port) because
it does not support the same configuration commands as GE ports, nor is
it mapped internally in the D5 UEQ to act as a video/depi port.
DVB Conditional Access Key
Exchange I nterface (FE02)
Supports the use of DVB SimulCrytp on ETH2. When the fastEthernet 0/1
port is used as a redundant GE port for the SFP GE ports, the fastEthernet
0/2 port must be reconfigured with the FE 0/1 settings (the NOC network
configuration) to maintain functionality. Failure to move the configuration
would result in loss of management access to the D5 UEQ.
Distributed Timing I nterface
(DTI )
Full hardware support.
Dual WAN
The support of dual WAN cards in the D5 UEQ chassis provides higher
WAN bandwidth capacity and accommodates the Quad-Port QAM Module
(QPM 8DX4). The QPM 8DX4 QAMs can be assigned to either WAN,
allowing the D5 UEQ to function as two logically-independent systems. The
addition of a second WAN module helps to accommodate the substantial
increase in required ingress. This additional WAN operates in slot 8 of the
D5 UEQ chassis.
Since the maximum bandwidth capacity of the each WAN module is 4
Gbps, the D5 UEQ should be configured with dual WANs when the total
bandwidth of the system, including Dual-Port QAM Module (DPM 4DX2) in
Quad Mode and Quad-Port QAM Modules (QPM 8DX4), is greater than 4
Gbps.
Quadrature Amplitude Modulation Module (QAM)
The Dual-Port QAM Module (DPM 4DX2) in Quad Mode and the Dual-Port
QAM Module (DPM 6DX2) in Hex Mode support the M-CMTS DRFI specifi-
cation for M-CMTS RF QAM modulation/upconversion, over the 54-867MHz
spectral range and 54-1GHz for the Quad-Port QAM Module (QPM 8DX4).
It ingests transport streams (TS) from the WAN, and modulates them onto
RF carriers that are then upconverted to their provisioned bandwidth allo-
cations and performs DVB scrambling when configured.
Figure 4-13: QAM Modules
RF1
RF1
RF2
RF1
RF2
RF2
RF3
RF3
RF3
RF4
RF4
RF4
RF1
RF1
RF2
RF1
RF2
RF2
RF3
RF3
RF3
RF4
RF4
RF4
O
O
S
P
O
W
E
R
O
O
S
P
O
W
E
R
O
O
S
P
O
W
E
R
A
R
R
I
S
A
R
R
I
S
A
R
R
I
S
D
5
Q
A
M
8
D
X
4
O
O
S
P
O
W
E
R
D
5
Q
A
M
8
D
X
4
O
O
S
P
O
W
E
R
D
5
Q
A
M
8
D
X
4
O
O
S
P
O
W
E
R
A
R
R
I
S
A
R
R
I
S
A
R
R
I
S
D
5
Q
A
M
8
D
X
4
D
5 Q
A
M
8D
X
4
D
5
Q
A
M
8
D
X
4
Power
RF Downstreams
4 System Components
The QAM module contains the upconversion and RF components of the
system. All the parameters associated with these components are
controlled on the WAN module then signaled to the QAM module. The
parameters that can be modified are:
format
annex
interleaver
frequency
symbol rate
power
spectral inversion
There can be up to six QAM modules in a D5 UEQ chassis. In a single Dual-
Port QAM Module (DPM 4DX2) in Quad Mode, there are eight QAM chan-
nels. When an RF port is configured in quad mode, there are four QAM
channels per RF connector, with two RF connectors per QAM (labeled RF1
and RF2) totaling 48 channels.
On a single Dual-Port QAM Module (DPM 6DX2) in Hex Mode, there are six
QAM channels per RF connector totaling twelve channels. When both RF
connectors are configured in hex (Annex B only), there are a total of 72
channels.
On the Quad-Port QAM Module (QPM 8DX4), the configuration of each
QAM channel on each RF output port is highly flexible. The number of QAM
output channels can be set independently for each RF port, ranging from
one QAM channel per port up to eight QAM channels per RF port totalling
32 QAM channels per module or 192 QAM channels per full-fill chassis.
The parameters format, annex, interleaver, frequency, symbol rate, power
and spectral inversion are associated to a port but configured on an RF
connector basis. The interface ranges are from one to two on a Dual-Port
QAM Module (DPM 4DX2) in Quad Mode and a Dual-Port QAM Module
(DPM 6DX2) in Hex Mode while the interface range on a Quad-Port QAM
Module (QPM 8DX4) ranges from one to four. The CLI command inter-
face qam 4/1.2 addresses the second QAM channel on the first RF
connector of the QAM module in slot four.
All QAM channels are set to quad mode and disabled by default before
being configured and enabled to ensure no interference in any existing
QAM channels.
The following tables describe the status of the LEDs on the Quad-Port QAM
Module (QPM 8DX4) under normal and failure conditions.
Table 4-1: QPM Status LEDs under Normal Conditions
Table 4-2: QPM Status LEDs under Failure Conditions
The status of QAM modules and their configuration parameters can be set
and read from the CLI HTTP interface to D5 UEQ Web Manager and SNMP
to the D5 UEQ Web Manager.
POWER
(Green LED)
OOS
(Red LED) Explanation
OFF ON Card is shut down (default state)
FLASHI NG FLASHING
LED is flashing alternatively. The card micro-controller is
being upgraded by software. The sequence should last no
more than 20 seconds (rev BB), two minutes (rev BA and
below)
ON ON
Card is booting up (downloading/ programming FPGA, etc.).
The sequence should last no more than 30 seconds.
ON OFF
Card is running normally, however RF signal may not be seen
if channels are muted which is the default value until
software tells otherwise.
FLASHI NG FLASHING
LEDs are flashing together. Card is being shutdown by
software. Sequence should last no more than two seconds
(time for rails to discharge).
POWER
(Green LED)
OOS
(Red LED) Explanation
OFF OFF
Card micro-controller has not been programmed, is
corrupted or has no power at all. Check micro internal LED
and programming and/ or 3.3V_UC rail.
FLASHI NG ON
Card micro-controller has detected a 'major' problem, board
cannot be powered up. Check PLLs, SPI bus, RF rails, etc.
FLASHI NG OFF
Card micro-controller has detected a 'minor' problem, board
can be powered up. Check PLL1 lock status, sensors, demod,
etc.
ON FLASHING
Card FPGAs could not be programmed successfully, DONE bit
is not asserted. Check NANDFLASH for corruption, FPGA bus,
etc.
OFF FLASHING
Card micro-controller has crashed. Check for brown-out
issues on 3.3V_UC rail, possible SD card corruption, bug in
firmware.
4 System Components
Each Dual-Port QAM Module (DPM 4DX2) in Quad Mode supports:
Two independent 75 ohm RF-connectors that carry four adjacent QAM
channels each
Total of eight QAM channels per module
Total of 48 channels per chassis in Annex A/B/C mode
RF port may run in single, dual or quad mode
RF muting
Figure 4-14: Dual-Port QAM Module (DPM 4DX2) in Quad Mode
Bonded Channels
Each Dual-Port QAM Module (DPM 6DX2) in Hex Mode supports:
Two independent 75 ohm RF-connectors that carry six adjacent QAM
channels each
Total of twelve QAM channels per module
Total of 72 channels per chassis in Annex B only
RF port may run in single, dual, quad or hex (Annex B only) mode
RF muting
Figure 4-15: Dual-Port QAM Module (DPM 6DX2) in Hex Mode
Bonded Channels
Each Quad-Port QAM Module (QPM 8DX4) supports:
Four independent 75 ohm RF-connectors that carry eight adjacent
QAM channels each
Total of 32 QAM channels per module
Total of 192 QAM channels per full-fill chassis
Supports Annex A/B/C
RF port may run in single, dual, quad, hex, or octal mode
Simultaneous support of multiple services
- within a QAM carrier
- within a bonded QAM channel group
Arbitrary QAM channel muting allows non-continguous channel
assignments.
Figure 4-16: Quad-Port QAM Module (QPM 8DX4) Bonded
Channels
NOTE
When replacing QPM QAMs with DPM QAMs, it is recommended that the
configuration for the unused QAM ports (ports 3 and 4) be removed to
avoid potential configuration issues (for instance, UDP port conflict).
To remove the configuration for ports 3 and 4, use the following
commands:
no interface qam 3/ 3
no interface qam 3/ 4
where x is the QAM slot number <1-6>.
Demodulator Features
Demodulator functionality is built into the QPM 8DX4 module and consists
of an RF switch that can tap any one of the four RF outputs on the QPM
8DX4 module and feed them into a 1GHz tuner. The tuner is associated
QPM1 DSPHY/UpconverterDOCISISDRFI(QPM)Module
RF1 RF2 RF3 RF4
1/1.1 1/1.4 1/1.3 1/1.2 1/1.51/1.61/1.71/1.8 1/3.1 1/4.1 1/2.11/2.21/2.31/2.41/2.51/2.61/2.71/2.8 1/3.2 1/3.8 1/3.7 1/3.6 1/3.5 1/3.4 1/3.3 1/4.8 1/4.7 1/4.6 1/4.5 1/4.4 1/4.3 1/4.2
4 System Components
with the demodulator IC that recovers the MPEG signal and collects various
RF-related statistics presented by the D5 UEQ, such as corrected/uncor-
rected FEC blocks, RF power levels and SNR information. The recovered
MPEG signal can also be directed through the QPM 8DX4 module FPGA and
transmitted as a UDP/IP stream to a remote video acquisition device. This
mode of MPEG streaming is known as post-rf snooping as opposed to the
existing post-mux snooping, however both follow the same type of
configuration and stream content in the same way to a remote UDP/IP
destination.
Each QPM demodulator operates over the full set of QAM channels, either
scanning all QAM channels periodically (staying on each QAM for a config-
urable amount of time) or programmed to stop on a single QAM channel
forever. The WAN module and each QPM 8DX4 module coordinate to
ensure the correct RF port is switched to the tuner and that the tuner
delivers the correct frequency to the demodulator every time a specific a
QAM channel is requested to be demodulated/monitored. The QPM 8DX4
module comprises of a local microcontroller, that directly controls the
demodulator, tuner and RF switch, and reads back information from the
demodulator IC, subsequently retrieved by the WAN module. The
retrieved information is recorded on a per QAM channel basis, and is avail-
able from the CLI, the WEB Manager and the Application Manager for
display purposes.
Dual Interleavers per RF Port
To operate a real QAM-sharing of services on a single F-connector, we
need to run both video applications and DOCSIS M-CMTS concurrently on
the same RF output. In order to run these services together, different
interleaver depths are required as the longer/deeper interleaver settings,
required for video to allow corrupted MPEG data to be corrected, nega-
tively impact the short interleave depths required for DOCSIS interactive
services to reduce the cable plant round-trip delays.
The D5 UEQ QPM module has been updated in Release 3.0.1 to allow the
operation of two independent interleavers per block of four QAM channels
on each RF port. This will enable QAM sharing to be deployed on the QPM,
with DOCSIS running over one block of four QAM channel blocks and video
running over the other block of four QAM channels.
The interleaver settings are applicable to a block of four QAM channels;
meaning channels numbered 1-4 can be configured with one interleaver
depth, while channels 5-8 can be configured with a different interleaver
depth.
In 8-channel mode (octal), the dual interleaver support allows the first four
ports to be configured with one interleaver setting and the second four
ports to be configured with a different setting.
In 6-channel mode (hex), the dual interleaver support allows the first four
ports to be configured with one interleaver setting and the last two ports
(ports 5 and 6) to be configured with a different setting.
In 4-channel mode (quad), only a single interleaver setting can be applied.
The following diagram details operation of dual interleaver for the different
channel modes available with the QPM modules (single and dual are not
shown).
Figure 4-17: 8 QAM Channel per RF Port
The CLI commands are defined to ensure that the selection of the inter-
leaver setting for each block of four channels will be unambiguous during
normal operation or through a reboot scenario. As the interleaver setting
is applied per block of four channels, the first channel of each block is used
to record the most recent interleaver value. When a user decides to
change the interleaver depth of any QAM channel within a block of four
QAM channels, the D5 UEQ records the change against the first channel of
that block.
For example, if a user modifies the interleaver setting to 128,1 on QAM
1/1.3, the interleaver would be reconfigured and the setting saved on QAM
1/1.1. The CLI will show the interleaver setting on QAM 1/1.3 with a
x/1.1 X/1.2 X/1.3 X/1.4 X/1.5 X/1.6 X/1.7
x/1.1 X/1.2 X/1.3 X/1.4
x/1.1 X/1.2 X/1.3 X/1.4
x/1.1 X/1.2 X/1.3 X/1.4
x/1.1 X/1.2 X/1.3 X/1.4
X/1.5 X/1.6 X/1.7
X/1.5 X/1.6 X/1.7
X/1.5 X/1.6 X/1.7
X/1.5 X/1.6 X/1.7
Interleaver Block #2 Interleaver Block #1
Channel Mode HEX
Channel Mode OCTAL
Channel Mode QUAD
128,1
128,1
128,1 32,4
32,4
NONE
4 System Components
comment (!) mark and the real interleaver setting on QAM 1/1.1 (without
the comment mark). In the case of configuring QAM 2/4.7 with a modified
interleaver setting, the D5 UEQ will mark QAM 2/4.7 with a comment mark
for the interleaver setting and set QAM 2/4.5 (first QAM in the block of
four) with the actual interleaver setting.
Chassis Monitoring Module (MON)
The Chassis Monitoring Module (MON) provides centralized monitoring and
control functions for the D5 UEQ chassis. It controls the front panel
display, the compact flash bulk storage file system and provides power and
telemetry connections for the front panel console ports.
Figure 4-18: Chassis Monitor Module (MON)
The MON is responsible for controlling the boot up of all the D5 UEQ cards.
It also monitors power, temperature and other important functions in the
D5 UEQ modules.
The MON controls the only physical serial interface (CLI port, see D5 UEQ
Front Chassis on page 4-3) on the D5 UEQ. The serial interface can be
used to access the D5 UEQ CLI.
The MON module drives the four line, 20 character display on the D5 UEQ
front panel (D5 UEQ Front Chassis on page 4-3). The LCD panel has an
associated keypad interface that allows users to navigate a simple read-
only menu system. The LCD displays information regarding faults or
alarms that have occurred on a per module basis in the system.
Mon Module
The MONs features include:
Managing card booting and initialization processes for all D5 UEQ
modules.
Detecting D5 UEQ module insertion and removal
Monitoring and reporting card thermal and power rail conditions
Monitoring and managing the PSU
Housing the MON module auto shutdown recovery button (Figure
4-19).
NOTE
Failure of the MON Module after system boot will not adversely affect
system video processing.
Auto Shutdown Recovery
Button
The Auto Shutdown Recovery button is used to power up the D5 UEQ after
the system has shutdown due to a fault (e.g. the D5 UEQ will shut itself
down automatically if the fan tray is removed from the chassis causing the
temperatures to rise above set thresholds). The D5 UEQ will not power
itself up afterwards even though the power cables are still connected. The
user has to press the Auto Shutdown Recovery button in order to bring the
D5 UEQ back up.
NOTE
The D5 UEQ system will only shut down the power supply as a last resort.
The thermal protection scheme is such that individual modules are shut
down if they reach a fatal temperature. The MON card is kept alive as
long as possible and would be the last module to shut down. If the
temperature continues to rise and the MON reaches its fatal temperature
threshold, then the PSU(s) is shut down using the inhibit relay and the
Auto Shutdown Recovery button is then required to recover. There is a
very low probability that the normally-closed electro-mechanical relay
which controls the Auto-Shutdown function may have been subject to
excessive mechanical shock duirng shipment. This may result in lack of
D5 UEQ power-up following out-of-boc set up. ARRIS recomments that a
4 System Components
user press the Auto Shutdown Recovery button to release the Auto-
Shutdown function in this event.
Figure 4-19: MON Auto Shutdown Recovery Button
Auto Shutdown
Recovery Button
5. Dual WAN
Topics Page
Overview 1
Configuration Management 2
Slot Assignments 2
QAM Management 4
WAN Synchronization in Dual WAN Configuration 5
Dual WAN Configuration 6
DTI Timing Support 8
SNMP Support 7
Feature Compatibility 8
Overview
The Dual WAN feature supports dual WAN cards in the D5 UEQ chassis to
provide higher WAN bandwidth capacity and to accommodate the Quad-
Port QAM Module (QPM 8DX4). QAMs can be assigned to either WAN,
allowing the D5 UEQ to function as two logically-independent systems.
5 Dual WAN
Figure 5-1 depicts a D5 UEQ chassis with QAMs 1, 2 and 4 assigned to
WAN 7. QAMs 3, 5 and 6 are assigned to WAN 8.
Table 5-1: Dual WAN Chassis
Table 5-2 illustrates the same D5 UEQ chassis separated into two logically-
independent systems.
Table 5-2: Dual WAN Logical Systems
The maximum bandwidth capacity of the each WAN module is 4 Gbps. The
bandwidth required by the QAMs is dependent on the annex, modulation
depth (64 or 256) and number of enabled channels.
The D5 UEQ should be configured with dual WANs when the total band-
width of the system, including Dual-Port QAM Module (DPM 4DX2) in Quad
Mode and Quad-Port QAM Modules (QPM 8DX4), is greater than 4 Gbps.
QAM cards should be divided between the WANs to ensure that both WANs
operate within the limits of their bandwidth capacity.
Configuration Management
The 3.0 release will utilize separate configuration data for WAN 7 and WAN
8. WAN 7 will continue to use the startup-configuration file contained in
the /update directory on the compact flash. WAN 8 will use a startup-
configuration file contained in the /update/wan2 directory.
Slot Assignments Ideally, slot assignment data would be stored in the startup-configuration
file. However, since two startup-configuration files could result in
conflicting data, a new file (/update/slotAssignments) has been
created to store slot assignments.
QAM 1 assigned to WAN 7 QAM 2 assigned to WAN 7
WAN 7 WAN 8
D5 UEQ System A D5 UEQ System B
QAM 1 QAM 2
QAM 4 QAM 3
QAM 5 QAM 6
WAN 7 WAN 8
The startup-configuration files for WAN 7 and WAN 8, as well as
the slotAssignments file, are concantenated in the showtech output
to reflect the configuration of the entire system.
When the Dual WAN feature is disabled, all slots are reassigned to WAN 7.
The Dual WAN feature is disabled by default and must be enabled before
slot assignments can be configured.
A QAM card must be shutdown before the slot can be re-assigned when
the QAM is equipped and the current slot owner (WAN) is in-service. When
WAN 8 is in-service, all equipped cards assigned to WAN 8 must be shut-
down before the Dual WAN feature can be disabled.
In the event that a WAN fails or is unequipped, the slots assigned to that
WAN can be re-assigned to the other WAN without putting the QAM cards
in the admin down state.
An unequipped slot does not need to be shutdown before assigning the
slot. Similarly, when WAN 8 has failed or is unequipped, the Dual WAN
feature can be disabled without putting the QAM cards assigned to WAN 8
in the admin down state.
Note that slot assignments are not autonomously redistributed due to the
failure or removal of a WAN card.
Hardware Mismatch Alarm A Hardware Mismatch alarm will be generated when a WAN card is present
in slot 8 and the Dual WAN feature is disabled. A WAN in slot 8 will be held
in reset until the feature is enabled.
A request to disable the Dual WAN feature will be rejected when the WAN
in slot 7 is not in-service (e.g., unequipped or failed).
5 Dual WAN
QAM Management
A QAM interface can be provisioned from either WAN, regardless of which
WAN the slot is assigned. However, changes are not synchronized across
the WANs.
A QAM interface configuration change made from a user-interface
provided by the slot owner takes effect immediately. A configuration
change made via an interface to the other WAN is saved as a pre-provi-
sioned configuration. The QAM is reconfigured accordingly if the slot is re-
assigned to that WAN.
When pre-configuring a QAM interface for a slot that is assigned to the
other WAN, a message is displayed indicating that the provisioning will be
applied when the slot is re-assigned to this WAN, as shown in Figure 5-1.
Figure 5-1: QAM Provisioning Warning
When displaying the attributes of a QAM interface for a slot that is
assigned to the other WAN, the output will indicate that the slot is assigned
to the other WAN, as shown in Figure 5-2.
Figure 5-2: Show I nterface Warning
WAN Synchronization in Dual WAN Configuration
The Dual WAN feature can be configured from either WAN. Dual WAN
configuration changes initiated at a particular WAN interface are
forwarded to the MON card. The MON card broadcasts the configuration
changes to both WANs to keep them synchronized.
Because of the dependence on the MON for synchronizing the WANs and
managing the slotAssignments file, Dual WAN configuration changes
cannot be made when the MON card is unequipped or communication
between the MON and WAN has failed.
The Dual WAN mode and slot assignments can be configured from a WAN
regardless of the state of the other WAN. A slot can be assigned to an
unequipped or failed WAN card. The WAN card will be updated with the
current Dual WAN configuration when put back into service.
CLI support A single CLI session will provide the interface for configuring the entire
system including QAMs assigned to either WAN.
5 Dual WAN
The 3.0 implementation will manage the D5 UEQ chassis as two logically-
independent systems. Therefore, commands executed on a CLI session
hosted by a particular WAN only apply to that WAN and its assigned slots.
There currently is no ability to toggle between WAN 7 and WAN 8 CLI
sessions.
Previously, the MON provided access to a CLI session hosted by WAN 7
(single-WAN system) and would display the WAN restart information on
the MON screen when the WAN rebooted. In a Dual WAN implementation,
the user will be able to select either WAN 7 or WAN 8 to host the CLI
session but the MON will no longer display the WAN restart information.
Dual WAN Configuration
The CLI provides an interface for configuring the Dual WAN feature and
displaying the current status. The feature can be enabled and disabled by
issuing the dualwan command and slot assignments are made using the
assign slot <1-6> wan <7-8> command.
Dual WAN CLI Commands The status of the feature and current slot assignments can be displayed
using the show linecard status verbose command. The show
linecard status verbose table does not list entries for unequipped
slots.
The output below displays the assignment of slot 6 to WAN 8 and the
status of the feature and all slot assignments.
D5#conf i gur e t er mi nal
D5( conf i g) #assi gn sl ot 6 wan 8
Sl ot 6 assi gned t o wan 8
d5#show l i necar d st at us ver bose
Dual WAN mode i s enabl ed
Car d Sl ot Admi n Oper Dupl ex Ser i al Pr oduct Pr od Pr ov
Type Owner St at e St at e St at e Number Code Rev Type
- - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - -
MON I S T119B0J 50007 MON_8 AE MON
QAM 1 WAN 8 UP I S Si mpl ex C119A081E015 QAM_8DX4 BA QAM
QAM 2 WAN 7 UP I S Si mpl ex C188A0G90108 QAM_6DX2 EB QAM
WAN 7 I S C308B0A1H029 WAN_4G2F CB WAN
PMOD 1 I S T119B0D60022 PWR_CNV8 AB PMOD
PSU 2 I S PSU
Reloads Under the current, single-WAN implementation, the MON and WAN are
both restarted when a reload command is issued. Likewise, the Dual
WAN implementation of the CLI reload command will launch a full
system restart of the MON and both WAN cards.
The settings entered for saving the running configuration and performing
the power-on self-test (POST) when executing the reload command will
be applied to both WAN cards.
Single WAN Reboot In Release 3.0, the reboot command was introduced to reboot a single
WAN without performing a full system restart.
SNMP Support The SNMP interface supports querying the status of the feature and
current slot assignments. The interface also allows for enabling and
disabling the feature and configuring the slot assignments. The Dual WAN
feature must be enabled in order to set a slot assignment value, or the set
will fail.
The SNMP interface can query the provisioning information for all slots in
the chassis. Pre-provisioned slot information is returned for slots assigned
to the other WAN.
The d5SlotExtMIB.txt file contains the MIB definitions for the Dual WAN
feature. This MIB is an extension of the ARRIS D5 UEQ MIB. All Dual WAN
MIB values are read/write.
Face Plate Display The D5 UEQ faceplate will alternate the display of the WAN host names
and IP addresses on the main screen when the Dual WAN feature is
enabled.
The faceplate will also display the WAN assignment of the QAM slots when
the feature is enabled.
Web Manager Support for the Dual WAN
The Web Manager user interface will provide a configuration page to
support the assignment of slots and allow for the configuration of the Dual
WAN feature. The linecard status page will be updated to display the
assignments. For more details, please refer to the latest version of the
Web Manager Help file.
Application Manager Support
The Dual WAN chassis will be displayed as two separate control planes
from the D5AM perspective. Changes to the AM/BCT are expected to be
minimal, with most of the changes in the Software Management View.
5 Dual WAN
DTI Timing Support In a Dual WAN configuration, each WAN is supplied with a DOCSIS Timing
Interface (DTI) input to synchronize with the other WAN clock signal via a
QAM card. When Dual WAN is enabled, the WAN is able to adjust the
frequency of the input to the DTI client to keep it synchronized with the
other WAN.
The timing signal for the WAN and QAM cards comes from the DTI client
firmware in the IPPROC FPGA. Dual WAN timing synchronization requires
at least one QAM card be equipped, provisioned and operational so that
the WAN card (requiring clock synchronization) can access the clock differ-
ence in the QAM card. One of the WAN cards must be set as the timing
master when Dual WAN is enabled.
Feature Compatibility
The Dual WAN configuration is compatible with all D5 UEQ features. A slot
configured for QAM sparing can only protect QAMs assigned to the same
WAN.
Software Upgrades The default configuration of this feature provides for seamless upgrades.
The Dual WAN feature does not affect in-service systems upgraded to 3.0,
regardless of the WAN and QAM configuration.
Software Downgrades A Dual WAN system running a 3.0 configuration can be downgraded to a
pre-3.0 configuration using the normal procedure, with one exception. The
slotAssignments file should be deleted after performing the down-
grade. Otherwise, the Dual WAN configuration will be automatically
applied following a future upgrade to 3.0.
NOTE
The /update/wan2/startup-configuration is not used in pre-3.0
releases. Removing this file is optional.
Software loads prior to 3.0 do not support Dual WAN. Therefore, WAN 8
will be held in reset and all slots will be assigned to WAN 7 when a down-
grade is performed.
System Commissioning
Initial configuration of a D5 UEQ system can be performed using the CLI
set-up script. This script prompts the user for system information, such as
IP addresses, and interface configuration, such as annex and frequency.
An equivalent set-up page is provided by the Web Manager application as
well.
Commissioning of a Dual WAN system is performed by configuring WAN 7
and its associated slots. The Dual WAN feature is then enabled and slot
assignments are made. Finally, initial set-up should be performed on WAN
8 to configure the WAN and its associated slots.
Backup and Restore Both configuration files, /update/startup-configuration for WAN
7 and /update/wan2/startup-configuration for WAN8, must be
saved and restored to capture the full system configuration. Additionally,
the /update/slotAssignments file must also be saved and restored
when the Dual WAN feature is enable.
5 Dual WAN
6. Installing the D5 UEQ
Topics Page
Safety Measures 2
FCC Statement 2
Unpacking and I nspecting the D5 UEQ 2
Main Hardware Components 4
Racking Recommendations 4
Grounding 11
Inserting QAM and WAN Modules 12
Fiber Optic Small Form Factor Pluggable (SFP) Card 13
Power Considerations 18
Connecting Cables 19
These basic head-end installation procedures will allow the technician to
rack-mount, install and power up the D5 UEQ for normal operations.
6 I nstalling the D5 UEQ
Safety Measures
All D5 UEQ power and grounding wiring should be in accordance with
applicable local electric codes (for more details, refer to section Grounding
on page 6-11).
WARNI NG
Refer servicing to qualified service personnel. No user serviceable parts
inside. This equipment is intended for installation into restricted access
locations only.
Lightning and surge protection measures are assumed to have been
followed in the RF plant to which the D5 UEQ RF is connected.
Do not insert foreign objects into the vents or card slots.
FCC Statement
This device complies with part 15 of the FCC Rules. Any changes or modi-
fications not expressly approved by the guarantee of this device could void
the users authority to operate the equipment.
RoHS Compliancy
This product complies with directive 2002/95/EC of the European Parlia-
ment and of the Council of 27 J anuary 2003 on the restriction of the use
of certain hazardous substances (RoHS) in electrical and electronic equip-
ment.
Unpacking and I nspecting the D5 UEQ
The carton in which the D5 UEQ is shipped is specifically designed to
protect the equipment from damage. Unpack the equipment carefully to
ensure that no damage is done and that none of the contents are missing.
Save all shipping materials in case the product needs to be returned to the
manufacturer for repair or upgrade.
D5 UEQ Chassis Package The D5 UEQ chassis package will minimally contain the following items:
One D5 UEQ chassis
One RJ45-to-DB9 serial cable (for management access)
One ESD strap
D5 UEQ Quick Start Guide
Warranty & Software License Agreement
Along with the following installed equipment:
- One Chassis Monitoring module (MON)
- One fan tray
- One AC or DC Power Supply Unit (PSU) module
- One PSU blanking cover plate
- One Power Converter module (PMOD) or Fan Converter module
(FMOD)
- One PMOD blanking plate
- One D5 UEQ chassis front face plate
- One compact flash card
- Two front chassis mounting brackets with screws
- Eight rear blanking plates
- Two fuses
- DC power cable (721114 DC chassis only)
Optional I tems Optional or additional orderable items per the purchase order:
AC power cord (unless DC PSU is supplied)
Chassis rear mounting brackets with screws
One or two WAN module(s), or
One or two Dual DTI WAN module(s) with DTI Adapter(s)
One to six QAM module(s)
Power Converter Module (PMOD) or Fan Converter module (FMOD)
AC or DC Power Supply Unit(s) (PSU) (not installed)
SFP Module(s) - Optical or electrical GigE
D5 UEQ DC Power Adapter
D5 UEQ software CD
NOTE
ARRIS does not supply screws or associated cage nuts for mounting unit
to the rack.
Visual Inspection
Before powering it up the first time, perform a visual inspection of the
equipment as follows:
Look for the following potential problems:
- Physical damage to the chassis or components
- Loose or missing connectors or hardware
- Loose wires and power connections
If any of the above are found, do not attempt to power on the D5 UEQ.
Contact your ARRIS representative for instructions.
NOTE
If modules are pre-installed in the D5 UEQ, check their seating to verify
none are loose. Re-seat modules if necessary (refer to chapter 19,
Service Procedures).
Main Hardware Components
A fully populated chassis includes:
Two Wide Area Network modules (WANs)
Six QAM modules
Two power supply units (PSUs)
Two power modules (PMOD) or one fan converter module (FMOD) and
one power module (PMOD)
One compact flash card
One MON module
One fan tray
Racking Recommendations
The D5 UEQ can be installed in both open rack and enclosed cabinet
configurations and is designed for use in 19 inch racks or cabinets that are
more than 31.5 inches (800mm) deep and comply with the Electronics
Industries Association (EIA) 310D standards. The front panel of the D5
UEQ protrudes two inches from the front mounting bracket into the aisle.
The depth of the D5 UEQ from the mounting brackets to the tip of the F-
types is then 23.25 inches.
If your headend is equipped with telco racks which typically mid-mount
equipment as opposed to general racks that are used to mount equipment
at the front of the racks, the mounting ears supplied with the D5 UEQ
can be installed at the mid-mount location to allow the unit to be installed
in a telco rack. See Mounting the D5 UEQ in a 19-inch Rack on page 6-10
for details.
NOTE
ARRIS recommends the use of the rear-mount bracket kit (ARCT01138)
to provide rear-support for the D5 UEQ within a rack. This is supplied as a
standard accessory with each D5 UEQ.
Installation of the equipment in a rack should not restrict airflow. Air
cooling and exhaust is accomplished from the sides of the D5 UEQ (see
Figure 4-6, D5 UEQ Airflow direction, on page 4-6). A seven inch gap
between the left hand side (exhaust) of the D5 UEQ in Rack 1 and
ingest side of the D5 UEQ in Rack 2. This is the expected distance
between the equipment racked in most open frame 19 inch racks.
ARRIS recommends not having more than two adjacent (adjacent
being defined as racks with a seven inch gap as described above)
racks of D5 UEQs or similar side-cooled equipment.
Mount the D5 UEQ to prevent uneven mechanical loading on the
chassis. Improper mounting can cause premature structural failure
and potentially hazardous conditions.
Avoid having the outlet of any unit in an adjoining rack blowing into
fan inlets of the D5 UEQ.
When installed in a closed or multi-unit rack assembly, the operating
temperature inside the rack environment may be higher than ambient
temperature. Install the D5 UEQ in an environment where the ambient
temperatures are between 32 and 122 Fahrenheit (0 to 50
Celsius).
Although the D5 UEQ can be racked in an open rack with up to 13 D5
UEQs on a raised floor (more than 13 exceeds the 140lb/sq. ft. limit)
and up to 18 D5 UEQs on cement floors without issue (even with
thermal conditions of aisle temperature being 122 (50 Celsius),
ARRIS is limiting this to a recommendation of 10 stacked D5 UEQs in
both conditions to help with cable management, rack power schemes
and allowing for potentially other equipment in the rack such as
combiners or switches.
Recommended Rack-type for the D5 UEQ
ARRIS recommends the use of a dedicated open 19 inch rack (with no side
panels or front doors) with rear support columns for use with the D5 UEQ.
This configuration provides the best thermal environment and access for
installation, cabling and maintenance.
Figure 6-1: Open Rack Configuration and Components
Open Racks with side panels The recommended racking configura-
tion is defined as follows
- < 6 Rack spacing Maximum of ten D5 UEQs in the 19 inch rack
- > 6 Rack spacing Maximum 18 but recommended to remain
at ten D5 UEQs
It is also assumed that there is no top panel on these open racks to prevent
air re-circulation.
Dedicated Open Rack
Recommendations
A four poster vertical-mounting-flange whose distance from front
flange fascia to rear mount fascia is 600mm or more.
The use of the ARRIS rear-mount kit (part number ARCT01138) to
provide rear support of the chassis and cable weight. This bracket
accessory is designed to allow flexibility in the distance of the rear-
vertical-rack-flange from the front-vertical-rack-flange. The distance
of the D5 UEQ front mounting bracket to the rear of the D5 UEQ is
579mm. ARRIS recommends that the rear-vertical rack-flange is posi-
tioned approximately 570mm -0mm to +165mm back from the front-
vertical-rack-flanges.
Do not use front-vertical-rack-flanges which obscure the fans immedi-
ately behind the D5 UEQs front fascia.
A gap of 3.5 inches from the side panel of the D5 UEQ to the next adja-
cent equipment or rack-panel is sufficient to achieve air flow of
200cfm, although a 7 inch gap is preferred.
The D5 UEQ may be equally stacked with either a vertical spacing
between each or with no spacing. There is little thermal impact to
stacking D5 UEQs directly on top of each other with no vertical
spacing.
Considerations for Shared-racks and Cabinets
Other configurations such as a shared open rack, or a shared enclosed rack
(cabinet) may also be used, but involve wider considerations or restric-
tions, particularly with respect to avoidance of circulating airflow.
Shared Open Rack Front-to-back coolingOther equipment within a shared open rack
that utilized front-to-back cooling should have no thermal impact on the
D5 UEQ units provided the exhaust hot air is properly directed out of the
rack in accordance with standard equipment room recommendations.
Side-to-side coolingFor other equipment within a shared open rack
that utilizes side-to-side cooling, consideration of the relative direction of
air flow should be made. ARRIS does not recommend co-location within a
rack of D5 UEQs with other equipment where the side-to-side cooling is in
the opposite direction. This leads to the re-circulation of exhaust air which
in turn can lead to an unpredictable thermal environment.
ARRIS recommends no more than two open-racks of D5 UEQs are located
immediately adjacent to each other in the same cable headend since air
exhaust of one D5 UEQ rack will preheat the air by approximately 6-7C
which will then be ingested into the adjacent D5 UEQ rack. While compo-
nent failure will not occur with three racks side-by-side in this way in a
cable-headend ambient of 50C, a cumulative 6-7C increase per adjacent
rack in the operating temperature of third and subsequent racks would
result in a reduction of MTBF of D5 UEQs in these third and subsequent
racks. If additional open-racks of D5 UEQs are to be deployed in the same
cable-headend, care should be taken to locate those racks where a barrier
of cooled air comes between these and other D5 UEQs racks.
SpacingARRIS recommends a 1RU vertical spacing from other equip-
ment immediately above or below a D5 UEQ to ensure no conduction of
heat to or from the D5 UEQ to other such equipment.
Adjacent Racks Open racks When open racks equipped with D5 UEQ are installed next
to other open racks, the following points need to be considered:
No particular restrictions need apply where the adjacent rack(s) are
installed with equipment that utilizes front-to-back cooling.
Where adjacent racks(s) are installed with equipment that utilizes
side-to-side cooling, and this includes racks solely populated with D5
UEQs, then the exhaust air of one rack can act as the air input for the
next rack. In this case, ARRIS advises no more than two such adjacent
open racks of D5 UEQs where one rack can exhaust directly to the next
rack. Other groups of two such adjacent racks can be deployed in the
cable-headend when a cold-air barrier comes between groups. No
more than two racks of D5 UEQs should be placed adjacent to each
other.
Enclosed racks ARRIS does NOT recommend the use of a dedicated
enclosed rack or cabinet for use with the D5 UEQ.
WARNI NG
Deviation from these recommendations may result in a reduction of the
D5 UEQ operating performance.
The Figure 6-2, page 6-9 summarizes the limitations on the number of D5
UEQs which may be installed in various types of racks and cabinets, in
particular where side panels are required or other equipment is already
installed in the same rack or cabinet.
Figure 6-2: Decision Tree Summary for Rack Types
Rack Configuration Decision Tree D5 UEQ Recommendations
Max 18 D5 UEQ units
No vertical spacing between
D5 UEQ units.
If airflow direction is the same as D5 UEQ.
Max of 18 D5 UEQs (10 recommended).
Otherwise, NOT RECOMMENDED.
Max 18 D5 UEQ units
D5 UEQ units
(10 recommended)
Max 10 D5 UEQ units
D5 UEQ units
Max 18 D5 UEQ units
D5 UEQ units
(10 recommended)
Max 18 D5 UEQ units
No vertical spacing between D5 UEQ
units. If other equipment has side-side
cooling, ensure in same direction
as D5 UEQ.
(10 recommended)
If airflow direction is the same as D5 UEQs,
MAX of 18 D5 UEQs
as space allows. Otherwise,
(10 recommended)
NOT RECOMMENDED.
Max 18 D5 UEQ units .
No vertical spacing between D5 UEQ units.
Min. 1RU gp with non-D5 UEQ
equipment.
(10 recommended)
Max 10 D5 UEQ units
1RU gap with non-D5 UEQ equipment.
If other equipment has side-side
cooling, ensure in same
direction as D5 UEQ.
Max 18 D5 UEQ units
1RU gap with non-D5 UEQ equipment.
If other equipment has side-side
cooling, ensure in same
direction as D5 UEQ.
(10 recommended)
S
t
a
n
d

A
l
o
n
e

R
a
c
k
R
a
c
k

S
h
a
r
e
d

w
i
t
h

O
t
h
e
r

E
q
u
i
p
m
e
n
t
R
a
c
k

d
e
d
i
c
a
t
e
d

t
o

D
5

U
E
Q
s

o
n
l
y
S
t
a
n
d

A
l
o
n
e

R
a
c
k
A
d
j
a
c
e
n
t

R
a
c
k
(
s
)
R
a
c
k
(
s
)

A
d
j
a
c
e
n
t

O
p
e
n

R
a
c
k

a
v
a
i
l
a
b
l
e
?

(
R
E
C
O
M
M
E
N
D
E
D
)
Rack Spacing
< 6 inches
Adjacent rack with
side-to-side
airflow
A
d
j
a
c
e
n
t

r
a
c
k

w
i
t
h

s
i
d
e
-
w
a
l
l
s
A
d
j
a
c
e
n
t

r
a
c
k

w
i
t
h

N
O

s
i
d
e
-
w
a
l
l
s
Adjacent rack has
front->back-side
airflow
Adjacent rack has
other equipment
with side-to-side
airflow
Rack Spacing
> 6 inches
Rack Spacing
> 6 inches
Rack Spacing
< 6 inches
Adjacent rack has
other equipment
with front->back
airflow
A
d
j
a
c
e
n
t

r
a
c
k

h
a
s

s
i
d
e
-
w
a
l
l
s
A
d
j
a
c
e
n
t

r
a
c
k

o
p
e
n
-
s
i
d
e
d
Rack is dedicated to D5 UEQs?
Shared Rack
E
n
c
l
o
s
e
d

R
a
c
k
NOT RECOMMENDED
NOT RECOMMENDED
Procedure 6-1 Mounting the D5 UEQ in a 19-inch Rack
1 Mount the D5 UEQ in the rack and secure it using two screws on each side.
See Figure 6-3 for placement of mounting ears.
Figure 6-3: Location of Mounting Ears
The following installation considerations should also be noted:
a Place the D5 UEQ's as low as possible in the rack to provide access to
the lowest temperature air in the rack. This is the most efficient
cooling. This is a particularly important consideration where four or
more D5 UEQ's are installed in the same rack.
b The D5 UEQ system can be mounted using the front mounting ears
alone. However, for fully filled systems, additional rear support is
advisable. ARRIS provides an optional rear-mount racking accessory
(ARRIS part number ARCT01138). Users may also elect to mount the
D5 UEQ in a rack or framed mounted tray that will support the weight
of the unit. These trays are available from a number of rack hardware
vendor.
End of procedure
If your D5 UEQ shipment includes modules not installed at the factory,
refer to Inserting QAM and WAN Modules, page 6-12; otherwise, proceed
to Connecting Cables, page 6-19.
I nstall rack mounting
ears here for flush
mount
Install rack mounting
ears here for mid-mount
Grounding
Reliable grounding of rack mounted equipment must be maintained. See
Safety for common safety considerations. Also consider using direct
connections instead of power strips to branch circuits.
The shield of the coaxial cable must be connect to earth (grounded) at the
entrance to the building in accordance with applicable national electrical
installation codes.
In the U.S., this is required by NFPA 70 (National Electrical Code) Article
820 and by the Canadian Electric Code, CSA C22.1 No. 1. In the European
Union and in certain other countries, CATV installation equipotential
bonding requirements are specified in IEC 60728-11, Cable networks for
television signals, sound signals and interactive services, Part 11: Safety.
For safe operation, this equipment is intended to be installed in accordance
with the requirement of IEC 60728-11 for safe operation.
Grounding Stud Use the supplied M4 stud on the rear of the unit (see Figure 6-4, Location
of M4 Grounding Studs, on page 6-11). This stud can accept an M4 ring
crimp or a size #8 in diameter. The minimum permissible is a 12 AWG
ground cable and the maximum size allowed with this stud is a 6 AWG.
WARNI NG
Before applying any power to the chassis, the chassis must be grounded
using the Grounding Stud.
The following figure shows the two different versions of the D5 UEQ Rear
Power Panel types and where the M4 Grounding Stud is located.
Figure 6-4: Location of M4 Grounding Studs
M4 Grounding
Stud
M4 Grounding
Stud
The M4 stud is used for permanent chassis grounding (protective
earthing). The D5 UEQ must be permanently connected to protective earth
in order to comply with safety regulations in all regions.
Use an M4 nut and M4 lock-washer with the parts stacked as shown in the
following figure.
The M4 stud grounding wire should be secured under the lock washer.
Figure 6-5: Securing the Grounding Wire
I nserting QAM and WAN Modules
Slot Requirements
WAN modules must be installed in slot seven. If you plan to run a dual
WAN system, then the second WAN would be placed in slot eight. QAM
cards may be installed in any of the six slots (numbered one through six).
Slots are numbered one through eight in descending order from left to
right.
Figure 6-6: Slot Numbering Order
Terminal Ring on
#10 AWG
Ground Wire
ARRIS D5 UEQ
Rear Chassis
Grounding Stud
Lockwasher
RF1
RF1
RF2
RF1
RF2
RF2
RF3
RF3
RF3
RF4
RF4
RF4
RF1
RF1
RF2
RF1
RF2
RF2
RF3
RF3
RF3
RF4
RF4
RF4
O
O
S
P
O
W
E
R
O
O
S
P
O
W
E
R
O
O
S
P
O
W
E
R
A
R
R
I
S
A
R
R
I
S
A
R
R
I
S
D
5
Q
A
M
8
D
X
4
O
O
S
P
O
W
E
R
D
5
Q
A
M
8
D
X
4
O
O
S
P
O
W
E
R
D
5
Q
A
M
8
D
X
4
O
O
S
P
O
W
E
R
A
R
R
I
S
A
R
R
I
S
A
R
R
I
S
D
5
Q
A
M
8
D
X
4
D
5 Q
A
M
8D
X
4
D
5
Q
A
M
8
D
X
4
Procedure 6-2 Installing modules in the D5 UEQ chassis
1 Ground yourself properly with an electrostatic discharge (ESD) strap
(included).
2 Using a Phillip head screwdriver #1, remove the blanking plate. Align the
QAM or WAN card along desired chassis insertion tracks.
3 Slide card firmly into chassis. Pull latches inward to grasp first latch tooth.
4 Push card thumb latches outward until the front card seating teeth catch
the outer edge of the unit cage assembly.
5 Push card thumb latches inward until card seats. The back card seating
teeth will catch the inner edge of the unit cage assembly and pull it into a
seated and locked position.
6 Tighten the card thumb latch screw to secure card in place.
End of procedure
Fiber Optic Small Form Factor Pluggable (SFP) Card
The Small Form-factor Pluggable (SFP) Gigabit Interface Converter is a
hot-swappable input/output device that can be plugged into one of the
Gigabit Ethernet ports on the rear of the chassis.
Install the SFPs after the WAN module is installed. Installation procedures
for all SFPs are the same.
Figure 6-7: Example of Fiber Optic and Copper SFPs
Table 6-1: SFP LED Status
LED Explanation
Off Interface is DOWN
ON Interface is UP
FLASHING Interface is UP and data is being received or transmitted
Receive optical bore
Optical bore dust plug
Transmit optical bore
Optical SFP Copper SFP
Only SFP modules from the following table have been officially approved
for use in the D5 UEQ. Use of any other modules are not guaranteed to
operate and may result in system malfunction.
Procedure 6-3 Installing Fiber Optic SFPs I nto GigE Ports
1 Ground yourself properly with an electrostatic discharge (ESD) strap.
CAUTI ON
Do not remove the plugs from the fiber-optic SFP module port or the
rubber caps from the fiber-optic cable until you are ready to connect the
cable.
WARNI NG
Do not look directly into fiber optic cables or ports. The laser radiation
used in these facilities is not visible and may cause permanent damage,
especially to the eye.
ARRI S P/ N Supplier P/ N Description
716635
Finisar
FTLF1319P1BTL
SFP NIC 1000Base-LX 1310nm
Single/Multimode, LC
716636
Finisar
FTLF8519P2BN
SFP NIC 1000Base-SX 850 nm
Multimode, LC
716637
Avago
AFCT-57V6USZ
SFP NIC 1000Base-ZX, 1550nm
Singlemode, LC (80km)
716639
Finisar
FCLF-8521-3
SFP NIC 1000Base-TX, RJ 45
2 Grip the sides of the SFP with your thumb and forefinger and insert the
fiber optic SFP into selected GbE port and push firmly into the port until it
seats.
Figure 6-8: I nstalling the SPF
NOTE
It is recommended that you do not install or remove fiber-optic SFP
modules with the cables attached due to the potential to damage the
cables, the cable connector, or the optical interfaces in the SFP module.
Disconnect all cables before removing or installing an SFP module.
3 Lock the SFP into place by moving the handle up into the locked position.
The handle is in the correct closed position when access to the connector
is not obstructed.
4 Remove the protective caps from the connectors on the fiber-optic cable
and save them for future use.
RF1
RF1
RF2
RF1
RF2
RF2
RF3
RF3
RF3
RF4
RF4
RF4
RF1
RF1
RF2
RF1
RF2
RF2
RF3
RF3
RF3
RF4
RF4
RF4
OO S
PO WE R
OOS
P OWER
OO S
PO WE R
A
R
R
IS
A
R
R
I S
A
R
R
I S
D 5 QAM 8DX4
OOS
P OWE R
D5 Q A M 8DX 4
O OS
P OWER
D 5 Q A M 8 D X4
O O S
P O WER
A
R
R
IS
A
R
R
IS
A
R
R
IS
D5 QAM 8DX4
D5 QAM 8DX4
D5 QAM 8DX4
5 Plug the fiber-optic cable into the connector on the SFP until it clicks in
place.
Figure 6-9: Fiber Optic Cable Connector
End of procedure
Copper Small Form Factor
Pluggable
To install the Copper SFP option perform the following steps:
Procedure 6-4 Install Copper SFP I nto GigE Ports
1 Ground yourself properly with an electrostatic discharge (ESD) strap.
2 Grip the sides of the SFP with your thumb and forefinger and insert the
copper SFP into selected GbE port and push firmly into the port until it
seats.
3 Lock the SFP into place by closing the handle up or locked position. The
handle is in the correct closed position when access to the connector is not
obstructed.
4 Insert copper Ethernet connector until it clicks in place.
End of procedure
Dual DOCSIS Timing Interface (DTI)
The D5 UEQ supports dual DTI operation (when equipped with the Dual
DTI WAN).
RF1
RF1
RF2
RF1
RF2
RF2
RF3
RF3
RF3
RF4
RF4
RF4
RF1
RF1
RF2
RF1
RF2
RF2
RF3
RF3
RF3
RF4
RF4
RF4
O OS
P OWER
OO S
PO W ER
O OS
POW
ER
A
R
R
IS
A
R
R
IS
A
R
R
I S
D5 QAM 8DX4
OOS
POWER
D5 QAM 8 DX4
OO
S
P OW ER
D 5 QAM
8D X4
OOS
POWER
A
R
R
IS
A
R
R
I S
A
R
R
I S
D5 QAM 8DX4
D5 QAM 8DX4
D5 QAM 8DX4
Rear of Chassis
NOTE
This adapter will not work on the Single DTI WAN (Part Number 722012).
The DTI port on the D5 UEQ is internally wired to deliver two separate DTI
server signals to the DTI controller on the D5 UEQ allowing for redundant
server setups. The dongle requires a straight-through Unshielded Twisted
Pair (UTP) cable rated at Category 5E or better (note: the Ethernet cables
are not provided by ARRIS) and a length limit of 200m is imposed on the
combined length of sections from the DTI server to the dongle and from
the dongle to the WAN.
Figure 6-10: Dual DTI Adapter
The DTI clock interface port on the WAN card has two integrated bi-color
LEDs. The one on the left hand side indicates the status of DTI link #1, the
LED on the right hand side indicates status of DTI link #2.
Each LED is color coded as follows:
DTI Clock
Interface
Dual DTI Adapter
DTI Status LEDs
TABLE 1. DTI Status LEDs
DTI Status LEDs DTI Client Mode Description
Off Warmup
Free-run
Holdover
Oscillator has not yet stabilized
Client has not had a valid timing source since reset.
Client has its timing reference but is attempting to maintain last valid
frequency.
Yellow Fast Using sort acquisition time constant to reduce initial lock time.
Green Normal or Bridging Clock is stable and locked on to the timing refernce and is fully compli-
ant. Client has lost its timing reference but is maintaining acceptable
performance.
NOTE
There are no LEDs on the dongle.
Dual DTI Dongle Pinout As shown in the graphic below, the Dual DTI Dongle has only four connec-
tions. Pins 1 and 2 of the Primary Port are connected to pins 1 and 2 of
DTI Port #1. Pins 7 and 8 of the Primary Port are connected to pins 1 and
2 of the DTI Port #2.
Figure 6-11: DTI Port Pinout
Power Considerations
The D5 UEQ has two slots for modular power supplies. The D5 UEQ may
use either an AC or DC power supply. Both AC and DC power supplies are
hot-swappable and share current. The specifications of the power supplies
can be found in Table 6-2 below. Also, please refer to Power Supply Unit
(PSU) on page 4-8 for compatibility issues when replacing or adding PSUs.
Table 6-2: Power Supply Data
Rear of Dongle
Port 2 Port 1
Front of Dongle
(Primary Port)
DTI CL
I nput Input Range Dimensions
Total
Power
Capacity Output Rails
Typical
Efficiency
AC Chassis
(722050)
85 to 264Vac 6Ux8HP 500W 3.3/5.0/+12/-12V 81-82%
High Capacity
AC Chassis
(780276)
90 to 264Vac 6Ux8HP 600W 3.3/5.0/+12/-12V 81-82%
DC Chassis
(72114)
37 to 60Vdc 6Ux8HP 500W 3.3/5.0/+12/-12V 83-84%
High Capacity
DC Chassis
(780277)
40 to 60Vdc 6Ux8HP 600W 3.3/5.0/+12/-12V 83-84%
CAUTI ON
This product is designed for connection to an IT power distribution
system with phase-to-phase voltage 230V.
Dette produktet er beregnet for tilkobling til en IT-strm
distribusjonssystem med fase til fase spenning 230V.
Ce produit est conu pour le raccordement un systme informatique de
distribution d'nergie avec les phases de tension 230V.
Circuit Breakers Circuit breakers should be selected to ensure they meet both the steady
state and the inrush current. The inrush current increases proportionate to
the supplied AC-voltage-magnitude, whereas the steady state current
decreases inversely as AC-voltage-magnitude increases. For appropriate
selection of a circuit breaker at 100Vac operation:
For single AC PSU per D5 UEQ at 110Vac, select a breaker which gives
at least a 4:1 ratio between inrush and steady state current handling.
For dual AC PSUs per D5 UEQ:
- If a single breaker is to be used for both PSUs, for operation at
110Vac, select a breaker which gives at least a 6:1 ratio between
inrush and steady state current handling.
- ARRIS recommends using two separate circuit breakers to feed
each PSU to give independent sources to AC-mains power to each
PSU in which the 4:1 ratio applies to each.
Connecting Cables
AC Power Cables
The D5 UEQ chassis supports two hot-swappable, load-sharing power
supply unit (PSU) modules. A single PSU can provide all the power that a
fully loaded system needs with a sufficient safety margin. The upper and
lower PSU slots can be used with either an AC PSU or a DC PSU.
The AC PSU configuration will always be shipped with the PSU unit in the
lower PSU1 slot. If you have only ordered one AC PSU then use the lower
PSU1 rear plug to power up your unit. If you use the upper PSU2 plug the
unit will not power on. If you have ordered a unit with two AC PSUs then
plug in both power cords to bring them online.
WARNI NG
To disconnect power from the D5 UEQ for servicing, remove all power
leads (AC and DC) from the rear socket. The D5 UEQ has no power
switch.
Procedure 6-5 Connect AC Power Cable to the D5 UEQ
1 Plug in the supplied cord into the Power Module on the back of the
D5 UEQ.
Figure 6-12: D5 UEQ AC Power Connection Panels
End of procedure
Rear of Chassis
RF1
RF1
RF2
RF1
RF2
RF2
RF3
RF3
RF3
RF4
RF4
RF4
RF1
RF1
RF2
RF1
RF2
RF2
RF3
RF3
RF3
RF4
RF4
RF4
O
OS
PO
W
ER
OO
S
PO
W
ER
OO
S
PO
WE
R
A
R
R
IS
A
R
R
IS
A
R
R
IS
D
5 QA M
8 D
X 4
O
OS
P
OW
ER
D5 Q
AM
8 D X4
OO
S
PO
W
E
R
D
5 Q
A M
8 DX 4
OOS
PO
W
ER
A
R
R
I
S
A
R
R
I S
A
R
R
I
S
D5 QAM 8D
X4
D5 Q
AM 8DX4
D
5 Q
AM
8DX4
Rear of Chassis
DC Power Cables
Unlike the AC PSUs which have two plug-ins on the rear of the chassis, the
DC PSU has only one connector on the rear of the D5 UEQ unit. It powers
DC PSU 1 slot and DC PSU 2 slot and should be wired appropriately for
each separate PSU slot. If a DC chassis is ordered, it will be shipped with
the DC PSU in the lower PSU 1 slot.
Procedure 6-6 If your D5 UEQ has the power connection panel shown below, use
the following procedure to connect the DC Power Cable:
1 The DC power source must:
have reliable grounding
be electrically isolated from its AC source
have an over-current protection device rated at 16 Amps, because the
D5 UEQ has no fuse for DC power
have a suitably rated disconnect device in the DC Mains feed
Connect the supplied external DC cable assembly to 48V DC using a
power distribution unit.
Signal To AWG Color
DC RTN Pin 2 12 Black
-48V Feed 1 Pin 1 12 Red
-48V Feed 2 Pin 3 12 White
2 Connect both Feed 1 and Feed 2 to 48V even if only one DC PSU is to be
installed. This allows placing a single DC PSU in either of the two possible
slots, or placing two DC PSUs in the chassis.
Figure 6-13: Connector Pin and Locations
End of procedure
Procedure 6-7 If your D5 UEQ has the power connection panel shown below, use
the following procedure:
1 The DC power source must:
have reliable grounding
be electrically isolated from its AC source
have an over-current protection device rated at 20Amps, because the
D5 UEQ has no fuse for DC power
have a suitably rated disconnect device in the DC Mains feed.
NOTE
If two DC PSUs are installed, both DC returns must be connected.
-48V Feed 2 (Pin 3)
DC Return (Pin 2)
-48V Feed 1 (Pin 1)
Top DC PSU
Bottom DC PSU
2 External connection to DC to be made by customer using ring or spade
tongue terminals.
The wire size is 12 AWG.
The tightening torque value for the terminal block connection is 0.8Nm
(7 lbs/inch).
Power connections to the terminal block for DC1 and DC2 are shown
in the following figure.
Figure 6-14: Terminal Block Wiring for DC PSU
End of procedure
Top DC PSU Slot
Bottom DC PSU Slot
DC 2
DC 1
- 48V
- 48V
RTN
RTN
To 20A Fuse (B)
12 AWG
12 AWG
12 AWG
12 AWG
To 20A Fuse (A)
Management Connections
Procedure 6-8 Connect Management Cable to the D5 UEQ
1 Connect cables into the appropriate fastEthernet port (labeled
ETH1/ETH2) on the WAN card on the back of the unit. .
Figure 6-15: FastEthernet cabling
2 Make sure to push the connector until you hear a click. This indicates the
connector is fully inserted and secure.
End of procedure
Video Connections
Procedure 6-9 Connect Video to the D5 UEQ
1 Connect GigE video content cables into the GigabitEthernet ports (GigE 1-
4) on the WAN card on the back of the unit.
End of procedure
ETH 02
ETH 01
RF Connections
Procedure 6-10 Connect RF Connections to the D5 UEQ
1 Before commencing cabling work on QAM ports/modules, shutdown the
QAM port/module. This is necessary to avoid triggering the D5 UEQ fault
detection feature which monitors fault conditions and shuts down the QAM
if one is detected. Connecting and disconnecting cables can result in a
significant change in power levels which could trigger a shutdown.
2 Connect the RF cables using F-connectors to the QAM module on the back
of the unit. The recommended torque value for the F-connectors of
subscriber cables is 1.0 to 1.25Nm.
End of procedure
Cable Management
The following rules for the cable management apply:
All cables should be kept in the rear area of the rack/cabinet.
Should it be necessary to route cables down the sides of the D5 UEQ,
they should be routed between the second and third fans (from the
front) where there is a break in the inlet and outlet exhaust grills.
The D5 UEQ rear-mount bracket assembly (ARCT01138) may addi-
tionally be used to conveniently attach bundles of RF coaxial cabling
to the rear of the D5 UEQ, using tie-wrap or other cable bundling
accessories. This accessory and the cable-bundle bound to it, also
provide a useful barrier to air circulation in that air heated by the D5
UEQ and expelled from the right-hand side of the rack is forced to
egress away from the D5 UEQ.
Both side walls of the D5 UEQ should be kept free from any obstruc-
tion. The airflow should be free along both internal side walls of the
cabinet.
The cabinet should have open aperture for cable routing on the top
cover, bottom base and/or rear door.
1U cable management panel with cable shunting rings can be installed
between each D5 UEQ.
The green outline in Figure 6-16, Cable Management, on page 6-26, shows
the preferred path for all cable routing. The cable management panel with
shunting rings can be ordered from most rack and cabinet suppliers.
.
Figure 6-16: Cable Management
7. Initial System Configuration
Topics Page
Configuring the D5 UEQ with CLI 2
Configuring the D5 UEQ with the Web Manager 10
Configuration Overview
Use the information in this chapter to configure an installed D5 UEQ with
minimal features. The D5 UEQ can be configured with a laptop or PC and
the appropriate cable by using the serial (console) port on the front of the
D5 UEQ and CLI commands or by using an Ethernet cable on the Fast
Ethernet (FE01) port on the rear of the D5 UEQ and Web Manager screens.
Once the D5 UEQ is configured, files are created and stored on the
compact flash card.
7 I nitial System Configuration
Configuring the D5 UEQ with CLI
Setup-Mode Configuration Script
The Setup-Mode Configuration Script is an intuitive and interactive setup
program used to configure a D5 UEQ without a pre-existing software
configuration. It is an easy to use, text-entry interface that is activated
upon initial power-up of a D5 UEQ.
The Setup-Mode Configuration Script is a wizard that guides a user
through input setup parameters and then launches a configuration file that
allows the D5 UEQ to boot successfully and stream video.
It is a simple tool targeted at users who expect to manage the D5 UEQ
primarily through the D5 UEQ Web Manager.
For operating instructions on the Setup-Mode Configuration Script, please
consult the D5 UEQ Quick Start Guide. The D5 UEQ Quick Start Guide
instructions, including Connecting Cables, are an alternate to this
chapter and accomplishes the same configuration using the text-entry
command line interface (CLI).
Serial Port Connection for the D5 UEQ Configuration
Connecting the Operator
Console
This section gives a detail description of the cabling for the operator
console. The operator console is necessary to initially power up and
configure the D5 UEQ. Use an asynchronous terminal or a PC with asyn-
chronous terminal emulation software.
Figure 7-1: RJ -45-to-DB9 Cable and Pin-out
RJ -45 DB-9
P5
P1
P6
P9
P8
P1
RJ45
Pin No. Signal Description
DB9
Pin No.
1 CTS Clear to Send 8
2 No Connect
3 Tx Transmit Data 2
4 Gnd Ground 5
The front panel connector is designed to connect directly to a host device
with the supplied cable and adapter. Do not attach the console to any
other network interface.
Procedure 7-1 How to Open a Terminal Emulator Session
Perform the following steps in their proper sequence.
1 Connect the RJ 45 connector on the cable to the RS/232 connector on the
front of the D5 UEQ.
2 Connect the other end of the serial port to your laptop or computer. If your
computer only uses a DB25 serial port or a USB connector, a DB9-to-DB25
or DB9-USB adapter will be needed in order to connect the cable.
3 Using a terminal access program, setup your serial port for terminal
emulation using the following parameters listed below:
Serial Port COM1
Bits per second 38400 baud
Data bits 8
Parity None
Stop bits 1
Flow Control None
4 If your emulator gives you the option to echo type characters locally, turn
it off.
5 Save your terminal emulator setup.
End of procedure
Initial Configuration for WAN and QAM Modules
Use the information in this section to create an initial configuration for the
WAN and QAM modules.
5 Gnd Ground 5
6 Rx Receive Data 3
7 DSR Data set Ready 4
8 RTS Request to Send 7
No Connect 9
No Connect 6
RJ45
Pin No. Signal Description
DB9
Pin No.
Requirements To create the configuration file, you need the following information:
IP addresses to be assigned to interfaces.
Cable plant configuration information: annex, frequencies, modula-
tion, etc.
General Configuration
General configuration includes management data (SNMP and CLI access).
When adding configuration information, change names and identification
strings to meet local requirements.
Ethernet Port Configuration
In previous releases, the WAN card provided management access on the
fastEthernet 0/1 port (ETH1). In release 3.0.1, ETH2 has been enabled
and should be used for management access if you plan to use ETH1 for
gigabitEthernet MAC redundancy. An IP address will need to be assigned
to the port. Make changes as necessary for your deployment.
After powering up of the D5 UEQ, perform the following from the PC
terminal via the serial port on the front of the D5 UEQ to configure
management access:
MON appl i cat i on
Dat e : J une 1, 2010, 18: 19: 18
Ver si on : 3. 0. 1. 50
done.
ARRI S D5 Uni ver sal EdgeQAM
Copyr i ght ( c) 2003- 2010 ARRI S Gr oup, I nc
Pat ent s and Pat ent s Pendi ng. Al l r i ght s r eser ved.
D5- mon
Pr ess any key t o connect t o CLI
Checki ng boot Loader :
=> no updat e i s r equi r ed.
Reboot i ng WAN. . .
Pl ease wai t up t o 1 mi nut e. . .
Tr yi ng t o connect t o WAN t hr ough mi dpl ane ( I P addr ess i s 111. 111. 1. 111) . . .
Successf ul l y connect ed t o wan_sl ot _7.
I f t hi s wi ndow i s t hr ough a di r ect connect i on t o t he MON consol e por t , Escape
char act er i s ' ^] ' .
ARRI S D5 Uni ver sal Edge QAM
Logi n:
D5>
D5>enabl e
D5#conf i gur e t er mi nal
D5( conf i g) #cli account <myusername>
D5( conf i g) #cli account <myusername> password <myuserpassword>
D5( conf i g) #cli account <myusername>enable-password <myenablepassword>
D5( conf i g) #interface fastethernet 0/2
! NOTE: sub- i nt er f ace conf i g wi l l not be appl i ed
! ( and wi l l not be di spl ayed by t he " show" commands)
! unt i l af t er i nt er f ace- conf i gur at i on mode has been exi t ed
D5( conf i g- i f ) #ip address <MyNetworkManagementIPAddress>
<MyNetworkManagementSubnetMask>
D5( conf i g- i f ) #no shutdown
D5( conf i g- i f ) #exit
D5( conf i g) #ip route 0.0.0.0 0.0.0.0 <MyNetworkManagementGatewayIPAddress> **(if
you need a default route)
D5( conf i g) #exit
D5#write memory
Copy Ok: 2851 byt es copi ed
The fastEthernet 0/2 port is now configured.
NOTE
After the Ethernet port has been configured, the ARRIS Web Manager can
be used to complete the D5 UEQ provisioning process in lieu of the
configuring with the text-entry CLI.
The Web Manager is a comprehensive graphical user interface (GUI)
toolset that enables a user to configure, monitor and troubleshoot a D5
UEQ. To use the ARRIS Web Manager, go to Configuring the D5 UEQ with
the Web Manager, page 7-10.
Gigabit Ethernet Port Configuration
The WAN card provides four interface GigE ports for video transport (and
requires IP addresses to be assigned to each port). The ports are automat-
ically shutdown by default upon D5 UEQ power up. The no shutdown
command enables the port.
The following example configures the GigE1 port for video transport. All
other GigE ports are disabled. Make changes as necessary for your deploy-
ment.
Login to the D5 UEQ Management port, on the back of the WAN card
(ETH2 port) with an RJ -45 cable and laptop or PC, using the IP address
from above.
Logi n: <MyLoginName>
Passwor d: <myuserpassword>
ARRI S D5 Uni ver sal EdgeQAM Command Li ne I nt er f ace
( S/ Wver si on: 3. 0. 1. 50 changes t o i nst al l ed ver si on)
D5>enable
Passwor d: <myenablepassword>
D5#configure terminal
D5( conf i g) #interface gigabitethernet 0/1
! unt i l af t er i nt er f ace- conf i gur at i on mode has been exi t ed
D5( conf i g- gi g- i f ) #<ip address> <GigE IP> <GigE Netmask>
D5( conf i g- gi g- i f ) #no shutdown
D5( conf i g- gi g- i f ) #exit
GigE1 port configuring is complete.
Dual WAN Configuration
If you plan to run Dual WAN, you must first configure WAN 7 and its asso-
ciated QAM slots. Dual WAN must be enabled before QAM slot assignments
can be configured for WAN 8.
Start a CLI session by connecting to the D5 UEQ serial port (|0|0|) on the
D5 UEQ front panel. You will be prompted to select the WAN card:
====================================
Please select a WAN card:
1. WAN slot 7
2. WAN slot 8
====================================
Type the number 2 (WAN slot 8) and hit Enter.
Log into Global configuration mode and set-up the route to your gateway:
D5(config)#ip route <destination prefix IP> <destination subnet mask> <forwarding
router IP>
Assign an IP address to the Fast Ethernet Port of the WAN-8 card:
D5(config)#interface fastethernet 0/1
D5(config-if)#ip address <IP address> <IP mask>
D5(config-if)#exit
To enable/disable the Dual-WAN feature via the CLI, issue the dualwan
command.
D5(config)#dualwan timing 7
Dual WAN mode has been enabl ed
NOTE
When two WAN cards are present, one must be chosen to be the master
timing WAN.
QAM Configuration
Each QAM card installed in the D5 UEQ provides two RF output ports. Each
port supports up to four QAM channels on the Dual-Port QAM Module (DPM
4DX2) in Quad Mode and six QAM channels on the Dual-Port QAM Module
(DPM 6DX2) in Hex Mode and eight QAM channels on the Quad-Port QAM
Module (QPM 8DX4). The interface designation is QAMslot/port.channel,
where:
slot is the slot number of the card (1 to 6);
port is the RF port (facing the back of the D5 UEQ, port 1 is on the
left);
channel is the channel number (1 to 4 for the DPM 4DX2, 1 to 6 for
the DPM 6DX2, or 1 to 8 for the QPM 8DX4). Configuring without the
channel number will configure all channels at once.
The following example will enable the Annex and video format on the QAM
card in slot 1:
D5(config)#interface qam 1
NOTE: Conf i gur at i on changes wi l l be appl i ed af t er t he " exi t " command i s gi ven.
D5(config-qam-card)#video annex b
D5(config-qam-card)#video format 256
D5(config-qam-card)#no shutdown
D5(config-qam-card)#exit
Next, enable the channel mode and video frequency on the card in slot 1,
port 1 with the following:
D5(config)#interface qam 1/1
NOTE: Conf i gur at i on changes wi l l be appl i ed af t er t he " exi t " command i s gi ven.
D5(config-qam-port)#channel mode quad
D5(config-qam-port)#video frequency 627000000
D5(config-qam-port)#no shutdown
D5(config-qam-port)#exit
The QAM interface in slot 1, port 1, is now configured.
If you have enabled Dual WAN, you can assign a QAM port to either the
WAN in slot 7 or the WAN in slot 8 with the following command in Global
Configuration mode:
D5(config)#assign slot <1-6> wan <7-8>
Sl ot 5 assi gned t o wan 8
To display the QAM assignments, you can use the following:
D5(config)#show linecard status
Dual WAN mode i s enabl ed, mast er t i mi ng WAN 7
- - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - -
MON UP I S C386A0D50021 MON_8 AB MON
QAM 1 WAN 7 UP I S Si mpl ex C217A0B71008 QAM_4DX2 AG QAM
QAM 2 WAN 7 DOWN OOS- MAN Si mpl ex C31720990004 QAM_4DX2 CA QAM
QAM 5 WAN 7 DOWN OOS- MAN Si mpl ex C217A0B71043 QAM_4DX2 AG QAM
WAN 1 UP I S 3259 WAN_4G2F BB WAN
WAN 2 UP I S 3278 WAN_4G2F BB WAN
PMOD 1 UP I S G487B0D60050 PWR_CNV8 AB PMOD
PSU 1 UP I S
PSU 2 UP I S
CHAS I S T14900E30005 CHA_8 AA CHAS
Configuring SNMP Service
The WAN module provides an SNMP agent for management purposes. You
must assign an IP address and enable management access on the WAN
module interface to enable SNMP management.
The following is the basic setup of v1/v2c SNMP configuration. The D5 UEQ
is also compatible with SNMP v3.
D5(config)#hostname D5
D5(config)#snmp-server community public ro
D5(config)#snmp-server community private rw
Configuring the D5 UEQ with the Web Manager
Overview
The D5 UEQ Web Manager is a comprehensive graphical user interface
(GUI) element manager that enables a user to configure, monitor and
troubleshoot a D5 UEQ. It reports D5 UEQ inventory via auto detection and
allows GUI control over most commands found in the CLI, therefore expe-
diting and simplifying common configurations that would take considerably
longer utilizing the CLI exclusively.
The Web Manager focuses on a specific subset of features which allows an
operator to manage MPEG configuration, monitor bandwidth and perfor-
mance, monitor events in real-time, and provision QAM modules.
The Web Manager utilizes Hyper Text Markup Language (HTML), Dynamic
Hyper Text Markup Language (DHTML), J avaScript, and Cascading Style
Sheets (CSS).
Since the Web Manager is session-based, each individual login will
generate its own session. There can be a maximum of four sessions logged
in at any one time. If all four sessions are running, any subsequent attempt
to log in will fail until one of the four sessions is logged out.
NOTE
While both Internet Explorer 8.x and FireFox support multiple sessions to
multiple D5 UEQs, they only support a single session to a particular D5
UEQ at any one time. This is because they share cookies between all
tabs and windows by default (even if a new instance is opened from the
Start menu). These shared cookies call all instances to resolve to the
same Web Manager session, leading to an inability to login. A new
Internet Explorer session must be explicitly requested by selecting File -
> New Session from an open Internet Explorer instance. Prior versions
of Internet Explorer create new sessions with new browser instances.
Logging out consists of one of the following:
Clicking the logout button.
Closing the browser window/browser tab containing a logged in
session.
Navigating to a different web-site from a logged-in session page. (You
will have five seconds to click the browser Back button to return to the
Web Manager before the session is logged out. This is to cover acci-
dental navigation from the current session.)
Session Timeout A session that has Privilege access shall have its
access level automatically logged out after a period of ten minutes of inac-
tivity. You will need to log back in with the Privilege password before you
can continue. By going to the Startup Configuration, Preferences menu,
you will be able to change the default session timeout.
System Requirements The Web Manager is optimized to support Internet Explorer version 6.0.
The minimum PC platform requirements are:
Windows 2000 Pro
Windows XP Pro/Corp
Pentium III @ 600MHz, 512 MB RAM
Video Card and Monitor capable of displaying 1024 x 800 in True Color
10baseT Ethernet Card
10 Mb of hard disk space
The Web Manager browser sends and retrieves data over port 80 after
user authentication. User authentication occurs when the user is prompted
to login. Once a password has been entered, access level authentication is
granted for either Monitor or Configure Modes.
NOTE
Do not use Mozilla Firefox because it could cause damage to your running
configuration.
Setting up the D5 UEQ
Connecting to the D5 UEQ The D5 UEQ can be setup without using CLI. You can use an Ethernet
cable and connect directly to the Web Managers FastEthernet port on the
rear of the chassis.
Procedure 7-2 After the Web Manager is launched, use the Basic Setup Steps
below to configure the D5 UEQ.
1 Power up the D5 UEQ
2 Plug your PC into the configured management port <ETH1 or ETH2> on
the rear of the chassis with an Ethernet cable.
3 Configure your PC to accept DHCP by:
a Right-click the Start button
b Click Control Panel
c Click Network Connections
d Click local area connections
e Right click Properties
f Select TCP/ I P
g Click Properties and select the Obtain I P Access Automatically
box
4 Read the IP address on the D5 UEQ front LED panel face plate (address
will default in the 169.254.x.x. range [APIPA]) and enter it in the address
bar of your PC Web browser (Figure 7-2).
Figure 7-2: Web Browser
5 D5 UEQ Web page will launch, then click on the Login button and the
system will log you in automatically. Since no user accounts have been set
up at this point, you will be logged in with Privilege access. (Once user
accounts have been configured, you will be presented with two input
boxes, one to enter the username and the other to enter the password.
You will then need to use the username and password that was
configured.)
NOTE
If the D5 UEQ Web page does not launch because the DHCP has assigned
the PC the same IP address as the D5 UEQ, go to step 6.
6 To release your PCs DHCP IP address and reconfigure a new one, use the
following steps:
a Right-click the Start button, and then click Run
b In the box, type: cmd and click ok
c At the command prompt, type: ipconfig / all, hit <enter>
d Confirm address is the same as the D5 UEQ
e At the command prompt, type: ipconfig / release, hit <enter>
f At the command prompt, type: ipconfig / renew, hit <enter>
g At the command prompt, type: exit, hit <enter>
h Go back to step 5.
Web Manager Login Modes As with CLI, the D5 UEQ Web Manager has two login modes for which
there are two (not necessarily different) passwords.
The User password gains access to the Monitor mode which is used to
monitor the status of the D5 UEQ. The Monitor mode allows read-only
access to the D5 UEQ. Configuration changes cannot be made in the
Monitor mode.
The Privilege password gains access to the Configure mode which is used
to configure the D5 UEQ. The Configure mode allows read-write access to
the D5 UEQ. The Configure mode has a session timeout safety feature.
You must complete a configuration task within ten minutes or you will be
automatically logged out. The session timeout period is configurable in the
Preferences menu under the Startup Configuration drop down menu.
Once the user is logged into the system, the Web Manager will display the
Web Manager D5 System Summary/Home page (Figure 7-11) which
profiles the major module states.
Web Manager AAA Implementation
Prior to Release 3.0.1, The D5 UEQ AAA implementation allowed the use
of TACACS+ and RADIUS for a mix of the Authentication, Authorization
and Accounting functionalities. However, when AAA Authentication was
enabled on the D5 UEQ, access to the D5 Web Manager Configure mode
was disabled. If you were using TACACS+ for Authentication (with the
primary reason being to centralize usernames and password storage),
then you would have been unable to deploy TACACS+ Authentication due
to the loss of Configure access via the Web Manager.
In Release 3.0.1, once configured for TACACS+ Authentication, the Web
Manager will accept login attempts from users, and place them in Monitor
mode or Configure mode, depending on the access level/priority returned
from the TACACS+ Authentication server. The feature relies on the
existing Monitor/Configure levels available in the Web Manager, and does
not require any change to these levels or any change in accessing any of
the Web Manager pages, with the exception of forcing the CLI account
page to be disabled.
The following paragraphs provide the updated view of the Web Manager
when operating with AAA support. The following setup was accomplished
using the configuration presented below, including the AAA and HTTP
configuration options.
Figure 7-3: AAA Default Login Page (Radius example)
The above screen capture shows the default AAA login option. Users may
select the Monitor or Configure mode, depending on what functions they
need access to on the Web Manager. In the event that AAA services are
configured to allow the user login directly to Enable/Configure mode, the
D5 UEQ takes care of this, even if the user chooses the Monitor option.
Figure 7-4: AAA Login Prompt (Radius example)
The user is offered a login prompt to submit their login name. The example
shows Radius, but TACACS+ is also supported. The login prompt can be
changed by the remote AAA authentication service (depending on how it
has been configured). Once entered, the user must click the submit button
to continue with the login attempt.
Figure 7-5: AAA Password Prompt (Radius example)
This screen capture shows the password prompt. The prompt is supplied
by the AAA authentication server, and may change depending on the pass-
word information being requested. In the event of a PIN number or a PIN
number change, the WEB Manager correctly presents the necessary
prompt (supplied by the AAA authentication server) to the user.
Figure 7-6: Successful AAA Login (Radius example)
Once the AAA authentication system has accepted the passwords, it
responds to the D5 UEQ to allow the user access to the WEB Manager. In
the even that Exec/Shell level authorization has also been configured, if
the AAA system requires the User access mode to be changed to/from
Monitor/Configure modes, the D5 UEQ will handle this and provide the
correct access mode for the user. This allows a user login using Monitor
mode, but get switched to configure mode depending on how Exec/Shell
level authorization is configured.
Figure 7-7: Failed AAA Login Attempt (Radius example)
The above screen capture shows a login failure after the login/password
combination were not accepted by the removed AAA authentication
server. The WEB Manager returns to the AAA Login screen, displaying the
failure message and providing the Monitor/Configure options for the user
to retry.
Web Manager Toolbars
The device status is displayed across the main page and includes the
following information:
Figure 7-8: Web Manager Device Status
Hostname
Access Mode
Software
Versi on
Management
IP Address
Active Image
Versi on
Logout
Button
ARRIS
Websi te
Li nk
Status
Bell
Mai n Navi gation
Menus
A menu bar is built across the main page and as each menu item is
selected, the various drop down menus are displayed.
Figure 7-9: Web Manager Main Menu Components
The following graphic displays a brief summary of the drop-down menus
and the sub-menus contained in the Web Manager Main Menu:
Figure 7-10: Web Manager Drop-down Navigation Menus
D5 Summary
State Monitoring Features
Card Status
Event Logs
Active Video
PSIG Database
Configure QAM, GbE,
Multicast
Port Mappings
Flexible Memory Mgr
Stream Replication
Network Attributes
Switched Digital Video
RPC Configuration
Shell Sessions, Stream,
PSI Info
Technical Report
Running Configuration
Inventory Report
Process State
DEPI Configuration
DTI Configuration
Bootup Configuration
Web Manager Prefs
WEB CLI Access
Conditional Access System
live CAS, Redundancy Groups,
ECMG, EMMG, EIS,
static SCG
D5 Summary
Line Card Status
Event Logs
Active Video
Sessions
QAM Dejitter
Queues
Program
Extraction
PSIG Status
Environment
Port Mappings
Interface Counters
QAM Bitrates
Input (GE Ports)
Port Channels
Dual WAN
Output
Channel Containers
Stream
Replication
Redundant
Stream Groups
QAM UDP Port
Mapping
QAM TSID/Serving
Group
QAM Dejitter
Rules
QAM Video
Rules
Network (FE Ports)
Operation
Multicast
Event Log
Live CAS
Configure
CAS
Redundancy
Groups
ECMG
EMMG
EIS
Static SCG
Sessions
Streams
Shell Sessions
Monitor ERMs
Configure ERM
Interface
Configure RPC
Interface
Show Version
Detail
Technical
Support
Inventory
Report
Running
Configuration
Boot
Management
Preferences
Configure Account
Access
Telnet D5 UEQ
DEPI Sessions
DEPI Connections
Configure DEPI
Group
Configure DEPI
Control Plane
Configure DTI
D5 UEQ System
Summary/ Home Page
The D5 System Summary, or Home Page (Figure 7-11) conveys the initial
GUI experience to the user. It displays the results of profiles run against
system modules for runtime status. System information for event
summary, stream video, bandwidth utilization and numerous quick links to
major configuration and monitoring pages are tracked here.
Figure 7-11: D5 System Summary/ Home Page
Displays frequency and
type of Event occurrence.
Provides shortcut to the
Event log screen.
Displays Active Video Sessions
information. Provides shortcuts
to the Video Rules, Active Video,
and UDP Port Mappings screen.
Displays system information.
Provides shortcut to the
Inventory Report screen.
Displays QAM video
statistics. Provides
shortcut to QAM Output
Configuration screen.
Displays QAM Bandwidth
Utilization statistics. Provides
shortcut to the Program
Extraction screen.
Navigating the Web
Manager
When navigating the Web Manager browser, you can perform the
following actions with your mouse and keyboard:
Select an item by single clicking the left mouse button.
To access drop-down menus, hover over an icon and left click on your
selection.
Double left clicking in the browser title will maximize the window.
Left click once with the left mouse button on an icon to execute the
icons intended action.
Using the Backspace key will step you backwards one screen, incre-
mentally through the drop down menu.
Using the Shift + Backspace keys will step you forward one screen.
Setting up a Host Name
A host name is used to designate a D5 UEQ. The host name can be seen
via the CLI or the Web Manager.
Procedure 7-3 From the Configure > Network drop-down menu, navigate to
the SNMP Management menu to launch the SNMP v2c
1 Enter a host name in the profile column of the Global config:
configuration box.
2 Click the Update button.
End of procedure
Configuring a CLI Account
The Configure CLI Account menu is located in the Access Management
menu under the Configure Account menu. It launches the D5- Access
Management screen which displays the D5 Account Table which displays
current accounts and access levels and is where you would also add new
accounts.
From the Account Screen (Figure 7-12) a user can configure new CLI login
accounts with passwords, Privilege passwords and secret passwords for
users to utilize while accessing the D5 UEQ from the CLI.
Figure 7-12: CLI Account Screen
Procedure 7-4 Creating a CLI Account from the Web Manager
1 Launch the Configure Account configuration screen from the drop down
menu located under the Access Management drop down menu.
2 Click Add in the D5 Account Table.
3 Enter a user name in the User Name field.
4 Enter a password (at least 8 characters long) in the Password field.
5 Enter a Privilege password (at least 8 characters long) in the Privilege
Password field.
6 (Optional) Enter a secret password (at least 8 characters long) in the
Secret Password field.
NOTE
The optional secret password sets the Privilege (Enable) mode to an
encrypted password. If this password is not set, then the Privilege mode
password is required to enter the Privilege mode.
CAUTI ON
If both the Privilege Mode password and Secret password have not been
set, the D5 UEQ disables access to the Privilege Mode using Telnet. A user
will only be able to enter the Privilege Mode by using a direct serial
connection to the D5 UEQ.
7 Click the Apply Changes button.
End of procedure
Configuring SNMP
The WAN module provides an SNMP agent for management purposes. You
must assign an IP address and enable management access on the WAN
module interface to enable SNMP management.
Figure 7-13: SNMP Configuration Screen
Procedure 7-5 From the Configure > Network drop-down menus, navigate to
SNMP Management to launch the SNMP v2c Configuration
screen.
1 In the SNMP Communities section, enter public in the Community field.
2 Select read-only in the Access field.
3 Click Create.
4 In the SNMP Communities section, enter private in the Community field.
5 Select read-write in the Access field.
6 Select enabled in the Notifications field.
7 Click Create.
8 In the D5 UEQ Application Manager SNMP Profile box, click On to enable
SNMP.
End of procedure
Enabling a GigabitEthernet Interface
The WAN card provides four interface GigE ports for video transport (and
requires IP addresses to be assigned to each port). The ports are automat-
ically shutdown by default upon D5 UEQ power up.
The following example configures the GigE1 port for video transport. All
other GigE ports are disabled. Make changes as necessary for your deploy-
ment.
Figure 7-14: GigabitEthernet Configuration Screen
Procedure 7-6 From the Configure > I nput (GE Ports) drop-down menu, the
GigabitEthernet SFP Port Configuration screen will launch.
1 Select the GbE I nterface to configure.
2 Check Up for Admin State state.
3 Select Full for Duplex.
4 Enter I P address in the Primary I P Address field.
5 Enter the Subnet Mask I P address in the Mask field.
6 Click Apply Changes or continue to next step.
Options I f using an NSG UDP port mapping scheme on the
GigabitEthernet interface, continue with these steps:
7 Check the NSG Compatible box if NSG UDP port mapping schemes will
be used.
8 Enter the number of NSG IP addresses to be used in the Number NSG
I P addresses field.
9 Click Apply Changes or continue to the next steps.
End of procedure
Configuring a QAM Module
The QAM module contains the QAM and RF components of the system.
Configurable parameters are: format, annex, inter-leaver, frequency,
symbol rate, power and spectral inversion.
On a single Dual-Port QAM Module (DPM 4DX2) in Quad Mode, there are
two RF connectors (labeled RF1 and RF2) that carry four QAM channels
each for a total of eight QAM channels per module.
On a single Dual-Port QAM Module (DPM 6DX2) in Hex Mode, there are
two RF connectors (labeled RF1 and RF2) that carry six QAM channels per
RF connector totaling twelve channels per module.
On a single Quad-Port QAM Module (QPM 8DX4), there are four indepen-
dent RF connectors that carry eight QAM channels per RF connector for a
total of 32 QAM channels per module.
Format, annex, inter-leaver, frequency, symbol rate, power and spectral
inversion are associated to a single port but are configured on an RF
connector basis.
The ports are listed as Modulator Group 1 and 2 for each QAM slot <1 -
6>. For example, the equivalent CLI command interface QAM 1/1.2,
addresses the second QAM channel on the first RF connector of the QAM
module in slot 1. This correlates to the QAM Mod 1 tab, Modulator Group
Port 1 and the second channel for each associated tab under the QAM
configuration menu.
All QAM channels are set to quad mode and disabled by default to prevent
any QAM channels from interfering with existing cable channel admin state
checkboxes on the QAM submenu tabs, disabling or enabling a QAM
channel.
WARNI NG
Changing the video annex through the web page will force hardware
reconfiguration and a status web page will report progress of this task.
During the reconfiguration no RF output appears on the RF Connector.
Procedure 7-7 From the Configure > Output drop-down menus, launch the
QAM Port Modulation Setup for QAM X screen.
1 From the QAM Module configuration tree, click the Modulator link (in the
QAM cards configuration tree) for the QAM you want to configure.
2 In the QAM box, select the Annex type.
NOTE
If you plan to run in hex or octal mode, select Annex B.
3 Click Up for the Admin State and Click Apply Changes to QAM X.
Figure 7-15: Initial QAM Configuration Screen
1
2
3
In the Modulator Groups (Port 1 and Port 2), a few key elements have
changed with the introduction of the Quad-Port QAM Module (QPM 8DX4)
(see red circled items).
Figure 7-16: QAM Configuration Screen
4 To configure frequencies via EIA Channels, select the desired RF Settings
Mode in the Attributes column to EI A Channel mode and specify the
required Channel in the EIA Channel field.
5 To configure frequencies manually, set the RF Settings Mode to
Frequency and enter the required frequency in the Frequency (Hz)
field.
6 Set the QAM Power (dBmV) using the chart in center of screen.
7 Select the QAM modulation type.
8 Select the I nterleaver type
9 Select the Channel-mode type.
10 Enter the channel spacing in the Channel Width (Hz) field.
11 Repeat steps 4-12 to configure the remaining ports.
12 Click Apply Changes
13 Select On for the RF Output and click Apply.
End of procedure
Enabling the Dual WAN
When both WAN cards are installed and configured with QAM cards in Dual
WAN mode, the D5 UEQ functions as two logically-independent systems.
Dual WAN mode is disabled by default to provide a seamless upgrade path
for in-service D5 UEQ systems. All QAMs are assigned to the WAN in slot
7 when the system is initially loaded.
The Dual WAN Configuration page has been added to the D5 UEQ Web
Manager for each WAN card.
NOTE
You must first configure WAN 7 and its associated QAM slots.
Procedure 7-8 From the Configure > Dual-WAN to launch the Dual WAN
1 Select Enabled in the Dual-WAN Support drop list.
2 For each QAM card, click the toggle button for the WAN card you want to
manage the card.
3 Click the Apply Changes push-button.
4 When the Dual WAN feature is enabled, the QAM assignments are shown
as part of the Line Card Status page. This can be display by going to:
Monitor -> Line Card Status. Any QAMs assigned to the other WAN
card will appear grayed out.
End of procedure
The Release 3.0 uses separate configuration data for WAN-7 and WAN-8.
/update/startup-configuration, for WAN-7
/update/wan2/startup-configuration, for WAN-8
Ideally, slot assignment data would be stored in the startup-config-
uration file; however, with the two configuration files, a new file had
to be created to store the slot assignments for each WAN to avoid
conflicting data.
Dual-WAN slot assignments are stored in the /update/slotAssign-
ments file on the compact flash.
Changes in slot assignments are saved when issued and are immediately
persistent across restarts and power cycles.
Enabling an Ethernet Interface
The Network Configuration screen utilizes the Ethernet Management Ports
configure box to configure FastEthernet management ports for manage-
ment access, speed and to assign a duplex mode. The primary, mask and
broadcast IP addresses for the management ports are also configured
here.
The DHCP Client Management configure box is used to configure DHCP
management on the specified interface. The Static Routing Table
configure box is used to add and delete static routing tables.
WARNI NG
An improperly entered configured management port or an improperly
added static route will disable access to the HTTP interface as well as
connectivity to the management port.
Figure 7-17: Ethernet Configuration Screen
Procedure 7-9 From the Configure > Network drop-down menu, navigate to I P
Management to launch the Network Configuration screen.
1 Check the Up in the Desired Admin State box.
2 Enter the Primary I P address, Netmask and Broadcast I P address
in their associated fields.
3 Check the Management Access box for the desired FE port.
4 If using DHCP Client Management on the FE port, select the desired
DHCP client interface in the box on the right. If not using DHCP, continue
with Steps 6-10. If not, skip to the add static route procedure.
5 Enter the Domain Name, the Primary Name Server and the
Secondary Name Server in the Domain Name Server section. Select
the number of attempts in the Retries drop down menu. Valid range is 1-
10.
CAUTI ON
Setting up the Default Gateway -- The next steps are crucial to get the D5
UEQ reachable over the IP network. The box will not function properly if
this is not done correctly.
6 To set the Default Gateway, click Add in the Static Routing Table.
7 Enter 0.0.0.0 in the Destination IP address field.
8 Enter 0.0.0.0 in the Prefix Mask field.
9 Enter the default gateway address in the Forward Router I P address
field.
10 Click Apply Changes.
End of procedure
Logging Out of the Web Manager
To logout of the Web Manager click the logout button (see Figure 7-9, Web
Manager Main Menu Components, on page 7-17) from any screen. After
clicking the OK button on the verification box, the Web Manager will return
to the login page.
8. Video on Demand
Topics Page
Video on Demand 1
UDP Port Management 2
Configuring Port and Program Number Mappings 8
Configuring Simultaneous Ports 9
Configure Ports Per I P Address 9
Override Previously Mapped Program Number 9
Map an I P Multicast to a QAM channel 9
VoD Show Commands 11
Video on Demand
The D5 UEQ renders MPEG-2 transport streams over UDP port assign-
ments efficiently by utilizing a default UDP port mapping scheme (see
Table 2.1). This allows a user to quickly deliver video, by simply entering
the D5 UEQs UDP port numbers on the VoD server. The D5 UEQ takes care
8 Video on Demand
of the details of transporting the MPEG-2 video to the appropriate QAMs.
The following diagram illustrates how a VoD server sends SPTS streams to
STB devices, via the D5 UEQ, using MPEG over UDP.
Figure 8-1: VoD Server, Multiple MPEG TS over UDP to STB
UDP Port Management
Individual transport streams are received on individual UDP ports,
however, multiple transport streams can be received on the same UDP-
port provided that the IP addresses are different when static rules are
configured on a QAM channel, given unique program numbers. The UDP
port number is used to identify which QAM channel to transmit the stream
on, as well as the program number to use when transmitting it. The D5
UEQ employs various techniques for mapping UDP ports to program
numbers including a default mapping. This default mapping can be over-
ridden to map any UDP port to any program number and/or QAM channel.
Default UDP Port Mapping The LEGACY default UDP port mapping supports a mixture of 2x4 or 2x6
modes with 127 UDP ports per QAM channel. The NEW default UDP port
mapping scheme will support a mixture of DPM 4DX2 and DPM 6DX2
modules with 63 UDP ports per QAM channel. The LEGACY scheme is
turned on by default on upgrade from an older software version (Table 8-
Step 2: MPEG-2 SPTS sent
to D5 UEQ over UDP via
GigE switch.
Step 3: D5 UEQ maps MPEG-2
SPTSs to QAM channels and sends
streams to network.
Step 1: VoD Server assigns
MPEG-2 SPTS (movie) to
UDP ports.
220 MHz
350 Mhz
200 MHz
RF Serving
Area #1
RF Serving
Area #2
RF Serving
Area #3
1). New installations will default to the NEW default UDP port mapping
scheme (Table 8-2). The UDP port numbers are not tied to a specific QAM
module. They are assigned to a QAM module depending on what slot in
the D5 UEQ chassis the module occupies.
LEGACY Default UDP Port
Mappings
The following table identifies the LEGACY (old) default port mapping of
UDP port numbers to slot numbers in the chassis. The <A>X<B> notation
indicates the number of RF ports per card <A> and the number of QAM
channels per RF port <B>.
NOTE
The first UDP port in each range maps to program number 0 (zero) and is
therefore only applicable if pass-thru mode is enabled on the QAM.
Table 8-1: LEGACY Default UDP Port Mappings
2X4 / 2X6 / 2X8 LEGACY
.1 .2 .3 .4 .5 .6 .7 .8
QAM 1/1
49152-
49279
49280-
49407
49408-
49535
49536-
49663
50176-
50303
50304-
50431
50432-
50559
50560-
50687
QAM 1/2
49664-
49791
49792-
49919
49920-
50047
50089-
50175
50688-
50815
50816-
50943
50944-
51071
51072-
51199
QAM 2/1
51200-
51327
51328-
51455
51456-
51583
51584-
51711
52224-
52351
52352-
52479
52480-
52607
52608-
52735
QAM 2/2
51712-
51839
51840-
51967
51968-
52095
52096-
52223
52736-
52863
52864-
52991
52992-
53119
53120-
53247
QAM 3/1
53248-
53375
53376-
53503
53504-
53631
53632-
53759
54272-
54399
54440-
54527
54528-
54655
54656-
54783
QAM 3/2
53760-
53887
53888-
54015
54016-
54143
54144-
54271
54784-
54911
54912-
55039
55040-
55167
55168-
55295
QAM 4/1
55296-
55423
55424-
55551
55552-
55679
55680-
55807
56320-
56447
56448-
56575
56576-
56703
56704-
56831
QAM 4/2
55808-
55935
55936-
56063
56064-
56191
56192-
56319
56832-
56959
56960-
57087
57088-
57215
57216-
57343
QAM 5/1
57344-
57471
57472-
57599
57600-
57727
57728-
57855
58368-
58495
58496-
58623
58624-
58751
58752-
58879
QAM 5/2
57856-
57983
57984-
58111
58112-
58239
58240-
58367
58880-
59007
59008-
59135
59136-
59263
59264-
59391
QAM 6/1
59392-
59519
59520-
59647
59648-
59775
59776-
59903
60416-
60543
60544-
60671
60672-
60799
60800-
60927
QAM 6/2
59904-
60031
60032-
60159
60160-
60287
60288-
60415
60928-
61055
61056-
61183
61184-
61311
61312-
61439
8 Video on Demand
NEW Default UDP Port
Mappings
The following table identifies the NEW default port mapping scheme. The
<A>X<B> notation indicates the number of RF ports per card <A> and
the number of QAM channels per RF port <B>.
NOTE
The first UDP port in each range maps to program number 0 (zero) and is
therefore only applicable if pass-thru mode is enabled on the QAM.
Table 8-2: NEW Default UDP Port Mappings
2X4 / 2X6 / 2X8 / 4X8 New
.1 .2 .3 .4 .5 .6 .7 .8
QAM 1/1
32768-
32831
32832-
32895
32896-
32959
32960-
33023
33024-
33087
33088-
33151
33152 -
33215
33216-
33279
QAM 1/2
33792-
33855
33856-
33919
33920-
33983
33984-
34047
34048-
34111
34112-
34175
34176 -
34239
34240 -
34303
QAM 1/3
34816 -
34879
34880 -
34943
34944 -
35007
35008 -
35071
35072 -
35135
35136 -
35199
35200 -
35263
35264 -
35327
QAM 1/4
35840 -
35903
35904 -
35967
35968 -
36031
36032 -
36095
36096 -
36159
36160 -
36223
36224 -
36287
36288 -
36351
QAM 2/1
36864-
36927
36928-
36991
36992-
37055
37056-
37119
37120-
37183
37184-
37247
37248 -
37311
37312 -
37375
QAM 2/2
37888-
37951
37952-
38015
38016-
38079
38080-
38143
38144-
38207
38208-
38271
38272 -
38335
38336 -
38399
QAM 2/3
38912 -
38975
38976 -
39039
39040 -
39103
39104 -
39167
39168 -
39231
39232 -
39295
39296 -
39359
39360 -
39423
QAM 2/4
39936 -
39999
40000 -
40063
40064 -
40127
40128 -
40191
40192 -
40255
40256 -
40319
40320 -
40383
40384 -
40447
QAM 3/1
39060-
41023
41024-
41087
41088-
41151
41152-
41215
41216-
41279
41280-
41343
41344 -
41407
41408 -
41471
QAM 3/2
41984-
42047
42048-
42111
42112-
42175
42176-
42239
42240-
42303
42304-
42367
42368 -
42431
42432 -
42495
QAM 3/3
43008 -
43071
43072 -
43135
43136 -
43199
43200 -
43263
43264 -
43327
43328 -
43391
43392 -
43455
43456 -
43519
QAM 3/4
44032 -
44095
44096 -
44159
44160 -
44223
44224 -
44287
44288 -
44251
44252 -
44415
44416 -
44479
44480 -
44543
QAM 4/1
45056-
45119
45120-
45183
45184-
45247
45248-
45311
45312-
45375
45376-
45439
45440 -
45503
45504 -
45567
QAM 4/2
46080-
46143
46144-
46207
46208-
46271
46272-
46335
46336-
46399
46400-
46463
46464 -
46527
46528 -
46591
QAM 4/3
47104 -
47167
47168 -
47231
47232 -
47295
47296 -
47359
47360 -
47423
47424 -
47487
47488 -
47551
47552 -
47615
CLI Controls If you are upgrading your software from Release 2.6, you will end up with
the same default UDP-mapping scheme as you had with Release 2.6
(legacy). However, the legacy scheme is off by default on a new installa-
tion of software.
The default UDP mapping scheme can be controlled from the CLI with the
following commands while in configuration mode:
To enable the new default UDP-mapping scheme, use the following
command:
D5(conf)# video default-mapping-scheme udp
To enable the old legacy default UDP-mapping scheme, use the following
command:
D5(conf)# video default-mapping-scheme udp-legacy
To turn off the default-mapping-scheme, use the following command:
D5(conf)# no video default-mapping-scheme udp-legacy
NOTE
The legacy scheme can be turned on/off globally, but not on a per-QAM
basis because it would create overlapping port ranges resulting in
ambiguous UDP->QAM mappings. If LEGACY mode is turned on globally,
then turning on the default-mapping scheme within a QAM enables
legacy-mode mapping for that QAM rather than enabling the new
QAM 4/4
48128 -
48191
48192 -
48255
48256 -
48319
48320 -
48383
48384 -
48447
48448 -
48511
48512 -
48575
48576 -
48639
QAM 5/1
49152-
49215
49216-
49279
49280-
49343
49344-
49407
49408-
49471
49472-
49535
49536 -
49599
49600 -
49663
QAM 5/2
50176-
50239
50240-
50303
50304-
50367
50368-
50431
50432-
50495
50496-
50559
50560 -
50623
50624 -
50687
QAM 5/3
51200 -
51263
51264 -
51327
51328 -
51391
51392 -
51455
51456 -
51519
51520 -
51583
51584 -
51647
51648 -
51711
QAM 5/4
52224 -
52287
52288 -
52351
52352 -
52415
52416 -
52479
52480 -
52543
52544 -
52607
52608 -
52671
52672 -
52735
QAM 6/1
53248-
53311
53312-
53375
53376-
53439
53440-
53503
53504-
53567
53568-
53631
53632 -
53695
53696 -
53759
QAM 6/2
54272-
54335
54336-
54399
54400-
54463
54464-
54527
54528-
54591
54592-
54655
54656 -
54719
54720 -
54783
QAM 6/3
55296 -
55359
55360 -
55423
55424 -
55487
55488 -
55551
55552 -
55615
55616 -
55679
55680 -
55743
55744 -
55807
QAM 6/4
56320 -
56383
56384 -
56447
56448 -
56511
56512 -
56575
56576 -
56639
56640 -
56703
56704 -
56767
56768 -
56831
8 Video on Demand
mapping scheme (e.g. D5(conf-qam-if)# video default-
mapping-scheme udp).
SNMP Controls The existing MPEG-MGR SNMP tables are largely unaffected by this
change. The addition of four extra channels per card simply means the
addition of extra row entries in the MIB tables.
Defacto Industry Standard
UDP Port Mapping
It is also possible to use an alternate mapping scheme for compatibility
with Harmonic
Edge QAMs. Under this scheme the QAM card is deter-

mined by the destination IP address rather than the UDP port. The QAM
channel and program number is determined by the UDP port, but the
calculation is not the same as for the default UDP mapping scheme.
The UDP port is used as outlined in Defacto Industry Standard UDP Port
Mapping (Decimal) on page 8-8. The scheme uses the following bitmap to
handle incoming UDP traffic where the IP address is used to identify the
particular QAM-card.
Figure 8-2: NSG Port Mapping Scheme
As shown in the diagram above, the NSG port-mapping scheme, by its very
nature, supports no more than eight channels per QAM card. The lowest
bit corresponds to the lowest number QAM channel on the card. The next
higher bit corresponds to the next higher number QAM channel on the card
and so on. The mapping of the bits to QAM channel is outlined in the
following table.
QAM Channel Program Number
....
Q
A
M

7
15 7 0 8
Q
A
M

8
Q
A
M

6
Q
A
M

1
....
NSG
I dentifier
D5 UEQ
Channel I dentifier
Quad-Mode
D5 UEQ
Channel I dentifier
Hex-Mode
QAM 1 X/1.1 X/1.1
QAM 2 X/1.2 X/1.2
QAM 3 X/1.3 X/1.3
QAM 4 X/1.4 X/1.4
QAM 5 X/2.1 X/2.1
Mapping
The defacto industry standard mapping can be configured on a per Gigabit
interface basis as shown in the following command:
D5# configure terminal
D5(config)# interface gigabitethernet 0/1
D5(config-gig-if)# ip address 192.168.250.74
255.255.255.0
D5(config-gig-if)# video emulation-mode bitwise 6
D5(config-gig-if)# no shutdown
D5(config-gig-if)# exit
The number of IP addresses on the CLI command line can be configured
with a value between 1 and 6. A value of 1 means that only one IP address
is created for NSG mode which effectively restricts NSG mode support in
this Gigabit interface to the QAM card in slot 1.
These commands assign IP address 192.168.250.74 to the Gigabit
Ethernet interface and set up six new IP addresses for NSG mode with
contiguous IP addresses offset from the primary interface IP address. With
this configuration, the primary IP interface (IP address 192.168.250.74)
uses the default UDP port mapping scheme but the six additional IP
addresses (192.168.250.75 through 192.168.250.80) use the NSG based
UDP port mapping scheme. In other words, traffic received on
192.168.250.75 is mapped to the QAM card in slot 1; 192.168.250.76 is
mapped to QAM card in slot 2, etc. For example, an SPTS sent to
192.168.250.76:259 is mapped using the NSG scheme to QAM 2/1.1
program 3. It is possible to transmit multiple SPTSs to the primary inter-
face IP address using the default UDP port mapping scheme to a particular
QAM channel while concurrently transmitting SPTS to the same QAM
channel using the NSG based UDP port mapping scheme, so long as the
output program numbers do not clash.
QAM 6 X/2.2 X/2.2
QAM 7 X/2.3 X/2.3
QAM 8 X/2.4 X/2.4
NSG
I dentifier
D5 UEQ
Channel I dentifier
Quad-Mode
D5 UEQ
Channel I dentifier
Hex-Mode
8 Video on Demand
UDP Port Mapping (Decimal)
NOTE
You can also use the hexadecimal table. The hexadecimal fields indicate
the values of the least-significant-byte in the UDP port, which is combined
with the most-significant-byte to address the QAM channel and program.
UDP Port Mapping
Hexadecimal
Configuring Port and
Program Number Mappings
The default UDP port mapping can be overridden to assign specific UDP
ports to programs on a given QAM channel. The command syntax is as
follows:
[no] video udp <> [src-ip <>] [dest-ip <>] program <1-
65535> [use <even | sequential> <1-127>]
For example, by default UDP port 49154 is assigned to QAM 1/1.1 Program
Number 2. However, the following commands assign this port to QAM
1/1.3 and the Program Number remains the default 2 for this port.
D5(config)# interface qam 1/1.3
D5(config-subif)# video udp 49154 program 2
.1 .2 .3 .4
First
PN0
Last
PN255
First
PN0
Last
PN255
First
PN0
Last
PN255
First
PN0
Last
PN255
QAM X/1 256 511 512 767 1024 1279 2048 2303
QAM X/2 4096 4351 8192 8447 16384 16639 32769 33023
.1 .2 .3 .4
First
PN1
Last
PN127
First
PN1
Last
PN127
First
PN1
Last
PN127
First
PN1
Last
PN127
QAM X/1 0101 01ff 0201 02ff 0401 04ff 0801 08ff
QAM X/2 1001 10ff 2001 20ff 4001 40ff 8001 80ff
Configuring Simultaneous
Ports
It is also convenient to configure several ports at once, for example, RTP
always uses even port numbers (the associated RTCP flow is carried on the
odd port number). It is possible to configure 10 even number ports from
49154 through 49172 to QAM 1/1.3 with the following commands
D5(config-subif)# video udp 49154 program 22 use even 10
The Program Numbers used for these would be 22, 23.31. The odd
ports, 49155 through 49171, are not remapped since they do not carry
SPTS streams, in the example they are carrying RTCP.
Configure Ports Per I P
Address
It is possible to perform configuration on a per IP address basis; this caters
for multiple VOD servers. For example, suppose there are two server
1.1.1.1 and 1.1.1.2. To map UDP port 49154 from the first server to QAM
1/1.3 use the following commands.
D5(config)#interface qam 1/1.3
D5(config-subif)#video udp 49154 src-ip 1.1.1.1 program
10
Override Previously Mapped
Program Number
If traffic is received from server 1.1.1.2 then it is still mapped to the
default, QAM 1/1.1 program number 2. This, in turn, can be over-ridden
with the following, to assign it to program number 12 on QAM 1/1.3.
D5(config-subif)#video udp 49154 src-ip 1.1.1.2 program
12
Map an I P Multicast to a
QAM channel
Following is an example of mapping an IP multicast to a QAM channel.
D5(config-qam-if)#video udp 1111 dest-ip 230.1.0.11
program 12
D5#(config-qam-if)#exit
In this case, the output program number is not reserved. When a stream
is activated that gets matched to this static rule, the program number is
calculated dynamically. This is especially useful where SPTS pass-through
mode is in use on the QAM channel and it may not be desirable to static
8 Video on Demand
limit the UDP port to a specific program number. If SPTS pass-through is
disabled, the dynamic stream is remapped using the default remapping
scheme (e.g. the lower seven bits of the UDP port number are used to
calculate the output program number). This type of static rule can also be
used for IP addresses (e.g. to create a static rule mapping all video traffic
from 10.250.1.1 to QAM 1/1.3).
VoD Show Commands To monitor VoD settings, use the following show commands:
The show video session command displays information about video
streams.
D5(config)#show video session
UDP SRC- I P DEST- I P QAM / PI DS | PROGS
CONTAI NER TOTAL FI LTERED | TOTAL FI LTERED
49153 10. 19. 96. 132 10. 19. 96. 135 1/ 1. 1 3 0 | 1 0
49155 10. 19. 96. 132 10. 19. 96. 135 1/ 1. 1 3 0 | 1 0
49157 10. 19. 96. 132 10. 19. 96. 135 1/ 1. 1 3 0 | 1 0
Tot al s 9 0 | 3 0
D5( conf i g) #
The show video session verbose command displays information
about video streams and PID remapping information.
D5#show video sessions verbose
UDP 49153, I P 10. 19. 96. 132- >10. 19. 96. 135, I N- TSI D 15097, QAM 1/ 1. 1
St r eamact i ve f or ( hh: mm: ss) 00: 14: 24
Pr ogr am 1 - > 1 ( 00: 14: 24)
I N- PI D OUT- PI D
66- >80 ( PSI )
68- >81 ( PCR) ( 00: 14: 24)
69- >82 ( ES) ( 00: 14: 24)
UDP 49155, I P 10. 19. 96. 132- >10. 19. 96. 135, I N- TSI D 5992, QAM 1/ 1. 1
Pr ogr am 1 - > 3 ( 00: 13: 53)
I N- PI D OUT- PI D
66- >112 ( PSI )
68- >113 ( PCR) ( 00: 13: 53)
69- >114 ( ES) ( 00: 13: 53)
UDP 49157, I P 10. 19. 96. 132- >10. 19. 96. 135, I N- TSI D 2476, QAM 1/ 1. 1
Pr ogr am 1 - > 5 ( 00: 13: 07)
I N- PI D OUT- PI D
66- >144 ( PSI )
74- >145 ( PCR) ( 00: 01: 30)
75- >146 ( ES) ( 00: 01: 30)
TOTALS: 3 i ncomi ng t r anspor t st r eams
8 Video on Demand
3 i nput pr ogr ams passed t hr ough, 0 f i l t er ed
9 i nput PI DS passed t hr ough, 0 f i l t er ed
3 out put pr ogr ams
9 out put PI Ds, 0 f i l t er ed
The show interfaces qam x/y.z video command displays video
information on the specified QAM.
D5#show interfaces qam 1/1.1 video
QAM 1/ 1. 1:
St at us: enabl ed
Vi deo bandwi dt h: 38. 810700 Mbps
Annex: I TU- T/ J . 83/ B
Fr equency: 585000000 Hz
Power : 48. 0 dBmV
Modul at i on: 256 QAM
Cur r ent out put ut i l i zat i on: 50%,
St r eami ng vi deo f or t he l ast 31 mi nut es 35 seconds
Tr anspor t st r eamI D: 1, Net wor k I D: 500, Or i gi nal net wor k I D: 500
Net wor k name: " NewYor k"
NI T PI D 16
( P) SI Tx I nt er val s: PAT: 100, CAT: 100, PMT: 100, SDT: 250,
# of act i ve pr ogr ams: 3
- PAT- updat ed 00: 30: 18 ago ( pr evi ous updat e was 00: 31: 04 ago)
Ver si on 12 ( cur r ent )
Tr anspor t - st r eam- I D 1
Pr ogr am1, PMT- PI D 80, 3218 Kbps
( Sessi on UDP 49153, I P 10. 19. 96. 132- >10. 19. 96. 135, pr ogr am1)
- PMT- updat ed 00: 31: 35 ago
PCR- PI D i s 81
ES- PI D ES- TYPE
81 2
82 129
- PMT- updat ed 00: 15: 17 ago ( pr evi ous updat e was 00: 15: 19 ago)
PCR- PI D i s 113
ES- PI D ES- TYPE
113 2
114 129
- PMT- updat ed 00: 03: 10 ago ( pr evi ous updat e was 00: 07: 02 ago)
PCR- PI D i s 145
ES- PI D ES- TYPE
145 2
146 3
The show video sessions psi command displays SI information.
D5(config-qam-if)#show video session psi
UDP SRC- I P DEST- I P QAM/ CONTAI NER PAT I N- TSI D PMT( S)
49153 10. 19. 96. 132 10. 19. 96. 135 1/ 1. 1 v0 15097 1/ 1
49155 10. 19. 96. 132 10. 19. 96. 135 1/ 1. 1 v17 5992 1/ 1
49157 10. 19. 96. 132 10. 19. 96. 135 1/ 1. 1 v5 2476 1/ 1
The show interface qam command displays information about the
specified QAM.
D5(config-qam-if)#show interface qam 1/1.1
QAM 1/ 1. 1 i s up, l i ne pr ot ocol i s up
Har dwar e i s QAM_4DX2/ AG, addr ess i s 0000. caf e. 201e
Descr i pt i on: QAM 1/ 1. 1 - D5 MPEG Tr anspor t Channel
MTU 188 byt es, BW38810 Kbi t
Ser vi ng gr oup: Test Tom
FPGA mi cr ocode ver si on: 0. 0. 4. 23
Mi cr o- cont r ol l er mi cr ocode ver si on: 2. 1. 6. 0
Wi dt h: 6000000 Hz
Power : 48. 0 dBmV
Symbol Rat e: 5360537 symbol s/ s
FEC I nt er l eaver dept h I =128, J =4 ( l evel 2, mode 6)
Spect r al I nver si on: di sabl ed
5 mi nut es out put r at e 19320384 bi t s/ sec, 12846 packet s/ sec
8 Video on Demand
1271208903 packet s out put , 2764072484 byt es
0 excessi ve col l i si ons
0 l at e col l i si on, 0 def er r ed
0 l ost / no car r i er
The show interfaces command displays information about all network
interfaces.
D5(config-qam-if)#show interfaces
DTI st at us: f r eer unni ng, no por t act i ve, 10 MHz cl ock pr esent
DTI enabl ed, use por t 1, manual por t sel ect
f i r mwar e r evi si on 20
I nt er nal Management I nt er f ace
I P addr ess 169. 254. 0. 8/ 24
Encapsul at i on Tag: 4094
Por t - Channel 1 i s down, l i ne pr ot ocol i s down
Har dwar e i s FEChannel , addr ess i s 0000. CAFE. 20A7
No. of member s i n t hi s channel : 2
Member 1: Gi gabi t Et her net 0/ 1. 0 DOWN ACTI VE
Member 2: Gi gabi t Et her net 0/ 2. 0 DOWN ACTI VE
I P addr esses: None set
Encapsul at i on Tags: None Set
Por t Sel ect i on Cr i t er i a: Def aul t Set t i ng
0 packet s i nput , 0 byt es
Recei ved 0 br oadcast s, 0 gi ant s
0 i nput er r or s, 0 CRC, 0 f r ame
0 out put er r or s, 0 col l i si ons, 0 excessi ve col l i si ons
Loopback. 1 - Not At t ached
Subi nt er f ace i s admi n down
Pr i mar y I nt er net Addr ess not assi gned
Tot al I gmp St at i c Gr oups: 0
Fast Et her net 0/ 1 i s admi n up, l i ne pr ot ocol i s up
Har dwar e i s et her net , addr ess i s 0000. caf e. 20a6
Descr i pt i on: FE 0/ 1 - Management Et her net Por t
Subi nt er f ace i s up
Oper - St at e l ast changed on: Sat 03- J un- 2000 10: 13: 36
I ngr ess management t r af f i c al l owed
Pr i mar y I nt er net Addr ess 10. 43. 210. 11/ 24
Ful l - dupl ex, 100Mb/ s
Out put queue 0 dr ops; i nput queue 0 dr ops
5 mi nut es i nput r at e 3037 bi t s/ sec, 4 packet s/ sec
Recei ved 0 br oadcast s 0 mul t i cast s, 0 gi ant s
0 out put er r or s, 0 col l i si ons
Gi gabi t Et her net 0/ 1 i s admi n up, l i ne pr ot ocol i s down - Not At t ached
Har dwar e i s et her net , addr ess i s 0000. caf e. 20a7
SFP i s FI NI SAR CORP. model FCMJ - 8521- 3
Descr i pt i on: GE 0/ 1 - Gi gabi t Et her net SFP Por t
Channel Gr oup 1
I ngr ess management t r af f i c al l owed
Pr i mar y I nt er net Addr ess 10. 17. 42. 170/ 24
2 NSG- compat i bl e I P addr esses 10. 17. 42. 171 . . . 10. 17. 42. 172
Ful l - dupl ex, 1000Mb/ s
Out put queue 0 dr ops; i nput queue 0 dr ops
5 mi nut es i nput r at e 0 bi t s/ sec, 0 packet s/ sec
Recei ved 0 br oadcast s 0 mul t i cast s, 0 gi ant s
0 out put er r or s, 0 col l i si ons
8 Video on Demand
QAM 1/ 1. 1 i s up, l i ne pr ot ocol i s up
Har dwar e i s QAM_4DX2/ AG, addr ess i s 0000. caf e. 1f 16
Descr i pt i on: QAM 1/ 1. 1 - D5 MPEG Tr anspor t Channel
Er mMappi ng: name
RPC SDV Pr i mar y I nput : Gi gabi t Et her net 0/ 1
FPGA mi cr ocode ver si on: 0. 0. 4. 23
Mi cr o- cont r ol l er mi cr ocode ver si on: 2. 1. 6. 0
Wi dt h: 6000000 Hz
Power : 44. 0 dBmV
Symbol Rat e: 5360537 symbol s/ s
FEC I nt er l eaver dept h I =128, J =4 ( l evel 2, mode 6)
Spect r al I nver si on: di sabl ed
DTI Of f set : 0
9. Digital Video Broadcast
Topics Page
Overview 1
Handling SI Table Streams, I njection and Configuration 2
SI Table Editing with the PSI Wizard 6
PSI G<>Configuration & Monitoring 7
PSI Table Auto-Generation 9
SPTS Pass-Through 11
MPTS Pass-Through 13
Handling Pre-scrambled Content 15
Video Session PSI Show Command 16
Overview
In the Digital Video Broadcast (DVB) hierarchy, most services are received
from a satellite at a central headend and scrambled centrally. Each service
is then distributed to each regional headend as a single program transport
stream (SPTS) over IP Multicast. EPG and SI tables are generated centrally
as well and distributed to each regional headend over IP multicast.
The D5 UEQ can also insert services locally and then scramble and multi-
plex (MUX) them with services received from the central headend prior to
transmission over radio frequency (RF). Each regional headend will typi-
cally deliver 60 to 120 services.
In a broadcast scenario, the D5 UEQ is much more static than it is when
distributing Video on Demand (VoD). That is because the service line-up,
Packet Identifier (PID) usage and most PSI/SI tables are static.
Figure 9-1: Example of DVB Hierarchy
Handling SI Table Streams, Injection and Configuration
DVB-SI tables play an important role in the DVB environment. There are
two methods of inserting SI tables into the D5 UEQ. One is by utilizing the
D5 UEQ Application Manager to create, edit and inject these tables into the
D5 UEQ. The second method is to stream dynamic tables into the D5 UEQ
Central Headend
Satellite
IRD
CAS Server
Grooming
Transrating
Encoding
IP Network
EPG Server
Scrambler
Unscrambled SPTS
SI Tables
I P Multicast
SI Tables
I P Multicast
Scrambled SPTS
I P Multicast
Scrambled SPTS
I P Multicast
Regional Headend #1
D5 UEQ
Scrambled SPTS
QAM RF
Local content
Unscrambled SPTS
Regional Headend #2
D5 UEQ
Scrambled SPTS
QAM RF
Local content
Unscrambled SPTS
ASI Network
delivered as MPEG frames encapsulated in UDP packets. They may be
delivered via IP multicast or unicast into each QAM channel from an
external SI table application server where the PAT tables are sent on the
standard-PID (0).
The commands necessary to allow QAM channels to be configured to
handle incoming SI streams are all based on the program number remap
command. This allows the SI stream to be classified by any combination
of source IP address, destination IP address and UDP port and as shown
in the following example:
Procedure 9-1 QAM Setup for SI Table Streams
1 To configure SI table streams, enter the QAM subinterface mode.
2 Configure a QAM channel and a video UDP port as well as a destination IP
address.
D5(config-qam-if)#video udp 5000 src-ip N.N.N.N dest-ip
10.250.24.51 si-stream
End of procedure
In the following example, the IP address 10.250.24.51 is the IP address of
the gigabitEthernet port on the D5 UEQ and N.N.N.N is the IP address of
the server generating the SI stream and allows the SI stream to be classi-
fied by UDP port plus a source IP address and/or a destination IP address.
Note the SI stream for QAM 6/1.1 is configured to be from N.N.N.N to
10.250.24.51 on UDP port 5000:
D5(config-qam-if)#video udp 5000 src-ip N.N.N.N dest-ip
10.250.24.51 si-stream
The SI table injection Show commands clearly indicate the incoming trans-
port streams that are being handled as SI streams. The following
commands will generate the same output format to indicate the SI
streams.
D5#show video session
D5#show interface qam 6/1.1 video session
D5#show video udp 5000 session
D5#show video udp 5000 dest-ip 10.250.24.51 session
D5#show video udp 5000 src-ip N.N.N.N dest-ip
10.250.24.51 session
D5#show video session
The output would look similar to:
UDP SRC- I P DEST- I P TSI D PI DS | PROGS
TOTAL FI LTERED | TOTAL FI LTERED
59393 10. 250. 24. 61 10. 250. 24. 51 25101 3 0 | 1 0
59394 10. 250. 24. 61 10. 250. 24. 51 25101 3 0 | 1 0
5000 N. N. N. N 10. 250. 24. 51 1234/ SI 0 0 | 0 0
Tot al s 6 0 | 2 0
The show video si-stream command will list all SI streams.
UDP SRC- I P DEST- I P TSI D PI DS | PROGS
TOTAL FI LTERED | TOTAL FI LTERED
5000 N. N. N. N 10. 250. 24. 51 1234/ SI 0 0 | 0 0
Tot al s 0 0 | 0 0
Table 9-1: SI Table Streams Commands
Command Description
[no] video udp <port> src-
ip <ip> dest-ip <ip> si-
stream
This command is applicable only when in QAM Channel Sub-interface
Configuration mode. It is an extension of the existing video UDP
commands and specifies an incoming stream that is to be treated as an
SI-stream for a QAM channel. The [no] version of this command will
remove the configuration and restore the default behavior, where the
stream is again treated as a regular service stream.
show video si-stream
This command is available in Privilege EXEC mode and will display all SI
streams that are currently being received by the D5 UEQ.
The output from the Show Video Session PSI command and all its deriva-
tives takes into account the fact that no table processing is being done on
PSI tables in these streams.
Show command derivatives:
D5#show video session psi
D5#show video udp 5000 session psi
D5#show interface qam 6/1.1 video session psi
UDP SRC- I P DEST- I P STATUS QAM PAT PMT( S)
59393 10. 250. 24. 61 10. 250. 24. 51 act i ve 6/ 1. 1 v27 1/ 1
5000 N. N. N. N 10. 250. 24. 51 act i ve 6/ 1. 1 n/ a n/ a
Show command verbose derivatives:
D5#show video session psi verbose
D5#show video udp 5000 session psi verbose
D5#show interface qam 6/1.1 video session psi verbose
UDP 59393, I P 10. 250. 24. 61- >10. 250. 24. 62, STATUS ' Act i ve' , QAM 6/ 1. 1
- SI t abl e st r eam, PSI t abl es cur r ent l y not avai l abl e
- PAT- r ecei ved 02: 06: 42 ago
Pr ogr am1, PMT- PI D 66
- PMT- r ecei ved 01: 40: 25 ago ( pr evi ous ver si on was r ecei ved 02: 06: 42 ago)
PCR- PI D i s 98
ES- PI D ES- TYPE FI LTERED
98 2 -
99 3 -
1 pr ogr ams passed t hr ough, 0 f i l t er ed
2 el ement ar y- st r eams passed t hr ough, 0 f i l t er ed
The show video portmap commands indicate SI table streams.
D5#show interface qam 6/1.1 video portmap
QAM 6/ 1. 1:
UdpPor t 5000 ( 0x1388) - > SI st r eam
UdpPor t 59393 ( 0xe801) - > QAM pr ogr am1
SI Table Editing with the PSI Wizard
The D5 UEQ provides the ability to edit and configure simple static SI
tables using the Application Manager (see the D5 UEQ Application
Manager) to edit the tables. This feature is called the PSI Wizard. It
supports the creation, import/export and storage of the following eight
table types:
PAT
PMT
CAT
SDT-Actual
SDT-Other
NIT
TOT
TDT
Table injection is done via the PSIG<=>MUX interface. The PSI Wizard will
allow the user to create a PSIG interface on the D5 UEQ to accept table
injection from a dedicated host (source IP Address) or from any host. It
also allows the user to configure the QAM channel video attributes to auto-
inject or force inject plus set transmission intervals.
NOTE
Although the TDT and the TOT tables are not actually static tables (as
they contain current system time and need to be periodically updated),
the D5 UEQ handles them internally as static tables and updates them
automatically.
PSIG<>Configuration & Monitoring
The configuration of (P)SIG clients on the D5 UEQ is very similar to config-
uring EIS clients (see Chapter 12, Conditional Access). Multiple PSIGs can
be configured, each with a unique name.
Procedure 9-2 PSI G Configuration
A basic CAS (P)SIG configuration might be as follows where:
PSIG 1 = IP address 192.168.250.24 port 2000
PSIG 2 = port 2001
1 Configure PSIG called ArrisPSIG1:
(config)#video psig ArrisPSIG1
2 Enable the PSIG interface with the following command:
(config-psig)#no shutdown
3 Set up the IP address 192.168.250.100 and port number 2000:
(config-psig)#ip address 192.168.250.100
(config-psig)#port 2000
4 Exit the configuration to save:
(config-psig)#exit
5 Set up the PSIG called ArrisPSIG2 with the following command:
6 Save the configuration
7 Assign the port number 2001:
8 Exit the configuration to save:
(config-psig)#exit
End of procedure
Procedure 9-3 PSIG Client Deletion
1 To delete the previously configured PSIGs use the following command:
D5#(config)# no video psig [<name>]
2 To display the currently configured client, use the following command:
D5# show video psig [<name>]
End of procedure
Other useful PSIG commands include:
D5# clear video psig active sections
Deletes all current PSIG output tables being transmitted on the QAM chan-
nels.
D5# show video psig active sections
Displays all current PSIG output tables being transmitted on the QAM
channels.
Table 9-2: PI SG <> MUX Command Set
Table 9-3:
Command Description
[no] video psig
<name>
This command is applicable only in configuration mode. It will create an instance
of a (P)SIG with the associated name if it does not already exist and will cause
the CLI to enter (P)SIG configuration mode.
[no] ip address <ip>
This command is available only in the (P)SIG configuration mode and assigns a
source IP address to the (P)SIG. The D5 UEQ will only accept connections from
that IP address for the given (P)SIG. The no version of the command will delete
the assigned IP address.
[no] port <port>
This command is available only in the (P)SIG configuration mode and assigned
a destination TCP port to the (P)SIG. The D5 UEQ will listen on that port for
incoming (P)SIG connections. The no version of the command will delete the
assigned TCP port.
[no] shutdown
This command is available on in the (P)SIG configuration mode. This will cause
the (P)SIG configuration to be put into an administratively down state. In this
state the D5 UEQ will refuse connection attempts. The no version of the
command will put the (P)SIG configuration in an administratively up state.
show video psig
[<name>]
These commands are available in Privilege mode and will display the
configuration of a given (P)SIG when the optional name is specified, or will
display that of all (P)SIGs when the optional name is omitted.
PSI Table Auto-Generation
By default, the D5 UEQ generates PSI tables automatically for each QAM
channel MPTS. Some broadcast applications will inject the PSI tables stat-
ically. To accommodate, the D5 UEQ will allow the automatic generation
of PSI tables to be enabled and disabled. Since it is possible to enable and
disable the generation of output PSI tables on a per-QAM basis, or globally,
the following table defines the rules for the possible configurations.
NOTE
Care should be taken when using video generate-psi/si commands so that
the setting does not cause duplicate PSI/SI tables to be transmitted
downstream. Duplicate tables may cause customer set-top boxes to crash
or experience loss of service.
The [no] video generate-psi command is applicable in QAM
Channel (Sub-interface) Configuration mode as well as Global
Configuration mode. When applied globally, these commands will apply to
all QAM channels where no previous setting was applied. If enabled or
disabled on a specific QAM channel, it will turn on/off the automatic
generation of PSI tables on the specified channel and will override any
global setting. To disable PSI table generation, use the no version of the
command.
Procedure 9-4 Configuring And Monitoring PSI Table Generation
These commands allow a user to configure automatic PSI generation glob-
ally or on a per QAM basis. The configuration at the QAM level takes
priority over the global configuration setting:
Global
Configuration
QAM Channel
Configuration
PSI Generation
on QAM Channel
video generate-psi Unset On
video generate-psi video generate-psi On
video generate-psi [no] video generate-psi Off
[no] video
generate-psi
Unset Off
[no] video
generate-psi
video generate-psi On
[no] video
generate-psi
[no] video generate-psi Off
1 To enable auto-generation of PSI tables CAT, PAT and PMT, use the
following command:
D5(config)#video generate-psi
2 To disable auto-generation of PSI table CAT, PAT and PMT, use the
following command:
D5(config)#no video generate-psi
3 To enable auto-generation of PSI table CAT, PAT and PMT per QAM, use
the following commands:
D5(config-qam-if)#video generate-psi
4 To disable auto-generation of PSI table CAT, PAT and PMT per QAM, use
the following command:
D5(config-qam-if)#no video generate-psi
End of procedure
PSI Table Generation Show
Command Set
The output from the show i nt er f ace qamx/ y. z vi deo command will
indicate when automatic PSI table generation has been disabled for a QAM
channel.
D5#show interface qam 6/1.1 video
QAM 6/ 1. 1:
St r eami ng vi deo f or t he l ast 2 hour s 22 mi nut es 22
seconds
Tr anspor t st r eamI D: 103, Net wor k I D: 4369, Or i gi nal
net wor k I D: 4370
Net wor k name: " D5NET"
NI T PI D 16
( P) SI Tx I nt er val s: PAT: 100, PMT: 100, NI T: 250, SDT:
250
Aut omat i c PSI Tabl e gener at i on di sabl ed
St at us: enabl ed
Power : 50 dBmV
- PAT- updat ed 02: 22: 22 ago
( Sessi on UDP 59393, I P 10. 250. 24. 61- >10. 250. 24. 62)
- PMT- updat ed 00: 12: 07 ago ( pr evi ous updat e was
01: 56: 05 ago)
PCR- PI D i s 81
ES- PI D ES- TYPE
81 2
82 3
SPTS Pass-Through
In SPTS pass-through operating mode the D5 UEQ will not remap PIDs
and will not remap program numbers. It also does not automatically pass-
through all defined DVB-SI PIDs, rather it merely processes PSI tables in
the REMUX mode since the incoming SPTSs have been lined-up in such a
manner that they will not cause overlapping PID and program numbers.
SPTS pass-through mode is configured either on a per-QAM channel basis
or globally. SPTS pass-through mode uses any configured or default
mapping rules when determining the destination QAM channel for an
incoming SPTS.
The MPEG Manager will reject an incoming SPTS when it determines that
there is a PID or program number conflict caused by overlapping PIDs or
program numbers. An SNMP event is generated when this occurs.
The MPEG Manager performs PSI table processing normally when in SPTS
pass-through mode. PMT tables are generated by the MPEG Manager as
in the REMUX mode.
Video Pass-through Automatic PSI generation can also be configured globally or on a per QAM
basis. The configuration at the QAM level takes priority over the global
configuration setting. The video pass-through command is configured at the
QAM sub-interface level for SPTS pass through.
When applied globally these commands will apply to all QAM channels
where no previous setting was applied
Show Command Set The output from the show interface qam x/y.z video command will indicate
when video pass-through has been enabled for a QAM channel.
D5#show interface qam 6/1.1 video
QAM 6/ 1. 1:
St r eami ng vi deo f or t he l ast 2 hour s 22 mi nut es 22
seconds
Tr anspor t st r eamI D: 103, Net wor k I D: 4369, Or i gi nal
net wor k I D: 4370
Net wor k name: " D5NET"
NI T PI D 16
( P) SI Tx I nt er val s: PAT: 100, PMT: 100, NI T: 250, SDT:
250
Aut omat i c PSI Tabl e gener at i on di sabl ed
SPTS Pass- t hr ough cur r ent l y enabl ed
St at us: enabl ed
Power : 50 dBmV
- PAT- updat ed 02: 22: 22 ago
( Sessi on UDP 59393, I P 10. 250. 24. 61- >10. 250. 24. 62)
- PMT- updat ed 00: 12: 07 ago ( pr evi ous updat e was
01: 56: 05 ago)
PCR- PI D i s 81
ES- PI D ES- TYPE
81 2
82 3
MPTS Pass-Through
In the case of MPTS pass-through, DVB-SI information is simply forwarded
through the D5 UEQ. The D5 UEQ supports MPTS IP streams in a limited
form, by allowing the operator to configure a QAM channel and dedicate it
to a particular input stream, which may be an MPTS.
Figure 9-2: D5 UEQ MPTS Pass-Through
In pass-through mode, the default remapping rules for PID and program
numbers are ignored. The MPTS is instead remapped to identical output
PIDs and programs. Rather than calculating new output PAT and PMT
output tables, the D5 UEQ creates cloned copies of the input PAT and PMT
tables to transmit downstream, so that the PSI information present in the
MPTS is preserved on the QAM.
200MHz-->225.0.0.1/100
206MHz-->225.0.0.1/200
212MHz-->225.0.0.1/300
216MHz-->225.0.0.1/400
Multicast
Address
MPTS SOURCE
MPTS over
UDP
UDP #100 MPTS#1
UDP #200 MPTS#2
UDP #300 MPTS#3
UDP #400 MPTS#4
D5 UEQ
192.158.23.2
QAM #1 (100)
QAM #2 (101)
QAM #4 (103)
QAM #3 (102)
200 Mhz
206 Mhz
212 Mhz
218 Mhz
RF Serving
MPTS#4
STB
MPTS#3
STB
MPTS#2
STB
MPTS#1
STB
Procedure 9-5 Enable MPTS Pass-Through Mode
In this example the DVB MPTS Pass-Through mode is configured on QAM
1/1.1. The transport stream is delivered to destination UDP port 593, at
destination IP address 10.250.0.6, from source IP address 10.250.0.5.
! WARNI NG: some set t i ngs al so af f ect ot her QAM
i nt er f aces connect ed t o t hi s por t
! unt i l af t er i nt er f ace- conf i gur at i on mode has been
exi t ed
D5(config-qam-if)#video pass-through mpts
D5(config-qam-if)#video udp 593 src-ip 10.250.0.5 dest-
ip 10.250.0.6
End of procedure
Filtering MPTS in Non Pass-Through Mode
By default, a stream is configured as an SPTS and the program that is
picked by the D5 UEQ is dictated by the first PMT received. If the user has
MPTS with several programs and wants to filter (or block) a specific
program (#112 in our example below), you will need to do the following:
Procedure 9-6 MPTS Filtering
Set the stream as SI stream. Virtual programs cannot be filtered.
To configure SI table streams:
1 Enter the QAM subinterface mode:
2 Configure a QAM channel and a video UDP port as well as a destination IP
address:
D5(config-qam-if)#video udp 1134 src-ip 76.59.192.74
dest-ip 239.193.140.33 si-stream
3 Set up filter rules to the programs the user wants to block:
D5(config-qam-if)#video filter-program 112
A filter needs to be set up for each program the user wants to block.
End of procedure
Use the following command to view the current video filters:
D5(config)#show video filter
The system response would look similar to:
Program Filters:
UDP SRC- I P DEST- I P QAM Pr og | Mat chCount Last Mat ch
| ( hh: mm: ss ago)
- - - 1/ 2. 2 112 | 0 00: 00: 00
Tot al s | 0
1 Pr og Fi l t er r ul es i n t ot al
Use the following command to view the current video sessions:
D5#show video sessions
The system response would look similar to:
UDP SRC- I P DEST- I P QAM / PI DS | PROGS
CONTAI NER TOTAL FI LTERED | TOTAL FI LTERED
1034 76. 59. 192. 74 239. 193. 140. 32 1/ 2. 1 31 0 | 9 0
1134 76. 59. 192. 74 239. 193. 140. 33 1/ 2. 2 22 0 | 6 0
2034 76. 59. 192. 74 239. 193. 140. 34 1/ 2. 3 28 0 | 7 0
2330 76. 59. 192. 46 239. 193. 140. 20 1/ 1. 2 60 0 | 30 0
2430 76. 59. 192. 46 239. 193. 140. 21 1/ 1. 4 16 0 | 1 0
3034 76. 59. 192. 74 239. 193. 140. 35 1/ 2. 4 23 0 | 7 0
4034 76. 59. 192. 74 239. 193. 140. 36 2/ 1. 1 14 0 | 4 0
Tot al s 194 0 | 64 0
Handling Pre-scrambled Content
The D5 UEQ is capable of handling pre-scrambled DVB-Simulcrypt content.
It will automatically detect pre-scrambled content in an incoming transport
stream due to the presence of a CA_Descriptor in the CAT and/or PMT
tables. These tables along with associated, scrambled, and Elementary
Stream tables will be forwarded through the D5 UEQ without any changes.
The D5 UEQ will generate an appropriate output CAT table containing
more than one CA_Descriptor when it detects different super_CAS_ids in
the CA_Descriptors of incoming CAT tables. The D5 UEQ will also handle
the presence of EMM tables in pre-scrambled streams. When two or more
transport streams are scrambled using the same super_CAS_id and also
contain EMM tables on the same PID, then those EMM tables are assumed
to be the same and only one copy will be transmitted to the output QAM
channel.
Video Session PSI Show Command
The output from the show video session psi command indicates the presence
of pre-scrambled content in the incoming transport streams. For example,
below the output from the show video session psi command shows the pres-
ence of a CA Descriptor in the PMT for the transport stream on UDP port
59393. This command will not attempt to show the presence of any CAT
or ECM tables.
D5#show video session psi
D5#show video udp 5000 session psi
D5#show interface qam 6/1.1 video session psi
UDP SRC- I P DEST- I P STATUS QAM PAT PMT( S)
59393 10. 250. 24. 61 10. 250. 24. 51 act i ve 6/ 1. 1 v27 1/ 1/ CA
59395 10. 250. 24. 61 10. 250. 24. 51 act i ve 6/ 1. 1 v29 1/ 1
D5#
The output from show video session psi verbose command displays more
detail about the transport stream and the contents of CAT & ECM tables if
present in the stream.
D5#show video session psi verbose
D5#show video udp 5000 session psi verbose
D5#show interface qam 6/1.1 video session psi verbose
- PMT- r ecei ved 01: 05: 40 ago ( pr evi ous ver si on was r ecei ved 02: 49: 38 ago)
PCR- PI D i s 100
ECM- PI D i s 102, CA Syst emI D i s 0x1800
100 2 -
101 3 -
- ECM- r ecei ved 00: 00: 39 ago ( pr evi ous ver si on was r ecei ved 00: 02: 39 ago)
ECM- PI D i s 102
- CAT- r ecei ved 03: 15: 55 ago
EMM- PI D i s 102, CA Syst emI D i s 0x1800
- PMT- r ecei ved 00: 00: 26 ago
PCR- PI D i s 68
68 2 -
69 3 -
2 pr ogr ams passed t hr ough, 0 f i l t er ed
4 el ement ar y- st r eams passed t hr ough, 0 f i l t er ed
D5#
10. IGMP Client
Topics Page
Overview 1
I GMP Client in the Network 3
Directly Connected to a Video Server(s) 3
Connected to I GMP Enabled Switch/ Router 6
Limitations 9
IGMP CLI Commands 10
IGMP Show Commands 10
Example IGMP Configurations 13
Overview
The D5 UEQ IGMP client can be employed in the network architecture
either by directly connecting the D5 UEQ to a video server or remotely
connecting via a switch, series of switches, routers or a combination
thereof. This document will explain how the mulitcasted video traffic will
be transported to the individual QAM channels.
10 IGMP Client
The D5 UEQ IGMP client is fully compliant with the IGMPv3 host specifica-
tion (unless stated otherwise) and is fully backward compatible with earlier
version queriers and hosts. IGMPv3 allows the user to specify Source
Specific Multicast (SSM) entries as well as Any Source Multicast (ASM)
entries. ASM entries are denoted using a '*' for the source address.
NOTE
The IGMP client operates on either a gigabit subinterface or a loopback
subinterface that is a member of a port-channel. It does not operate on
any fastethernet ports. There are a maximum of 1488 groups that can be
configured on the D5 UEQ system. A group can only be configured
against a single subinterface. Enabling IGMP on a subinterface enables
the processing of IGMP packets (when a query is received, the client will
send reports for the corresponding group(s)). If IGMP is disabled, then all
IGMP queries are dropped by the client and the client wont generate any
IGMP packets. When a group is statically configured on a subinterface,
packets destined to the multicast address will not be filtered on the
subinterface whether IGMP is enabled or disabled on that subinterface.
I GMP Client in the Network
The following scenarios show where the IGMP client fits into the network
topology.
Directly Connected to a Video Server(s)
Any Source Multicast (ASM)
Example
The diagram below illustrates where the D5 UEQ is directly connected to
a video server that is IGMP enabled.
Figure 10-1: ASM Example - Directly Connected to a Video Server
In this configuration, the following series of operations are conducted as
follows:
1 Video server 10.1.1.1 starts transmitting video traffic to multicast address
225.1.2.3.
2 All video traffic destined for multicast address 225.1.2.3 is received on the
D5 UEQ port and filtered.
3 Group {*, 225.1.2.3} is provisioned on a D5 UEQ subinterface.
4 The D5 UEQ issues a join on the subinterface for group {*, 225.1.2.3} to
signal interest in receiving traffic on multicast address 225.1.2.3 from any
source.
Video Server
10.1.1.1
Leave {*, 225.1.2.3}
{*, 225.1.2.3}
{*, 225.1.2.3}
6
3
2
8
Keystone D5 DMTS
D5 UEQ
X
X
7
1
4
5
Provision
Deprovision
Allowed Stream {10.1.1.1, 225.1.2.3}
Stream {10.1.1.1, 225.1.2.3}
Stream {10.1.1.1, 225.1.2.3}
10 IGMP Client
5 Video traffic from server 10.1.1.1 destined for multicast address 225.1.2.3
is no longer filtered by the D5 UEQ.
6 The group {*, 225.1.2.3} is deprovisioned on the D5 UEQ.
7 The D5 UEQ issues a leave/report on the subinterface for group {*,
225.1.2.3} to signal that it is no longer interested in receiving traffic on
multicast address 225.1.2.3 from any source.
is filtered by the D5 UEQ.
Source Specific Multicast
(SSM) Example
The diagram below illustrates where the D5 UEQ is directly connected to
a video server.
Figure 10-2: SSM Example - Directly Connected to a Video Server
follows:
1 Video servers 10.1.1.1 and 10.1.1.2 start transmitting video traffic to
multicast address 225.1.2.3.
2 All video traffic destined for multicast address 225.1.2.3 is received on the
D5 UEQ port and filtered.
3 Group {10.1.1.2, 225.1.2.3} is provisioned on a D5 UEQ subinterface.
Leave {10.1.1.2, 225.1.2.3}
{10.1.1.2, 225.1.2.3}
{10.1.1.2, 225.1.2.3}
6
3
2
8
X
X
7
1
4
5
Provision
Deprovision
Allowed Stream {10.1.1.2, 225.1.2.3}
Stream {10.1.1.1, 225.1.2.3}
Stream {10.1.1.1, 225.1.2.3}
D5 UEQ
D5 UEQ
10.1.1.2
Video Servers
10.1.1.1
X
1
Stream {10.1.1.2, 225.1.2.3}
Stream {10.1.1.1, 225.1.2.3}
5
8
X
Stream {10.1.1.2, 225.1.2.3}
X
4 The D5 UEQ issues a join on the subinterface for group {10.1.1.2,
225.1.2.3} to signal interest in receiving traffic on multicast address
225.1.2.3 from source 10.1.1.2.
is no longer filtered by the D5 UEQ. Video traffic from server 10.1.1.1 is
still filtered.
6 The group {10.1.1.2, 225.1.2.3} is deprovisioned on the D5 UEQ.
7 The D5 UEQ issues a leave/report on the subinterface for group {10.1.1.2,
225.1.2.3} to signal that it is no longer interested in receiving traffic on
multicast address 225.1.2.3 from source 10.1.1.2.
10 IGMP Client
Connected to IGMP Enabled Switch/ Router
Any Source Multicast (ASM)
Example
The diagram below illustrates where the D5 UEQ is connected to an IGMP
enabled switch or router.
Figure 10-3: ASM Example - Connected to an I GMP-enabled
Switch or Router
follows:
1 Video server 10.1.1.1 start transmitting video traffic to multicast address
225.1.2.3.
2 Video traffic destined for multicast address 225.1.2.3 is received on
switch/router port and filtered.
3 Group {*, 225.1.2.3}. is provisioned on a D5 UEQ subinterface.
{10.1.1.1, 225.1.2.3}
2
1
10.1.1.1
Video Server
X
8
4
5
X
9
10
11
Allowed
3 {*, 225.1.2.3}
Provision
I P
Network
7
Deprovision
{*, 225.1.2.3}
J oin
{*, 225.1.2.3}
6
{10.1.1.1, 225.1.2.3}
Query
{*, 225.1.2.3}
Stream
{10.1.1.1, 225.1.2.3}
Stream
{10.1.1.1, 225.1.2.3}
Leave
{*, 225.1.2.3}
X
D5 UEQ
D5 UEQ
4 The D5 UEQ issues a join on the subinterface for group {*, 225.1.2.3} to
signal interest in receiving traffic on multicast address 225.1.2.3 from any
source.
5 Northbound switch/router receives join and no longer filters video traffic
destined to multicast address 225.1.2.3.
6 Video traffic from server 10.1.1.1 destined to multicast address 225.1.2.3
is received by the D5 UEQ.
7 Group {*, 225.1.2.3} is deprovisioned on the D5 UEQ subinterface.
8 D5 UEQ issues a leave/report to the northbound switch/router for group
{*, 225.1.2.3} to signal that it is no longer interested in receiving traffic on
multicast address 225.1.2.3 from any source.
9 Video traffic destined to multicast address 225.1.2.3 is filtered by the D5
UEQ.
10 Northbound switch/router receives leave and issues group-specific query
for group 225.1.2.3.
11 Northbound switch/router receives no report for group 225.1.2.3 within a
specific timeout, switch/router then filters video traffic for multicast
address 225.1.2.3 from all sources.
10 IGMP Client
Source Specific Multicast
(SSM) Example
The diagram below illustrates where the D5 UEQ is connected to an IGMP
enabled switch or router.
Figure 10-4: SSM Example - Connected to an I GMP-enabled
Switch or Router
follows:
1 Video servers 10.1.1.1 and 10.1.1.2 start transmitting video traffic to
multicast address 225.1.2.3.
2 Video traffic destined for multicast address 225.1.2.3 is received on
switch/router port and filtered.
3 Group {10.1.1.2, 225.1.2.3}. is provisioned on a D5 UEQ subinterface.
4 The D5 UEQ issues a join on the subinterface for group {10.1.1.2,
225.1.2.3} to signal interest in receiving traffic on multicast address
225.1.2.3 from source 10.1.1.2.
X
8
4
5
X
9
10
11
Allowed
Provision
IP
Network
7
Deprovision
J oin
{10.1.1.2, 225.1.2.3}
6
{10.1.1.2, 225.1.2.3}
Query
{10.1.1.2, 225.1.2.3}
Stream
{10.1.1.2, 225.1.2.3}
Stream
{10.1.1.2, 225.1.2.3}
Leave
{10.1.1.2, 225.1.2.3}
X
10.1.1.1 10.1.1.2
Video Servers
2 1
1 2
X
3 {10.1.1.2, 225.1.2.3}
{10.1.1.2, 225.1.2.3}
{10.1.1.2, 225.1.2.3}
{10.1.1.1, 225.1.2.3}
D5 UEQ
D5 UE Q
5 Northbound switch/router receives join and no longer filters video traffic
destined to multicast address 225.1.2.3 from video server 10.1.1.2. Video
traffic from server 10.1.1.1 and destined to 225.1.2.3 is still filtered by
switch/router
is received by the D5 UEQ.
7 Group {10.1.1.2, 225.1.2.3} is deprovisioned on the D5 UEQ subinterface.
8 D5 UEQ issues a leave/report to the northbound switch/router for group
{10.1.1.2, 225.1.2.3} to signal that it is no longer interested in receiving
traffic on multicast address 225.1.2.3 from source 10.1.1.2.
10 Northbound switch/router receives leave and issues group-source-specific
query for group 225.1.2.3.
11 Northbound switch/router receives no report for group 225.1.2.3 within a
specific timeout, switch/router then filters video traffic for multicast
address 225.1.2.3 from server 10.1.1.2.
Limitations
The following list describes some of the limitations in the current D5 UEQ
release:
1 A multicast group can be configured on a multiple interface if:
a The source IP address and destination IP address are not configured
against any interface (e.g. configuring {1.1.1.1, 225.0.0.1} on GigE 2
when {1.1.1.1, 225.0.0.1} is already configured on GigE 1), and
b There is no IGMP group with the same destination IP address and no
source address specified on any interface (e.g. configuring {1.1.1.,
225.0.0.1} on GigE 2 when {*, 225.0.0.1} is already configured on
GigE 1), or
c There is no IGMP group with the same destination IP address on any
interface and the group being configured has no source IP specified
(e.g. configuring *, 225.0.0.1} on GigE 2 when {1.1.1.1, 225.0.0.2} is
already configured on GigE 1).
Note: In the above examples, the * (asterisk) means no source
address is specified.
2 There is a maximum of 1488 groups per WAN module.
3 There are 1488 multicast filters per WAN module. Each configured source
address that is programmed will use one filter. A group that has no
configured source addresses will also use one filter.
4 There is a maximum of four source addresses per group.
10 IGMP Client
5 Only eight source addresses will be read from a group and source specific
query. Any subsequent sources will be ignored by the D5 UEQ IGMP Client.
IGMP CLI Commands
The following commands are executed from the sub-interface mode.
IGMP Show Commands
To verify that IGMPv3 is configured properly, use the commands listed in
the following table while in Privilege Mode:I
Table 10-1: I GMP Database Commands - Subinterface Commands
Command Description
[no] ip igmp static-group <N.N.N.N>
Adds [removes] a static multicast address to the IGMP
database associating it with the gigabitethernet/loopback
subinterface.
[no] ip igmp static-group <N.N.N.N>
source <S.S.S.S>
Adds [removes] a source specific address to a static
multicast address. Adds a static multicast address to the
IGMP database (if it previously didnt exist) associating it
with the gigabitethernet/loopback subinterface.
[no] ip igmp Enables [disables] a subinterface's IGMP capabilities.
ip igmp process-remote-queries Processes queries from any subset.
ip igmp query-max-response-timeout
<N>
Sets the timeout advertised in queries.
ip igmp robustness <N>
Variable for tuning the expected packet loss on the
subnet. Default is set to 2.
ip igmp verify ip-router-alert-option
Enables checking for the presence of the IP Router Alert
option in IGMPv2 and IGMPv3 messages.
ip igmp version <N>
Configures which version of IGMP the system uses. The
default is set to v3.
Table 10-2: I GMP Show Commands
Command Description
show ip igmp groups
Lists all the multicast groups presently stored in the IGMP
database.
show ip igmp groups <N.N.N.N>
Lists all the multicast groups stored in the IGMP database
with a group address of <N.N.N.N>.
Example of output from the variants of the show ip igmp groups
commands:
SDV LEGEND:
' I F- Down' - i gmp i nt er f ace i s not oper at i onal
' Candi dat e' - candi dat e sour ce addr ess on r edundant por t
' St r eami ng' - st r eampr esent
' Wai t i ng' - wai t i ng f or st r eam
Gr oup Addr ess I nt er f ace Upt i me SDV St at us Sour ces Addr ess
225. 1. 1. 2 Gi gabi t Et her net 0/ 1. 0 2m27s ANY
225. 1. 1. 3 Gi gabi t Et her net 0/ 1. 0 1m50s 2. 5. 34. 192
4. 2. 4. 6
226. 1. 1. 4 Gi gabi t Et her net 0/ 1. 0 1m10s St r eami ng ANY
226. 1. 1. 4 Gi gabi t Et her net 0/ 3. 0 1m10s Candi dat e ANY
226. 1. 2. 4 Gi gabi t Et her net 0/ 2. 0 1m10s St r eami ng ANY
226. 1. 3. 4 Gi gabi t Et her net 0/ 4. 0 1m10s I F- Down ANY
232. 1. 2. 3 Gi gabi t Et her net 0/ 1. 0 3s 7. 6. 5. 4
St r eami ng 4. 2. 4. 6
2. 5. 34. 192
4. 2. 4. 6
Candi dat e 2. 5. 34. 192
Wai t i ng 4. 2. 4. 6
2. 5. 34. 192
show ip igmp groups interface
gigabitethernet <X/Y>
Lists the number of multicast groups stored in the IGMP
database associated with the specified gigabitethernet
subinterface.
show ip igmp groups interface
loopback <X>
Lists all the multicast groups stored in the IGMP database
associated with the specified loopback subinterface.
show ip igmp interface
Lists the IGMP attributes of all sub-interface running in
video mode.
gigabitethernet <X/Y>
Lists the IGMP attributes of the specified gigabitethernet
sub-interface.
show ip igmp interface loopback <X>
Lists the IGMP attributes of the specified loopback sub-
interface.
Table 10-2: I GMP Show Commands
Command Description
10 IGMP Client
4. 2. 4. 6
2. 5. 34. 192
Wai t i ng 4. 2. 4. 6
2. 5. 34. 192
234. 1. 2. 5 Gi gabi t Et her net 0/ 4. 0 3s I F- Down 7. 6. 5. 4
I F- Down 4. 2. 4. 6
I F- Down 2. 5. 34. 192
Example of output from the variants of the show ip igmp interface
command:
Gi gabi t Et her net 0/ 1. 0:
I GMP enabl ed subi nt er f ace has 0 gr oups
ver si on 3 r obust ness 2 quer y- i nt er val 125 quer y- max- r esponse- t i me 100
not ver i f yi ng i p r out er al er t opt i on
I GMP quer i er 4. 3. 2. 1 upt i me 7s expi r es i n 4m7s
I GMP quer i er 1. 1. 1. 1 upt i me 32s expi r es i n 4m11s
V2 r out er pr esent t i mer expi r es i n 1m35s
I GMP quer i er N. N. N. N upt i me 32s expi r es i n 2m11s
I GMP quer i er not pr esent on net wor k
Example IGMP Configurations
Procedure 10-1 The following procedure demonstrates how to:
enable IGMP on gigabitEthernet 0/1
create the static-group {*, 225.0.0.1}(ASM) on gigabitEthernet 0/1
add source address 1.2.3.4 to the static-group {*, 225.0.0.1}(SSM) on
gigabitEthernet 0/1
remove source 1.2.3.4 from static-group {1.2.3.4, 225.0.0.1}(ASM) on
gigabitEthernet 0/1
delete the static group {*, 225.0.0.1} from gigabitEthernet 0/1
create a static group 226.0.0.1 with multiple source addresses
{1.2.3.4, 2.3.44.5, 3.4.5.6} on gigabitEthernet 0/1
remove source address 1.2.3.4 from 226.0.0.1 on gigabitEthernet 0/1
delete the static-group 226.0.0.1 from gigabitEthernet 0/1
1 Enable IGMP on gigabitEthernet 0/1
D5(config)#interface gigabitethernet 0/1
!NOTE: sub-interface config will not be applied
!(and will not be displayed by the "show" commands)
!until after interface-configuration mode has been
exited
D5(config-gig-if)#ip igmp
D5(config-gig-if)#exit
2 Create a static-group {*, 225.0.0.1}(ASM) on gigabitEthernet 0/1
exited
D5(config-gig-if)#ip igmp static-group 225.0.0.1
10 IGMP Client
3 Add source address 1.2.3.4 to the static-group
{*, 225.0.0.1}(SSM) on gigabitEthernet 0/1
exited
D5(config-gig-if)#ip igmp static-group 225.0.0.1 source
1.2.3.4
4 Remove source 1.2.3.4 from static-group {1.2.3.4, 225.0.0.1}(ASM) on
gigabitEthernet 0/1.
!exited
D5(config-gig-if)#no ip igmp static-group 225.0.0.1
source 1.2.3.4
5 Delete the static group {*, 225.0.0.1} from gigabitEthernet 0/1
!exited
6 Create a static group 226.0.0.1 with multiple source addresses {1.2.3.4,
2.3.44.5, 3.4.5.6} on gigabitEthernet 0/1
exited
1.2.3.4
2.3.44.5
3.4.5.6
7 Remove source address 1.2.3.4 from 226.0.0.1 on gigabitEthernet 0/1
exited
1.2.3.4
8 Delete the static group {*, 225.0.0.1} from gigabitEthernet 0/1
exited
End of procedure
10 IGMP Client
Procedure 10-2 The following procedure demonstrates how to:
associate the static-group {1.1.1.1, 225.0.0.1} with qam 1/1.1
program 10
create the static-group {1.1.1.1, 225.0.0.1}(ASM) on gigabitEthernet
0/1
1 Associate the static-group {1.1.1.1, 225.0.0.1} with qam 1/1.1 program 10
D5(config-qam-if)video src-ip 1.1.1.1 dest-ip 225.0.0.1
program 10
D5(config-qam-if)#exit
2 Create the static-group {1.1.1.1, 225.0.0.1}(ASM) on gigabitEthernet 0/1
exited
D5(config-gig-if)#ip igmp static-group 225.0.0.1 source
1.1.1.1
End of procedure
See Chapter 8, Video on Demand for information on port mapping.
11. Switched Digital Video
Topics Page
Overview 1
Switched Digital Architecture 2
Setting up SDV on the D5 UEQ 2
Overview
The ARRIS D5 Universal Edge QAM (UEQ) Software first delivered QAM
sharing of digital broadcast and unicast Video on Demand (VoD) services
on a single Edge Device. Release 2.2 extended QAM sharing support on
the D5 UEQ with the addition of Switched Digital Video (SDV) functionality
using Generic QAM Interface SDV Protocol. Release 2.3 extended its posi-
tion to all SDV architectures by supporting Real-Time Streaming Protocol
(RTSP) for SDV applications. SDV is an economical option for reclaiming
spectral bandwidth. To free additional bandwidth for additional content
and services with SDV, broadcast channels are switched on to the network
only when they are requested by one or more subscribers.
Switched Digital Architecture
The primary elements of a Switched Digital Architecture are:
(Global) Session and Resource Manager
Switched Digital Video (SDV) Server
Switched Digital Video (SDV) Manager
Switched Digital Video (SDV) Client
Staging Processor
Bulk Encryptor
Content Routing Network
Edge QAM Modulator
Figure 11-1: Switched Digital Architecture Example
Setting up SDV on the D5 UEQ
Use the following steps to set Switched Digital Video on the D5 UEQ:
Procedure 11-1 Enable I GMP
1 Enter gigabitEthernet configuration mode by typing the following:
D5(config)#interface gigabitethernet <X/Y>
Where: X/ Y = Slot/port
2 Enable the subinterfaces IGMP capabilities:
D5(config-gig-if)#ip igmp
3 Sets the client to run in IGMPv3:
D5(config-gig-if)#ip igmp version 3
End of procedure
For more information on IGMP configuration, see Chapter 10, IGMP Client
Procedure 11-2 Configure the SDV RPC I nterface
Following is the command to configure the SDV RPC interface:
D5(config)# video sdv rpc [dncs-compatibitility-mode |
master-srm <N.N.N.N> <tcp | udp> | persistent | qam-
model <2x4-qam | 2x6-qam | 4x8-qam> | reset-indicator
interval <1-20> | timeout <default | 0-65535>]
Where: dncs-compatibility-mode = The Master SRM for Edge
Reset Indications.
master-srm <N.N.N.N> = The Master SRM for Edge Reset
using the Master SRM IP address and tcp | udp = Protocol
persistent = Sets the client connection to persistent
qam-model = Sets the QAM-model to either the 2X4-QAM,
2X6-QAM or the 4X8-QAM
reset-indicator interval = Sets the SDV RPC reset-indicator
interval in seconds. Valid range is 1-20 seconds
timeout = Sets the SDV RPC timeout back to the default or
sets it in a range of 0-65535 milliseconds.
Follow these steps to turn on the SDV RPC interface:
1 Enter configuration mode by typing the following:
2 Turn on the SDV RPC interface with the following command:
D5(config)#video sdv rpc
3 (Optional) Some Master SRM devices also expect the D5 UEQ to generate
a Reset Indicator message. This is accomplished with the following
command:
D5(config)# video sdv rpc master-srm <ip-address> <tcp
| udp>
End of procedure
NOTE
In SDV deployments, other headend systems such as the SDV Manager
and/or the SRM, will need to be set up by the operator to match the
configurations of the D5 UEQ systems in use. For example, these systems
will need to know whether the D5 UEQ is operating in Dual, Quad, or
Hex-channel or Octal mode. It is very important that the actual D5 UEQ
configurations match the configurations set up on these other systems. If
this is not done accurately, then SDV may not operate correctly, or may
not operate at all.
SDV Load Balancing
Refer to GQI/RPC GigE Load Balancing, page 13-22 for information on SDV
load balancing and the current show commands.
12. Conditional Access
Topics Page
Conditional Access 2
Basic CAS Configuration 3
EMMG Configuration 4
EI S Configuration 12
Redundancy Group Configuration 14
Channel Container Configuration 15
SCG Configuration 15
DVB Simulcrypt Configuration 20
Conditional Access
Figure 12-1: D5 UEQ in a Conditional Access System
The D5 UEQ Conditional Access System (CAS) is responsible for delivering
Entitlement Management Message (EMM), Entitlement Control message
(ECM) and Conditional Access Tables (CAT) for transmission on appro-
priate QAM channels along with Packet Identifier (PID) remapping of these
tables prior to transmission.
A
R
R
I
S

D
5

U
n
i
v
e
r
s
a
l

E
d
g
e

Q
A
M

The CAS configuration Command Line Interface (CLI) is based on the
concept of interfaces similar to those for Ethernet ports and QAM channels.
The interface CLI for each CAS Server Interface is session based. No two
CLI sessions are able to configure the same server interface at the same
time. The configuration is only applied when the CLI session is completed
with the exit command.
Each configured Element Control Message Generator (ECMG), Entitlement
Management Message Generator (EMMG) and Event Information System
(EIS) forms a CAS server on the D5 UEQ and has a unique name. No two
similar types of CAS servers can have the same name however, a different
type (ECMG, an EIS and an EMMG) could all have the same name.
Each CAS server can be in an administrative up or down state. The no
shutdown and shutdown commands are utilized to initiate these states.
Setting a server to admin down will cause any associated channels and
streams to be deleted. Each server also has an operational state (referred
to in the show commands as line protocol) which indicates a connected
channel. Up means the channel is connected while down means no
channel is connected.
There are restrictions placed on what can be configured on a CAS server
when it is in the admin up state, for example, the super-CAS-id (or CA-
system-id, or client-id) cannot be changed until the server is set to admin
down. The same applies to IP configuration.
Basic CAS Configuration A basic CAS configuration can be accomplished in the following manner:
Basic CAS Configuration To setup a basic CAS configuration it is
necessary to configure a video channel container, the ECMG, EMMG and
the EIS. The procedure is as follows:
ECMG = super-CAS-id 0x18000002, IP address 192.168.250.22 Port 6000
EMMG = client-id 0x18000001, TCP Port 5555 (or UDP Port 5555)
EIS = IP address 192.168.250.23 Port 5000
(config)#video channel-container cn
(config-video-channel)#channel qam 6/1.1
(config-video-channel)#exit
(config)#video emmg emmg
(config-emmg)#no shutdown
(config-emmg)#client-id 1800.0001
(config-emmg)#tcp port 5555
(config-emmg)#channel-container cn
(config)#video ecmg ecmg
(config-ecmg)#no shutdown
(config-ecmg)#super-cas-id 1800.0002
config-ecmg)#ip address 192.168.250.22
(config-ecmg)#port 6000
(config-ecmg)#exit
(config)#
(config)#video eis eis
(config-eis)#no shutdown
(config-eis)#ip address 192.168.250.23
(config-eis)#port 5000
(config-eis)#exit
(config)#
EMMG Configuration
The EMMG interface supports two modes of operation, namely promis-
cuous mode and restricted mode. Which mode is used depends on
whether you specify an IP address along with the port definition. TCP-
only, UDP-only and TCP/UDP port specifications are supported. The
default format is mpeg-section and the default data-type is EMM.
To define an EMMG interface that uses TCP Port 2222 for control
and UDP Port 3333 for entitlement data use the following
example configuration:
D5(config)#video channel-container cn
D5(config-video-channel)#channel qam 6/1.1
D5(config-video-channel)#exit
D5(config)#video emmg emmg
D5(config-emmg)#channel-container cn
D5(config-emmg)#client-id 1801.0001
D5(config-emmg)#tcp port 2222
D5(config-emmg)#udp port 3333
D5(config-emmg)#no shutdown
D5(config-emmg)#exit
D5(config)# exit
To define an EMMG interface that accepts data from any EMMG
server on TCP port 5555, use the following example configuration
D5(config-emmg)#shutdown
D5(config-emmg)#channel-container cn
5(config-emmg)#client-id 1801.0001
D5(config)# exit
To define an EMMG interface that uses UDP port 4444 for control
and entitlement data from EMMG server 1.2.3.4 only, use the
following example configuration
D5(config-emmg)#shutdown
5(config-emmg)#channel-container cn
D5(config-emmg)#client-id 1801.0001
D5(config-emmg)#udp port 4444 ip address 1.2.3.4
D5(config-emmg)#data-id <1-65535>
D5(config)# exit
NOTE
In UDP-only operation, it is necessary to specify the data-id.The complete
EMMG provisioning command set is as follows:
Table 12-1: EMMG Configuration Mode Commands
Command Description
TCP
only
TCP
UDP
UDP
Only
[no] bandwidth <n>
Set the maximum allowed bandwidth
for the EMMG channel 1 - 5000 Kbps.
The [no] option sets it to 0 Kbps. A
value of zero means unlimited
bandwidth
optional optional optional
[no] channel-container <name>
Assigns the EMMG to the list of QAM
channels defined by the channel
container. The [no] option removes
the assignment.
required required required
[no] client-id <x.y>
Set the client_id for the EMMG
channel. For TCP based stream setup,
this is used to verify the received
client_id is as expected. For UDP-only
operation it is required to match the
incoming data_provision to the
correct EMMG stream.
required required required
[no] data-id <x>
Set the data_id for the EMMG channel
in UDP-only operation. Not used is a
TCP port is configured.
optional optional required
[no] data-type [EMM | PDG]
Set the data_type for the stream. The
[no] option sets it to the default which
is EMM.
[no] pid <n>
Set the PID to be used to transmit the
EMM for the stream. The [no] option
sets it to the default which is to use
the input PID value on the output
QAM.
[no] mpeg-section
Set the expected data format to the
MPEG sections for the stream. The
[no] option sets it to the default which
is to expect MPEG frames.
[no] shutdown
Enable / disable the EMMG interface.
The default is for the interface to be
administratively down.
[no] tcp port <value> [ip
address <N.N.N.N>]
Sets the port number and optional
TCP/IP address* for the EMMG.The
[no] option deletes the setting.
required required n/a
*...If no IP address is specified (promiscuous mode), the D5 UEQ will
accept connections from any EMMG on the specified port. If an IP address
is specified (restricted mode), the D5 UEQ will only accept connections
from the specified IP address/port.
EMMG Show Command Set The EMMG show commands display the basic configuration of the EMMG
and some counters that are cumulative, for example, the Total Channels
value is not the current number of channels (which would be always 0 or
1) but the number of channels that have ever been opened on the EMMG.
This concept applies to all counters. Even if the EMMG channel closes, the
counters still retain their values. Setting the EMMG to admin down resets
the counters. Data_channel_id and Active time are 0 because there is no
channel connected (line protocol is down).
The complete EMMG show command set is as follows:
D5#show video emmg <name>
EMMG ' Ar r i sEMMG' i s admi n up, l i ne pr ot ocol i s down
Cl i ent _i d i s 1800. 0001 ( Nagr a - Kudel ski SA)
TCP Por t i s 5555, conf i gur ed I P addr ess 192. 168. 250. 21
UDP Por t i s 0, I P addr ess i s not conf i gur ed
No maxi mumst r eambandwi dt h conf i gur ed
Channel cont ai ner i s ' cc1'
Dat a f or mat i s MPEG Fr ames, Dat a_t ype i s EMM
Dat a_i d i s 0, PI D i s not speci f i ed
Dat a_channel _i d i s 0, Act i ve t i me ( 0: 00: 00)
Tot al Channel s 0 St r eams 0
0 dat a_pr ovi si ons
0 st r eamer r or s
0 CC er r or s
0 channel t est s, 0 sent
Verbose Show CommandThe verbose show video command
displays the basic configuration of the EMMG and details of any channels
and streams connected to the EMMG. The stream B/W is the negotiated
[no] udp port <value> [ip
address <N.N.N.N>]
Set the port number and optional
UDP/IP address* for the EMMG. The
[no] option deletes the setting.
n/a required required
[no] ca-descriptor [ca-
system-id <id in hex> |
private-data <hex array>]
Allows private data to be added to the
CA_Descriptor of the CAT table.
Syntax is the same as access-criteria
(config-emmg)#ca-descriptor
Command Description
TCP
only
TCP
UDP
UDP
Only
bandwidth which could be less than the configured bandwidth maximum.
The Data-Provision value is formatted as number-of-message/number-of-
bytes received.
D5#show video emmg cas01-emmg1 verbose
EMMG ' cas01- emmg1' i s admi n up, l i ne pr ot ocol i s up
Cl i ent _i d i s 1800. 0001 ( Nagr a - Kudel ski SA)
TCP Por t i s 17773, connect ed I P addr ess 10. 17. 101. 100
UDP Por t i s unassi gned
No maxi mumst r eambandwi dt h conf i gur ed
Channel cont ai ner i s ' cas01'
Dat a f or mat i s MPEG Fr ames, Dat a_t ype i s EMM
Dat a_i d i s not speci f i ed, PI D i s not speci f i ed
CHAN- I D FORMAT VER ACTI VE ERRORS/ CC
123 f r ames 2 ( 73: 25: 45) 0/ 0
STRM- I D DATA- I D B/ W DATA- PROVI SI ON ACTI VE ERRORS/ CC
456 789/ EMM 150 1586113/ 298189244 ( 73: 25: 45) 0/ 0
Show Video EMMG Channel The command output displays the
stream status of the specified stream.
#show video emmg <name> channel
CHAN- I D FORMAT VER ACTI VE ERRORS
235 f r ames 2 ( 0: 00: 27) 0
Show Video EMMG Stream The command output displays the
channel status if connected.
#show video emmg <name> stream <stream-id>
STRM- I D DATA- I D B/ W DATA- PROVI SI ON ACTI VE ERRORS/ CC
123 321/ EMM 0 6/ 1128 ( 0: 03: 06) 0/ 5
124 322/ EMM 0 3/ 564 ( 0: 03: 06) 0/ 2
ECMG Configuration
The ECMG is unlike all other CAS servers in that it is a server in the tradi-
tional sense. The D5 UEQ connects to it unlike EMMG, EIS, Program
Specific Information Generator (P)SIG and other CAS servers who connect
to the D5 UEQ instead. When configuring the ECMG it is mandatory to
specify the TCP address as well as the TCP port. Multiple ECMGs can have
the same super_CAS_id. Multiples can also be assigned to a Redundancy
Group. Setting an ECMG to admin down will delete all ECM Streams asso-
ciated with it causing the ECM Streams to go to an extended Crypto-Period
or possibly be re-assigned to another ECMG, if they are setup in a redun-
dant configuration. Restrictions apply to what can be changed in the
configuration of an admin up ECMG. For example, the Redundant Group,
TCP configuration and the super_CAS_id cannot be changed in an admin
up ECMG.
Use the following command to set the ECMG:
D5(config)#video ecmg <name>
Sharing ECMG Servers It is possible to use the same ECMG Server to provide CAS support on more
than one D5 UEQ. When this configuration is required, each D5 UEQ needs
to have a unique scs_id. This identifier is used to ensure that the
ecmg_stream_id created by each D5 UEQ is unique.
In the following example, two D5 UEQs, with host names D5-One and
D5-Two respectively, sharing the same ECMG, would be configured with
unique scs_ids using the following commands:
D5-One# config terminal
D5-One(config)# video scs-id 1
D5-One(config)# exit
D5-Two# config terminal
D5-Two(config)# video scs-id 2
D5-Two(config)# exit
The complete set of configuration commands are as follows:
Table 12-2: ECMG Mode Commands
Command Description Status
[no] ip address
<N.N.N.N>
Specify the TCP/IP of the ECMG. This
is used by the D5 UEQ as the port to
connect to, when contacting the
ECMG Server.
required
[no] port <tcp-
port>
Specify the TCP Port to which the
ECMG can listen. This is used by the
D5 UEQ when contacting the ECMG
server.
required
[no] super-cas-
id <xxxx.yyyy>
specify the super_CAS_id of this
ECMG. Duplicate values are allowed.
required
The ECMG show command displays the basic configuration of the ECMG
and some counters that are cumulative, for example, the Total Channels
value is not the current number of channels (which would be always 0 or
1) but the number of channels that have ever been opened on the ECMG.
This concept applies to all counters. If the ECMG channel closes the coun-
ters still retain their values. Setting the ECMG to admin down resets the
counters. Normally the codewords_provisioned (sent) should match the
ECM_responses (received) but may not if the ECMG has failed to respond
to any cw_provision message sent by the D5 UEQ. A channel_test is typi-
cally sent on every open channel every 10 seconds and stream_test
messages are sent if an ECM_response is missed.
ECMG Show Command Set The complete ECMG show command set
is as follows:
[no] version
Set the protocol version number that
the D5 UEQ uses when creating
channels and streams with this
ECMG. Default is 2.
optional
[no] redundancy-
group <name>
Specify the redundancy group to
which this ECMG belongs if it is in a
redundant configuration.
optional
[no] primary
Specify the primary/secondary
(backup) status of this ECMG with
respect to its redundant group.
optional
[no] channel
test <seconds>
Specify the time between sending
channel_test messages when
connected to the ECMG. Default is 10
seconds
optional
[no] channel
timeout
<seconds>
Specify the time taken to wait for a
response to a channel test message.
optional
[no] channel
delay <seconds>
Specify the expected propagation
delay through the network from D5
to ECMG. This is taken into account
when calculating the time to send a
cw_provision message to the ECMG.
The longer the delay the earlier the
message will be sent (to compensate
for that delay). Default is 2 seconds
optional
[no] shutdown
Enable/disable the ECMG interface.
The default is for the interface to be
optional
#show video ecmg <name>
ECMG ' ecmg1' i s admi n up, l i ne pr ot ocol i s up
Super _CAS_i d i s 1800. 0001 ( Nagr a - Kudel ski SA)
TCP Por t i s 17771, I P addr ess i s 127. 0. 0. 1
Redundancy Gr oup i s ' unassi gned' , i s a secondar y ECMG
ECM f or mat i s MPEG f r ames
ECM_channel _i d i s 1, Act i ve t i me ( 0: 00: 22)
Tot al Channel s 1 St r eams 2
8 codewor d_pr ovi si ons
8 ECM_r esponses
0 st r eamt est s, 0 sent
0 st r eamer r or s
0 channel t est s, 7 sent
Verbose Show CommandThe verbose show command displays the
basic configuration of the ECMG and details of any channel and streams
connected to this ECMG. CW-PROVISION format is cw_provision-
messages-sent / ecm_response-message-received; they should always be
the same.
D5#show video ecmg <name> verbose
ECMG ' ecmg1' i s admi n up, l i ne pr ot ocol i s up
Super _CAS_i d i s 1800. 0001 ( Nagr a - Kudel ski SA)
Redundancy Gr oup i s ' unassi gned' , i s a secondar y ECMG
CHAN- I D FORMAT VER ACTI VE STREAMS ERRORS
1 f r ames 0 ( 0: 00: 35) 2 0
ECM- I D STRM- I D CP# CW- PROVI SI ON ACTI VE ERRORS
101 1 108 8/ 8 ( 0: 00: 35) 0
505 4 105 4/ 4
( 0: 00: 35) 0
Show Video ECMG Channel The command output displays the
channel status if connected.
D5#show video ecmg <name> channel
CHAN- I D FORMAT VER ACTI VE STREAMS ERRORS
1 f r ames 0 ( 0: 00: 48) 2 0
Show Video ECMG StreamThe command displays the stream status
of the specified stream.
ECM- I D STRM- I D CP# CW- PROVI SI ON ACTI VE ERRORS
505 4 108 7/ 7 ( 0: 00: 56) 0
Show Video ECM Name Displays details of the ECMG channel param-
eters, like delay_start, delay_stop and max_streams.
D5#show video ecmg <name> channel verbose
Channel _i d i s 1, Ti me act i vat ed ( 0: 08: 40)
ac_del ay_st ar t 0 ac_del ay_st op 0
del ay_st ar t 350 del ay_st op 350
t r ansi t i on_del ay_st ar t 0 t r ansi t i on_del ay_st op 0
ecm_r ep_per i od 100 max_st r eams 1500 mi n_cp_dur at i on
80
EIS Configuration
Typically there are either 0 or 1 EISs configured on the D5 UEQ. The
configuration is very simple in that only the TCP port needs to be config-
ured and then brought into an admin up state. Extra care should be taken
when setting the admin state to down as it will delete any SCGs provi-
sioned on the D5 UEQ through that EIS thereby causing all associated
services to be unscrambled.
EI S redundancy The D5 UEQ acts as the server for EIS connections.
Once the identifiers are used consistently between EISs (e. g. ecm_id,
etc), multiple EISs may provision/deprovision the same scrambling group.
Link redundancy for an EIS connection may be achieved through the use
of virtual interfaces.
EI S Configuration Commands
D5#(config)#video eis <name>
The complete set of configuration commands are as follows:
Table 12-3: EI S Mode Commands
[no] ip
address
<N.N.N.N>
Set the source IP address of the EIS. This
can be entered to verify the source IP of
a connecting EIS. Default is no IP
address.
optional
[no] port
<tcp-port>
Specify the TCP Port to which to listen for
connection attempts from the EIS.
Default port is no port.
required
EI S Show Command Set EIS show command output is much like that of the EMMG and ECMG. The
counters are cumulative and reset on admin down. The total SCG repre-
sents the total provisioned SCGs and does not include the SCG dele-
tions/modifications. The scg_provisions represents the total message
count and includes the SCG deletions/modifications.
EI S Show Command Set The complete EIS show commands are as
follows:
D5#show video eis <name>
EI S ' ei s1' i s admi n up, l i ne pr ot ocol i s up
TCP Por t i s 17772, I P addr ess i s <ANY>
Max SCG i s 624, Ser vi ce scr ambl i ng onl y
EI S_channel _i d i s 1, Act i ve t i me ( 0: 00: 10)
Tot al SCGs 0
0 scg_pr ovi si ons
0 scg er r or s
0 scg l i st s
0 channel r eset s
0 channel t est s
Verbose Show CommandThe verbose show command displays
basic EIS configuration plus all current SCGs, their associated services and
ecm_groups.
#show video eis <name> verbose
EI S ' ei s1' i s admi n up, l i ne pr ot ocol i s up
SCG I D 501 admi n up Act i vat i on t i me 17013 CP Dur at i on 90
Ser vi ce I D 4 Tr anspor t I D 41
EcmI D 101 super - cas- i d 1800. 0001 AC 11- 22- 33
EcmI D 103 super - cas- i d 1900. 0002 AC 44- 55- 66- 77
[no] shutdown
Enable/disable the EIS interface. The
default is for the interface to be
optional
Redundancy Group Configuration
A redundancy group is a collection of ECMGs used for redundancy. All must
have the same CA_system_id. The group also defines the redundancy
policy (like load balancing off/on). When load balancing is on, the D5
UEQ will attempt to balance the number of ECM Streams on each primary
ECMG in the group. Some ECMG may have higher stream limits than others
and this is taken into account when load balancing. Secondary ECMGs is
the group that will only be used when no primary has available capacity.
Admin down means the assigned ECMGs will ignore the redundancy config
and behave as if not assigned to a group.
Redundancy Group Command Set
D5(config)#video redundancy-group <name>
The complete set of Redundancy Group commands are as follows:
Table 12-4: Redundancy Group Command Set
Redundancy Group Show
Command Set
There is a single show command in the Redundancy Group Show. It
displays the Line protocol down which means there are no ECMGs
assigned to this group. The Total ECMGs is the current number of
assigned ECMGs. Failed ECMGs is the current number of off-line ECMGs
from the group. ECMG errors is the cumulative total of failed ECMGs.
D5#show video redundancy-group <name>
Redundancy Gr oup esr a i s admi n up, l i ne pr ot ocol i s
down
CA_syst em_i d i s 1800 ( Nagr a - Kudel ski SA)
Load bal anci ng i s enabl ed
Tot al ECMGs 0
0 f ai l ed ECMGs
0 ECMG er r or s
[no] ca-system-
id <xxxx>
Specify/remove the CA system id. required
[no] load-
balancing
Turn on/off load balancing. optional
[no] shutdown
Enable/disable the Redundancy
Group. The default is for the group to
be administratively down.
optional
Channel Container Configuration
A channel container is a simple mechanism used to group a number of
QAM channels together. It associates an EMMG with a channel container
so the CAT table and EMM tables received from the EMMG will be sent on
all channels defined in the channel container.
D5(config)#video channel-container <name>
The complete set of Channel Container configuration commands are as
follows:
Table 12-5: Channel Container Configuration Command Set
Channel Container Show
Command Set
There is a single show command used to display the Local service-id, Local
pid, Tsid and QAM service-id.
D5#show video channel-container <name>
Vi deo Channel Cont ai ner " cc1"
Tsi d QAM
1 - ( maps t o Q1/ 1. 1) UP
2 - ( maps t o Q1/ 1. 2) UP
3 - ( maps t o Q1/ 1. 3) UP
- Q6/ 1. 1 UP
- Q6/ 1. 3 UP
- Q6/ 2. 1 UP
SCG Configuration
The SCG configuration CLI was added to allow users to configure SCGs
statically, via the CLI, without utilizing an EIS<>SCS interface, that creates
them dynamically (refer to procedure 2-1). Similar to most of the CAS
servers, this concept is also based around interfaces. The CLI configured
static SCGs are displayed separately from those that are generated by an
external EIS.
[no] channel
tsid <n>
Add/remove a channel to the container,
specifying the channel using its
transport stream id <n>
optional
[no] channel
qam x/y.z
Add/remove a channel to the container,
specifying the channel using x/y.z sub-
interface notation.
optional
SCG Configuration Mode Assuming the ECMG configuration shown
in the following services will be scrambled using the same ECM Stream
from the ECMG with super-CAS-id 1800.0001, and using the
access_criteria 0x112233:
Service 1 on transport_stream_id 46
D5(config)#video scg basic_scg
D5(config-scg)#ecm-group 1 super-cas-id 1800.001
access-criteria 11-22-33
D5(config-scg)#service 1 transport 46
D5(config-scg)#no shutdown
D5(config-scg)#exit
D5(config)#
The complete set of SCG Configuration commands are as follows:
Table 12-6: SCG Configuration Command Set
[no]
activation-
time
Specify/removes the activation time in
clock time for the SCG, the time can be
in hh:mm:ss or now + secs.
If the time referred to is in the past, an
activation time of now is assumed.
Optional
defaults
to now
[no] cp-
duration
Adds/removes the crypto period
duration specified in units of 100ms,
e.g. 2000 would be 200 seconds.
Defaults to 600 (1 minute).
Optional
[no] network-
id
Specifies/removes the original network
id. If none is defined, it defaults to 4370
(0x112).
Optional
[no] service
<nn> transport
<nn>
Specify/removes a service and
transport stream id. Valid range for
both are 0-65535. No default values.
This command can be repeated for
different combinations of service and
transport stream IDs.
Optional
SCG Service Group Commands Theses command can be used to
change admin states of SCG service groups but only those SCGs gener-
ated by an external EIS client. These changes are not persistent.
D5# [no] video eis <name> scg-id <id> [ecm-id <id>]
shutdown
D5# [no] video eis <name> scg-id <id> [service-id <id>]
transport-id shutdown
SCG Show Command Set The show command set displays informa-
tion about the SCG admin state, activation time, service-id number and
other information pertinent to the static SCGs.
D5# show video scg
SCG " basi c_scg" I D 1 admi n up oper at i onal st at e i s up
Act i vat i on t i me 2007- 04- 09- 16: 04: 14. 00
Cr ypt o Per i od Dur at i on 600
Or i gi nal Net wor k I D 4370
ECM I D 1 Super _CAS_i d 1800. 0001 AC 11- 00- 34
Show Video SCG All Displays static and dynamic SCGs
D5# show video scg all
[no] ecm-group
<nn> super-
cas-id
<nnnn.nnnn>
access-
criteria <XX-
XX>
Specifies/removes an ECM group. The
first parameter is the ecm-id <0-
65535> super-cas-id in the
nnnn.nnnn format and the access
criteria in a hexadecimal string with
dashes. The maximum length of this
string is 256 characters. The ECM group
id must be unique per CA system/super-
cas-id.
Up to two ecm-groups can be
described.
Required
[no] ca-
descriptor
Allows/disallows private data to be
added to the CA_Descriptor of the PMT.
Syntax is same as access-criteria
Optional
[no] shutdown Enables/ disables the entire static SCG. Optional
Table 12-6: SCG Configuration Command Set
Verbose Show CommandExternally generated SCGs can be viewed
with this command.
D5# show video eis <eisname> verbose
EI S ' ei sAr r i s' i s admi n up, l i ne pr ot ocol i s up
CAS (P)SIG Configuration
Typically there are 0, 1 or 2 (P)SIG's configured on the D5 UEQ. The
configuration consists of the TCP port, IP address and admin up state.
Extra care should be taken when setting the admin state to down
as it will delete all channels and streams provisioned on the D5
UEQ through the (P)SI G and wont stop the carouselling of any
sections that have been provisioned, resulting in closing the
connection with the PSI G. Typically, it is the (P)SIGs job to establish
and close all connections between it and the MUX.
Basic CAS (P)SI G
Configuration
A basic CAS (P)SIG configuration might be as follows:
Where:
PSIG 1 = IP address 192.168.250.24 port 2000
PSIG 2 = port 2001
(config-psig)#ip address 192.168.250.100
(config-psig)#exit
(config-psig)#exit
(P)SIG Show Command Set The show command set displays information about the (P)SIG admin
state, TCP Port and IP address.
D5#show video psig <name>
PSI G ' Ar r i sPSI G1 i s admi n up, l i ne pr ot ocol i s down
Show verbose commandDisplays information about the (P)SIGs
Total Channels, Streams
show video psig <name> verbose
PSI G ' Ar r i sPSI G1' i s admi n up, l i ne pr ot ocol i s up
Tot al Channel s 1 St r eams 1 Sect i ons 1
Channel : Channel I D 1 TSI D 1 Net wor k I D 1 Conf i gur ed St r eams 1
St r eam: PI D 1 St r eamI D 1 Conf i gur ed Sect i ons 1
Act i ve sect i on: Channel 1 TSI D 1 Net wor k I D 1 PI D 1 Number Of Sect i ons 1
PSI G ' Ar r i sPSI G2' i s admi n up, l i ne pr ot ocol i s up
TCP Por t i s 2001, I P addr ess i s ANY
Tot al Channel s 1 St r eams 0 Sect i ons 0
Channel : Channel I D 1 TSI D 2 Net wor k I D 3 Conf i gur ed St r eams 1
St r eam: PI D 1 St r eamI D 1 Conf i gur ed Sect i ons 1
Show Video (P)SI G active sections Displays (P)SIG active sections
show video psig active sections
PSI G ' Ar r i sPSI G1'
Channel I D 1 St r eamI D 1 TSI D 1 Net wor k I D 1 PI D 1
Table 12-7: (P)SI G Configuration Command Set
[no] port <port>
The TCP port used by the PSIG to
establish a TCP connection.
Required
[no] ip address
<N.N.N.N>
The validated source IP address of
PSIG when establishing a TCP
connection on tcp port <port>
Optional
[no] shutdown
The admin state of the PSIG
interface
Required
Act i vat i on Ti me 2005 01/ 01 01: 01: 01. 01 Sect i on Lengt h 16 I nt er val 100
0x01 0x01 0x00 0x0D 0x00 0x03 0x01 0x01 0x01 0x02 0x03 0x04 0x05 0x06 0x07 0x08
PSI G ' Ar r i sPSI G2'
Channel I D 1 St r eamI D 1 TSI D 2 Net wor k I D 3 PI D 1
Act i vat i on Ti me 2005 01/ 01 01: 01: 01. 01 Sect i on Lengt h 19 I nt er val 100
0x04 0x01 0x00 0x11 0x00 0x03 0x01 0x01 0x01 0x02 0x03 0x04 0x05 0x06 0x07 0x08
DVB Simulcrypt Configuration
The D5 UEQ SimulCrypt feature supports session based encryption for VoD
and Broadcast traffic passing through the D5 UEQ Edge QAM. Since an
operators fully integrated DVB SimulCrypt deployment may consist of
various components (such as the EIS, which can be provided by many 3rd
party vendors) the D5 UEQs Simulcrypt feature handles multiple versions
of the DVB Simulcrypt standard utilized by proprietary CAS interface
suppliers. For example, if a proprietors EIS system uses a different version
of the DVB Simulcrypt standard to trigger encryption sessions with the D5
UEQ, that standard is handled seamlessly.
The D5 UEQ is primarily concerned with the generation of CWs, scram-
bling MPEG streams and ensuring proper timing synchronization between
ECM messages and MPEG scrambling
D5 UEQ
EMMG
PDG
A
C
G
PSI/ SI
Generator
SCS
CWG
M
U
X
S
c
r
a
m
b
l
e
r
SI Tables
PSI Tables
Private Data
EMMs
AC
CW
CW
ECMs
E
C
M
s
C
W
A
C
E
C
M
G
Content
&
Tables
SCG
S
I
/
I
F
A
g
e
n
t
Figure 12-2: D5 UEQ in a Simulcrypt Environment
DVB Simulcrypt
Configuration
The D5 UEQ DVB SimulCrypt feature contains extensive CLI support to
configure and monitor the operation of the major components that
comprise the feature. The different areas are EIS, ECMG, EMMG/PDG,
CWG, Scrambler and Synchronizer. They all have CLI commands to control
their operation.
An example of a basic setup follows:
Sample DVB Simulcrypt Configuration
D5(config)#video channel-container "CAS-SYSTEM"
D5(config-video-channel)#video ecmg CAS-SYSTEM
D5(config-ecmg)#ip address 10.3.14.4
D5(config-ecmg)#port 5026
D5(config-ecmg)#super-cas-id 0b00.0001
D5(config-vecmg)#no shutdown
D5(config-ecmg)#video emmg CAS-SYSTEM
D5(config-emmg)#client-id 0b00.0001
D5(config-emmg)#data-id 1
D5(config-emmgl)#no mpeg-section
D5(config-emmg)#data-type emm
D5(config-emmg)#no pid
D5(config-emmg)#channel-container CAS-SYSTEM
D5(config-emmg)#video scg SERVICE-1
D5(config-scg)#network-id 4369
D5(config-scg)#cp-duration 90
D5(config-scg)#activation-time now+10
D5(config-scg)#ecm-group 1 super-cas-id 0b00.0001
access-criteria 90-01-00-06-00-01-00-02-00-03
Procedure 12-1 Sample DVB Simulcrypt Configuration Explained
1 Setup a channel container by assigning it a name. Then assign a channel
TSID (TSID 1 by default is QAM 1/1.1) This is where the EMM tables are
to be transmitted.
D5(config)#video channel-container <CAS-SYSTEM>
D5(config-video-channel)#channel tsid 1
2 Give the ECMG a name, IP address, TCP port number and super-cas-id.
Use the no shutdown command to enable.
D5(config-video-channel)#video ecmg <CAS-SYSTEM>
D5(config-ecmg)#ip address <N.N.N.N>
D5(config-ecmg)#port 5026
D5(config-ecmg)#super-cas-id 0b00.0001
D5(config-ecmg)#no shutdown
3 Name the EMMG and assign a client-id, tcp port, IP address data-id, mpeg-
section, data-type, pid and channel-container name. Use the no shutdown
command to enable.
D5(config-ecmg)#video emmg <CAS-SYSTEM>
D5(config-emmg)#client-id 0b00.0001
D5(config-emmg)#data-id 1
D5(config-emmg)#no mpeg-section
D5(config-emmg)#data-type emm
D5(config-emmg)#no pid
D5(config-emmg)#channel-container <name>
4 Create a static SCG by giving it a name (SERVICE-1). Then create a
network-id. The default network-id for the D5 UEQ is 4369. Assign a
crypto-period duration and then specify an activation time for scrambling
to start. The no shutdown command will enable the configuration.
D5(config-emmg)#video scg SERVICE-1
D5(config-scg)#network-id 4369
D5(config-scg)#cp-duration 90
D5(config-scg)#activation-time now+10
5 Name the service that is to be scrambled and then the ECMG that will do
the scrambling.
D5(config-scg)#ecm-group 1 super-cas-id 0b00.0001
access-criteria 90-01-00-06-00-01-00-02-00-03
End of procedure
13. Redundancy
Topics Page
Multicast Redundancy 1
HOT/ WARM Redundancy 2
HOT/ HOT Redundancy 3
Redundant Stream Groups 5
QAM Redundancy 8
Failover Procedure 11
Failback procedure 12
GigabitEthernet (GE) MAC Redundancy 14
Expanded Operation in Release 3.0.1 17
GQI / RPC GigE Load Balancing 22
GigE Link Trunking Redundancy 31
Multicast Redundancy
HOT/WARM and HOT/HOT refer to the two possible methods a QAM edge
device can use to handle redundant multicast stream details.
13 Redundancy
This document describes the HOT/HOT redundancy feature, the changes
required to implement it, and how this differs from the HOT/WARM redun-
dancy provided in release 2.3. HOT/HOT redundancy will be available
when configuring video sessions for both GQI(RCP) and RTSP video
session setup modes. Although this document only deals with multicast
sessions, unicast sessions are also possible but they effectively will always
be HOT/HOT.
The number of QAM channels available on a QAM card increases from 8 to
32 and on a fully loaded D5 UEQ from 48 to 96. This is a potential output
capacity of over four Gigabits while our input capacity is limited to four
Gigabits. This becomes an important factor especially in HOT/HOT redun-
dancy if each stream has one available redundant source, as the D5 UEQ
will then be only able to handle two Gigabits of unique streams assuming
the redundant stream is of equal bandwidth to the first.
Since the ERM will be responsible for not oversubscribing the input
capacity, the D5 UEQ will be able to ensure that QAM output capacity is
not oversubscribed.
HOT/ WARM Redundancy
In HOT/WARM redundancy mode, the session manager receives a session
setup either from GQI(RPC) or RTSP. If the information is valid, the session
manager passes on the information to the IGMP task and the MpegMgr.
The IGMP task sends tries to join one stream at a time and configures a
single multicast filter rule that allows that single stream through an input
port; each rule is enabled for a CLI configurable period called the source
timeout (which is 750ms by default).
Figure 13-1: Example of HOT/ WARM Redundancy
As a result of this single rule, only one multicast stream for each session
will ever be seen on the input ports. In HOT/WARM, the first detected
stream is enabled.
HOT/ HOT Redundancy
Although HOT/WARM is available and is the current default mode,
HOT/HOT redundancy has been added. In HOT/HOT mode, the most
significant difference from HOT/WARM is that IGMP will configure all multi-
cast filter rules, associated with a session, simultaneously and attempt to
join all of them, causing the multicast traffic from each transport to be sent
to the D5 UEQ. A single SDV stream in HOT/HOT can generate two or more
times the bandwidth of that stream arriving at the input of the D5 UEQ.
In this mode, the MPEG manager will notify the session manager of all
available streams that correspond to a configured session. The session
manager will then select the stream based on priority, with a CLI configu-
Session Manager MPEC Manager IGMP I PProc
Setup
Transport List
Transport List
Setup Reply
PAT
Stream Available Message
Activate Stream
PMT
IGMP Stop
PCR Start Message
Stream Start Message
Announce
PAT
13 Redundancy
rable choice of policy. The first policy will be to wait until the highest
priority stream becomes available within the session timeout interval; the
second mode of selection would be to select the first available stream.
If a stream fails and the D5 UEQ needs to generate a switchover to a
redundant source in HOT/HOT, this will require the triggering of a rule
change. In HOT/WARM, IGMP needs to send a join for the redundant
stream at failover time.
Figure 13-2: Example of HOT/ HOT Redundancy
HOT/HOT will be available as an option for both RTSP and GQI(RCP). If
HOT/HOT is enabled, the order is the priority.
Although the GQI(RCP) specification doesnt allow an input Gigabit port to
be specified, the D5 UEQ has been designed to work as follows. If the
output port is on the first three QAM cards, the D5 UEQ searchs for the
stream on Gigabit 1 and a backup source on Gigabit 3. If the output port
is on the second 3 QAM cards, then similarly Gigabit 2 and Gigabit 4 are
used.
Once a session has been setup and is running and has failed over to a
backup stream, a CLI command will send that session back to the primary
stream. No automatic method will be provided on the D5 UEQ.
CLI Commands The following commands have been added:
Session Manager MPEC Manager IGMP I PProc
Setup
Transport List
Transport List
Setup Reply
PAT
Activate Highest Priority Stream
PMT
PCR Start Message
Stream Start Message
Announce
PAT
PAT
1 The following command will allow global redundancy mode to be set to
either HOT/WARM or HOT/HOT:
D5(config)#video sdv policy-active [hot-hot/hot-warm]
The global redundancy mode default is set at hot-warm.
2 The following command allows configuration of the setup transport
selection behavior:
D5(config)#video sdv session setup-policy [wait-for-
primary | first-available]
In wait-for-primary, the D5 UEQ will wait for the session-timeout time of
the primary stream to be detected. If the primary does not become avail-
able, then the highest priority backup stream will be selected. This is the
default action.
In first-available, the D5 UEQ will stop waiting as soon as any of the trans-
ports are detected and then the first detected stream will be made active
3 The following command allows the user to manually set a session to the
primary transport. This is intended to be used after a session has failed
over to a backup stream and the operator wants to revert to the primary
transport.
D5(config)#video sdv session [session ID] switch-to-
primary
The sessionID for RTSP will be typically an eight digit number and for
GQI(RCP) it is a ten character dot-separated hex string (e.g.
ABC100.2000).
Redundant Stream Groups
The current D5 UEQ supports HOT/HOT and HOT/WARM redundancy
options through the use of the NGOD R6 RTSP protocol. This protocol
relies on the use of multiple MulticastTransportHeaders to identify input IP
multicast streams, one of which will be forwarded as an output program
to a QAM channel. The D5 UEQ has supported HOT/HOT and HOT/WARM
redundancy internally as of Release 2.4.
The current stream management on the D5 UEQ is based on setting a
stream classifier and supplying a method to apply to the stream when it is
delivered, e.g.
video udp <454> src-ip 1.1.1.1 dest-ip 1.1.1.1 virtual-prog <channel-container>
This section introduces a new video redundant-stream <name>
command. The command enables a list of stream classifiers to be used in
place of the current classifier single input command available, for example,
13 Redundancy
video [udp <454> src-ip 1.1.1.1 dest-ip 1.1.1.1] virtual-prog <channel-container |
qam>
is equivalent to
video [redundant-stream 'super_str'] virtual-prog <channel-container |qam>
The new command enables multiple, input stream definitions to be asso-
ciated together, for redundancy reasons, and activated for forwarding.
All the existing options available with the video udp <> command apply
to the video redundant-stream <> command, and are not expected
to change. The active stream, as described in the HOT/HOT HOT/WARM
section, is the stream that the existing video udp <> command options
will apply to.
The redundant-stream refers to a named redundant-stream-group that
contains the list of video input classifiers to use for the video sources, for
example,
video redundant-stream 'super_str'[channel-container
<> | qam <x/y.z>]
video redundant-stream-group 'super_str'
are equivalent to:
D5(config-stream)#video udp <port> src-ip <addr} dest-ip <addr>
The redundant-stream-group configuration menu also includes some
policy definitions. These allow for particular behavior of the redundant-
stream-groups to be manually configured.
The policy active <hot-hot | hot-warm> option determines how
the multiple video input classifiers should be treated. The default is hot-
warm. The hot-hot option indicates that all video sources will be
requested to be delivered to the D5 UEQ, but only a single video source
will be marked as active and forwarded. In the case of multicast video
sources, the D5 UEQ must issue IGMP J oins for all video sources. In the
case of unicast video sources, it is expected that the default behavior will
be hot-hot.
The hot-warm option indicated that only a single video source will be
delivered to the D5 UEQ at a time, and this video source will be considered
the active source. If, after a configurable amount of time (switch-over
<ms>), the active video source is determined to have failed, the D5 UEQ
is expected to switch over to the next available video source. This
approach is repeated as different video sources fail and will eventually
return to the first video source in the list.
The policy switch-over <ms> option determines the switch over
time that is used to identify when an active video source is no longer
active, and a switch over is necessary. There is a default switch-over of
750ms.
Example:
D5(config-stream)#video redundant-stream-group super_str
D5(config-stream)#video udp 2321 src-ip 192.165.222.248 dest-ip 224.0.0.1
interface-ip 10.20.1.1 priority <1-255>
D5(config-stream)#video udp 2321 src-ip 192.165.12.198 dest-ip 224.0.2.1 gigabit
0/1 priority 24
D5(config-stream)#policy-active hot-hot
D5(config-stream)#policy switch-over 500
D5(config-stream)#video redundanty-group super_nothing
show video multicast-transport
D5#show vi deo mul t i cast - t r anspor t
UDP Sour ce- I P Dest i nat i on- I P I nt er f ace |
- - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - +- - - - - +- - - - - - - - - - - - - - - +- - - - - - - - - - - - - - - +- - - - - - - - - - - - - - |
mux1 > 2440| 10. 250. 42. 1| 231. 2. 2. 2| gi ge0/ 2. 1|
- - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - +- - - - - +- - - - - - - - - - - - - - - +- - - - - - - - - - - - - - - +- - - - - - - - - - - - - - +
TSI D10101 > 30002| 10. 250. 41. 13| 230. 11. 12. 101| gi ge0/ 1. 1|
30003| 10. 250. 41. 16| 230. 11. 12. 102| gi ge0/ 2. 1|
- - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - +- - - - - +- - - - - - - - - - - - - - - +- - - - - - - - - - - - - - - +- - - - - - - - - - - - - - +
Test Gr oup > 20001| 10. 250. 2. 254| 230. 2. 2. 2| gi ge0/ 1. 1|
- - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - +- - - - - +- - - - - - - - - - - - - - - +- - - - - - - - - - - - - - - +- - - - - - - - - - - - - - +
The above display shows 'super_str' in hot-hot mode, where both sources
are being received, but only src-ip 192.165.12.198 is actively being
forwarded.
show video multicast-transport super_str
2 st r eams
SSM based
HOT- HOT st andby
act i ve st r eam: ( 192. 165. 222. 248, 224. 0. 0. 1) , UDP=2321, del i ver ed t o 10. 20. 1. 1
( GE0/ 1. 1)
backup st r eam: ( 192. 165. 12. 198, 224. 0. 2. 1) , UDP=2321, del i ver ed t o GE0/ 1.
13 Redundancy
QAM Redundancy
Release 3.0 and 3.0.1
QAM Redundancy is not supported across QAMs allocated to different
WANs in dual-wan mode. It will only be supported on identical QAM type
cards (e.g. a QPM can be a spare for a QPM and a DPM can be a spare for
a DPM) assigned to the same WAN.
Release 2.6 and earlier
In Release 2.6, the D5 UEQ introduced QAM redundancy in multiple fail-
over configurations using Dual-Port QAM Modules (DPM 4DX2) in Quad
Mode and/or Dual-Port QAM Modules (DPM 6DX2) in Hex Mode with a
single WAN. QAM redundancy is not currently supported with the Quad-
Port QAM Module (QPM 8DX4) with Dual WANs. Of the many configura-
tions that may be used, ARRIS has tested and recommends the following
scenarios:
Three sparing groups configured as 1:1
Two sparing groups configured as 2:1
One sparing group configured as 5:1
The following sections will illustrate these sparing groups.
NOTE
In figures 12-3, 12-4, 12-5, and 12-6, the P signifies the primary and the
S signifies the spare.
1:1 QAM Sparing
Redundancy
The recommended sparing group configured as 1:1 is as follows:
Slot 1 primary, slot 2 spare
Figure 13-3: Example of 1:1 QAM Sparing
QAM Modules
Power
Reserved for Future Use
1 1 2 2
3 3
4 4
5 5 6 6
P S
P
S
S P
2:1 QAM Sparing
Redundancy
There are two options for the 2:1 QAM sparing groups:
Slot 1 and 3 primary, slot 5 spare
The first option would look like the following:
Figure 13-4: Example of 2:1 QAM Sparing (Option 1)
Option two would be configured to work as follows:
Figure 13-5: Example of 2:1 QAM Sparing (Option 2)
5:1 QAM Sparing
Redundancy
If you want to configure a sparing group as a 5:1 sparing group
Slot 1 through 5 primary, slot 6 spare
Figure 13-6: Example of 5:1 QAM Sparing
QAM Modules
Power
1 1 2 2
3 3
4 4
5 5 6 6
P
S
P
P
P
S
QAM Modules
Power
1 1 2 2
3 3
4 4
5 5 6 6
P
S
P
P
P
S
QAM Modules
Power
1 1 2 2
3 3
4 4
5 5 6 6
P
P
P
P
S
P
13 Redundancy
Procedure 13-1 Enabling QAM Sparing Redundancy
Use the following steps to setup QAM sparing redundancy.
1 The spare-group command allows grouping cards in a spare group as
follows:
interface QAM 1
shutdown
spare-group 1 manual
interface qam 2
spare-group 1
interface qam 3
spare-group 1
interface qam 4
spare-group 6
interface qam 5
spare-group 6
interface qam 6
spare-group 6 auto
End of procedure
QAM cards 1, 2, 3 are part of a spare-group whose spare is QAM 1. The
D5 UEQ spare card does not need to be the first card in the spare group
(as shown by the second spare group in the example) which identifies QAM
6 as the spare and whose members also contain QAM 4 and QAM 5. The
D5 UEQ provides both a 1:1 (one spare card for each active card) and a
1:N (one spare card for multiple active cards) redundancy mechanism.
The spare QAM card may be configured for three different levels of readi-
ness:
Cold Standby The spare is basically powered off in order to save on
component wear. Switch-over time to the spare, however, is the slowest
of the three readiness levels. The QAM manager would have to program
the spare card from scratch using the configuration from the failed primary
card. The target outage duration is in the order of 10 to 15 seconds.
Busy Standby The spare is fully active using its own custom configu-
ration and may be passing traffic, which will be interrupted when a primary
card fails and will be restored when the primary is recovered. This mode
allows a user to make use of spare card using traffic of lower importance.
Switch-over time is slower than Hot standby and the target outage dura-
tion is approximately 2 to 15 seconds.
Hot Standby The spare configuration is identical to the primary card
with the exception of the RF output which would be disabled to avoid RF
interference. Since the spare would not be passing any custom traffic, this
mode allows preparing a spare card for fast switch-over. The target outage
duration is in the order of less than one second if active RF switching is
used, less than three seconds if passive RF switching is used.
On the D5 UEQ, there are no significant differences between 1:1 and 1:N
redundancy modes as far as hardware or software support is concerned.
Typically, 1:1 redundancy is chosen over 1:N for its higher availability but
also for faster switchover. Therefore, Hot Standby is suited for 1:1 redun-
dancy where Cold or Busy Standby are more suitable for 1:N redundancy
scenarios.
Cold Standby is demonstrated in the above example by QAM 1 configura-
tion, the card is disabled by the shutdown command, which for the latest
DRFI QAM board will be equivalent to powering it off. On the other hand,
the D5 UEQ CLI does not provide any explicit means to configure busy or
Hot Standby mode. A user is free to configure a spare group to contain one
spare and one primary (hot 1:1 redundancy) and to manually tune the
spare configuration to match the primary (for Hot Standby).
Failover Procedure
In a properly configured spare group, an active card must have at least
one QAM channel enabled for traffic (although traffic may not be passing
at the time of switching) to be allowed to fail over to the spare card.
Failover can be triggered manually by shutting down a primary card or by
removing it from a chassis. Automatic failover happens when a hardware
fault is detected by either the QAM manager on the WAN card or the Envi-
ronment manager on the MON card.
Typical faults are as follows:
Card is powered down due to exceeded environment thresholds.
MUX FPGA heartbeat fails
Monitored RF power output is too low.
On the contrary, no automatic failover will be performed on traffic prob-
lems such as video oversubscription, buffer overflows or underflows, etc.
In order to switch over a failed primary card to its spare, the QAM manager
performs the following procedure:
1 Spare QAM interfaces are marked as shutdown if they were active and
notified as such to listeners such as the MPEG manager which will
discontinue all video traffic to spare if necessary.
13 Redundancy
2 The spare QAM card is reconfigured using primary card configuration, only
differences are applied.
3 A MAC address change notification will be sent to listeners regarding
primary card interfaces which is now the MAC address of the spare card.
On receipt of the change, the MPEG manager will reprogram the IPPROC
FPGA on the WAN card using the new MAC address. This will redirect all
video streams from the failed primary card to the spare card. The MPEG
manager may also need to reconfigure explicit stream settings on the
spare card such as latency queues.
Once the primary card is switched over, all but its QAM channel interfaces
are seen as shutdown on SNMP/CLI or other user interfaces. Similarly, on
the spare card, all but its QAM interfaces are in service and the running
configuration is left unchanged. By using the shutdown command
(manual failback mode), the running configuration of the failed card is
changed to force it out-of-service. User interaction would be required to
bring the QAM card in the failed slot back to in-service level. Alternatively,
automatic failback is performed whenever the primary card fault is cleared,
usually when the card is replaced.
Manual failback mode is configured on the CLI by using the manual qual-
ifier on the spare-group command; automatic failback mode is configured
using the auto qualifier. This is respectively demonstrated in above
example by QAM 1 and QAM 6 spare groups.
While in a 1:N sparing mode, only one QAM card can be switched over. If
another card fails while the spare is switched over, it will be put out of
service, notified as such and will not automatically failover to the spare
card even if the latter reverts to stand-by afterward. Similarly, if the spare
card hardware is missing or has failed, then failover mode will be disabled.
As long as it is unavailable, redundancy is disabled.
Failback procedure
The spare card will manage the services of a failed primary card as long
as it is out of service. However, it may be desirable to bring the replace-
ment primary card online without recovering the spare card, in order to
test it. This can be achieved by taking the replacement card out of the
spare group before bringing it online by using the no spare-group
command in the card configuration. While the card is out of the spare
group, the user is free to configure in any way s/he wishes, typically to test
its RF while not interfering with the spare. However traffic will not be
allowed through until the spare card is recovered. Once the replacement
card is reinserted into a spare group and is online, traffic will again be
allowed.
In order to switch a spare card back to an online card, the QAM manager
performs the following procedure:
1 A MAC address change notification will be sent to listeners regarding
primary card interfaces, which is now the MAC address of the replacement
card. On receipt of the change, the MPEG manager will re-program the
IPPROC FPGA on the WAN card using the new MAC address. This has the
effect to re-direct all video streams from spare card to replacement card
instantaneously.
2 The QAM manager will mute the spare card RF, reconfigure it using its
original configuration, which will activate the QAM interfaces.
If passive RF combining and manual failback mode is used, there is a
possibility that both the spare and primary card RF signals may overlay for
a brief instant. If the spare card fails or is manually shutdown while in
failover mode, traffic will automatically failback to the primary, even if the
card is out-of-service, in which case traffic will be interrupted and listeners
would be notified which may redistribute video streams to a different D5
UEQ or a different QAM card.
13 Redundancy
GigabitEthernet (GE) MAC Redundancy
The GE MAC Redundancy feature developed for the D5 UEQ in Release 2.6
provided a mechanism to use an unused gigabitEthernet port as a backup
for active gigabitEthernet ports. With four gigabitEthernet ports on the D5
UEQ, it was possible to operate a number of different sparing options, e.g.,
1:1, 2:1, 3:1 and 2x 1:1. The MAC Redundancy feature is transparent to
the services running on the D5 UEQ, meaning that it can be applied to
VOD, SDV (RPC/NGOD), BCAST, and DOCSIS/DEPI applications.
Each of the four gigabitEthernet ports on the D5 UEQ have full Ethernet
MAC functionality. When a gigabitEthernet port is used as a spare, it must
be connected to the same switch/vlan as the gigabitEthernet ports it is
sparing for. The MAC redundancy feature is configured through the use of
the ip bundle gigabitethernet x/y command entered on any
active gigabitEthernet port.
Procedure 14 Configuring gigabitEthernet Redundancy
The D5 UEQ supports 1+1 gigabitEthernet redundancy to match the 1+1
redundancy options available on some M-CMTS cores. When using the
redundancy option, the primary gigabitEthernet port is configured as
normal with IP address details, etc.
To enable redundancy, the ip bundle command is used to explicitly
nominate the backup gigabitEthernet port by specifying the correct giga-
bitEthernet interface.
D5(config-gig-if)#ip bundle gigabitethernet 0/2
D5(config)#
The configuration can be removed simply by issuing a no ip bundle
command within the primary port.
The D5 UEQ also supports modes of 2+1 and 3+1 redundancy options,
where a single gigabitEthernet port can be used as a spare for two or three
other ports (this can be useful when connected via a switch to a remote
M-CMTS core, rather than direct connections). When operating in 2+1 or
3+1, the backup port is allocated to the first primary port that fails.
The Gigabit Ethernet redundancy feature provides control over the
switching back to a primary port if it becomes active again. The ip
bundle policy non-revertive command, available in global config-
uration mode, is used to prevent reverting back to a primary Gigabit
Ethernet port if it becomes available again. The ip bundle policy
revertive command allows for automatic reverting between interfaces.
This command also allows a wait-time to be configured to deal with any
delays that occur during link activation (such as STP link-state resolution).
D5(config)# ip bundle policy non-revertive
D5(config)# ip bundle policy revertive wait-time 20
D5(config)#
It is also possible to force a switchover to the backup Gigabit Ethernet port
by entering the active gigabit Ethernet interface and entering the ip
bundle revert to command. To return from the backup to the active
gigabitEthernet port, enter the ip bundle revert from command.
These commands are immediate commands and are not stored as part of
the configuration.
D5(config-gig-if)#ip bundle revert to <<< switch over to backup
D5(config-gig-if)#
D5(config-gig-if)#ip bundle revert from <<< switch over from backup
D5(config)#
End of procedure
The configuration of the sparing is done on the active gigabitEthernet port,
by nominating the spare gigabitEthernet port to use. Multiple gigabitEth-
ernet ports can nominate the same spare gigabitEthernet port. The
switching over from the active to spare gigabitEthernet port is very fast.
The spare gigabitEthernet port runs hot (i.e., its physical layer is already
active) and when taking over from an active gigabitEthernet port, simply
activates its MAC layer, issues a gratuitous ARP and re-subscribes to all IP
multicast streams based on the active gigabitEthernet port configuration.
NOTE
A spare port must be in shut down mode before it is made part of the IP
bundle. An error will occur while attempting to configure a port that is a
spare for an IP bundle. It must be removed from the bundle being
configured.
Show Command Examples The show ip bundle command is used to display the current configu-
ration of the gigabitEthernet ports and any backup ports setup in IP
bundles. The show interface gigabitethernet x/y command will
display any IP bundle memberships that might exist.
The following are sample outputs for the show ip bundle command
under different scenarios:
13 Redundancy
Scenario 1: Normal operation, no port backed up
IP Bundle Policy: Non-Revertive
IP Bundle:
Members: GIG-1, GIG-2, GIG-3
Spare port is GIG-4, port link status is UP
Currently no port is being backed up
Scenario 2: gigabitEthernet 0/ 2 backed up after its link goes
down
IP Bundle:
Backed up port is GIG-2, port link status is down
Scenario 3: gigabitEthernet 0/ 2 still backed up after its link is
restored (non-revertive mode)
IP Bundle:
Backed up port is GIG-2, port link status is UP
Scenario 4: No port can be backed up as the link to the spare port
is down
IP Bundle:
Spare port is GIG-4, port link status is DOWN
Currently no port is being backed up
The following are sample outputs for the IP bundle status using the show
interface gigabitethernet x/y command:
D5(config)#show interfaces gigabitethernet 0/2 <<<<<Backed up port)
Gi gabi t Et her net 0/ 2 i s admi n up, l i ne pr ot ocol i s up
Har dwar e i s et her ent , addr ess i s 0000. caf e. 858d
SFP i s FI NI SHAR CORP. model FCMJ - 8521- 3
Subi nt er f ace i s up
Oper - St at e l ast changed on: Wed 14- J ul y- 2010 13: 31: 29
I P- Bndl e Por t Cur r ent l y Fai l ed Over t o Gi gabi t Et her net 0/ 4 <<<< i ndi cat ed
t hat i s i s f ai l ed over
I ngr ess management t r af f i c bl ocked
D5(config)#show interfaces gigabitethernet 0/4 <<<<<Spare port)
Gi gabi t Et her net 0/ 4 i s admi n up, l i ne pr ot ocol i s down - Not At t ached
Har dwar e i s et her ent , addr ess i s 0000. caf e. 858f
SFP i s FI NI SHAR CORP. model FCMJ - 8521- 3
Subi nt er f ace i s up admi n up, oper down
I P- Bndl e Por t Cur r ent l y Spar i ng For Por t Gi gabi t Et her net 0/ 2
I ngr ess management t r af f i c bl ocked
Expanded Operation in Release 3.0.1
System Release 3.0.1 provides support for full operation of the existing D5
UEQ features, such as SDV and VOD at the 1488 sessions per WAN
module. When running in dual WAN mode, the D5 UEQ is configured to
have a maximum of 96 QAM channels on WAN 7 and 96 QAM channels on
WAN 8. The bandwidth associated with the 96 QAM channels is close to
4Gbps interfaces.
The 4+1 GE MAC Redundancy feature exploits fastEthernet port 0/1 to add
an extra redundant port. The fastEthernet 0/1 port becomes the redun-
dant backup port to support the four active gigabitEthernet SFP ports.
The fastEthernet port 0/1 can be used as a redundant GE port for any of
the other SFP GE ports. The fastEthernet port, 0/1, is capable of 1Gbps
operation, is fitted with the necessary Phy and magnetic to terminate the
Copper port and is hooked up to a fully functional GE port on the BCM
56500 switch.
The fastEthernet port 0/1 CANNOT be used as an active GE port (i.e., a
video carrying port) because it does not support the same configuration
commands as GE ports, nor is it mapped internally in the D5 UEQ to act as
a video/depi port.
CAUTI ON
The fastEthernet 0/1 port must be configured by the D5 UEQ to
disconnect from the management VLAN when it is assigned as a
redundant GE port. This will prevent any superfluous traffic from being
transmitted into the CPU. The remaining fastEthernet, 0/2, needs to be
reconfigured with the FE 0/1 settings in order to provide the exact same
13 Redundancy
functionality as FE 0/1. Existing installations are only required to move
their NOC network configuration from FE 0/1 to FE 0/2. Failure to move
the configuration will result in losing management access to the D5 UEQ.
The feature introduced in Release 2.6 relied on the D5 UEQ WAN module
being able to detect local link failures on its active gigabitEthernet port and
force the IP/MAC address and IGMP joins from a failed gigabitEthernet
port to the configured redundant gigabitEthernet port. The D5 UEQ WAN
performs all the network refresh functions to ensure that the northbound
switch maintains connectivity to the original Ethernet MAC/IP Address
setup on the failed gigabitEthernet port.
The following diagrams show the connectivity to a northbound switch in
the existing Release 2.6 feature that only allowed the four SFP gigabitEth-
ernet ports to be used.
Figure 13-7: GE MAC Redundancy Normal Mode, External View
The dataplane network learned the IP/MAC addresses of the D5 UEQ giga-
bitEthernet ports using source address learning. The forwarding database
shows the relationship between the IP/MAC address and the network
interfaces on the switch/router.
NOC/Mgt/CAS
Network
(swi t ch/router)
D5 UEQ
Datapl ane Network
(swi t ch/router)
1
2
3
4
G
E
0
/1
G
E
0
/2
G
E
0
/3
G
E
0
/4
F
E
0
/1
M
g
m
t
F
E
0
/2
C
a
s
VIDEO/DEPI
5
CLI/SNMP/CAS
1
0.
1
.1
.1
1
0. 1
.1.2
10.1. 1.3
10.1. 1.1/XX
10.1. 1.2/YY
10.1. 1.3/ZZ
0. 0.0.0/FF
REDUNDANT
Swi t ch Forwardin g
Dat abase
10.1.1.1/MAC XX1
10.1.1.2/MAC YY2
10.1.1.3/MAC ZZ3
Max 3Gbps
The following D5 UEQ configuration is used to setup the above configura-
tion:
D5(config-gig-if)#shutdown
D5(config-gig-if)#interface gigabitethernet 0/1
D5(config-gig-if)#ip address 10.1.1.1 <IP mask>
D5(config-gig-if)#no shutdown
In the event of a failure occurring on GE0/1 (as shown in Figure 13-8), the
GE MAC Redundancy feature identifies the link failure, reconfigures the
internals of the D5 UEQ to connect the GE0/4 interface to GE0/1, then
performs a network refresh (using ARP and IGMP joins) to direct all orig-
inal traffic sent to GE0/1 to GE0/4. The switch/router updates its
forwarding database using the gratuitous ARP issued by the D5 UEQ, and
handles any IP multicast forwarding required based on the IGMP joins
received.
13 Redundancy
Figure 13-8: Failover using GE MAC redundancy, GE0/ 1 moved to
GE0/ 4
Expanding the feature from just the four SFP GE ports to include a fifth GE
port is done by using the fastEthernet 0/1 port. This port is GE capable,
and is directly connected to the same internal switch as the other four SFP
GE ports. The benefit of including the fifth GE port is that the D5 UEQ WAN
module IPP FPGA can reach its maximum throughput (previously, one of
the SFP GE ports had to be sacrificed for redundancy, with a corresponding
drop of 1Gbps throughput).
NOC/Mgt/CAS
Network
(swi t ch/router)
D5 UEQ
Datapl ane Network
(swi t ch/router)
1
2
3
4
G
E
0
/1
G
E
0
/2
G
E
0
/3
G
E
0/
4
F
E
0
/1
M
g
m
t
F
E
0
/2
C
as
VIDEO/DEPI
5
CLI/SNMP/CAS
1
0. 1
.1.1
10
. 1.1
.2
10.1. 1.3
10.1. 1. 1/FAILED
10.1. 1.2
10.1. 1.3
10. 1.1.1/XX
Dat abase af t er ARP
10.1.1.1/ MA C XX4
10.1.1.2/MAC YY2
10.1.1.3/MAC ZZ3
ARP 10.1.1.1/XX
IGMP J OIN
Max 3Gbps
The following diagrams show the external view of the expanded GE MAC
redundancy feature (using five GE ports) (Figure 13-9) and a failover
scenario (Figure 13-10).
Figure 13-9: Expanded GE MAC Redundancy, Failover Scenario
Figure 13-10: Expanded GE MAC Redundancy, External View
NOC/Mgt/CAS
Network
(swi t ch/router)
D5 UEQ
Datapl ane Network
(swi t ch/router)
1
2
3
4
G
E
0
/1
G
E
0
/2
G
E
0
/3
G
E
0/
4
F
E
0
/1
M
g
m
t
FE
0
/2
C
as
VIDEO/DEPI
5
CLI/SNMP/CAS
1
0
.1
.1
.1
10
. 1.1
.2
10.1. 1.3
10.1. 1.1/FAILED
10.1. 1.2
10.1. 1.3
10. 1.1.1/XX
Dat abase af t er ARP
10.1.1.1/ MA C XX5
10.1.1.2/MAC YY2
10.1.1.3/MAC ZZ3
10.1.1.4/MAC PP4
ARP 10.1.1.1/XX
IGMP J OIN
10
.1.1. 4
10.1. 1.4
Max 4Gbps
NOC/Mgt/CAS
Network
(swi t ch/router)
D5 UEQ
Datapl ane Network
(swi t ch/router)
1
2
3
4
G
E
0
/1
G
E
0
/2
G
E
0
/3
G
E
0/
4
F
E
0
/1
M
g
m
t
FE
0
/2
C
as
VIDEO/DEPI
5
CLI/SNMP/CAS
1
0
.1
.1
.1
10
. 1.1
.2
10.1. 1.3
10
.1.1. 4
10.1. 1.1/XX
10.1. 1.2/YY
10.1. 1.3/ZZ
0. 0.0.0/FF
REDUNDANT
Dat abase
10.1.1.1/MAC XX1
10.1.1.2/MAC YY2
10.1.1.3/MAC ZZ3
10.1.1.4/MAC PP4
10.1. 1.4/PP
Max 4Gbps
13 Redundancy
Figure 13-10 shows the configuration of the fastEthernet port as a redun-
dant port. This also shows the four active SFP GE connections to the WAN
module, providing the full 4Gbps of throughput to the WAN module.
The configuration settings for this setup are as follows:
D5(config)#interface fastethernet 0/1
D5(config-if)#shutdown
D5(config-if)#interface gigabitethernet 0/1
D5(config-gig-if)#ip bundle fastethernet 0/1
The GE MAC redundancy includes the option to revert back to a recovered
active port, automatically or manually, and provides timeouts to control
the switchover speed between active and redundant ports. The feature
also supports displaying the status of the ip bundle and logging of state
changes using syslog and SNMP logs.
GQI/ RPC GigE Load Balancing
In Release 3.0.0, GQI operates with two primary GE ports and two backup
GE ports. Sessions are mapped to GE ports based on the input port number
on GQI session requests. Input sessions mapped to 0 (zero) are only
mapped to GE1 which was a non-optimal usage of the D5 UEQ gigabitEth-
ernet input capabilities and sessions mapped to 3 or 4 were mapped
directly back to GE1 and GE2.
In Release 3.0.1, load balancing is added and the current redundancy of
S1, S2 and S3 multicast sources of received sessions will be handled deter-
ministically. It will also provide default CLI configuration to map what is
currently in Release 3.0.0.
The D5 UEQ will allow GE ports to be configured as primary or secondary
ports. This is handled through the use of the GQI SDV related command
video sdv interface gigabitethernet 0/[1-4] [primary |
secondary | none]. This command will have defaults set to match
Release 3.0.0. When using HOT/WARM mode, only primary ports will be
used. When using HOT/HOT mode, primary ports are used for S1 sources,
while secondary ports are used for S2 (or S3) sources. GE interfaces not
required for SDV operation will be marked as none.
Load balancing will be performed when a session presents an input port
=0. When in HOT/WARM mode, the session will be load balanced across
the primary ports only. When in HOT/HOT mode, the session will be load
balanced with source S1 on the primary ports, and load balance with
source S2 on the secondary ports.
HOT/HOT mode will force the use of the secondary ports, and the number
of primary ports must match the number of secondary ports. In the case
of HOT/WARM, sessions are only placed on primary ports (secondary ports
are not used at all).
The use of HOT/WARM support in Release 3.0.1 will also allow the D5 UEQ
to properly support increases in the size of the SDV tier above 2Gbps,
described later in this document.
Release 3.0.0 Operation
The current operation of Release 3.0.0 is described below.
WAN
GE1 GE2 GE3 GE4
PRIMARY SECONDARY
HOT/HOT
(S1,S2,S3,G)
No Load Balance No Load Balance
13 Redundancy
A session is mapped to an interface based on the input port number
received in the GQI request. Values 1 and 2 are mapped to GE1 and GE2,
while values 3 and 4 are mapped to GE1 and GE2. Value 0 is mapped to
GE1 only, which is incorrect, as this value indicates load balancing over the
PRIMARY ports, but results in the D5 UEQ loading up GE1 with all sessions.
Since the default is HOT/WARM, the active source is joined to GE1 or GE2,
while a backup source is mapped to GE3 or GE4. There are no rules in the
current code to prevent S2 or S3 from appearing on GE1 or GE2 which is
a problem for segregating session sources to specific interfaces.
The current 3.0.0 scheme also has no control over what ports are
PRIMARY or what are SECONDARY, having a default assignment of ports
and no way to prevent a port from being used by SDV (especially in the
case of VOD or M-CMTS).
When operating GQI Shell Sessions, the D5 UEQ has always been required
to map QAM RF ports to explicit GE ports as there was no input port
number supplied with the GQI shell session requests. The introduction of
load balancing will enable this explicit mapping to be ignored, and allow
better utilization of GE bandwidth based on committed load.
Release 3.0.1 Behavior
The following describes the operation of Release 3.0.1 with the introduc-
tion of proper HOT/HOT and HOT/WARM handling, GE port assignment,
and load-balancing. An additional option to force load balancing is also
offered (basically setting input port values of 1, 2, 3 or 4 to 0 when
received). GE port failure is also addressed, allowing the load balancing to
overcome a lost GE port.
The default operation of 3.0.1 is to mostly match how Release 3.0.0 was
configured with the addition of proper source segregation when using
HOT/HOT, and proper load balancing within the primary and secondary
ports.
The D5 UEQ is required to support an SDV CLI option that maps a GE port
as PRIMARY, SECONDARY or NONE.
The primary setting means that a GE port will be used for S1 source in
HOT/HOT mode, or S1, S2 or S3 source in HOT/WARM mode. The
secondary setting means that a GE port will be used for S2, S3 source in
HOT/HOT mode, and not use in HOT/WARM mode. The none setting indi-
cates that the GE port will not be used in GQI SDV.
The assignment of GE ports as PRIMARY, SECONDARY or NONE can only
be performed when GQI SDV is disabled.
This approach ensures that no configuration changes can occur on GE port
assignment for SDV when SDV is up and running.
Load Balancing Support
Load balancing of sessions will apply to both HOT/HOT and HOT/WARM
modes of operation.
Load balancing determines the lowest loaded GE port on which to place a
session. Multiple GE ports may exist in the PRIMARY or SECONDARY maps.
Session counts and total session bandwidth gets maintained per GE port,
incremented due to session creates, decremented due to session deletes.
The lowest loaded GE port is chosen when adding a new session to the D5
UEQ. The session remains associated with the assigned GE port until the
session is deleted or in the case of HOT/WARM until a GE port failure
occurs (and a subsequent re-balance occurs).
HOT/ HOT and HOT/ WARM Support
The current SDV HOT/HOT and HOT/WARM configuration options are
used to control GQI behavior.
When running in HOT/HOT mode, only GE ports marked as PRIMARY will
carry S1 source, while S2 and S3 sources will be mapped to SECONDARY
GE ports. In HOT/HOT mode, the number of primary and secondary GE
ports must be equal.
In HOT/HOT mode, two load balance operations are performed. The first
load balance operation relates to placing the S1 source on the PRIMARY
GE ports. The second load balance operation puts the S2 source on the
SECONDARY GE ports. The GQI SDV system fails over from S1 to S2 in the
case of a S1 source failure or PRIMARY GE failure. The GQI SDV system
fails back to S1 only when S2 fails or the SECONDARY GE port fails.
In HOT/WARM mode, only one load balance operation is performed. The
session remains associated with the GE port until the session is deleted or
the GE port fails (resulting in a re-balance). When a source fails, the D5
UEQ maintains the session on the same GE port, but forces a switch-over
to the next available source. This means the failed multicast session must
be removed before the next available multicast source is joined, on the
same GE port. This approach maintains that the total bandwidth on the GE
port remains the same (and no load balancing is required).
13 Redundancy
HOT/ WARM Link Redundancy
In HOT/WARM, the D5 UEQ has the option of load balancing all sessions
associated with a failed GE to the other available PRIMARY GE ports. This
means that a certain amount of path redundancy is available, without
requiring a full N+N redundancy setup.
Forced Load Balancing
Load Balancing in general requires an input port number of 0 to be
supplied in the case of sessions created by CreateSession, or is always
enabled for shell sessions since these sessions are created without an
input port being specified. It is also useful to allow the D5 UEQ to ignore
the supplied input port number, and perform FORCED load balancing. In
this mode, which only effects sessions created by CreateSession, any input
port not equal to 0 is set to 0, and the D5 UEQ takes over responsibility of
mapping the sessions to the available PRIMARY or SECONDARY ports
(depending on the redundancy mode, HOT/WARM vs. HOT/HOT).
Support for 2+ Gbps SDV Tier
As operators increase the number of programs (both SD and HD) in the
available SDV tier, the associated bandwidths also increase. This has a
direct impact on how an EQAM can continue to operate within the SDV
environment. If the EQAM does not have enough GE ports to match the
SDV tier, the EQAM may not join and deliver all the content requested by
the SDV users. In HOT/HOT, a maximum SDV tier of two Gigabits is
supported, primarily because the four GE interfaces are split as two
Primary and two Secondary GE interfaces. In HOT/HOT redundancy, it is
not possible to exceed two gigabits as there are only two GE interfaces.
Even in a worst case scenario, where all the SDV content is requested by
subscribers, the D5 UEQ can only support an SDV tier size of at most two
Gigabits.
Release 3.0.1 allows for HOT/WARM redundancy over all interfaces, in the
event the SDV tier exceeds two Gigabits. The D5 UEQ can perform load
balancing automatically when an input port=0 is supplied by the SDV
Server, or force load balancing itself. The use of multiple GE ports in
HOT/WARM with load-balancing allows the D5 UEQ to overcome link fail-
ures and re-balance SDV sessions over remaining active GE ports
(providing some link/path redundancy, without the need to use HOT/HOT
mode).
CLI Support
The CLI changes are limited to four commands:
video sdv policy-active [hot-hot| hot-warm]
This command is already part of the D5 UEQ CLI commands for controlling
SDV operation. The use of HOT/HOT will enable HOT/HOT operation in
GQI using both primary and secondary assigned GE ports, while
HOT/WARM will only use primary assigned GE ports.
video sdv interface gigabitethernet 0/[1-4]
[primary|secondary|none]
This command allows any of the four GE ports to be utilized for primary or
secondary use for GQI, or excluded altogether from GQI usage.
[no]video sdv policy-load-balance forced
This command overrides incoming input port numbers such that they are
treated as 0 by the GQI SDV system. Normal load balancing, where
sessions are presented with input port=0, are not affected by this
command. Using this option allows the D5 UEQ to entirely control the
session placement entirely, and enables more control of GE failure. E.g., if
USRM signaled sessions are placed on specific GEs, they cant be moved.
If the D5 UEQ removes this control from the USRM, it can place sessions
on any active PRIMARY GE port, and recover sessions to active PRIMARY
GE port from failed PRIMARY GE ports). The [no] option forces the D5 UEQ
to obey the session input ports supplied by the SDV Server.
show video sdv load-balance [verbose]
This command is used to display the SDV load-balance status of the four
GE Ports, their link-status, their assignment as primary, secondary or
none, and the counts of assigned SDV sessions and total bandwidth per
GE port. The verbose command will display the same basic information,
along with details of each session assigned to the GE port and bandwidth.
show video sdv load-balance
Oper at i on i s HOT/ HOT
GE 0/ 1 GE 0/ 2 GE 0/ 3 GE 0/ 4
Li nkSt at us UP UP UP UP
Assi gnment PRI MARY PRI MARY SECONDARY SECONDARY
SDV Count 23 25 24 24
SDV BW 203123 232001 220020 230002
13 Redundancy
show video sdv load-balance verbose
Oper at i on i s HOT/ HOT
GE 0/ 1 GE 0/ 2 GE 0/ 3 GE 0/ 4
Assi gnment PRI MARY PRI MARY SECONDARY SECONDARY
SDV Count 23 25 24 24
SDV BW 203123 232001 220020 230002
20012: G=232. 1. 11. 2: 1- 192. 139. 2. 1( 1) : 3- 192. 139. 2. 21( 2)
201123: G=232. 1. 23. 3: 2- 192. 133. 2. 1( 1) : 4- 193. 139. 2. 33( 2)
show video sdv load-balance verbose
Oper at i on i s HOT/ WARM
GE 0/ 1 GE 0/ 2 GE 0/ 3 GE 0/ 4
Assi gnment PRI MARY PRI MARY PRI MARY NONE
SDV Count 23 25 24 -
SDV BW 203123 232001 220020 -
20012: G=232. 1. 11. 2: 1- 192. 139. 2. 1( 1)
201123: G=232. 1. 23. 3: 2- 192. 133. 2. 1( 2)
The above shows a SessionID, followed by Multicast Group address
(G=232.1.11.2), followed by the GE port assigned for S1 in the case of
HOT/WARM and its source IP address, and S2 in the case of HOT/WARM
and its source IP address.
Overview of Options Release 3.0.0 to 3.0.1
Release 3.0.1 Default Operation (changes are (a) load balance in
PRI/SEC groups (b) GE1+2 in PRI, GE3+4 in SEC, (c) isolation of S1 in PRI,
S2 in SEC (d) potential for HOT/WARM for (S2, S3, G) in SEC.
D5(config)#video sdv interface gigabitethernet 0/1 primary
D5(config)#video sdv interface gigabitethernet 0/3 secondary
D5(config)#video sdv interface gigabitethernet 0/4 secondary
D5(config)#video sdv policy-active hot-hot
!load balance of input-port=0 will be on by default
Release 3.0.1 HOT/ WARM Operation (a) load balance only in PRI
groups (b) GE1+2 in PRI group (c) GE3+4 in SEC group UNUSED (d) (S1,
S2, S3 ,G) session streams maintained on 1 GE port
D5(config)#video sdv interface gigabitethernet 0/3 none
D5(config)#video sdv interface gigabitethernet 0/4 none
D5(config)#video sdv policy-active hot-warm
WAN
GE1 GE2 GE3 GE4
PRIMARY SECONDARY
HOT/HOT
Load Balance Load Balance
S1,G S2,G
WAN
GE1 GE2 GE3 GE4
PRIMARY SECONDARY
Load Balance
NotUsed
HOT/WARM
13 Redundancy
Release 3.0.1 HOT/ WARM Operation (a) load balance only in PRI
groups (b) GE1+2+3+4 in PRI group (c) (S1, S2, S3, G) session streams
maintained on 1 GE port
Release 3.0.1 HOT/ WARM Forced Load Balance Operation (a)
load balance only in PRI groups (b) GE1+2+3+4 in PRI group (c) (S1, S2,
S3, G) session streams maintained on 1 GE port (d) input port number
ignored, D5 UEQ takes over load balance
D5(config)#video sdv policy-load-balance forced
!load balance of input-port=N will be converted to 0 automatically
WAN
GE1 GE2 GE3 GE4
PRIMARY
Load Balance
HOT/WARM
WAN
GE1 GE2 GE3 GE4
PRIMARY
FORCED Load Balance
HOT/WARM
Release 3.0.1 HOT/ WARM Forced Load Balance operation with
Recovery (a) load balance only in PRI groups (b) GE1+2+3 +4 in PRI
group (c) (S1, S2, S3, G) session streams maintained on 1 GE port (d)
input port number ignored, D5 takes over load balance (e) GE failure
forces load balance recovery, moves GE3 sessions to remaining GE ports
D5(config)#video sdv policy-load-balance forced
!load balance of input-port=N will be converted to 0 automatically
!failure of primary GE port results in re-load-balance to active GE ports
GigE Link Trunking Redundancy
Link aggregation redundancy, otherwise known as trunking, allows the
logical grouping of a number of individual Ethernet interfaces into a larger,
combined bandwidth trunk, for the purposes of redundancy, speed and
increased network reliability. The total bandwidth of a trunk is equivalent
to the aggregate of all the physical Ethernet interfaces (links) in that trunk.
WAN
GE1 GE2 GE3 GE4
PRIMARY
FORCED Load Balance
HOT/WARM
13 Redundancy
Figure 13-11: GigE Link Trunking Redundancy Example
Trunking accomplishes high network availability, load balancing and
redundancy by automatically redirecting traffic to surviving links of a trunk.
If one or more physical links in that trunk are disabled, and then immedi-
ately directs them back, should the formally failed links again become
available.
SFP GigE Trunking The D5 UEQ can utilize up to four SFP GigE ports in a video trunk to create
a single logical link capable of delivering four Gbps or other redundancy
options such as 3:1, 2:2, 2:1, and 2 of 1:1. To support this, the D5 UEQ
CLI allows the manual configuration of gigabitethernet ports into static
trunking links.
Configuring a Trunk Configuring a trunk consists of creating a port channel, adding the desired
GigE ports to that port channel including a standby port, adding a loop-
back interface for management and to carry the IP address of the trunk.
The procedure is as follows:
Procedure 13-1 Creating a GigE Link Video Trunk
1 Enter the configuration mode and issue the following command to create
a port channel:
D5(config)#interface port-channel 1
Gigabit Ethernet 0/1
Gigabit Ethernet 0/2
Trunk
Group 1
QAMS
2 Add GigE 0/1 to the port-channel:
D5(config-if)#channel-group 1
D5(config-if)#no shutdown
3 Add GigE 0/2 to the port channel:
D5(config-if)#channel-group 1
4 Add GigE 0/3 to the port channel in the standby mode:
D5(config-if)#channel-group 1 standby
5 In order to modify the port-channels interface, a loopback configuration
is created next:
D5(config-gig-if)#interface loopback 1
D5(config-gig-if)#channel-group 1
D5(config-if)#management-access
D5(config-if)#ip address 10.250.24.42 255.255.255.0
D5(config-if)#exit
End of procedure
Show I nterface Command The show interface command displays a summary of the channel
configuration.
Procedure 13-2 Display I nterface Summary
In the following example, the gigabitethernet port 0/3 is not active but is
in standby mode. If either gigabitethernet port 0/2 or gigabitethernet port
0/1 fails, then gigabitethernet port 0/3 will become active
D5(config)#show interface port-channel 1
Por t - Channel 1 i s up, l i ne pr ot ocol i s up - At t ached
13 Redundancy
Har dwar e i s FEChannel , addr ess i s 0019. 17132. 169194
No. of member s i n t hi s channel : 4
Member 1: Loopback. 1 ( Act i ve)
Member 2: Gi gabi t Et her net 0/ 3. 0
Member 3: Gi gabi t Et her net 0/ 2. 0 ( Act i ve)
Member 4: Gi gabi t Et her net 0/ 1. 0 ( Act i ve)
I P addr esses: 10. 250. 24. 42/ 24
Encapsul at i on Tags: None Set
Por t Sel ect i on Cr i t er i a: Def aul t Set t i ng
Recei ved 0 br oadcast s, 0 gi ant s
0 out put er r or s, 0 col l i si ons, 0 excessi ve col l i si ons
End of procedure
14. M-CMTS Support
Topics Page
Overview 1
System Overview 2
DEPI DMPT Mode 3
DEPI PSP Mode 3
DEPI L2TP Control Plane 5
Primary/ Secondary Downstreams 4
UDP/ I P and L2TPv3 5
Downstream Channel Configuration 5
Configuration Examples 6
Operational Parameters/ Limitations 18
Overview
With the Release 3.0, support of a Modular Cable Modem Termination
System (M-CMTS) on the D5 UEQ with D-MPT/L2TPv3, D-MPT/UDP and
the DEPI L2TP Control Plane (for D-MPT) has been added. DOCSIS Timing
Interface (DTI) support already exists on the D5 UEQ hardware as part of
M-CMTS core and plays a critical role as it drives the internal timing of the
M-CMTS core and the downstream EdgeQAMs responsible for sending the
received DOCSIS 2.0 and 3.0 traffic over RF.
14 M-CMTS Support
The diagram below shows how the D5 UEQ communicates with a Cisco
10K CMTS, with a DOCSIS Timing & Control Card (DTCC) for DTI and a
SPA Interface Processor (SIP) module with Shared Port Adapter (SPA)
cards for handling M-CMTS downstream channels. The addition of the
L2TP Control does not affect this diagram

Figure 1: Example of the D5 UEQ in an M-CMTS Configuration
System Overview
The D5 UEQ supports DTI, Downstream External PHY Interface (DEPI) and
DRFI/D3.0 RF specifications. It is capable of dual-DTI server operation
(when equipped with the Dual DTI WAN Part Number 728905) and also
supports redundant Gigabit Ethernet ports for the reception of DEPI traffic.
It receives M-CMTS DEPI traffic over its Gigabit Ethernet link from a
remote M-CMTS Core (Cisco 10K). DEPI traffic consists of the DOCSIS
control plane traffic to setup dynamic sessions and DEPI data/MAC traffic
that has not passed through the final processing and RF up-conversion-
stage performed by a traditional CMTS. In the case of the M-CMTS opera-
tion, when the DEPI control plane is active, the M-CMTS core establishes
an L2TP control plane connection to setup and control DEPI data plane
session on the D5 UEQ. The M-CMTS core transmits DOCSIS traffic to a
remote D5 UEQ M-CMTS EdgeQAM to perform the necessary final
processing and RF up-conversion.
All of the D5 UEQ Gigabit Ethernet links may be used to carry DEPI traffic,
and all of the QAM channels in the D5 UEQ can be used to perform the
final processing and up-conversion of DEPI traffic (as normally done by a
traditional CMTS).
DEPI traffic can be sent by an M-CMTS Core using one of two different
formats, DOCSIS MPEG-TS (DMPT) traffic or Packet Streaming Protocol
(PSP) traffic. The current release of the D5 UEQ supports DMPT traffic,
matching the capability of available/existing M-CMTS core devices. The
establishment of DEPI data plane sessions can be statically managed
directly on each of the M-CMTS devices (core/EQAM) or dynamically
managed by the M-CMTS core to the EQAM via the DEPI L2TP control
plane interface.
DEPI DMPT Mode
DEPI DMPT mode carries DOCSIS data and MAC frames as MPEG packets
as a result of the MPEG segmentation function performed on DOCSIS
frames in the M-CMTS Core device. The finalized MPEG packets (each with
their PID set to 0x1FFE), are transported over IP to the D5 UEQ using two
different approaches, either directly in UDP/IP packets (similar to tradi-
tional VOD/SDV traffic) or within L2TPv3 packets. Each individual DEPI
DMPT flow is associated with a single QAM output channel. No QoS is
applied by the M-CMTS EdgeQAM to DEPI DMPT traffic as the M-CMTS
Core already performed QoS before the MPEG segmentation function.
Any DEPI DMPT traffic that carries DOCSIS timing (specifically the DOCSIS
SYNC MAC message) must be corrected by the D5 UEQ before being
modulated and up-converted. Correcting the DOCSIS timestamp (within
the DOCSIS SYNC MAC messages) requires that the D5 UEQ shares iden-
tical DOCSIS timestamp information with the M-CMTS Core. Accurate
Downstream/Upstream time synchronization is essential for DOCSIS to
operate. Rather than distribute the M-CMTS core timestamp, the M-CMTS
specifications provides a DOCSIS Timing Interface, DTI, that uses a timing
server to distribute a common timestamp to a set of clients. The D5 UEQ
and the M-CMTS Core act as DTI clients connected to the DTI server (a
limit of 200m exists between client/server connections). The DTI server
operates the DTI protocol to ensure that the 10.24MHz clock and DOCSIS
timestamp get delivered accurately to each client. As a result the D5 UEQ
has an identical copy of the DOCSIS timestamp and is able to correct the
DOCSIS SYNC message to ensure that the DOCSIS MAC system can
operate within this distributed environment.
DEPI PSP Mode PSP mode is currently not supported as part of D5 UEQ System.
14 M-CMTS Support
DEPI L2TP Control Plane
DEPI supports a dynamic control plane interface over L2TP that allows an
M-CMTS core to request an EQAM to setup DEPI dynamic session
endpoints to which the M-CMTS core transmits its DEPI data/MAC traffic.
A dynamic session maps directly to a single QAM channel on an EQAM.
Similar to static DEPI sessions, the M-CMTS core must identify the
frequency, power, interleaver, annex, etc of each RF channel it wants to
use. For dynamic sessions, the M-CMTS core must also identify the TSIDs
(Transport Stream IDentifier) of the remote QAM channels that will be
used, and signals this TSID as part of the dynamic session setup requests.
The M-CMTS Core acts as the client requesting DEPI sessions from the
EQAM server.
The DEPI L2TP Control Protocol requires a unique control connection to be
established from an M-CMTS core to a gigabitEthernet input port on the
EQAM. The EQAM must operate at least one control plane connection per
gigabitEthernet port (The D5 UEQ can support >1 control plane per giga-
bitEthernet port in order to allow multiple M-CMTS core devices to share a
gigabitEthernet port if necessary).
The DEPI L2TP control plane requires a control connection to be estab-
lished between the Core and the EQAM (SCCRQ->SCCRQ->SCCN). Once
setup, the Core signals session setup requests to the EQAM, one per QAM
channel to establish DEPI dynamic sessions (ICRQ->ICRP->ICCN->SLI).
The session setup establishes an L2TP tunnel between the M-CMTS core
and the EQAM, and can optionally reconfigure the QAM/RF parameters of
the remote QAM channel on the EQAM. The EQAM is dynamically config-
ured with an L2TP SessionID on the connected gigabitEthernet port during
the session setup. (Static and dynamic L2TP sessions are treated the same
from a data traffic processing perspective on the D5 UEQ). Once the
dynamic sessions are established, the M-CMTS core can transmit to the D5
UEQ that classifies and forwards the received DEPI traffic to the dynami-
cally assigned QAM channel for final stage processing (DTI overwrite)
before transmitting to RF.
Primary/ Secondary Downstreams
A QAM channel receiving DEPI DMPT traffic with DOCSIS timing is known
as a primary downstream channel. A QAM channel receiving DEPI DMPT
traffic WITHOUT DOCSIS timing is known as a secondary downstream
channel. DOCSIS 1.0/1.1/2.0 CMs can only operate with primary down-
stream channels, while DOCSIS 3.0 modems require a minimum of one
primary downstream channel (the remaining downstream channels used
by a 3.0 modem can be primary or secondary). The D5 UEQ also supports
wideband mode of operation where the M-CMTS Core generates the
primary downstream QAM channel locally, and relies on the D5 UEQ to
handle the secondary downstream QAM channels.
UDP/ IP and L2TPv3
The carriage of DMPT packets over IP is possible using UDP/IP or L2TPv3.
In the case of UDP/IP, the DMPT MPEG traffic is placed in an IP packet
addressed to a Gigabit Ethernet link on the D5 UEQ (via the destination IP
address). The destination UDP port of the IP packet is mapped to a specific
output QAM channel on the D5 UEQ. All traffic received by the D5 UEQ on
this UDP/IP combination is passed to the correct QAM channel for DOCSIS
timestamp correction (if necessary) and RF up-conversion. In the case of
L2TPv3, the DMPT MPEG traffic is placed in an L2TPv3 packet containing
an L2TPv3 Session ID and an L2TPv3 DEPI DMPT Sub-layer header
(comprising of some control fields and a separate sequence number). The
L2TPv3 traffic is typically sent as native traffic, without any UDP header,
using IP protocol type 115. (carriage using L2TPv3/UDP is also supported).
All field trials to date have identified that native L2TPv3 is in use (no
evidence of L2TPv3/UDP).
With both cases, static mappings can be configured on the D5 UEQ or the
DEPI L2TP control plane can be used. For static mappings, the D5 UEQ
provides a set of commands, detailed below that are used to manage these
mappings to QAM channels. The UDP/IP or SessionID/IP settings config-
ured on the D5 UEQ must be used by the M-CMTS Core to setup its
mappings.
In both cases, as IP packet fragmentation is actively avoided, a maximum
of seven MPEG packets (when using an MTU of 1500) are carried. For
dynamic sessions, a depi control-plane configuration option is provided
via the CLI and WEB to configure the L2TP endpoint configuration. When
the DEPI control plane is in use, any previously configured static mappings
present on QAM channels must be removed.
Downstream Channel Configuration
Like all EdgeQAMs, the D5 UEQ allows downstream QAM parameters to be
configured. An operator must ensure that the M-CMTS core downstream
QAM configuration matches the configuration of the remote EdgeQAM.
This can be achieved by cross-checking configurations; specifically,
ensuring that the L2TPv3 session ID assigned to the M-CMTS core RF
channel details matches the EdgeQAM session ID and RF parameter
details.
In the case of the DEPI Control Plane, the operator must check that the
TSIDs configured on the M-CMTS Core downstream configuration matches
the desired QAM channel on the EQAM. Note that the configuration of all
the RF parameters can be dynamically modified by the M-CMTS Core when
using the DEPI control plane. This removes the need or checking of RF
configurations associated with the static mode of operation.
14 M-CMTS Support
Configuration Examples
The following configuration examples identify the basic D5 UEQ configura-
tion to setup the downstream QAM and DEPI settings from a static mode
of operation.
NOTE
For both static and dynamic, the QAM channels must be configured on
the D5 UEQ with some RF parameters, as well as being enabled/powered
up.
NOTE
The DTI procedure applies to both static and dynamic configurations.
Procedure 14-1 Setting up the downstream QAM settings
In this example, we are setting up four downstream QAM channels for
Annex-A operation at 256 QAM modulation transmitting at 548MHz,
556MHz, 564MHz and 572MHz. The channels are all transmitted with a
power output of 50 dBmV.
NOTE
There is no requirement to address interleaver settings with Annex-A, as
there is only a single interleaver setting (I=12, J =17) allowed. For Annex-
B, the interleaver setting must match the CMTS configuration.
Starting in configuration mode:

D5(config)#interface qam 1
D5(config-if)no shut
D5(config-if)exit
D5(config-qam-port)#video annex a
D5(config-qam-port)#video format 256
D5(config-qam-port)#video frequency 548000000
D5(config-qam-port)#video power 50
# Note: The video spectral-inversion command listed below is not required and
# should not be used in Annex-B. This command is required for Annex A only.
D5(config-qam-port)#video spectral-inversion
D5(config-qam-port)#channel mode quad
D5(config-qam-port)#no shutdown
D5(config-qam-chan)#no shutdown
D5(config-qam-chan)#exit
D5(config)#
The channel mode quad setting in the above configuration sets up four
adjacent QAM outputs from the QAM 1/1 F-connector, starting at 548MHz.
Channel mode single, dual and hex are also allowed (hex is only available
for Annex B).
End of procedure
Procedure 14-2 Setting up DEPI addressing
To setup DEPI addressing associated with each QAM channel, the
following configuration for each QAM channel is required. The number
after dmpt is the dest-ip address which identifies the ingress gigabitEth-
ernet port on the D5 UEQ that the L2TPv3 DEPI stream must be sent to
(this is used to manually allocate input bandwidth over the available giga-
14 M-CMTS Support
bitEthernet ports) followed by the L2TPv3 sessionI D for the particular
QAM channel. Of course, the following commands can be entered when
enabling the individual QAM channels in the previous step.
D5(config-qam-chan)#depi dmpt dest-ip 10.30.4.99 sessionId 49162
D5(config)#
The above configuration is setup for four primary downstream channels
signaled using the L2TPv3 data plane.
To use UDP as the transport, the following commands are required to
setup the data path between the ingress gigabitEthernet ports and the
output QAM channels:
D5(config-qam-chan)#depi dmpt dest-ip 10.30.4.99 udp 49162
D5(config)#
End of procedure
NOTE
UDP/ L2TP RulesIf UDP or L2TPv3 DEPI sessions are not configured
correctly to match what is being sent, and a DEPI rule for UDP port 1-
65535 was created, that rule will also allow an L2TPv3 sessionID of 1-
65535 to pass.
Example:
D5(config-qam-chan)#depi dmpt dest-ip N.N.N.N udp 1000
A backup rule of depi dmpt dest-ip 1234 sessionid 1000 will
also be configured. If the user sends in UDP 1000, the traffic matches the
rules. If the system is misconfigured, traffic using L2TPv3 sessionId 1000
would still pass.
The reverse is also true.
Example:
D5(config-qam-chan)#depi dmpt dest-ip N.N.N.N sessionid 1000
A backup rule of depi dmpt dest-ip 1234 udp 1000 will also be
configured. If the user sends in L2TPv3 traffic using sessionID 1000, the
traffic matches the rules. If the system is misconfigured, traffic using UDP
port 1000 would still pass.
Procedure 14-3 Configuring gigabitEthernet Redundancy
The D5 UEQ supports 1+1 gigabitEthernet redundancy to match the 1+1
redundancy options available on some M-CMTS cores. When using the
redundancy option, the primary gigabitEthernet port is configured as
normal with IP address details, etc.
To enable redundancy, the ip bundle command is used to explicitly
nominate the backup gigabitEthernet port by specifying the correct giga-
bitEthernet interface.
D5(config)#
End of procedure
The configuration can be removed simply by issuing a no ip bundle
command within the primary port.
The D5 UEQ also supports modes of 2+1, 3+1 and 4 + 1 redundancy
options, where a single gigabitEthernet port can be used as a spare for
two, three or four other ports (this can be useful when connected via a
switch to a remote M-CMTS core, rather than direct connections). When
operating in 2+1, 3+1 or 4+1, the backup port is allocated to the first
primary port that fails. The D5 UEQ will automatically switchback to the
14 M-CMTS Support
primary port if it recovers, to ensure that the backup port continues to be
available. For complete information, refer to GigabitEthernet (GE) MAC
Redundancy, page 13-14.
The Gigabit Ethernet redundancy feature provides control over the
switching back to a primary port if it becomes active again. The ip
bundle policy non-revertive command, available in global config-
uration mode, is used to prevent reverting back to a primary Gigabit
Ethernet port if it becomes available again. The ip bundle policy
revertive command allows automatic reverting between interfaces to
occur. This command also allows a wait-time to be configured to deal
with any delays that occur during link activation (such as STP link-state
resolution).
D5_2(config)# ip bundle policy non-revertive
D5_2(config)# ip bundle policy revertive wait-time 20
D5_2(config)#
It is also possible to force a switchover to the backup Gigabit Ethernet port
by entering the active gigabit Ethernet interface and entering the ip
bundle revert to command. To return from the backup to the active
gigabitEthernet port, enter the ip bundle revert from command.
These commands are immediate commands and are not stored as part of
the configuration.
D5(onfig)#interface gigabitethernet 0/1
D5(config-gig-if)#ip bundle revert to <<< switch over to backup
D5(config-gig-if)#
D5(config-gig-if)#ip bundle revert from <<< switch over from backup
D5(config)#
End of procedure
The show ip bundles command is used to display the current configu-
ration of the gigabitEthernet ports and any backup ports setup in ip
bundles. The show interface gigabitEthernet x/y.z command
will display the any ip bundle memberships that might exist.
Procedure 14-4 Configuring L2TP Control Plane
As per the static configuration, the QAM channels that are assigned for M-
CMTS operation must be configured enabled (no shutdown on each QAM
channel), and configured with some RF configuration values. It makes
sense to set the RF parameters to match the typical DOCSIS configuration
in use, as this is likely to be reused for M-CMTS.
An additional parameter, the TSID, not normally associated with DOCSIS
must also be configured for each QAM channel. This parameter is a 16-bit
value, with valid values from 1-65535. The value is typically unique per
QAM channel within an operators network; however, for DEPI control
plane operation, the uniqueness requirement is only necessary per EQAM.
The D5 UEQ QAM channels are addressed using the naming convention
QAM X/Y.Z, where X is the slot number (starting at 1, top left), Y is the
physical port number (starting at 1, left to right) and Z is the
logical/channel number on the physical port (starting at 1). So, QAM 1/1.1
would map to the first QAM channel on the first port of the QAM module
in slot 1. The D5 UEQ assigns default TSID values to every QAM channel
present in the chassis. The D5 UEQ allocates TSID values to QAM channels
by following the X/Y.Z nomenclature, so QAM 1/1.1 would have TSID
10101, and QAM 4/1.3 would have a default TSID of 40103. All the QAM
channels have similar default TSID assignments. This numbering approach
simplifies QAM channel identification, and also ensures that the TSIDs are
unique within a D5 UEQ, even when fully populated with QAM modules.
The TSID can be changed, if required, by using the video tsid <val>
command on any of the D5 UEQ QAM channels.
14 M-CMTS Support
The DEPI control plane must be enabled on the D5 UEQ to allow an M-
CMTS core connect to it. The D5 UEQ has a DEPI control-plane configura-
tion available on the CLI and the WEB.
D5#config t
D5(config)#depi control-plane
D5(config-depi)#?
authentication - L2TP authentication
depi - Configure DEPI
end - Exit configuration mode
exit - Exit Mode / CLI
hello-interval - L2TP hello-interval
ip-header - Choose how IP headers are populated
lock-qam-bandwidth - Prevents video from sharing DEPI QAM-channels
lock-qam-rf - Controls QAM RF attribute locking for the control-plane
max-connections - Maximum number of DEPI connections
mtu - Maximum Transmission Unit
no -
protocol - Choose which L2TP layers to enable
qam-set-failure - Controls how the control-plane handles failed RF sets
retry - Change packet retry behaviour
router-id - L2TP router-id field
shared-secret-1 - Add shared-secret key
shared-secret-2 - Add shared-secret key
shutdown - Disable the DEPI control-plane
sli - Set Link Info behaviour
vendor-name - L2TP vendor-name field
video - video configuration
D5_2(config-depi)#no shutdown
D5_2(config-depi)#exit
D5_2(config)#
The default settings of the DEPI control plane to not need to be modified
in order to get it working with a remote M-CMTS core.
To enable the debugging of the DEPI control plane, the following CLI
commands have been added, and should be used if issues arise during the
operation of the DEPI control plane
D5_2#debug module depi control-plane ?
authentication - L2TP authentication
avp - L2TP AVP
connection - L2TP connection
database - L2TP database
gas - GAS layer
session - L2TP session
To setup the full debugging of the DEPI control plane, enter the following
sequence of commands
configure debug cli
debug module depi control-plane connection 5
debug module depi control-plane session 5
debug module depi control-plane avp 5
term mon
In order to disconnect established DEPI control plane connections and
sessions, the following commands are available.
depi disconnect connection 20
- del et e DEPI conn#20 gr acef ul l y ( and al l i t s sessi ons)
depi disconnect connection 20 session 10
- del et e DEPI sess#10 on conn#20 gr acef ul l y
depi disconnect connection 20 force
- del et e DEPI conn#20 and al l sessi ons i mmedi at el y
depi disconnect connection 20 session 10 force
- del et e DEPI sess#10 on conn#20 i mmedi at el y
14 M-CMTS Support
Status commands
Once the D5 UEQ is configured for DEPI and is receiving input from a
remote M-CMTS core, the following diagnostic commands are available for
displaying the current configuration and running status of the system.
D5 UEQ DEPI Status To determine the configuration and status of the input DEPI sessions and
any errors that may have occurred, use the following command:
show depi sessions [sessionId] [verbose]
Following are examples of this command and output that may be received.
D5#show depi sessions
SESSI ON UDP SRC- I P DEST- I P QAM
49162 - - 10. 30. 4. 99 1/ 1. 1
49163 - - 10. 30. 4. 99 1/ 1. 2
49164 - - 10. 30. 4. 99 1/ 1. 3
49164 - - 10. 30. 4. 99 1/ 1. 4
D5#show depi sessions verbose
SESSI ON UDP SRC- I P DEST- I P QAM PKT_COUNT SEQ_ERROR
49162 - - 10. 30. 4. 99 1/ 1. 1 3927218424 1
49163 - - 10. 30. 4. 99 1/ 1. 2 3927217864 0
49164 - - 10. 30. 4. 99 1/ 1. 3 3927218375 0
49165 - - 10. 30. 4. 99 1/ 1. 4 3927218284 0
Dual DOCSIS Timing Interface (DTI)
DTI WAN).
NOTE
This adapter will not work on the Single DTI WAN (Part Number 722012).
Configuring Dual DTI
Operation
When operating in auto (redundant) mode, the D5 UEQ will allow you to
configure the behavior of the DTI port during failover or recovery. The
revertive command option, if enabled, will force a switchover to the
primary DTI link whenever it recovers after a failure.
To disable this mode and force the D5 UEQ to remain on its current DTI
link without switching back to any recovering links, the no revertive
command should be used (as shown in the following example).
To enable the redundant setup, the following commands should be
entered:
D5(config)#interface dti
D5(config-dti)#auto
D5(config-dti)#no revertive
D5(config-dti)#no shutdown
D5(config-dti)#exit
D5(config)#
Procedure 14-5 Setting up the DTI configuration
The D5 UEQ automatically performs the SYNC timestamp overwrite using
the DOCSIS timestamp supplied using the DTI links.
In order to setup the DTI link configuration, the DTI interface must be
enabled as follows:
D5(config-dti)#port 1
D5(config-dti)#exit
D5(config)
End of procedure
Procedure 14-6 Dual DTI Support
DTI WAN Part Number 728905). The DTI port on the D5 UEQ is internally
wired to deliver two separate DTI server signals to the DTI controller on
the D5 UEQ allowing for redundant server setups.
To enable the redundant setup, the following should be entered:
D5(config-dti)#auto
D5(config-dti)#no revertive
D5(config-dti)#exit
D5(config)
When operating in auto (redundant) mode, the D5 UEQ also allows for
the behavior of DTI port selection during failover/recovery to be config-
ured. The revertive command option, if enabled, will force a
switchover to the primary DTI link whenever it recovers after a failure.
14 M-CMTS Support
To disable this mode and force the D5 UEQ to remain on its current DTI
link without switching back to any recovering links, the no revertive
command should be used (as shown in the above example).
End of procedure
Procedure 14-7 Setting a Time Offset Adjustment
The D5 UEQ supports setting a time offset value per RF output that is
applied to the received DTI clock. This may be used to tune up the time
offset values as reported by the show cable modem output from an M-
CMTS core. The offset is measured in time tick values.
To reduce the time offset value of all the QAM channels associated with
QAM 1/1 by 40 ticks, the following should be entered:
D5(config-qam-port)#dti offset -40
D5(config)
End of procedure
DTI Server configuration The default DTI configuration is DTI enabled, automatic port select,
revertive port switchover disabled. Once a valid DTI signal is detected, the
DTI interface will automatically synchronize. The DTI status will reflect the
current DTI state. The states are:
Warmup Wait for clock system to become stable
Freerun System clock is not synced to DTI and is freerunning
Fast Acquire DTI signal is detected and synchronization is in process
Normal System clock is synchronized to the DTI signal
Bridging DTI synchronization lost, trying to recover
Holdover DTI synchronization lost, system timing using last known
corrections
D5 UEQ DTI Status To determine the status of the input DTI port and the connection to the
remote DTI server the show interface dti command is provided.
The following is sample output of the show interface dti commands
when the D5 UEQ is connected to a remote DTI server.
D5#show interface dti
DTI st at us: nor mal , por t 1 act i ve, 10. 24 MHz cl ock pr esent
DTI enabl ed, aut omat i c por t sel ect , r ever t i ve por t di sabl ed
D5#show interface dti counters
T3: 000 T4: 004 T6: 000 T7: 002
Nor mal Ti me 1251000 Hol dover Ti me 5100
D5#show interface dti 1
Por t 1 f r ame er r or l ess t han 2 per cent
Ser ver t ype i s r oot , not t i med, wi t h a t ype I cl ock|
cl i ent i s st abl e, cabl e advance i s val i d, ser ver i s i n nor mal mode
CRC ERR 0x37
Advance 0x0000132a
Por t 1 TOD 1980/ 01/ 21 01: 59: 10 GMT +00
D5#show interface dti 2
Por t 2 f r ame er r or l ess t han 2 per cent
Ser ver t ype i s r oot , not t i med, wi t h a t ype I cl ock
cl i ent i s st abl e, cabl e advance i s val i d, ser ver i s i n nor mal mode
CRC ERR 0xe1
Advance 0x0000167d
Por t 2 TOD 1980/ 01/ 21 01: 59: 17 GMT +00
DTI Logs The following logs relating to the DTI interface are generated:
DTI-5-PORT_STATUS Port # Active
DTI-5-PORT_STATUS Port # Error Rate > 5%
DTI-5-PORT_STATUS Port # Signal Lost
DTI-3-NO_ACTIVE_PORT No Active DTI port
DTI-6-STATE_CHANGE New State (as listed above
The following is a log session of a DTI link failure when dual DTI links are
setup on the D5 UEQ:
MAY 02 04: 33: 29: %DTI - 5- PORT_STATUS: Por t 2 Si gnal Lost
MAY 02 04: 33: 29: %DTI - 5- PORT_STATUS: Por t 1 Si gnal Lost ( 2 l ogged)
MAY 02 04: 33: 29: %DTI - 6- STATE_CHANGE: New st at e br i dgi ng ol d st at e nor mal
MAY 02 04: 33: 31: %DTI - 3- NO_ACTI VE_PORT: No act i ve DTI por t
MAY 02 04: 33: 31: %DTI - 6- STATE_CHANGE: New st at e hol dover ol d st at e br i dgi ng
MAY 02 04: 33: 32: %DTI - 5- PORT_STATUS: Por t 1 Si gnal Det ect ed
14 M-CMTS Support
MAY 02 04: 33: 32: %DTI - 5- PORT_STATUS: Por t 1 Er r or Rat e < 5%
MAY 02 04: 33: 32: %DTI - 5- PORT_STATUS: Por t 1 Act i ve
MAY 02 04: 33: 32: %DTI - 6- STATE_CHANGE: New st at e f ast ol d st at e hol dover
MAY 02 04: 33: 32: %DTI - 5- PORT_STATUS: Por t 2 Si gnal Det ect ed
MAY 02 04: 33: 32: %DTI - 5- PORT_STATUS: Por t 2 Er r or Rat e < 5%
MAY 02 04: 33: 39: %DTI - 6- STATE_CHANGE: New st at e nor mal ol d st at e f ast
Operational Parameters/ Limitations
The D5 UEQ currently supports D-MPT with native L2TPv3 (no UDP
header) and over UDP/IP
The D5 UEQ does not support PSP mode
The D5 UEQ does not support the L2TPv3 Control Connection for dynamic
management of DEPI.
15. Security
Topics Page
Overview 1
TACACS+ Authentication 4
Radius 7
Setting up RADI US 7
AAA Configuration 10
Global Enable Password on SecureI D Systems 19
Overview
The D5 UEQ supports RADIUS Authentication, TACACS+ Authentication
and a limited AAA (Authentication, Authorization and Accounting) frame-
work required to setup Radius.
RADIUS or TACACS+ can be configured as a remote Authentication
protocol for the login and enable CLI levels. Multiple RADIUS/TACACS+
servers can be configured and added to server groups to allow for server
redundancy. As part of the AAA framework, the use of RADIUS or
TACACS+ authentication can be finely tuned to different CLI interfaces
such as the console line, the multiple vty (telnet) lines or the HTTP inter-
faces.
15 Security
Local authorization of commands is based on command privilege level,
allowing commands to be moved from the higher privilege enable level
into the lower Privilege login level. Default privilege levels will apply for
all of the CLI commands supplied with the D5 UEQ; some additional
commands will be used to change the privilege setting per command.
The extent of the feature development for both TACACS+ and RADIUS is
to support remote authentication of users gaining access to the D5 UEQ.
The D5 UEQ will provide basic configuration commands to setup details of
TACACS+ and RADIUS protocols/servers. Once the AAA protocols/servers
are configured, additional commands will be provided to enable the user
to configure the AAA services to meet their needs, and will include other
options for authentication including local database and no authentication
at all. The AAA model allows for different management interfaces (serial,
telnet, ssh, etc) to be configured differently, allowing a user to define
different AAA policies on these interfaces.
The AAA Model The AAA security model is an architectural framework for the implementa-
tion and management of common security functions within a mixed
network environment and is an industry standard adhered to by our
competitors. The model distinguishes authentication (verification of a
users identity) from authorization (verification that a users actions are
permissible) and offers accounting services with respect to both.
Moreover, the model separates security policy from policy enforcement
thereby enabling a distributed security scheme with centralized policy
management for each independent function. The following figure provides
a network-level illustration.
Figure 15-1: Full AAA Security Model

Authentication
Servers
Authorization
Servers
Accounting
Servers
Router

login attempt

command xyz

login attempt
D5 UEQ

D5 UEQ
In the figure above, the D5 UEQ and the Router are AAA clients that defer
login authentication and command authorization responsibilities to remote
servers. Information regarding each authentication or authorization
exchange is forwarded to accounting servers where historical records of
user activity are maintained.
Note that the AAA model itself does not demand a distributed security
scheme but simply offers enough flexibility to accommodate it. Any and all
of the AAA functions can be administered locally at an element. For
example, an element can defer login authentication to a remote authority
but authorizes each command locally based on element-specific policy
such as the users privilege level. Similarly, an element can authenticate
locally (e.g., from a password file) but defers authorization to an external
server on a per-command basis.
In the case of Radius Authentication on the D5 UEQ, the above diagram is
modified slightly with the following configuration setup.
Figure 15-2: Radius Authentication Model on the D5 UEQ
Login attempts are terminated in the D5 UEQ. The login to the CLI is
authenticated using either local authentication (authn) database (which is
the default out of box configuration for the D5 UEQ) or the RADIUS
protocol to connect to the remote authentication servers. As the D5 UEQ
follows the industry standard notion of a separate login password and a
separate enable password, both of these can be authenticated using the
remote RADIUS servers.
Authentication
Servers
Authorization
Servers
Accounting
Servers

D5 UEQ

Router

login attempt
command xyz
login attempt
Local
Authz
DB
Local
Authn
DB
D5 UEQ
Local
Acct
DB
15 Security
The D5 UEQ also supports local authorization of commands based on priv-
ilege level of the login. A normal login is assigned a privilege level of 0,
while an enable login is assigned a privilege level of 15. Commands avail-
able on the D5 UEQ can have their privilege level re-assigned through the
use of the privilege exec level command, allowing a user to setup the
commands applicable to either the login or enable levels. A number of
commands are setup by default at the login level, while all other
commands are setup with privilege level 15.
I nitial Setup The D5 UEQ, when initially setup, has no usernames or passwords config-
ured, and access is only available through the console port. Once IP
addresses and username/passwords are setup, access via Telnet is
enabled. In this configuration, a login password and enable password
exist per user and are stored as part of the configuration file.
To state this in AAA equivalent terms, the authentication for login and
enable levels are set to use the local authentication database (e.g. the
username/passwords configured on the D5 UEQ), while there is no autho-
rization for command or exec modes, and no accounting for command or
exec modes. Note that no AAA commands are part of the D5 UEQ initial
configuration file.
Local Authorization As mentioned, the D5 UEQ does support the notion of local authorization
of commands. This is achieved by assigning a privilege level to each
command, from 0 to 15. Typically, the privilege level associated with login
is set to 0, while the privilege level associated with enable level is 15. A
user setup with only login privileges will only have access to those
commands configured to privilege level 0, while a user setup with login and
enable privileges will have access to privilege level 15 commands.
The notion of local command privilege levels influences the operation of
the CLI to the point where the ? CLI option output (for displaying all avail-
able commands within the current CLI context) gets filtered based on the
users privilege level and privilege level of commands within the context.
When AAA is enabled on the D5 UEQ, the user gets the opportunity to
modify how the user authentication command is setup. The user is also
provided with the option of tailoring how AAA operates on each of the
different interfaces capable of supporting the CLI, including console and
vty (telnet) on the D5 UEQ (these are typically known as lines).
TACACS+ Authentication
Terminal Access Controller Access Control System plus (TACACS+) is a
relatively simple, TCP-based protocol supporting distinct request/response
transactions for authentication, authorization, and accounting. TACACS+
supports full payload encryption via MD5.
TACACS+ offers authentication for a wide variety of user services including
login, privilege-level change (e.g. entering enable mode) and password
change. It employs an unbounded, server-controlled challenge-response
mechanism in which the server may issue any number of challenges to a
user prior to accepting or rejecting a service request. If the server rejects
a service request, the client drops the connection. Otherwise, the client
establishes the service parameters (e.g., session timeout, idle timeout,
privilege level) as directed by the server and initiates the service.
AAA Treatment of SSH
I nterfaces
Each SSH interface allows an SSH user to authenticate themselves to the
system using an SSH key. If no AAA configuration is configured on an SSH
interface, then the correct SSH key will grant the user access to the D5
UEQ CLI. The SSH interfaces can be configured to use AAA, in which case
the user will be asked for the appropriate information (e.g. username and
password for RADIUS/TACACS+ authentication)
AAA Method List Operation An AAA method list may contain one or more AAA methods. With multiple
methods, AAA capabilities can continue to operate even if some methods
become unavailable due to network failures or configuration errors.
Line Operation Each line interface supports a CLI session. The CLI sessions behavior is
completely dependent on the configuration of the associated line.
However, a sessions authentication process can override a lines configu-
ration for the duration of a session.
Creating a default AAA
model
The aaa new-model command provides a wizard like configuration inter-
face for quickly setting up sensible defaults for all lines to use TACACS+.
Once the command is issued the system will use the TACACS+ server for
all authentication services.
NOTE
Once you run aaa new-model, you may not be able to perform any
more configuration changes until you start a new login session.
Local Authorization Each command on the D5 UEQ CLI will have an assigned privilege level
which can be changed via the local authorization CLI interface. A user who
has performed a TACACS+ login authentication can issue the enable
command with an optional parameter. This changes the users privilege
level and makes all commands up to that level available to the user. For
RADIUS, only login and enable users are supported and only privilege
level 0 and 15 are possible. This means commands must be locally
assigned to either of these two levels.
The D5 UEQ supports a local privilege command that is used to assign
command privilege levels between 0 and 15. Level 0 is used to identify all
commands available from the login prompt, while level 15 is the highest
privilege level and is associated with the enable logging.
15 Security
As already described, the D5 UEQ supports the notion of local authoriza-
tion. In the case of TACACS+, once a user is authenticated, the D5 UEQ is
provided with privilege credentials from the server that identifies the user.
If the user logs in using the login prompt, all commands available are at
privilege level 0. However, it is possible to login to another enable level,
by supplying the number after the enable command and pressing
RETURN on the keyboard. The number supplied identifies the exact privi-
lege level.
Default Command Privilege
Levels
Any command not listed in the table below will have a default privilege
level of 15. Commands listed in the table below will have a default privilege
level of 0.
Table 15-1: Commands with Privilege Level 0
disable show crypto
enable show crypto key
enable global-password show crypto key mypubkey
enable password show crytop key my pubkey dsa
enable secret show crypto key my pubkey rsa
end show crypto key pubkey-chain
exit show crypto key pubkey-chain dsa
help show crypto key pubkey-chain rsa
logout show history
ping show ip
systat show ip arp
terminal length show ip arp fastethernet
terminal monitor [no] show ip arp gigabitethernet
terminal pagination [no] show ip route
terminal timeout [no] show ip route connected
terminal vt100-colours [no] show ip route static
terminal width show ip route summary
traceroute show ip ssh
show aliases show ipc
show arp show memory
Radius
From the point of view of RADIUS, only user authentication is supported,
both login and enable. Login user privilege is set to 0, and enable
level is set to 15. These privilege levels define what commands are avail-
able to login and enable modes. Think of this as a very basic local
command authorization concept in the absence of any real AAA authori-
zation for RADIUS. This concept is managed by the privilege exec level
command, where commands are assigned different privilege levels, 0 for
login level or 15 for enable level.
The same applies to accounting, where the D5 UEQ does not support any
notion of RADIUS accounting, but does support the option of logging all
CLI activity into per line files (console.log, vty0.log, etc) on the local
compact flash file system. This is a very basic local accounting concept,
controlled through the CLI logging command available in global configura-
tion mode. The details logged are available through the show cli
logging {console, vty0, etc}.
Setting up RADIUS
To setup RADIUS, details of the remote server must be available. The D5
UEQ requires a number of different parameters to be supplied to properly
configure the remote server. Up to three different RADIUS servers can be
configured. Global timeout, retry and key values can be configured or
these may be configured per RADIUS server.
Procedure 15-1 Setup remote RADI US server with global settings
D5(config)#radius-server key abc123
D5(config)#radius-server timeout 3
D5(config)#radius-server retransmit 3
D5(config)#radius-server host 192.168.254.2
End of procedure
show bootvar show ntp
show calendar show snmp
show clock show terminal
show clock timezone show users
15 Security
This example shows how global settings can be configured for all config-
ured RADIUS servers. The radius-server timeout value configures
the amount of time (in seconds) the D5 UEQ will wait for a RADIUS server
to respond to an authentication request. If a timeout occurs, the D5 UEQ
will retry the request again, up to a maximum of radius-server
retransmit. The radius-server key must contain the shared-
secret associated with the RADIUS configuration in the remote RADIUS
server.
NOTE
The D5 UEQ supports configuring all of these options on an individual
RADIUS server basis through a single command line. Per-RADIUS server
settings take precedence over any global settings.
The above configuration can be simplified to the following:
Procedure 15-2 Setup remote RADI US server with individual settings
D5(config)#radius-server host 192.168.254.2 timeout 3 key abc123
D5(config)#radius-server host 192.168.254.4 key ddd999
End of procedure
To setup other RADIUS servers, simply repeat the above commands with
the appropriate IP address for the servers in question.
NOTE
RADIUS servers MUST be configured as shown above before they can be
added to RADIUS server groups that are described below.
Please note the following defaults for RADIUS:
Timeout 5 seconds (0-1000, 0=no timeout)
Retransmit is 3 retries (4 attempts, 0-5)
Default key = (up to 32 characters can be supplied)
Default port = 1812 (RADIUS port)
Once the different RADIUS servers are setup, the corresponding RADIUS
server groups can be setup. The RADIUS server group is a list of one or
more RADIUS servers that are to be used when performing remote
authentication of login and enable modes. When adding servers to the
group, the order that the servers are added is important, as it determines
the order that the servers are subsequently contacted when trying to
exchange RADIUS protocol messages. The first server added is always the
first server contacted by the D5 UEQ.
Setup server group with RADIUS servers
D5(config)#aaa group server radius RAD-SRV-GRP
D5(config-sg-radius)#server 192.168.254.2
D5(config-sg-radius)#exit#
The server group command, aaa group server requires that the type of
servers being grouped together are explicitly stated. As this is for RADIUS
authentication, radius is supplied as the server type. The server group
must also be configured with a name which is set using the last parameter
in the above command, RAD-SRV-GRP.
Once the server group is created, it is possible to see how it is configured
by running the show radius groups command, as per the following
example.
Procedure 15-3 Show RADI US server group settings
D5(config)#show radius groups
RADI US Gr oups
=====================
Name I P Addr ess
RAD- SRV- GRP 192. 168. 254. 2 192. 168. 254. 4
End of procedure
NOTE
The order the servers were entered through the CLI is preserved in the
output of the group.
The D5 UEQ supports up to three separate server groups, each with their
own name. What is also interesting with server groups is that two separate
server groups can reference a common RADIUS server (e.g. a single
RADIUS server can appear in multiple server groups).
15 Security
Normally server groups are setup with multiple servers for redundancy
reasons in case a single server becomes unavailable during normal opera-
tion. In this case, the D5 UEQ will give up on the first server after retrying
as many times as configured (note default retry count is 3) and then move
to the next available server in the group. If none of the RADIUS servers
provisioned can be contacted, RADIUS authentication will not be possible
with the line in use and the D5 UEQ will then consider other authentica-
tion methods as configured through the AAA setup.
Once the RADIUS servers are setup and the server groups are defined, it
is possible to consider the AAA configuration options and how to manage
the so-called methods that are used for authentication.
AAA Configuration
To use AAA, the AAA sub-system must be enabled through the use of the
aaa new-model command. As part of enabling the AAA sub-system, the
D5 UEQ sets up default method lists for all the different AAA configuration
options, referenced by the name default, in order to match a normal, non-
AAA controlled system. The following commands are added by the D5 UEQ
to achieve this configuration setting.
Global AAA commands automatically added by the aaa new-
model command
aaa authentication login default local
aaa authentication enable default local
aaa authorization commands default none
aaa authorization exec default none
aaa accounting commands default none
aaa accounting exec default none
These commands set the default method list for each of the configurable
AAA options in order to match a non-AAA system (achieved by the param-
eter directly after the default word; local here meaning the local user-
name/password database, and none meaning do nothing).
The AAA system applies to management interfaces that are capable of
hosting CLI connections such as the console interface or any of the
telnet/vty connections. These interfaces are collectively known as lines
and are part of the standard system configuration and allow fine tuning of
the operation of the CLI, such as screen width, height, and inactivity
timeout before logging out. The line configuration menu is extended to
allow the full AAA functionality to be managed per interface.
The aaa new-model command adds additional configuration commands
for AAA purposes to each line instance present within the D5 UEQ config-
uration. The actual commands added to each of the lines present within
the configuration are as follows:
Per line AAA commands automatically added by the aaa new-
model command
login authentication default
enable authentication default
authorization commands default
authorization exec default
accounting commands 0 default
accounting exec default
All these commands reference the default method-list discussed earlier.
The result of the aaa new-model command is to enable the AAA service,
explicitly setup the default method lists for all of the AAA interfaces
(authn, authz and acct) and then setup each lines AAA configuration to
point to the default method list. At this point, RADIUS has still not been
enabled for AAA authentication, even though the server details and the
server groups have been setup.
In order to enable RADIUS to be used for AAA, the default login and
enable authentication method lists must be updated to reference the
RADIUS server groups that have been setup. This is accomplished as
follows:
Procedure 15-4 Setup default method lists for RADI US
D5(config)#aaa authentication login default group RAD-SRV-GRP local
D5(config)#aaa authentication enable default group RAD-SRV-GRP local#
End of procedure
At this point, RADIUS is now in operation for login and enable authentica-
tion.
The previous paragraphs attempted to put in context the elements of
configuration used to setup AAA services. A considerable number of
configuration settings occur automatically as a result of the aaa new-
model command. The full set of configuration commands follow.
15 Security
Procedure 15-5 Use the following set of commands for a complete RADI US
configuration setup
D5(config)#radius-server host 192.168.254.2 key abc123
D5(config)#radius-server host 192.168.254.4 key ddd999
D5(config)#aaa group server radius RAD-SRV-GRP
D5(config-sg-radius)#exit
D5(config)#
D5(config)#aaa new-model
D5(config)#aaa authentication login default group RAD-SRV-GRP local
D5(config)#aaa authentication enable default group RAD-SRV-GRP local
End of procedure
This configuration sets up two RADIUS servers, adds them to the server-
group called RAD-SRV-GRP, and then modifies the default method list for
login and enable. The method lists are constructed so that the RADIUS
server group is used to authenticate the login and enable users, but if
these servers can not be contacted, the method-list moves on to the next
available option, in this case the special local case where the local user-
name/password database is used to authenticate login and enable.
This configuration relies on the aaa new-model command to create the
six different default method-lists (two for authn, two for authz and two
for acct), and apply them to every single line, changing the default
method lists applied to every line.
Viewing current RADI US
settings
To view the current configuration, the user has a number of options. A
number of direct RADIUS show commands exist.
Procedure 15-6 To display the RADI US group, use the following command:
D5(config)#show radius groups
RADI US Gr oups
=====================
Name I P Addr ess
RAD- SRV- GRP 192. 168. 254. 2 192. 168. 254. 4
End of procedure
Procedure 15-7 To display the RADI US hosts, use the following command:
D5(config)#show radius hosts
Gl obal Def aul t s
===============
Ti meout : 5
Ret r i es : 3
Key : <none>
RADI US Host s
===============
Ser ver Por t Ti meout Ret r i es Key
192. 168. 254. 2 1812 - - abc123
192. 168. 254. 4 1812 - - ddd999
End of procedure
Procedure 15-8 To display detailed RADI US related information, use the
following command:
D5#show radius detail
15 Security
Gl obal Def aul t s
===============
Ti meout : 5
Ret r i es : 3
Key : <none>
RADI US Host s
===============
Ser ver Por t Ti meout Ret r i es Key
192. 168. 254. 2 1812 - - abc123
192. 168. 254. 4 1812 - - ddd999
RADI US Det ai l
===============
RADI US Ser ver = 192. 168. 254. 2
Access- Request packet s f or med = 8
Access- Accept packet s r ecei ved = 4
Access- Rej ect packet s r ecei ved = 4
Access- Chal l enge packet s r ecei ved = 0
Access- Request packet t i meout s = 1
Access- Request packet r et r ansmi ssi ons = 1
Access- Request f ai l ur es = 4
Access- Request r esponses r ecei ved wi t h an i nval i d l engt h = 0
Access- Request r esponses r ecei ved wi t h an i nval i d t ype = 0
Access- Request r esponses r ecei ved wi t h an i nval i d i dent i f i er = 0
Access- Request r esponses r ecei ved wi t h an i nval i d aut hent i cat or = 0
RADI US Ser ver = 192. 168. 254. 4
Access- Request packet s f or med = 0
Access- Accept packet s r ecei ved = 0
Access- Rej ect packet s r ecei ved = 0
Access- Chal l enge packet s r ecei ved = 0
Access- Request packet t i meout s = 0
Access- Request packet r et r ansmi ssi ons = 0
Access- Request f ai l ur es = 0
Access- Request r esponses r ecei ved wi t h an i nval i d l engt h = 0
Access- Request r esponses r ecei ved wi t h an i nval i d t ype = 0
Access- Request r esponses r ecei ved wi t h an i nval i d i dent i f i er = 0
Access- Request r esponses r ecei ved wi t h an i nval i d aut hent i cat or = 0
End of procedure
Viewing the line AAA
configuration
As the aaa new-model command updates the line AAA configuration, it
is useful to be able to display the details of all the currently configured
lines, and their individual AAA configuration options. This is possible
through the following commands:
Procedure 15-9 Display line configuration details
D5(config)#show running-config | begin line
l i ne consol e
l engt h 24
wi dt h 80
t i meout 900
no moni t or
no vt 100- col our s
l i ne vt y 0 3
l engt h 24
wi dt h 80
t i meout 900
no moni t or
no vt 100- col our s
D5( conf i g) #
End of procedure
The line details above show the typical configuration items, as well as the
newly added AAA related commands. The commands in BOLD show the
six different AAA settings (method lists) available per line. Note too, that
15 Security
in this example, a single VTY line is described, that is applied to vty 0 to 3.
Any of these four vty lines can be split out, and assigned completely
different method lists. Note that default is an always available special
case method-list.
Enabling the debug of the
RADI US service
The D5 UEQ provides a debugging option for users to enable if connectivity
to remote RADIUS servers seems to be an issue. The debugging option
enables protocol exchange messages to be monitored between the D5
UEQ and the remote RADIUS servers.
Procedure 15-10 To turn on debugging, the debugging subsystem on the D5 UEQ
must be enabled for the CLI being used, and the debug monitor
output must be enabled.
This is achieved by entering the following commands:
D5(config)#configure debug cli
D5(config)#terminal monitor
End of procedure
Once the CLI is enabled for debugging, RADIUS debugging can be enabled
and displayed.
Procedure 15-11 Use the following command to enable RADI US debugging:
D5(config)# debug module radius
The no version of the command, described below, disables the debugging
of RADIUS:
D5(config)# no debug module radius
End of procedure
Procedure 15-12 AAA debugging is also available through the use of the following
debug command:
D5(config)# debug module aaa
End of procedure
This will produce debug output relating to operation of the AAA frame-
work. The no version of this command will disable AAA debugging.
Sample output of the RADIUS/AAA debugging follows,
D5( conf i g) #conf i gur e debug cl i
D5( conf i g) #t er mi nal moni t or
D5( conf i g) # debug modul e r adi us
D5( conf i g) # debug modul e aasda
Aut hent i cat e aaaNewModel : Enabl ed.
[ 5] di spl ayi ng banner
_aut hent i cat eAAA aut hent i cat i on usi ng gr oup t est
_aut hent i cat eAAA aut hent i cat i on usi ng gr oup ( met hod 0 ser ver 0)
_aut hent i cat eUsi ngRadi usSer ver l i ne=5 st at e=0
AaaRadi us( 5, 0, NULL, 0, ) l i neSt at e=0 r adi usSt at e=0
_aut hent i cat eUsi ngRadi usSer ver cal l i ng r adi us_aut hen_l ogi n_st ar t pSer ver 0x8314e7c0 i p 10. 250. 4. 149
_aut hent i cat eUsi ngRadi usSer ver ( l i ne 5) st at us=0
_aut hent i cat eUsi ngRadi usSer ver l i ne 5 RADI US_START
_aut hent i cat eAAA st at us=2
_aut hent i cat eAAA aut hent i cat i on usi ng gr oup t est
_aut hent i cat eAAA aut hent i cat i on usi ng gr oup ( met hod 0 ser ver 0)
_aut hent i cat eUsi ngRadi usSer ver l i ne=5 st at e=2
AaaRadi us( 5, 0, NULL, 0, ) l i neSt at e=2 r adi usSt at e=0
_aut hent i cat eUsi ngRadi usSer ver di spl ay r adi us pr ompt : Logi n:
_aut hent i cat eUsi ngRadi usSer ver r ef or mat t ed r adi us pr ompt : Logi n:
_aut hent i cat eUsi ngRadi usSer ver ( l i ne 5) st at us=1 out put =
_aut hent i cat eUsi ngRadi usSer ver l i ne 5 RADI US_GETUSER
Aut hor i zeCmd aaaNewModel : Enabl ed aut hor i zat i on: Enabl ed
_aut hor i zeAAA Aut hor i zi ng Command. cmd=" " ger r y" " . Aut hent i cat i on has not yet t aken pl ace.
AaaRadi us( 5, 0, ar r i s, 0, ) l i neSt at e=2 r adi usSt at e=2
_aut hent i cat eUsi ngRadi usSer ver ( l i ne 5) st at us=5 i nput =ar r i s
_aut hent i cat eUsi ngRadi usSer ver l i ne 5 RADI US_PASS
_aut hent i cat eAAA AUTHENTI CATE success! !
15 Security
Disabling AAA When AAA services are no longer required on the D5 UEQ, run the no aaa
new-model command. This will remove all of the defined method-lists as
well as removing all the method lists assigned to the different AAA inter-
faces on each line. The no version of this command does not remove the
RADIUS server or RADIUS server-group settings.
Logging of AAA details During the operation of the AAA service and RADIUS, there should be no
logging of error conditions. However, if issues occur such as login failures,
loss of connectivity to remote authentication servers, etc, information
concerning these issues get logged in the D5 UEQ event log and is also
sent to remote syslog servers.
Further RADIUS examples. Once the AAA service is running and RADIUS servers are defined, it is
possible to consider more advanced configuration settings, through the
use of additional server groups (listing applicable RADIUS server details)
and method lists (where combinations of AAA server groups and
local/none settings can be lined up in any order to meet the customers
requirements).
One point to consider with the more advanced configurations is that there
are finite numbers of AAA elements that can be used. The D5 UEQ
supports up to three separate server groups, and three separate method
lists. Any advanced setup must fit within these constraints.
An advanced example follows:
D5(config)#aaa group server radius ADMIN-SG
D5(config-sg-radius)#exit
D5(config)#aaa group server radius OPS-SG
D5 (config-sg-radius)#exit
D5 (config)#aaa new-model
D5 (config)#aaa authentication login ADMIN-ML group ADMIN-SG local
D5 (config)#aaa authentication login OPS-ML group OPS-SG local
D5 (config)# line vty 0 1
D5 (config-line)#login authentication ADMIN-ML
D5 (config-line)#exit
D5 (config)# line vty 2 2
D5 (config-line)#login authentication OPS-ML
D5 (config-line)#exit
This example shows two RADIUS server groups being defined, and two
separate, named method lists, one called ADMIN-ML, the other OPS-ML.
These method lists link to the server groups, identifying what service
groups to rely upon for login authentication. Note that the vty 0 and 1 are
configured to use the ADMIN-ML method list, ONLY for login, while vty 2
is configured to use the OPS-ML method list, again ONLY for login. Once
the login is successful, the current configuration example which assigns
nothing to the enable level, but relies on the default option which is to
use the local username/password database.
RADIUS Protocol Operation The RADIUS protocol specification covers AAA capabilities for network
services such as PPP and SLIP as well as for login and enable services.
Since the D5 UEQ only supports login and enable services, only a subset
of the specification applies.
RADI US Server and Server
Group Operation
The RADIUS protocol specification details the interactions between a
single RADIUS server and a RADIUS client in a fault-free network. It does
not address server/network fault scenarios or multiple server configura-
tions. The D5 UEQ must, of course, recognize server/network failures
during RADIUS exchanges and gracefully recover if multiple servers are
defined (which is an allowed configuration option).
Global Enable Password on
SecureI D Systems
As stated previously, typical login to a D5 UEQ consists of a login user
name and a password. Once logged in, a user has minimal access to the
CLI, requiring another password, known as the enable password, to be
entered. When AAA/Authentication is enabled, the username, login pass-
word and enable password are all stored on a remote Authentication
server and are passed to the server for validation during login to allow
access to the D5 UEQ.
Some MSOs rely on a secureID system, based on physical cards that
generate one-time passwords used in place of actual passwords. A new
one-time password is generated periodically (e.g. once per minute) and is
15 Security
supplied with a users unique username as part of the login process. This
removes the need to store any passwords on an Authentication server or
forcing users to change their passwords regularly.
In Release 3.0.1, we identified the need to create an approach to login
directly to the enable mode (without needing to supply the login pass-
word). In this mode, the user will have a different login name to allow the
AAA system to identify the user to be logged directly into the enable mode.
This will quicken user access to the D5 UEQ, removing the current delay
associated with waiting for the physical access-card to readout a new one-
time key.
This particular approach of direct to enable, used in mixed
Radius/TACACS+ Authentication models, with the global enable password,
can also be used when TACACS+ is unreachable.
When TACACS+ Authentication/Authorization servers are down/unreach-
able, the AAA method lists are setup to ensure that an AAA method is used
before any local methods are used.
The following example identifies how this feature is used:
D5(config)#tacacs-server host 192.168.250.188 key abc123
D5(config)#enable global-password test123
D5(config)#aaa new-model tacacs+
D5(config)#aaa authentication enable default local
This will allow a user to login to the D5 UEQ using the account provisioned
on the TACACS+ server at 192.168.250.188 and enable with the global
password test123.
The following example identifies the current AAA login approach based on
Radius to authenticate the login user and TACACS+ authorization:
D5(config)#aaa new-model
D5(config)#aaa authentication login default group radius local
D5(config)#aaa authorization exec default group tacacs+
D5(config)#aaa authorization commands default group tacacs+ none
Since the SecureID cards validate users by requiring them to enter their
username and the currently visible passcode on the SecureID card, the D5
UEQ AAA system relies on the above method lists for authentication and
authorization to accept the login and assign the correct privilege level to
the user.
Once authenticated, the AAA state machine will present a command shell
to the user. To do this, it will authorize access to the shell using shell
(exec) authorization to the remote TACACS+ server. The D5 UEQ will
automatically supply the login credentials to the TACACS+ authorization
server and wait for the server response to decide upon what to present to
the user (namely a basic login prompt or an enable prompt).
Once the D5 UEQ has completed the RADIUS Authentication and the
TACACS+ Authorization (shell/exec) and presented the user a login
prompt, it will authorize all subsequently entered CLI commands with the
configured TACACS+ command authorization server. The users ability to
run CLI commands is now completely dependent on how the TACACS+
server has been configured and the priority levels associated with each
command.
15 Security
16. CLI Overview
Topics Page
CLI Command Modes 2
Command Completion and Parameter Prompting 5
Keyboard Shortcuts 6
Local Authorization 8
CLI Output Filtering 10
CLI Syntax Conventions 12
The ARRIS D5 UEQ CLI is a fully functional interface that enables users to
enter commands to create, manage, display and remove networks, VTY
users, and other system entities. All D5 UEQ controls can be issued via the
CLI after hardware installation is complete.
The CLI can be utilized either from the serial port or through a remote
network connection such as telnet or secure shell. The CLI is a straightfor-
ward command interface that is intended to follow the familiar syntax of
many other communications products.
Type commands on a single line. Execute the commands using the Enter
key. The CLI provides command help and completion. It also provides
keyboard control sequences which allow a user to move around a
command line and scroll through a buffer that contains recently entered
commands.
16 CLI Overview
Accessing the D5 UEQ
There are two ways to access the D5 UEQ CLI. The first is via direct serial
access from the RS/232 (CLI or |0|0|) interface located on the front panel.
The second is remotely using TCP/IP and telnet, or secure shell (ssh). For
remote access, at least one interface for management access must be
designated. The MGT FastEthernet interface on the WAN card is intended
for system management access.
CAUTI ON
If more than one user is on simultaneous telnet sessions configuring the
same parameter on the D5 UEQ, you have the potential to create
unexpected results. E.g., session one is configuring banner one while
session two is configuring banner two and then you end session one
and exit session two, the banner one would be wiped out and a
subsequent write command would cement the wrong banner. This could
cause confusion in the field (for more significant commands) and
unexpected results. It is recommended that you run the command
systat to display the current users.
CLI Command Modes
The D5 UEQ supports hundreds of CLI commands. They are grouped into
different functional modes. The first set of commands is available to all
users including those with non-Privilege access. Most of these commands
are used to show system status. They are available when the D5 UEQ is in
User EXEC mode or any other mode.
The other modes are available only to users with Privilege EXEC access.
These commands are more powerful and can be used to reconfigure the
system or to adjust system performance.
The following table lists some of the command modes and some of the
commands needed to change from one mode to another.
Table 16-1: How to Enter and Exit the CLI Command Modes
Mode
To enter this mode,
type ... Resultant Prompt
To exit this mode,
type ...
User EXEC <login> + <password> D5>
exit or logout (terminates
CLI session)
Privilege EXEC
D5>enable
Password:
D5#
disable (returns to User
Exec Mode); exit or logout
(terminates CLI session)
Global Configuration
D5>enable
Password:
D5<config>#
exit, end or press Ctrl+Z
(returns to Privilege EXEC
Mode)
FastEthernet Sub-
Interface
D5>enable
Password:
D5(config)#interface
fastethernet X/ Y
D5(config-if)#
exit (returns to Global
Configuration Mode)
end or press Ctrl+Z
Mode)
GigabitEthernet Sub-
Interface
D5>enable
Password:
gigabitethernet X/ Y
D5(config-gig-if)#
Configuration Mode)
end or press Ctrl+Z
Mode)
Loopback Sub-
Interface
D5>enable
Password:
loopback <N>
D5(config-if)#
Configuration Mode)
end or press Ctrl+Z
Mode)
Port-channel Sub-
Interface
Configuration
D5>enable
Password:
port-channel <interface
num>
D5(config-if)#
Configuration Mode)
end or press Ctrl+Z
Mode)
QAM Card
D5>enable
Password:
D5(config)#interface qam
<card>
D5(config-qam-if)#
Configuration Mode)
end or press Ctrl+Z
Mode)
QAM Port Sub-
Interface
D5>enable
Password:
<card/ port>
D5(config-qam-port)#
Configuration Mode)
end or press Ctrl+Z
Mode)
Mode
To enter this mode,
To exit this mode,
type ...
16 CLI Overview
QAM Channel Sub-
Interface
D5>enable
Password:
<card/ port[.channel]>
D5(config-qam-if)#
Configuration Mode)
end or press Ctrl+Z
Mode)
DTI Configuration
D5>enable
Password:
D5(config-dti)#
Configuration Mode)
end or press Ctrl+Z
Mode)
ERM Configuration
D5>enable
Password:
D5(config)#video erm
<name>
D5(config-erm)#
Configuration Mode)
end or press Ctrl+Z
Mode)
EIS Configuration
D5>enable
Password:
D5(config)#video eis
<name>
D5(config-eis)#
Configuration Mode)
end or press Ctrl+Z
Mode)
ECMG Configuration
D5>enable
Password:
D5(config)#video ecmg
<name>
D5(config-ecmg)#
Configuration Mode)
end or press Ctrl+Z
Mode)
EMMG Configuration
D5>enable
Password:
D5(config)#video emmg
<name>
D5(config-emmg)#
Configuration Mode)
end or press Ctrl+Z
Mode)
P(SIG) Configuration
D5>enable
Password:
D5(config)#video psig
<name>
D5(config-psig)#
Configuration Mode)
end or press Ctrl+Z
Mode)
Mode
To enter this mode,
To exit this mode,
type ...
Command Completion and Parameter Prompting
Press the Tab key to complete a partially-typed command. If the tab key
is unable to uniquely identify a command, (for example, co could be
completed as configure or copy) the D5 UEQ console beeps and does a
partial-completion of the command (completing the characters which are
common to the multiple commands).
Example:
# con<tab>
# configure
The ? (question mark) key has two functions:
When added to the end of a partially-typed set of characters, the D5
UEQ lists commands that start with the current fragment.
When separated from the command by one or more spaces, the D5
UEQ lists valid additional commands, parameters or values that must
follow the currently typed command, on the same line.
Example:
Redundancy-Group
D5>enable
Password:
D5(config)#video
redundancy-group
<name>
D5(config-redund-
grp)#
Configuration Mode)
end or press Ctrl+Z
Mode)
SCG Configuration
D5>enable
Password:
D5(config)#video scg
<name>
D5(config-scg)#
Configuration Mode)
end or press Ctrl+Z
Mode)
Video Channel
Configuration
D5>enable
Password:
D5(config)#video
channel-container
<name>
D5(config-video-
channel)#
Configuration Mode)
end or press Ctrl+Z
Mode)
Mode
To enter this mode,
To exit this mode,
type ...
16 CLI Overview
D5(config)#lo?
l oggi ng l ogi n
D5(config)#logging ?
al ar m - Conf i gur e al ar ms
buf f er ed - Set buf f er ed l oggi ng par amet er s
consol e - Set consol e l oggi ng l evel
moni t or - Enabl e l oggi ng on moni t or , def aul t
i s Er r or s l evel
ngod - Enabl e NGOD l oggi ng
on - Enabl e al l l oggi ng
over r i de - Enabl e event over r i de
sever i t y - Enabl e/ di sabl e l oggi ng f or a
par t i cul ar sever i t y
sysl og - Enabl e sysl og l oggi ng f or event s
t hr esh - Conf i gur e t hr eshol ds
t r ap - Enabl e t r aps
t r ap- cont r ol - Conf i gur e t r ap cont r ol
Keyboard Shortcuts
In the CLI, you can use keyboard sequences to navigate and edit a
command line. You can also use keyboard sequences to scroll through a
list of recently executed commands. The following table lists the line-
editing keys that are available in the CLI.
These shortcuts are available in a telnet session (LAN connection) only.
They are NOT available from a serial connection.
Table 16-2: CLI Editing Shortcuts
Keystroke(s) Result
Backspace Deletes one character to left of cursor (back)
Delete Deletes the current character
Enter Executes command
Tab Completes command entry
(Right arrow)
Move the cursor forward one character
(Left arrow)
Move the cursor back one character
(Up arrow)
Scrolls backward through all commands in the history
buffer starting with the most recent. Repeat keystroke to
recall successively older commands.

(Down arrow)
Scrolls forward through all commands in the history
buffer after recalling commands with the up arrow key.
Repeat keystroke to recall successively more recent
commands.
<Esc> + B Move the cursor back one word
<Esc> + C Converts the rest of the word to uppercase
<Esc> + D Deletes the remainder of the word
<Esc> + F Moves forward one word
<Esc> + L Converts the rest of the word to lowercase
<Ctrl> + A Move the cursor to beginning of the command line
<Ctrl> + B Move the cursor back one space
<Ctrl> + C Aborts current line (aborts a command if running)
<Ctrl> + D Deletes the character at the cursor
<Ctrl> + E Move the cursor to the end of the command line
<Ctrl> + F Move the cursor forward one character
<Ctrl> + K
Deletes all characters from cursor position to the end of
the command line
<Ctrl> + N
Scrolls forward through the list of recently executed
commands. (Note: you must first scroll backwards using
the <CTRL> + P command before this using this
command.)
<Ctrl> + P
Scrolls backward through the list of recently executed
commands
<Ctrl> + T
Transposes the character to the left of the cursor with
the character located at the cursor.
<Ctrl> + U Deletes all characters on line to left of cursor position
<Ctrl> + W Deletes word directly before cursor
<Ctrl> + Z Enters command and then returns to root prompt
Table 16-2: CLI Editing Shortcuts (Continued)
Keystroke(s) Result
16 CLI Overview
NO Commands
The [no] form of a command is used to negate a specific function. A
slot/port with one parameter supports the [no] form automatically. If a
slot/port has two or more parameters, you must specify which parameter
the [no] is designated. It is important to specify this as it can have varying
effects depending on the command, such as:
disabling the feature
disabling a particular option of the feature
restoring default settings
removing a single entry which was previously configured
Local Authorization
A privilege exec command is provided to allow an operator to change the
privilege level of a command. Using this command, an operator can recon-
figure any CLI command to a specific privilege level. This command is set
at privilege level 15.
A privilege reset command is provided to allow an operator to restore a
command to its default privilege level. Using this command, an operator
can reconfigure any CLI command to its default privilege level.
When a user logs into a D5 UEQ, they are considered to be unprivileged
and can only run commands that are available at level 0. A user can gain
access to commands at a higher privilege level by enabling access to that
level.
The enable command will take an optional argument to allow the user to
specify the level they wish to escalate their privilege. If the optional argu-
ment is omitted, it is treated as if the user issued the command with an
argument of 15.
The D5 UEQ will prune the list of available commands such that only the
commands a user is privileged to execute are made available on the CLI.
NOTE
Auto complete will not show options that are not available. When a user
presses the? key to get a list of commands or command options, the D5
UEQ will only present those options that the user is authorized to
execute.
The D5 UEQ supports a local privilege command that is used to assign
command privilege levels between 0 and 15. Level 0 is used to identify only
the commands available from the login prompt, while level 15 is the
highest privilege level, and is associated with the enable commands.
NOTE
If a command has been assigned a privilege level of n, then that
command is not available to enable modes of less than n, where n is an
integer in the range [0,15].
For example The following commands will set the two CLI commands
to level 5 and 6, respectively:
D5>configure terminal
D5#privilege exec level 5 "show video erm"
D5#privilege exec level 6 "show video sessions"
D5#end
Now, exit privilege mode and enable level 5 with the following commands:
D5#disable
D5>enable 5
At this point, show video erm would be allowed but show video sessions
would not allowed.
Privilege Level 0 Commands Any command not in the table below will have a default privilege level of
15. Commands listed in the table below will have a default privilege level
of 0.
enable show history show users
exit show ip arp show version
help show crypto systat
logout show ip dhcp-server terminal
llc-ping show ip protocols terminal length
no monitor show ip route terminal monitor
ping show ipc terminal timeout
show aliases show memory terminal no timeout
show arp show ntp terminal vt100-colours
show bootvar show phs terminal no vt100-colours
show calendar show snmp terminal width
show clock show ssh traceroute
16 CLI Overview
CLI Output Filtering
The D5 UEQ provides output filtering commands. You can use them to
reduce the amount of output sent to the screen by certain commands.
The CLI permits the following types of filtering:
Begin - displays output beginning with the first line that contains the
text string or regular expression
Include - displays output lines that contain the text string or regular
expression and excludes lines that do not contain the text string or
regular expression
Exclude - displays output lines that do not contain the text string or
regular expression and excludes lines that do contain the text string or
regular expression
The following CLI options have been added to the show commands:
[| {begin| include| exclude} [] regular expression []]
To use this functionality, enter a show command as normal but add a
space followed by the pipe character (| ) at the end of the command line.
Then add one of the keywords begin, include, or exclude, along with
the regular expression that you want to filter or search on.
Expanded Syntax
show any-command | begin regular expression
show any-command | include regular expression
show any-command | exclude regular expression
You specify output filtering by appending a vertical bar character to the
end of a command, followed by the filtering command and its arguments.
The ? (help) command prints a brief summary of the commands:
Example:
D5#show run | ?
begi n Begi n wi t h t he l i ne t hat mat ches
i ncl ude I ncl ude l i nes t hat mat ch
excl ude Excl ude l i nes t hat mat ch
show crypto show terminal
show hardware show tftp-server
Filtering Previous Lines
Use the begin command to suppress output until an output line matches
the specified string:
Example:
D5#show run | begin "interface FastEthernet"
i nt er f ace Fast Et her net 0/ 1
no descr i pt i on
no shut down
! mac- addr ess 0000. caf 5. 7b98
dupl ex aut o
snmp t r ap l i nkst at us
l oad- i nt er val 300
i p addr ess 10. 17. 106. 254 255. 255. 255. 0
Including Matching Lines
Use the include command to display only output lines matching the spec-
ified string:
Example:
D5#show configuration | include Video
vi deo t i meout sessi on cl ose 10
vi deo net wor k- i d 4369
vi deo or i gi nal - net wor k- i d 4370
vi deo net wor k- name " D5NET"
vi deo ni t - pi d 16
Excluding Matching Lines
Use the exclude command to suppress output lines matching the speci-
fied string:
D5#show configuration | exclude video
! ****Gener at ed on TUE MAR 613: 08: 19 2007
! ****by S/ Wver si on 2. 2. 0. 38
!
!
16 CLI Overview
conf i gur e debug aut ospool
conf i gur e debug over wr i t e
!
no l oggi ng sysl og host
l oggi ng t hr esh none
l oggi ng t hr esh i nt er val 1
l oggi ng sever i t y 0 l ocal t r ap sys vol
CLI Syntax Conventions
ARRIS documentation uses certain conventions to show the syntax of
commands. These notations are not part of the command itself but indi-
cate choices a user has in entering a command. The notations are for
documentation purposes only, they are not input by the user.
The CLI commands use the syntax conventions described in the
following table
Table 16-3: Conventions for Representing Command Syntax
CLI Syntax Description
<...>
Angle brackets indicate a required value or parameter
which is position-dependent and does not have
keywords.
<slot/port>
Values are required for both the slot and port. They
must be separated by a slash.
[...]
Brackets enclose optional entriesthey may be
included or excluded.
{...}
Braces enclose two or more entry choices; one and
only one choice should be entered in the command.
[word <a | b>]
Brackets and a vertical line within brackets indicate a
required choice within an optional entry.
|
A vertical bar (the pipe symbol) separates entries
within brackets or braces. You may select only one
from the key list:
[first | second | third]
Case Commands are not case sensitive.
IP addresses and
host names
Wherever an IP address is required, you can enter a
host name provided you have configured a DNS server
or put the name and address into the DNS Local Host
Table.
Script files
You can create a script filea text file containing CLI
commandsto simplify repetitive tasks.
Table 16-3: Conventions for Representing Command Syntax
CLI Syntax Description
16 CLI Overview
17. CLI Command Descriptions
This chapter provides detailed descriptions of each of ARRIS D5 UEQ CLI
commands.
When you log in to the CLI, you are in User EXEC mode. This is the initial active
mode accessed when a user logs into the CLI after powering up the D5 UEQ.
User EXEC User EXEC commands are used for everyday system moni-
toring. They allow you to change terminal settings on a temporary basis,
perform basic tests and show system information. The prompt D5> indicates
User EXEC mode.
The User Show commands are part of the User EXEC mode. The prompt will
be D5> as in the User EXEC mode. The User Show commands display system
information.
Privilege EXEC The Privilege EXEC mode commands are used to set oper-
ating parameters. If a Privilege EXEC password exists, the CLI prompts you to
enter it to gain access. The password does not appear on the screen. Privilege
EXEC mode includes the User EXEC commands.
To enter Privilege EXEC mode, enter the enable command at the D5>
prompt. The prompt changes to D5#. If no enable password is configured,
any user may enter Privilege EXEC mode without authentication.
Global Configuration Global Configuration commands apply to features
that affect the entire system. These commands apply to system features and
enable routing functions.
Enter configure terminal at the command prompt in Privilege EXEC mode
to enter the Global Configure mode. The prompt will change to
D5<config>#. To return to Privilege EXEC mode, enter exit or press
Ctrl+Z.
I nterface Configuration Mode These modes can be entered from the
Global Configuration mode by typing interface <string>. For more information
of the types of Mode(s), see CLI Command Descriptions, page 17-1. They are
used to enter configuration parameters for specific interfaces like the fastEth-
ernet, gigabitEthernet and QAM ports. Loopback configurations and port-
channel assignments can be issued from these modes as well. To exit any of
these modes and return to the Global Configuration mode, type exit. To
return directly to the Privilege EXEC mode, type exi t or Ctrl + Z.
aaa accounting commands default
Purpose Creates an default accounting list. Use the [no] version of the command to
remove the default accounting list.
Syntax [no] aaa accounting commands default {none | start-stop
group <name> | stop-only group <name>}
Available in Mode(s) Prompt
Global Configuration D5(config)#
Parameter Definition
none No accounting.
start-stop group <name>
Sends the accounting record of the specified server-group at the initiation and
termination of a command
stop-only group <name>
Sends the accounting record of the specified server-group only at the
termination of a command.
aaa accounting exec default
Purpose Creates an default accounting list. Use the [no] version of the command to
remove the default accounting list.
Syntax [no] aaa accounting exec default {none | start-stop group
{name | tacacs+ <group>} | stop-only group {name | tacacs+
<group>}
none No accounting.
start-stop group {name |
tacacs+ <group>}
Sends the accounting record of the specified group at the initiation and
termination of a command.
stop-only group {name |
tacacs+ <group>}
Sends the accounting record of the specified group only at the termination of
a command.
aaa authentication banner
Purpose Creates an authentication banner.
Syntax aaa authentication banner <input>
<input> Input
aaa authentication enable
Purpose Creates a method list for use by the enable service. Use the [no] version of the
command to remove the method list.
Syntax [no] aaa authentication enable [default {group <tacacs+ |
radius>} | local | none]
default The default authentication list.
group Use the local Server-group
tacacs+ Use list of all TACACS+ hosts
radius Use list of all Radius hosts
local Use local username authentication
none No authentication
aaa authentication fail-message
Purpose Creates an personalized banner that will display when a user login fails. Use
the [no] option to disable this banner.
Syntax [no] aaa authentication fail-message <input>
<input> Message to appear
aaa authentication login
Purpose Creates a login authentication methods list. Use the [no] version of the
command to remove the authentication method list.
Syntax [no] aaa authentication login [name | default {group
<tacacs+ | radius>} | local | none]
name The named authentication list
default The default authentication list.
group Use the local Server-group
tacacs+ Use list of all TACACS+ hosts
radius Use list of all Radius hosts
local Use local username authentication
none No authentication
aaa authentication password-prompt
Purpose Creates a login authentication password prompt. Use the [no] version of the
command to remove the authentication prompt.
Syntax [no]aaa authentication password-prompt <input>
aaa authentication prompt
Purpose Creates a login authentication prompt.
Syntax aaa authentication prompt <input>
aaa authorization commands default
Purpose Creates the default configuration parameters for an authorization list. Use the
[no] version of the command to release the default authorization list.
Syntax [no] aaa authorization commands default {none | group
<tacacs+>}
none No authorization.
group <tacacs+> Configures the authorization record of the specified server-group
aaa authorization exec default
Purpose Creates the default exec parameters for an authorization list. Use the [no]
version of the command to release the default authorization list.
Syntax [no] aaa authorization exec default {none | group
<tacacs+>}
none No authorization.
group <tacacs+> Configures the authorization record of the specified server-group
aaa group server
Purpose Creates a AAA group designed to contain an ordered list of one or more AAA
servers. Use the [no] version of the command to remove the AAA group.
Syntax [no] aaa group server [radius <name> | tacacs+ <name>]
radius <name> Radius server-group name
tacacs+ <name> Tacacs+ server-group name
aaa new-model
Purpose Creates a default configuration for AAA for either Radius or TACACS+. Use the
[no] version of the command to remove the default configuration.
Syntax [no] aaa new-model [radius <name> | tacac+ <name>]
radius <name> Radius server-group name
tacacs+ <name> Tacacs+ server-group name
activation-time
Purpose Specifies the activation time in clock time for the SCG. The time can be in
hh:mm:ss or now + secs. If the time referred to is in the past, an activation
time of now is assumed. Use the [no] version of the command to reset the acti-
vation time to SCG creation time.
Syntax [no] activation-time [now | <now+SS> | <YYYY-MM-DD-
HH:MM:SS.hh> | <today-HH:MM:SS.hh>]
SCG Configuration D5(config-scg)#
now Activate SCG now
<now+SS> Activate SCG in SS seconds
<YYYY-MM-DD-
HH:MM:SS.hh>
Activate at this date and time (UTC)
<today-HH:MM:SS.hh> Activate today at this time (UTC)
alias
Purpose An alias is a shortcut of characters that directly represents a command string.
The alias is entered as a command. It executes the command string. The
command string must be enclosed in quotes. Use the [no] version to remove
an alias.
Syntax [no] alias <alias name> <string>
Example To create an alias of svs for the command show vi deo sessi ons, use the
following command:
D5(config)# alias svs show video sessions
<alias name> Enter the alias name.
<string> Enter the command string.
arp
Purpose Creates a static ARP entry. Use the [no] version of the command to remove
the static ARP entry.
Syntax [no] arp <N.N.N.N> [H.H.H]
<N.N.N.N> IP address for ARP table.
[H.H.H] MAC address for ARP table.
arp * * fastethernet
Purpose Configures how long a dynamically learned IP address and MAC address
remain in the ARP cache. before timing out.
Syntax arp <N.N.N.N> <H.H.H> fastethernet <x/y.z> [<1-4000>]
<N.N.N.N> IP address
<H.H.H> MAC address
<x/y.z> Slot/port.subinf of fastEthernet
[<1-4000>] VLAN ID
arp * * gigabitethernet
Purpose Configures how long a dynamically learned IP address and MAC address
remain in the ARP cache before timing out.
Syntax arp <N.N.N.N> <H.H.H> gigabitethernet <x/y.z> [<1-4000>]
<H.H.H> MAC address
<x/y.z> Slot/port.subinf of gigabitEthernet
[<1-4000>] VLAN ID
arp timeout
Purpose Sets the timeout for ARP entries before timing out.
Syntax arp timeout <300-65535>
<300-65535> Time in seconds. Default is 14400 seconds (4 hours)
assign slot * wan *
Purpose Assigns a slot to a WAN.
Syntax assign slot <1-6> wan <7-8>
<1-6> Slot number
<7-8> WAN slot number
authorization exec *
Purpose Configures authorization parameters.
Syntax [no] authorization exec {default | <input>}
Line Configuration D5(config-line)#
default The default exec authorization list
<input> Named exec authorization list.
auto
Purpose Configures automatic or redundant mode.
Syntax auto
DTI Interface D5(config-dti}#
bandwidth
Purpose Sets the maximum allowed bandwidth for the EMMG channel. Use the [no]
version of the command to disable the maximum bandwidth setting.
Syntax [no] bandwidth <1-50000>
EMMG Configuration D5(config-emmg)#
<1-50000> Maximum bandwidth per stream in Kbps units.
banner
Purpose Sets the login banner to the specified string. Use the [no] version of the
command to completely remove the login banner.
Syntax [no] banner <string> | <filename>
Example To add a banner, use the following command:
D5(config)# banner Welcome to the D5 UEQ
The following is an example of the output returned by the system:
D5( conf i g) #banner " Wel come t o t he D5 UEQ"
D5( conf i g) #
Fr oml ogi n scr een:
Wel come t o t he ARRI S D5 UEQ
Copyr i ght ( c) 2007 ARRI S Gr oup, I nc
Logi n:
<string>
ASCII character string (maximum 2000 characters). The file name string must
be enclosed in quotation marks.
<filename> Sets the login banner from an ASCII text file.
boot
Purpose Configures the boot parameters.
Syntax boot {system flash <FILENAME> | update bootloader}
system flash <FILENAME>
Specify an image on the compact flash from which to boot and where it is
located.
update bootloader Updates the D5 UEQ ROM bootloader.
bridge aging-time
Purpose Sets the aging time for learned entries in seconds.
Syntax bridge aging-time <10-1000000>
<10-1000000> Seconds.
bw-interval
Purpose Sets the interval for QAM output bandwidth change updates.
Syntax bw-interval <sec>
ERM Configuration D5(config-erm)#
<sec> Interval in seconds.
bw-threshold
Purpose Sets the threshold for QAM output bandwidth change updates.
Syntax bw-threshold <kbps>
<kbps> Interval in Kbps.
ca-descriptor
Purpose Adds additional pseudo CA-descriptor to CAT or private data to CA descriptor
of CAT. Use the [no] version of the command to remove the information.
Syntax [no] ca-descriptor {ca-system-id <xxxx> | private-data
<HH-HH-HH-HH-..>}
EMMG Configuration
SCG Configuration
D5(config-emmg)#
D5(config-scg)#
<xxxx> CA-System-ID in hex
<HH-HH-HH-HH-..> Add private data to CA descriptor of CAT
ca-system-id
Purpose Specifies the CA_system_id of the Redundant Group. In a Redundancy group,
all ECMGs must have the same CA_system_id. Use the [no] version of the
command to disable the CA_system_id.
Syntax [no] ca-system-id <xxxx>
Redundancy Group Configuration D5(config-redund-grp)#
<xxxx> CA-System-ID in hex
calendar set
Purpose Sets the internal D5 UEQ real time clock to the specified time and date.
NOTE
The calendar keeps time even if the D5 UEQ is powered off.
Syntax calendar set <hh:mm:ss> [<dd><mmm><yyyy>]
Privilege EXEC D5#
<hh:mm:ss>
Sets the hour 0 - 12, minutes 0 - 60, and seconds 0 - 60, to the specified
time.
<dd> Sets the specified day of the month 0 - 31.
<mmm> Sets the specified month of the year J an - Dec.
<yyyy> Sets the specified year 1970 - 2037.
cancel
Purpose Cancels all changes set since this subinterface was entered.
Syntax cancel
All All
cd
Purpose Changes the working directory on the Compact Flash disk.
Syntax cd <path>
Privilege EXEC D5#
<path> Enter the path to the specified directory.
channel-container
Purpose Specifies the list of QAM channels data from this EMMG connection will be
forwarded to. Use the [no] version of the command to remove the list.
Syntax [no] channel-container <name>
<name> Channel-container name
channel-group
Purpose Adds the interface to the specified channel group. An interface can also be
added to a channel-group in the redundant/backup mode by choosing the
standby option. Use the [no] version of the command to remove the interface
from a channel group.
Syntax [no] channel-group <X> [standby]
GigabitEthernet Sub-interface
Loopback Sub-Interface
D5(config-gig-if)#
D5(config-if)#
<X> Channel group number
[standby] Adds interface to channel-group in redundant/backup mode.
channel delay
Purpose Sets the expected propagation delay through the network from the D5 UEQ to
the ECMG. This is taken into account when calculating the time to send a
cw_provision message to the ECMG. Use the [no] version of the command to
reset to the two second default.
Syntax [no] channel delay <1-20>
ECMG Configuration D5(config-ecmg)#
<1-20>
ECMG network propagation delay in seconds. The longer the delay the earlier
the message will be sent (to compensate for that delay). Default is 2 seconds.
channel mode
Purpose Configures the maximum number of bonded channels set for this RF port since
this subinterface was entered. Use the [no] version of the command to return
to the default value.
Syntax [no] channel mode <dual | octal | quad | single | hex>
QAM Port Sub-interface D5(config-qam-port)#
dual Maximum of two bonded carriers per port.
octal Maximum of eight bonded carriers per port.
quad Maximum of four bonded carriers per port. This is the default value.
single Maximum of one carrier per port.
hex Maximum of six bonded carriers per port.
channel qam
Purpose Adds a QAM channel to a named container by interface stream. Use the [no]
version of the command to remove the QAM channel from a named container
by interface stream.
Syntax [no] channel qam <X/Y.Z> [service-id <program>]
Video Channel Configuration D5(config-video-channel)#
<X/Y.Z> Interface string
service-id <program> Service ID program. Valid range is 1-65535
channel spacing
Purpose Configures the spacing between bonded carriers bandwidth, thus increasing
the distance between center frequencies between bonded channels. Use the
[no] version of the command to remove the spacing between bonded carriers
bandwidth.
NOTE
Channel spacing is not available in hex mode.
NOTE
This command can be used for configuring 6 Mhz Annex C QAM channels into
7 Mhz frequency channel plan (J apan).
Syntax [no] channel spacing <1-100000>
<1-1000000> Frequency width in Hertz
channel test
Purpose Specifies the time between sending channel_test messages when connected
to the ECMG. Use the [no] version of the command to reset to the 10 second
default.
Syntax [no] channel test <5-120>
<5-120> ECM channel test interval in seconds. Default is 10 seconds.
channel-test-period
Purpose Sets the interval between channel test messages. Use the [no] version of the
command to reset the interval.
Syntax [no] channel-test-period <0-120>
EIS Configuration D5(config-eis)#
<0-120> Interval in seconds
channel-test-timeout
Purpose Sets the timeout to wait for channel test response. Use the [no] version of the
command to reset the timeout value.
Syntax [no] channel-test-timeout <2-20>
channel timeout
Purpose Specifies the time taken to wait for a response to a channel test message. Use
the [no] version of the command to remove the waiting time for a response to
a channel test message.
Syntax [no] channel timeout <2-20>

<2-20> ECM channel test timeout in seconds.
channel tsid
Purpose Adds a QAM channel to a named container by transport stream ID. Use the
[no] version of the command to remove the QAM channel from a named
container by transport stream ID.
Syntax [no] channel tsid <1-65535> [service-id <program>]
<1-65535>
Transport stream ID. Default value is 1 to 48 for QAM 1/1.1 to QAM 6/2.4,
respectively.
[service-id <program>] Service ID program. Valid range is 1-65535
channel width
Purpose Configures the distance between center frequencies Use the [no] version of
the command to return to the default width.
Previously, for example, an operator could drop the effective channel width of
an Annex A channel using the video symbol-rate command. The width of
the channel (in terms of the bump on the scope) drops according to the
symbol rate but the channels remain centered at 8Mhz intervals according to
Annex A characteristics. So, on a scope, if you dropped the symbol rate to
5,000,000, you would end up with gaps between each of your four channels
which would still have a total span of 32 Mhz of an Annex A Quad. Now, if you
configured the symbol rate to give a 6Mhz channel, you could then set the
channel width to 6 Mhz and the channels would all be tightly adjacent on a
scope and the quad would occupy 24 Mhz of bandwidth.
NOTE
The symbol rate must be small enough to prevent overlapping of adjacent
channels.
Syntax [no] channel width <distance>
Related Command(s) video symbol-rate
<distance>
Distance in Hertz of each channel in the QAM port. Valid range is 6000000 to
8000000.
chkdsk system
Purpose Verifies that the file system is correct. If the optional repair keyword is speci-
fied, the D5 UEQ will attempt to repair the file system errors.
Syntax chkdsk system [repair]
Example To check the file system, use the following command:
D5# chkdsk system
dosf sck 2. 11 ( 12 Mar 2008)
dosf sck 2. 11, 12 Mar 2008, FAT32, LFN
Checki ng we can access t he l ast sect or of t he f i l esyst em
Boot sect or cont ent s:
Syst emI D " MSDOS5. 0"
Medi a byt e 0xf 8 ( har d di sk)
512 byt es per l ogi cal sect or
8192 byt es per cl ust er
6 r eser ved sect or s
Fi r st FAT st ar t s at byt e 3072 ( sect or 6)
2 FATs, 16 bi t ent r i es
125440 byt es per FAT ( = 245 sect or s)
Root di r ect or y st ar t s at byt e 253952 ( sect or 496)
512 r oot di r ect or y ent r i es
Dat a ar ea st ar t s at byt e 270336 ( sect or 528)
62522 dat a cl ust er s ( 512180224 byt es)
63 sect or s/ t r ack, 255 heads
63 hi dden sect or s
1000881 sect or s t ot al
Recl ai mi ng unconnect ed cl ust er s.
Syst em: 191 f i l es, 14532/ 62522 cl ust er s
Privilege EXEC D5#
clear arp-cache
Purpose Clears the entire arp cache.
Syntax clear arp-cache
Privilege EXEC D5#
clear counters depi
Purpose Clears all depi sessions counters and other tabled information.
Syntax clear counters depi
Privilege EXEC D5#
clear counters qam
Purpose This set of commands resets the respective counters and other tabled informa-
tion for a QAM, port or slot.
Syntax clear counters qam <X/Y.Z>
Privilege EXEC D5#
<X/Y.Z> Clears MIB counters for the QAM in the specified port/slot.channel.
clear ip igmp group
Purpose Clears all IGMP groups from the system.
Syntax clear ip igmp group
Privilege EXEC D5#
clear ip igmp group interface gigabitethernet
Purpose Clears all IGMP groups from the specified interface.
Syntax clear ip igmp group interface gigabitethernet <X/Y>
Privilege EXEC D5#
<X/Y> Gigabit Ethernet slot/port.
clear ip igmp group interface loopback
Purpose Clears all IGMP groups from the specified interface.
Syntax clear ip igmp group interface loopback [n]
Privilege EXEC D5#
[n]
Loopback number. If a loopback number is not specified, this command
deletes all loopbacks.
clear logging history
Purpose Clears the local event log.
Syntax clear logging history
Privilege EXEC D5#
clear mac-address
Purpose Clears the specified MAC address entry from the MAC address table.
Syntax clear mac-address <H.H.H>
Privilege EXEC D5#
<H.H.H> MAC address
clear mac-address-table
Purpose Clears all learned entries from the MAC address table.
Syntax clear mac-address-table
Privilege EXEC D5#
clear qam-log
Purpose Clears the contents of the QAM log.
Syntax clear qam-log
Privilege EXEC D5#
clear screen
Purpose Clears the terminal window.
Syntax clear screen
Privilege EXEC D5#
clear video psig active sections
Purpose Clears all sections being carouselled by the MUX.
Syntax clear video psig active sections
Privilege EXEC D5#
cli account
Purpose Sets the login account name and passwords for access to the D5 UEQ
command line. Use the [no] version of the command to remove the login pass-
word.
Syntax [no] cli account <name> [enable-password <password> |
encrypt <password> | password <password> | secret-password
<password>]

<name> User name
enable-password <password>
Password to move into Privilege EXEC mode for this account. This password is
shown in clear text in the D5 UEQ configuration.
NOTE: This command sets the Privilege EXEC mode encrypted password to a
password string. If this password is not set, then the enable password is
required for Privilege EXEC mode access.
The password string must be at least eight characters long.
If both the enable and enable secret passwords have not been set, the D5 UEQ
disables access to Privilege EXEC mode using telnet. You can still enter
Privilege EXEC mode using a direct serial connection to the D5 UEQ.
encrypt <password> Sets the encrypted string.
password <password> Sets the login password for this account.
secret-password <password>
Sets the encrypted password to move to the Privilege EXEC mode after login.
This password is visible in the configuration file in encrypted format.
cli logging
Purpose Enables session command logging. CLI logging will redirect all console
messages to archival files on the compact flash and will also continue to be
displayed on a connected CLI session. Use the [no] version of the command
to disable command logging.
Syntax [no] cli logging [password <password>] [path <path>] [size
<1-50000>]
password <password> Enables command logging of passwords
path <string>
Sets the file path for storing the default log files. The default file names used
are console.log, vty0.log, vty1.log, vty2.log, or vty3.log.
size <1 - 50000> Sets the maximum allowed size of log files in kilobytes.
client-id
Purpose Sets the client ID of the EMMG. Use the [no] version of the command to
remove the assigned client-id.
Syntax [no] client-id <xxxx.yyyy>
<xxxx.yyyy> EMMG client_id
clock set
Purpose Sets the internal D5 UEQ real time clock to the specified time and date.
NOTE
The clock keeps time even if the D5 UEQ is powered off.
Syntax clock set <hh:mm:ss> [<dd><mmm><yyyy>]
Example To set the time and date for 1:59:11 p.m. on February 11, 2008, use the
following command:
D5# cl ock set 13: 59: 11 11 f eb 2008
Privilege EXEC D5#
<hh:mm:ss>
Sets the hour 0 - 12, minutes 0 - 60, and seconds 0 - 60, to the specified
time.
<dd> [Optional] Sets the specified day of the month 0 - 31.
<mmm> [Optional] Sets the specified month of the year J an - Dec.
<yyyy> [Optional] Sets the specified year 1970 - 2037.
clock summer-time <timezone> date
Purpose Creates a specific period of summer time (daylight savings time) for the spec-
ified time zone. Use the clock summer-time recurring command to set
recurring time changes. Use the [no] version of the command to reset to
default summer time.
Syntax [no] clock summer-time <timezone> date {<1-31> <JAN-DEC>
<1970-2037> <hh:mm>} {<1-31> <JAN-DEC> <1970-2037>
<hh:mm>}
Example To set the summer-time clocks start and end dates, use the following
command:
D5(config)# clock summer-time EDT date 3 14 2007 02:00 3 22 2007 02:00
Related Command(s) clock summer-time <timezone> recurring
<timezone> The time zone name. Use clock timezone to create the timezone.
<1-31> <J AN-DEC> <1970-
2037> <hh:mm>
The starting date and time. The format is: day month year hh:mm
<1-31> <J AN-DEC> <1970-
2037> <hh:mm>
The ending date and time. The format is: day month year hh:mm
clock summer-time <timezone> recurring
Purpose Creates a recurring period of summer time for the specified time zone. Use
clock summer-time date to set a specific period of summer time. Use the [no]
version of the command to remove a recurring period of summer time.
Syntax [no] clock summer-time <timezone> recurring {<1-4 | first
| lst> <1-7 | sun-sat> <jan-dec> <hh:mm>} {<1-4 | first |
st> <1-7 | sun-sat> <jan-dec> <hh:mm>}
Example To set the summer-time clocks start and end dates to be recurring, use the
following command:
D5(config)# clock summer-time EDT recurring first sun apr 01 02:00
first sun oct 02:00

<timezone> The time zone name. Use clock timezone to create the timezone.
<1-4 | first | lst> <1-7 | sun-
sat> <jan-dec> <hh:mm>
The starting date and time. The format is: week day month hh:mm.
Week can be first, last or 1 to 4. Day is the day of the week (sun through
sat, or 1 to 7)
{<1-4 | first | lst> <1-7 | sun-
sat> <jan-dec> <hh:mm>
The ending date and time. The format is: week day month hh:mm. Week
can be first, last or 1 to 4. Day is the day of the week (sun through sat,
or 1 to 7)
clock timezone
Purpose Sets system clock which is important to ensure proper reporting times for items
such as system logging messages. Use the [no] version of the command to
delete a configured timezone.
Syntax [no] clock timezone <name> <offset>
<name>
Any text string to describe the time zone. Maximum of nine characters
allowed.
<offset>
The offset, in hours (and optionally minutes), from UTC. Valid range: -12 to
+14
component-name
Purpose Sets the component name of this ED connection to the remote ERM. Use the
[no] version of the command to remove the component name.
Syntax [no] component-name <string>
ERM Configuration
D5(config)#
D5(config-erm)#
<string> The component name
component <pid> transport
Purpose Sets the specified streams (such as teletext and subtitle streams) to be sent
unencrypted while keeping audio/video scrambled. Use the [no] version of the
command to remove the static configuration of the ES scrambling.
NOTE
When there is an overlap between SCG service and ES configuration, priority
is always given to service level scrambling over ES scrambling.
Syntax [no] component <pid> transport <ts-id>
<pid> The component name
<ts-id> ID number of the transport stream
configure debug
Purpose Configures advanced system debugging.
Syntax configure debug {autospool | cli | console | display [date
|file | func | line | task | ticks | time] | nonvolatile |
overwrite | syslog | volatile}
Privilege EXEC D5#
autospool Enables autospooling debug output.
cli Enables CLI debug output.
console Enables console debug output.
display [date | file | func | line
| task | ticks | time]
Configures debug logging display options; e.g. date, filename, function,
linenumber, taskname, ticks, and time.
nonvolatile Enables non-volatile debug output storage.
overwrite Enables overwrite of oldest debug entries.
syslog Enables syslog debug output.
volatile Enables volatile debug output storage.
configure terminal
Purpose Enters the Configure mode from the terminal. Prompt will change from D5#
to D5(config)#.
Syntax configure terminal
Privilege EXEC D5#
connection-timeout
Purpose Sets the EIS connection timeout. Use the [no] version of the command to reset
the timeout value.
Syntax [no] connection-timeout <5-1800>
copy
Purpose Duplicates the file <orig> and names it <dest>.
Syntax copy <orig> <dest>
Specify files by name or use the following special qualifiers:
Example If copying to or from the local disk, make sure that the drive letter is in upper
case.
D5# copy tftp://10.1.100.1/vxWorks1.st vxWorks1.st
D5# copy C:/test.txt C:/test.old.txt
Copyi ng. . . . !
29886 byt es copi ed i n 0 secs <29886 byt es/ sec>
Privilege EXEC D5#
Special Qualifiers Definition
flash
Copies a file on the flash disk to the flash disk
or a TFTP server.
running-configuration
Copies the running configuration to a file or
the startup configuration.
startup-configuration
Copies the startup configuration to a file or
the running configuration.
tftp
Copies a file from the default TFTP server to
the flash disk.
tftp://ipaddr/file
Copies a file (or configuration) to or from the
TFTP server at the specified address
<FROM_FILENAME> Copies from a local file.
cost
Purpose Sets the cost that is advertised by the D5 UEQ to remote ERMs. The ERMs may
use this value in conjunction with local policy rules when allocating sessions to
edge devices like the D5 UEQ. Use the [no] version of the command to delete
the user provided value and restore the default value of 1.
Syntax cost <cost>
[no] cost
<cost>
Cost advertised by this ERM instance. Valid range is 1-255. The default value
is 1.
cp-duration
Purpose Specifies a crypto period duration. Use the [no] version of the command to
reset the crypto period duration to the one minute default.
Syntax cp-duration <50-65535>
[no] cp-duration
<50-65535>
Duration specified in units of 100ms (i.e. 2000 would be 200 seconds).
Defaults to 600 (1 minute). Minimum value is 50, 5 seconds.
crypto key generate
Purpose Generates the host public and private keys for the D5 UEQ Secure Shell server.
Use the [no] version of the command to remove the host public and private
keys for the SSH server.
Syntax [no] crypto key generate {both [modulus <1-65535>] | dsa
[modulus <1-65535> | rsa modulus <1-65535>}
both [modulus <1-65535>] Generates RSA and DSA keys. Key length range is 1-65535.
dsa [modulus <1-65535>] Generates only the DSA key.
rsa [modulus <1-65535>] Generates only the RSA key.
crypto key import rsa <input> pem url
Purpose Installs a public RSA or DSA key in PEM format for the specified user. Once a
users public key is installed in the D5 UEQ user database, password authenti-
cation for that user is no longer available. Use the [no] version of the command
to remove the public RSA or DSA key for a specified user.
Syntax [no] crypto key import rsa <input1> pem url <input2>
<input1> Userid
<input2>
Either the URL of a file on a TFTP server, or the name of a file on the D5
UEQ compact flash disk.
crypto key zeroize
Purpose Deletes the specified host public and private key types. The type is one of DSA,
RSA or both.
Syntax crypto key zeroize {both [<input>] | dsa [<input>] | rsa
[<input>]}
both <input>
Deletes RSA and DSA keys. Specifying the optional userid deletes only the
public keys associated with the D5 UEQ user ID.
dsa <input>
Deletes only the DSA keys. Specifying the optional userid deletes only the
rsa <input>
Deletes only the RSA keys. Specifying the optional userid deletes only the
data-id
Purpose Sets the data-id for the EMMG channel. For TCP-based stream setup, this is
used to verify the received data-id is as expected. For UDP-only operation it is
required to match the incoming data-provision to the correct EMMG stream
data-type. Use the [no] version of the command to clear the data-id of the
EMMG.
Syntax [no] data-id <1-65535>
<1-65535> Data ID
data-type
Purpose Sets the data type for an EMM stream.
Syntax data-type <emm> | <pdg> | <stream>
<emm> Entitlement Management Message
<pdg> Private Data
<stream> Entitlement Management Message
debug module aaa
Purpose Enables debugging of AAA. Use the [no] version of the command to turn off
debugging.
Syntax [no] debug module aaa
Privilege EXEC D5#
debug module alarms
Purpose Used to configure alarm debugging. Use the [no] version of the command to
turn of debugging.
Syntax [no] debug module alarms <1-6>
Privilege EXEC D5#
<1-6> Debug level (the higher the number, the more information).
debug module cas ecm
Purpose Used to configure Conditional Access debug parameters on the Entitlement
Control Message (ECM). Use the [no] version of the command to turn off
debugging.
Syntax [no] debug module cas ecm [channel [tlv [verbose] |
verbose] | [stream [tlv [verbose] | verbose] |[scg [tlv
[verbose] | verbose]
Privilege EXEC D5#
channel [tlv [verbose] CAS ECM channel TLV
stream [tlv [verbose] CAS ECM stream TLV
scg [tlv [verbose] CAS ECM SCG TLV.
[verbose] Verbose
debug module cas eis
Purpose Used to configure CAS Entitlement Information Message (EIS) debug parame-
ters. Use the [no] version of the command to turn of debug levels.
Syntax [no] debug module cas eis [tlv [verbose]] | [verbose]
Privilege EXEC D5#
tlv [verbose] CAS EIS TLV
[verbose] Verbose
debug module cas emm
Purpose Used to configure CAS Entitlement Management Message (EIS) debug param-
eters. Use the [no] version of the command to turn off debug levels.
Syntax [no] debug module cas emm [tlv [verbose]] | [verbose]
Privilege EXEC D5#
[tlv [verbose]] CAS EMM TLV
[verbose] Verbose
debug module cas mux
Purpose Used to configure CAS Program Specific Information Generator (PSIG) debug
parameters. Use the [no] version of the command to turn off debug levels.
Syntax [no] debug module cas mux [tlv [verbose]] | [verbose] |
<input>
Privilege EXEC D5#
[tlv [verbose]] CAS PSIG TLV
[verbose] Verbose
<input> CAS PSIG
debug module cli
Purpose Used to configure CLI debug parameters. Use the [no] version of the command
to turn off debug levels.
Syntax [no] debug module cli [<1-255>]
Privilege EXEC D5#
[<1-255>]
Debug level (the higher the number, the more debug information is
recorded).
debug module depi control-plane
Purpose Used to configure CLI debug parameters. Use the [no] version of the command
Syntax [no] debug module depi control-plane [authentication | avp
| connection | database | gas | session] [verbose]
Privilege EXEC D5#
authentication L2TP authentication
avp L2TP AVP
connection L2TP connection
database L2TP database
gas GAS layer
session L2TP session
verbose Verbose
debug module dhcpc
Purpose Used to configure Management Interface DHCP client debug parameters. Use
the [no] version of the command to turn off debug levels.
Syntax [no] debug module dhcpc [<1-5>]
Privilege EXEC D5#
[<1-5>]
recorded).
debug module dns
Purpose Used to enable the debug dns client. Use the [no] version of the command to
disable debug module dns.
Syntax [no] debug module dns
Privilege EXEC D5#
debug module dti
Purpose Used to configure DTI debugging. Use the [no] version of the command to turn
of debugging.
Syntax [no] debug module dti <1-5>
Privilege EXEC D5#
<1-5> Debug level (the higher the number, the more information)
debug module ecl
Purpose Used to configure ECL debug parameters. Use the [no] version of the
command to turn off debug levels.
Syntax [no] debug module ecl [<1-255>]
Privilege EXEC D5#
[<1-255>]
recorded)
debug module httpd
Purpose Used to configure HTTP daemon debug parameters. Use the [no] version of
the command to turn off debug levels.
Syntax [no] debug module httpd [<1-255>]
Privilege EXEC D5#
[<1-255>]
recorded).
debug module igmp
Purpose Used to configure IGMP debug parameters. Use the [no] version of the
Syntax [no] debug module igmp <1-6>
Privilege EXEC D5#
<1-6>
recorded).
debug module ip-bundle
Purpose Used to configure IP bundle debug parameters. Use the [no] version of the
Syntax [no] debug module igmp <1-6>
Privilege EXEC D5#
<1-6>
recorded).
debug module ipproc
Purpose Used to configure IP Processor debug parameters. Use the [no] version of the
Syntax [no] debug module ipproc [<1-255>]
Privilege EXEC D5#
[<1-255>]
recorded)
debug module mon
Purpose Used to configure the Monitor card debug parameters. Use the [no] version of
Syntax [no] debug module mon [<0-9> | slotmgr <0-9> | dlmgr <0-9>]
Privilege EXEC D5#
<0-9>
Monitor card debug config 0 to 9, slot manager and FPGA download debug
information.
debug module mpeg
Purpose Used to configure the Monitor card debug parameters. Use the [no] version of
Syntax [no] debug module mpeg [database | gas | ipp [verbose] |
transport-stream <incoming [verbose] | outgoing [verbose]
| table-reassembly [verbose [verbose]]>]
Privilege EXEC D5#
[database] MPEG Manager database
[gas] MPEG Manager GAS communications
[ipp] MPEG Manager IPP interface
[transport-stream <incoming |
outgoing | table-reassembly>]
MPEC Transport Streams. Valid choices are: incoming streams, outgoing
streams or (P)SI table-reassembly.
debug module ntp
Purpose Used to configure the Network Time Protocol (NTP) debug parameters. Use the
[no] version of the command to turn off debug levels.
Syntax [no] debug module ntp [<1-255>]
Privilege EXEC D5#
[<1-255>] Debug level (the higher the number, the more debug information recorded).
debug module qam
Purpose Used to configure the QAM Manager (QAM) debug parameters. Use the [no]
version of the command to turn off debug levels.
Syntax [no] debug module qam [<1-255>]
Privilege EXEC D5#
[<1-255>] Debug level (the higher the number, the more debug information recorded).
debug module radius
Purpose Enables debugging of Radius. Use the [no] version of the command to turn of
debugging.
Syntax [no] debug module radius <1-6>
Privilege EXEC D5#
debug module rtsp connections
Purpose Configures RTSP connection debugging. Use the [no] version of the command
Syntax [no] debug module rtsp connections <1-7>
Privilege EXEC D5#
<1-7> Debug level (higher number = more information)
debug module rtsp msg
Purpose Configures RTSP message debugging. Use the [no] version of the command to
turn off debug levels.
Syntax [no] debug module rtsp msg <1-7>
Privilege EXEC D5#
<1-7> Debug level (higher number = more information)
debug module sdv
Purpose Used to configure the Switched Digital Video manager debug parameters. Use
the [no] version of the command to turn off debug levels.
Syntax [no] debug module sdv [<1-10> | [pi <1-5>] | [rpc <1-10>]
Privilege EXEC D5#
<1-10> Debug level (the higher the number, the more debug information recorded).
[pi <1-5>]
PI manages SDV packet insertion. Debug level is 1- 5 (the higher the number,
the more debug information recorded)
[rpc <1-10>]
Remote Procedure Call (RPC) manages the RPC request dump. Debug level is
1 - 10 (the higher the number, the more debug information recorded)
debug module snmp
Purpose Used to configure SNMP debug parameters. Use the [no] version of the
Syntax [no] debug module snmp [<1-255>]
Privilege EXEC D5#
[<1-255>] Debug level (the higher the number, the more debug information is recorded).
debug module tacacs
Purpose Enables debugging of TACACS+. Use the [no] version of the command to turn
of debugging.
Syntax [no] debug module tacacs <1-6>
Privilege EXEC D5#
debug module timerlib
Purpose Enables debugging of TimerLib. Use the [no] version of the command to turn
of debugging.
Syntax [no] debug module timerlib <1-6> <string>
Privilege EXEC D5#
<string> TLA name of a specific TimerLib instance.
debug module vrep connections
Purpose Configures debugging of VREP connections. Use the [no] version of the
command to turn off debugging.
Syntax [no] debug module vrep connections <1-5>
Privilege EXEC D5#
<1-5> Debug level (the higher the number, the more debug information is recorded).
debug module vrep fsm
Purpose Configures debugging of VREP Finite State machine. Use the [no] version of
the command to turn off debugging.
Syntax [no] debug module vrep fsm
Privilege EXEC D5#
debug module vrep msg
Purpose Configures debugging of VREP messages. Use the [no] version of the
command to turn off debugging.
Syntax [no] debug module vrep msg
Privilege EXEC D5#
debug snmp
Purpose Enables SNMP traffic debugging. Use the [no] version of the command to
disable SNMP traffic debugging.
Syntax [no]debug snmp
Privilege EXEC D5#
default-cp-duration
Purpose Sets the default CP duration in seconds. Use the [no] version of the command
to reset the CP duration.
Syntax [no] default-cp-duration <1-65535>
<1-65535> Default CP duration (in seconds) used if none is provided.
delete
Purpose Removes the specified file from the Compact Flash module.
CAUTI ON
Care should be taken when deleting configuration or boot image files.
Syntax delete <filename>
Privilege EXEC D5#
<filename> Name of file to be deleted.
depi control-plane
Purpose Configures the DEPI L2TP control-plane. Use the [no] version of this command
to remove the DEPI control-plane.
Syntax [no] depi control-plane
depi disconnect connection
Purpose Removes the incoming DEPI session from the specified connection.
Syntax depi disconnect connection <1-65535> {force | session <1-
65535> [force]}
Privilege EXEC D5#
<1-65535> Local connection ID
force Force immediate teardown
session <1-65535> [force] L2TP session ID. Use the option [force] parameter for immediate teardown.
depi dmpt dest-ip * * sessionid
Purpose Configures the DEPI addressing associated with each QAM channel, the
following configuration for each QAM channel is required. The number after
dmpt is the dest-ip address which identifies the ingress gigabitEthernet port
on the D5 UEQ that the L2TPv3 DEPI stream must be sent to (this is used to
manually allocate input bandwidth over the available gigabitEthernet ports)
followed by the L2TPv3 sessionI D for the particular QAM channel. Use the
[no] version of the command to remove the depi session.
Syntax depi dmpt dest-ip <N.N.N.N> [src-ip <addr>] sessionid <1-
4294967295>
no depi
NOTE
correctly to match what is being sent, and a DEPI rule for UDP port 1-65535
was created, that rule will also allow an L2TPv3 sessionID of 1-65535 to pass.
Example:
depi dmpt dest - i p N. N. N. N udp 1000
A backup rule of depi dmpt dest-ip 1234 sessionid 1000 will also be
configured. If the user sends in UDP 1000, the traffic matches the rules. If the
system is misconfigured, traffic using L2TPv3 sessionId 1000 would still pass.
Example:
depi dmpt dest - i p N. N. N. N sessi oni d 1000
QAM Sub-interface D5(config-qam-if)#
<N.N.N.N> Destination IP address from IP header
src-ip <addr> Source IP address
<0-4294967295> Session ID in the L2TP header
A backup rule of depi dmpt dest-ip 1234 udp 1000 will also be configured.
If the user sends in L2TPv3 traffic using sessionID 1000, the traffic matches
the rules. If the system is misconfigured, traffic using UDP port 1000 would still
pass.
depi dmpt dest-ip * * udp
Purpose Configures the DEPI addressing associated with each QAM channel, the
following configuration for each QAM channel is required. The number after
dmpt is the dest-ip address which identifies the ingress gigabitEthernet port
on the D5 UEQ and the output QAM channels. Use the [no] version of the
command to remove the udp session.
Syntax depi dmpt dest-ip <input> [src-ip <addr>] udp <1-65535>
no depi
NOTE
correctly to match what is being sent, and a DEPI rule for UDP port 1-65535
was created, that rule will also allow an L2TPv3 sessionID of 1-65535 to pass.
Example:
depi dmpt dest - i p N. N. N. N udp 1000
A backup rule of depi dmpt dest-ip 1234 sessionid 1000 will also be
configured. If the user sends in UDP 1000, the traffic matches the rules. If the
system is misconfigured, traffic using L2TPv3 sessionId 1000 would still pass.
Example:
depi dmpt dest - i p N. N. N. N sessi oni d 1000
Modes Prompt
<input> Destination IP address from IP header
src-ip <addr> Source IP address
<1-65535> Destination UDP port
A backup rule of depi dmpt dest-ip 1234 udp 1000 will also be configured.
If the user sends in L2TPv3 traffic using sessionID 1000, the traffic matches
the rules. If the system is misconfigured, traffic using UDP port 1000 would still
pass.
depi timeout session close
Purpose Sets to DEPI session timeout.
Syntax depi timeout session close <1-65> {
Privilege EXEC D5#
<1-65> Seconds
description
Purpose Allows user to a textual description to be used as a reference for this specific
interface. Use the [no] version of the command to remove the textual descrip-
tion for the interface.
Syntax [no] description <string>

FastEthernet Sub-Interface
GigabitEthernet Sub-Interface
QAM Channel Sub-Interface
ERM Configuration
D5<config-if>#
D5(config-gig-if)#
D5(config-qam-channel)#
D5(config-erm)#
<string> Textual description
diagnostics bootup level
Purpose Runs the hardware diagnostics whenever a QAM card is inserted, reset or
present in the slot when the system starts up.
Syntax diagnostics bootup level <complete | minimal>
Related Command(s) show interfaces qam * diagnostics
QAM Card Interface D5(config-qam-card)#
<complete> Runs complete hardware diagnostics at card bootup time.
<minimal> (Default) Runs minimal hardware diagnostics at card bootup time.
diagnostics enable module qam
Purpose Enables manufacturing mode on the QAM card in the specified slot.
Syntax diagnostics enable module qam <1-6> >
Privilege EXEC
D5#
D5(config)#
<1-6> QAM slot number
diagnostics ondemand iteration
Purpose Sets the number of test iterations.
Syntax diagnostics ondemand iteration <input> >
Privilege EXEC
D5#
D5(config)#
<input> Test iteration number. Valid range is 0-1000 where 0 is continuous.
diagnostics start module qam
Purpose Performs an ad hoc diagnostics check on the QAM card in the specified slot and
displays the results. Two diagnostics mode are currently available, minimal and
complete. Minimal diagnostics runs the critical tests that will ensure that the
QAM card is in working order. Complete diagnostics runs the minimal tests as
well as a battery of extensive and lengthy tests such as a complete RAM sweep.
CAUTI ON
During the diagnostics run, the QAM card will be taken out of service as most
tests are intrusive and prevent normal operation.
Syntax diagnostics start module qam <1-6> test <complete |
minimal>
Privilege EXEC
D5#
D5(config)#
<complete> Runs a complete diagnostic test suite.
<minimal> Runs a minimal diagnostic test suite.
diagnostics stop module qam
Purpose Stops an ad hoc diagnostics check on the QAM card in the specified slot.
Syntax diagnostics stop module qam <1-6> >
Privilege EXEC
D5#
D5(config)#
diagnostics su qam * do
Purpose Runs a DnlMgr command on the QAM card in the specified slot.
Syntax diagnostics su qam <1-6> do
Privilege EXEC D5#
diagnostics su qam * show
Purpose Displays the DnlMgr information for the QAM card in the specified slot.
Syntax diagnostics su qam <1-6> do
Privilege EXEC D5#
dig
Purpose The domain information groper (dig) sends domain name query packets to
name servers to look up an IP address or hostname.
Syntax dig <fqdn | ip_addr>
Privilege EXEC D5#
<fqdn> Fully qualified domain name. Enter this parameter to discover the IP address.
<ip_addr> IP address. Entering this parameter to discover the FQDN.
dir
Purpose Displays a list of all files in the current directory or the specified directory path.
Syntax dir [<path>]
Privilege EXEC D5#
[<path>] The specified directory path.
disable
Purpose Exits the Privilege EXEC mode and drops the user into the User mode. The
prompt will change from D5# to D5>.
Syntax disable
Privilege EXEC D5#
disconnect
Purpose Disconnects telnet or SSH sessions even if not fully logged in. Valid range: 0
to 3.
NOTE
The disconnect command will not disconnect Web Manager sessions.
Syntax disconnect {vty <0-3> | ssh <0-3>}
Privilege EXEC D5#
vty <0-3> Telnet connection. Valid range is 0-3.
ssh <0-3> SSH connection. Valid range is 0-3.
dti offset
Purpose Sets the DOCSIS timing interface.
Syntax dti offset <-30000-30000>
<-30000-30000> Ticks from 1024Hz clock
dualwan
Purpose Enables dual WAN mode. Use the [no] version of the command to disable dual
WAN mode.
Syntax [no] dualwan
<1-65> Seconds.
duplex
Purpose By default, the port is set to auto-negotiate. If desired, you can set the oper-
ating mode to full duplex with the following command.
Syntax D5<config-if>#duplex <auto | full | hal f >
D5(config-gig-if)#duplex <auto | full>
FastEthernet Interface
GigabitEthernet Interface
D5(config-if)#
D5(config-gig-if)#
<auto> Auto-negotiate mode (for both duplex and speed)
<full> Full-duplex mode
<half> Half-duplex mode. Available in FastEthernet Interface mode only.
ecm-group * super-cas-id
Purpose Specifies an ECM group. The ECM group id must be unique per
CA_system_super-cas-id. Up to two ecm-groups can be described. Use the
[no] version of the command to remove the ECM group from this SCG.
Syntax [no] ecm-group <0-65535> super-cas-id <xxxx.yyyy> [access-
criteria <HH-HH-HH-HH-..>]

<0-65535> ECM ID unique for SCG.
<xxxx.yyyy> Super-cas-id in xxxx.yyyy format.
<HH-HH-HH-HH- ... > Access criteria in a hexidecimal string with dashes
ecm-group * transport
Purpose Configures the PID to be used on the specified QAM channel to transmit the
ECM tables associated with this ECM group. Use the [no] version of the
command to remove the ECM group from the SCG.
Syntax [no] ecm-group <0-65535> transport <0-65535> pid <0-65535>
<0-65535> ECM ID unique for SCG
<0-65535> Transport associated with PID and PID number.
ecm-wakeup
Purpose Enables a non-persistent ECM channel connection. Use the [no] version of the
command to disable the non-persistent ECM channel connection.
Syntax [no] ecm-wakeup <0-65535>

<0-65535> Specify preamble duration before next ECM datagram (in seconds).
enable
Purpose Enters Privilege EXEC mode after receiving a valid enable password. See
undebug snmp on page 17-453 for more details.
NOTE
The User is allowed three invalid login attempts before the login fails. If the
login fails, you will need to type enabl e again.
Syntax enable [global-password <password>] [password <password>]
[secret <password>]
Example To enter Privilege EXEC Mode, type the following command:
D5> enable
Password:
D5#
NOTE
Notice that the D5> prompt changes to D5# prompt when the D5 UEQ
enters the enable mode.
Mode Prompt
User EXEC D5>
global-password <password> Sets the global password
password <password> Sets the enable password
secret <password> Sets the secret password to use
Purpose Configures the default authentication list.
Syntax [no] enable authentication default
enable-login
Purpose Enables TACACS+ users to login directly to Enable mode. Use the [no] version
of the command to turn it off.
Syntax [no] enable-login
Example TACACS+ users can login directly to enable mode by configuring on a line with
the following sequence:
D5(config)# line vty 0 3
D5(config-line)# enable-login
Mode Prompt
encapsulation dot1q
Purpose Assigns a VLAN tag number to this sub-interface. Outbound data is not
encoded with this tag. There can only be one native VLAN specified per subin-
terface. Use the [no] version of the command to remove a specific VLAN tag
number for this interface.
Syntax [no] encapsulation dot1q <1-4094>
D5(config-if)#
D5(config-gig-if)#
D5(config-if)#
<1 - 4094> VLAN tag number.
end
Purpose Exits the current command mode.
Syntax end

All All
erase startup-config
Purpose Erases the startup configuration file.
WARNI NG
This command erases startup configuration file!
Syntax erase startup-config
Privilege EXEC D5#
erm
Purpose Binds a gigabit interface to an ERM. Use the [no] version of the command to
remove the ERM
Syntax [no] erm <name>
GigabitEthernet Sub-interface D5(config-gig-if)#
<name> Name of the configured ERM that this ethernet is available to
exception auto-reboot
Purpose Enables or disables automatic reboot upon system crash. Use the [no] version
of the command to disable automatic reboot upon a system crash.
Syntax [no] exception auto-reboot
exception auto-reboot mon
Purpose Enables or disables automatic reboot upon MON crash. Use the [no] version of
the command to disable automatic reboot upon a MON crash.
Syntax [no] exception auto-reboot mon
exit
Purpose Exits the current command mode. Typing exit in the Global Configuration
mode, exits the user back to the Privilege EXEC mode. Typing exit from the
User mode will terminate the CLI session.
Syntax exit
Mode Prompt
All All
file prompt
Purpose Sets the confirmation level for file commands and instructs the D5 UEQ to
prompt the user before executing certain file commands.
Syntax file prompt [alert |noisy | quiet]
[alert] Prompts only for destructive operations.
[noisy] Confirms all operations
[quiet] Prompts the user to confirm format or erase commands only.
format system
Purpose This command completely erases and reformats a Compact Flash card.
WARNI NG
This command reformats the compact flash card!
Syntax format system
Privilege EXEC D5#
gratuitous arp
Purpose Enables transmission of gratuitous arps and sets transmission parameters on
ports configured in a video mode. Use the [no] version of the command to
disable transmission of gratuitous arps.
Syntax [no] gratuitous arp [interval <5-600>]

<5-600> Transmission interval in seconds.
hostname
Purpose Sets the D5 UEQ host name. The host name is shown as part of the command
line prompt and included with the system log information.
Syntax hostname <string>
<string> Host name
interface
Purpose Defines the configuration on the specified interface, including subnet mask.
Use the [no] version of the command to disable configuration for a specified
interface.
Syntax [no] interface {dti | fastethernet <X/Y.Z> |
gigabitethernet <X/Y> | loopback <1-31> | port-channel <1-
2> | pwr-convertor <1-2> powerup | qam <X | X/Y | X/Y.Z>}
NOTE
Configuration changes will be applied after the exit command is executed.
Port-channel Sub-Interface
QAM Card
QAM Port Sub-Interface
ERM Configuration
D5(config)#
D5<config-if>#
D5(config-gig-if)#
D5(config-if)#
D5(config-qam-if)#
D5(config-erm)#
dti DTI
fastethernet <X/Y.Z> Slot/port.channel
gigabitethernet <X/Y> Slot/port.channel
loopback <1-31>
Loopback number. NOTE: Only loopback sub-interfaces numbered 1-15 are
currently available.
port-channel <1-2> Port-channel number
pwr-convertor <1-2>
powerup
Powers up the specified power convertor
qam <X | X/Y | X/Y.Z> QAM Card [1-6] | QAM Port [1-4] | QAM Channel interface [1-8]
ip address
Purpose Defines IP configuration on this interface, including subnet mask. The IP
address can be set as secondary. Use the [no] version of the command to
disable IP configuration on this interface.
Syntax [no] ip address <N.N.N.N> <M.M.M.M> [secondary]>

ECMG Configuration
EIS Configuration
D5<config-if>#
D5(config-gig-if)#
D5(config-if)#
D5(config-ecmg)#
D5(config-eis)#
D5(config-psig)#
<N.N.N.N> IP address. The IP address can be set as secondary.
<M.M.M.M> Subnet mask
[secondary] Secondary address
ip broadcast-address
Purpose Defines broadcast IP configuration on this interface.
Syntax ip broadcast-address <N.N.N.N>
D5<config-if>#
D5(config-gig-if)#
D5(config-if)#
<N.N.N.N> IP Mask.
ip bundle fastethernet
Purpose Sets up IP bundle spare fastethernet interface relationship. Use the [no] option
to remove the spare port.
Syntax [no] ip bundle fastethernet <0/1>
Fastethernet Interface D5<config-if>#
<0/1> Slot/port
ip bundle gigabitethernet
Purpose Sets up IP bundle spare gigabitEthernet interface relationship. Use the [no]
option to remove the spare port.
Syntax [no] ip bundle gigabitethernet <0/1>
<0/1> Slot/port
ip bundle policy non-revertive
Purpose Sets the IP redundancy option to remain on the spare port when the primary
port becomes operational.
Syntax [no] ip bundle policy non-revertive
ip bundle policy revertive
Purpose Sets the IP redundancy option to switch from the spare port to the primary port
when the primary port becomes operational.
Syntax [no] ip bundle policy revertive {wait-time <sec>}
{wait-time <sec>} Amount of time in seconds before switching
ip bundle revert
Purpose Sets the IP redundancy option.
Syntax ip bundle revert <to | from>
to Forces a switch from the spare port to the current port.
from Forces a switch from the current port to the spare port.
ip domain-name
Purpose Sets the domain name for the D5 UEQ. Use the [no] version of the command
to disable the domain name.
Syntax [no] ip domain-name <string>
<string> Domain name
ip http authentication aaa login-authentication
Purpose Enables the AAA support in the Web Manager. Use the [no] version of the
command to disable.
Syntax [no] ip http authentication aaa login-authentication

ip http enable
Purpose Enables the Web Manager to process HTTP requests. Use the [no] version of
the command to disable the Web Manager from processing HTTP requests.
Syntax [no] ip http enable

ip igmp
Purpose Enables IGMP message processing on the gigabitEthernet interface.
Syntax ip igmp
D5(config-gig-if)#
D5(config-if)#
ip igmp process-remote-queries
Purpose Allows processing queries from any subnet.
Syntax ip igmp process-remote-queries
D5(config-gig-if)#
D5(config-if)#
ip igmp query-max-response-timeout
Purpose Sets the maximum interval, in 1/10 second increments.
Syntax ip igmp query-max-response-timeout <10-255>
D5(config-gig-if)#
D5(config-if)#
<10-255> Tenths of seconds.
ip igmp robustness
Purpose Variable for tuning the expected packet loss on a subnet.
Syntax ip igmp robustness <1-255>
D5(config-gig-if)#
D5(config-if)#
<1-255> Value of robustness.
ip igmp static-group
Purpose Adds the specified static group on this interface. Use the [no] version of the
command to remove a specific static group from this interface.
Syntax [no]ip igmp static-group <N.N.N.N> [source <M.M.M.M>]
D5(config-gig-if)#
D5(config-if)#
<N.N.N.N> Multicast group IP address
source <M.M.M.M> Source specific IP address
ip igmp static-group source
Purpose Adds the specified static group on this interface. Use the [no] version of the
command to remove a specific static group from this interface.
Syntax [no] ip igmp static-group <N.N.N.N> [source <S.S.S.S>]
D5(config-gig-if)#
D5(config-if)#
<S.S.S.S> Source IP address
ip igmp verify ip-router-alert-option
Purpose Enables checking for the presence of the IP Router Alert option in IGMPv2 and
IGMPv3 messages. Use the [no] version of the command to disable checking
for the presence of the IP Router Alert option in IGMPv2 and IGMPv3 mess-
sages.
Syntax [no] ip igmp verify ip-router-alert-option
D5(config-gig-if)#
D5(config-if)#
ip igmp version
Purpose Enables IGMP version 1, 2, or 3.
Syntax ip igmp version <1-3>
D5(config-gig-if)#
D5(config-if)#
<1-3> IGMP Version
ip local-address
Purpose Explicitly sets the source IP address used in the D5 UEQ to ERM IP commun-
cations. Setting this address ensures that the D5 UEQ can be unambiguously
identified by a fixed IP address from the ERM point of view. Use the [no]
version of the command to remove the local configured IP address.
Syntax [no] ip local-address <ip-addr/dhcp>
ip-addr
The local IP address configured on the D5 UEQ to uses as the source iP
address for ERM communications.
dhcp Sets the local-address to use the DHCP supplied IP address.
ip name-server
Purpose Specifies the domain name servers for the D5 UEQ. Use the [no] version of the
command to return to the default setting.
Syntax [no] ip name-server {retries <1-10>} {N.N.N.N [primary |
secondary]}
<retries>
Sets the number of times the resolver libraries retry name lookups. Valid range
is 1-10. The default is 1. Note: this can slow down the system if too high.
N.N.N.N [primary | secondary]
Adds the IP address of the Domain Name Server to the list of servers. Using
the optional primary or secondary parameter specifies if this is the primary or
secondary (max. 2) Domain Name Server.
ip remote address
Purpose Sets the remote IP address of the desired ERM device as well as identify which
of its own local addresses it should select for the source for ERM communica-
tions. Use the [no] version of the command to remove the remote IP address.
Syntax [no] ip remote address <ip-addr> [secondary]
<ip-addr>
The IP address of the remote ERM to connect to. This can be set using dotted
decimal notation (n.n.n.n) or a Fully Qualified Domain Name (FQDN).
[secondary]
This is used to qualify the remote ERM address as a backup ERM. The D5 UEQ
will switchover to this ERM if the primary configured ERM fails and the D5 UEQ
gives up connection attempts to that ERM.
ip route
Purpose Creates a static route on the D5 UEQ. The administrative distance can be
adjusted and different gateways may be given for the same route with
different administrative distances. The D5 UEQ uses the lowest administrative
distance until the route fails, then it uses the next higher administrative
distance and so on. Up to six static routes may be configures in this manner.
Use the [no] version of the command to remove a specific static route.
The route to a connected subnet (subnet of a sub-interface) always has an
administrative distance of 0, this is the first route selected if there is any
conflict with a static route. After a reboot, the D5 UEQ uses the first static route
defined in the startup-configuration file.
Syntax [no] ip route <N.N.N.N> <N.N.N.N> <N.N.N.N> <1-255>

<N.N.N.N> Destination IP address
<N.N.N.N> Destination IP mask
<N.N.N.N> IP address of forwarding router
<1-255> Distance metric for this route. The default value is 1.
ip routing
Purpose Enables IP routing. Use the [no] version of the command to disable IP routing.
Syntax [no] ip routing
ip ssh authentication-retries
Purpose Sets the number of authentication retries for SSH access. Use the [no] version
of the command to remove the authentication retries.
Syntax [no] ip ssh authentication-retries <number>
<number> Retries. The valid range is 0-65535.
ip ssh authentication-timeout
Purpose Sets the maximum number of seconds the SSH server waits for authentication
input. Use the [no] version of the command to reset the default.
Syntax [no] ip ssh authentication-timeout <sec>
<sec> Seconds. Valid range is 0-65535 seconds. Use 0 (zero) to disable.
ip ssh port
Purpose Sets the TCP port at which the D5 UEQ listens for SSH connections. Use the
[no] version of the command to remove the port at which the D5 UEQ listens
for SSH connections.
Syntax [no] ip ssh port <1-65535>
<1-65535> SSH IP port number
ip ssh server
Purpose Enables or restarts the SSH server. Use the [no] version of the command to
disable the SSH server.
Syntax [no] ip ssh server <enable | restart>
ip ssh version
Purpose Specifies the version of SSH to run. Use the [no] version of the command to
remove the version of SSH.
Syntax [no] ip ssh version <1 | 2 | both>
1 Enables only SSH1 mode.
2 Enables only SSH2 mode
both> Enables both SSH1 and SSH2 mode.
ip telnet server disable
Purpose Inhibits the establishment of new telnet sessions. Existing telnet sessions will
continue. The default setting is telnet sessions enabled. Use the [no] version
of the command to re-enable the telnet server.
Syntax [no] ip telnet server disable
line
Modifies terminal parameters for the current specified interactive cli session.
NOTE
These settings revert to the defaults on the next login.
Syntax line {console | ssh | http | vty [0-3]}
Example To enter line console, type the following command:
D5(config)# line console
The system response would be (and the prompt would change):
Conf i gur i ng consol e
D5(config-line)#
Example To enter line ssh, type the following command:
D5(config)# line ssh
Conf i gur i ng SSH l i nes 0 t o 3
D5(config-line)#
console Configures the console.
ssh Configures SSH.
http Configures HTTP (web manager)
vty <0-3> Configures VTY (telnet).
Example To enter line vty, type the following command:
D5(config)# line vty
Conf i gur i ng t el net l i nes 0 t o 3
D5(config-line)#
load-balancing
Purpose Enables load-balancing. Use the [no] version of the command to disable load-
balancing.
Syntax [no] load-balancing
load-interval
Purpose Defines load interval for averaging data rates on this interface.
Syntax load-interval <30-600>
D5<config-if>#
D5(config-gig-if)#
<30-600> Seconds
logging alarm clear
Purpose Clears a specified alarm condition or all alarm conditions on the D5 UEQ.
Syntax logging alarm clear <alarmId | all>
alarmId Alarm ID.
all Clears all alarm conditions.
logging buffered
Purpose Configures the buffered logging parameter. Use the [no] version of the
command to disable the buffered logging.
Syntax [no] logging buffered [<1-8> | <50-1000>]
[<1-8>] Sets the logging severity level. The higher number reveals more information.
[<50-1000>] Sets the logging buffer size. Default is 300.
logging console
Purpose Enables logging on the console. Use the [no] version of the command to
disable console logging.
NOTE
The logging console configuration is not saved in the startup-config file when
wr i t e memor y command is executed. Hence, the configuration will not
persist on reboot and will need to be reconfigured each time you reload.
Syntax [no] logging console <1-8>
<1-8> Sets the logging level. Default is Errors level.
logging monitor
Purpose Configures the monitor logging level. Use the [no] version of the command to
disable the monitor logging level.
Syntax [no] logging monitor [<1-8>]
logging ngod
Purpose Enables NGOD logging. Use the [no] version of the command to disable all
logging.
Syntax [no] logging ngod
logging on
Purpose Enables all logging. Use the [no] version of the command to disable all logging.
Syntax [no] logging on
logging override event
Purpose Customizes the severity of the specified event. Use the [no] version of the
command to return to the default value.
Syntax [no] logging override event <eventId> {inhibit | severity
<1-8>}
eventId Event ID
inhibit Inhibits
severity <1-8>} Severity value
logging override event * trap
Purpose Enables the specified event ID to be transmitted using the generic D5 UEQ
trap. This command overrides the sending of any D5 UEQ specific trap that
may have been associated with the eventID originally.
Syntax logging override event <eventId> trap [none]
eventId Event ID
[none] Disables trap generation
logging override event * trap none
Purpose Disables the specified event ID from generating any kind of trap, regardless of
whether it was a generic D5 UEQ trap or a specific D5 UEQ trap associate with
the eventID.
Syntax logging override event <eventId> trap none
eventId Event ID
logging severity
Purpose Configures the event generation by the severity level of the event.
Syntax logging severity <1-8> <local | no-local> <trap | no-trap>
<sys | no-sys> <vol | no-vol>
<1-8> Sets the logging severity level. The higher number reveals more information.
local | no local Enables or disables local logging.
trap | no-trap Enables or disables trap logging.
sys | no-sys Enables or disables syslog logging.
vol | no-vol Enables or disables local volatile logging.
logging syslog
Purpose Enables syslog logging for events. Use the [no] version of the command to
disable syslog logging of events.
Syntax [no] logging syslog [<1-8>]
logging syslog host
Purpose Configures the syslog host. Use the [no] version of the command to disable
the syslog host.
Syntax [no] logging syslog host <N.N.N.N>
logging thresh all
Purpose Blocks logging of all events.
Syntax logging thresh all
logging thresh at
Purpose Stops logging when specified threshold is reached.
Syntax logging thresh at <0-2147483647>
<0-2147483647> Number of events to allow.
logging thresh below
Purpose Maintains logging below specified threshold.
Syntax logging thresh below <0-2147483647>
<0-2147483647> Number of events per interval.
logging thresh interval
Purpose Sets the event logging threshold interval.
Syntax logging thresh interval <0-2147483647>
<0-2147483647> Seconds
logging thresh none
Purpose Sets the event logging threshold to be unconstrained.
Syntax logging thresh none
logging trap
Purpose Enables transmission of SNMP logging traps to an external SNMP management
system. Use the [no] version of the command to disable logs.
Syntax [no] logging trap [<1-8>]
<1-8> Sets the logging severity level. The higher number reveals more information.
logging trap-control
Purpose Configures trap control.
Syntax logging trap-control <HHHH>
<HHHH> Sets valid docsbevCmtsTrapControl (value in HEX).
login authentication
Purpose Configures authentication parameters.
Syntax [no] login authentication {default | <input>}
default The default exec authentication list
<input> Named exec authentication list.
login user name
Purpose Changes login user name.
Syntax login user name <string>
<string> User name.
login user password
Purpose Changes login user password.
Syntax login user password <string>
<string> User password.
logout
Purpose Closes the connection to the D5 UEQ.
Syntax logout
All All
mac-address
Purpose Modifies the MAC address on this interface. Use the [no] version of the
command to remove a specific MAC address from this interface.
Syntax [no] mac-address <nnnn.nnnn.nnnn>
<nnnn.nnnn.nnnn> New MAC address
mac-address-table static
Purpose Manually creates an entry in the forwarding database (FDB), associating
packets with the specified incoming MAC address to an external or internal
(IPP) interface. Use the [no] version of the command to remove entries in the
forwarding database.
Syntax [no] mac-address-table static <H.H.H> {fastethernet <X/Y>
[<1-4094>] | gigabitethernet <X/Y> [<1-4094>]}
<H.H.H> MAC address
<X/Y> The fastethernet interface card/port.
<1 - 4094> The VLAN tag.
<X/Y> The gigabitethernet interface card/port.
management-access
Purpose Enables local management through this interface. Use the [no] version of the
command to disable local management on this interface.
Syntax [no] management-access
D5<config-if>#
D5(config-gig-if)#
D5(config-if)#
mkdir
Purpose Creates a new directory on the Compact Flash card.
Syntax mkdir <dirname>
Privilege EXEC D5#
<dirname> New directory name.
mpeg-section
Purpose Sets the expected data format to the MPEG sections for the stream. Use the
[no] version of the command to set the default for the MPEG frames.
Syntax [no] mpeg-section
more
Purpose Displays the contents of the specified file one page at a time. If no option is
given, this command will ignore missing carriage returns in Unix files.
Press c to display the entire file without pausing, press enter to view one line
at a time, press space to page down, or press esc to quit viewing the file.
Syntax more <file name> [binary | crlf]
Privilege EXEC D5#
<file name> File name
binary Displays the contents of a binary file.
crlf
Properly displays a text file transferred from an MS-DOS or Windows operating
system.
network-id
Purpose Changes the DVB network-id used in the output QAM(s). Use the [no] version
of the command to reset the network ID to the default value.
Syntax [no] network-id <0-65535>
<0-65535> Original network ID. The default network ID is 4369.
ntp server
Purpose Configures D5 UEQ to use an external Network Time Protocol (NTP) server for
its time source. Use the [no] version of the command to remove the NTP
servers or an individual server.
NOTE
Default value for first NTP server added is: Interval 300 seconds, Master
enabled and Server enabled. Additional servers can be added but they will not
be made Master by default.
Syntax [no] ntp server <N.N.N.N> [delete | disable | enable |
interval <1-2147483647> | master]
<N.N.N.N> NTP server IP address.
delete Removes the specified NTP server from the list.
disable Disables polling of the specified server.
enable Enables polling of an existing but previously disabled server.
interval
The time, in seconds, the D5 UEQ waits between NTP updates. Valid range: 1
- 2147483647 seconds. Default is 300 seconds.
master Designates the specified server as the master. Default is master enabled.
pid
Purpose Sets the PID to be used to transmit the EMM for the stream. Use the [no]
version of the command to set the default to use the input PID value on the
output QAM.
Syntax [no] pid <16-8191>
Video Channel Configuration
EMMG Configuration
D5(config-video-channel)#
D5(config-emmg)#
<16-8191> QAM output PID
ping
Purpose Sends a series of ICMP echo requests to the specified IP address, and reports
whether the D5 UEQ received an echo response for each packet.
The ping operation may be terminated at any time by pressing any key on the
CLI.
NOTE
This command can be used in multiple combinations within the various
parameters.
Syntax ping <N.N.N.N> [interval <n> | repeat <n> | size <n> |
source <N.N.N.N> | timeout <n>]
User EXEC
Privilege EXEC
D5>
D5#
<N.N.N.N> IP address <N.N.N.N>.
interval <n>
Specifies the interval, in seconds, between successful, successive ping
attempts. If the ping attempt is unsuccessful, the timeout setting will take
priority over the interval setting. Valid range is 0 to 3600. The default is 0
seconds.
repeat <n>
Specifies the number of ping attempts to be made. Valid range is 1 to
2,147,483,647.
size <n>
Specifies the size (in bytes) of the ping packet generated. This size includes
the IP packet header and the ICMP payload (i.e. not the L2 header size). Valid
range is 36 to 4079. The default is 64 byte ip packet.
source <N.N.N.N>
Specifies the source IP address to be included in the IP header of the ping
packet. This IP address must be configured on an operational interface
otherwise the command will fail. The source IP address specifies does not
determine the outbound interface of the ping request. Instead, it is used to
select the inbound interface that the responding host will issue its
corresponding ping response to.
timeout <n>
Specifies the timeout, in seconds, between successive unsuccessful pint
attempts (e.e the period that will be waited for a ping request after a ping
request has been issued). Valid range is 0 to 3600. The default is 2 seconds
port
Purpose Enables the DTI interface.
Syntax port <input>
DTI Interface
ECMG Configuration
EMMG Configuration
EIS Configuration
D5(config-dti}#
D5(config-ecmg)#
D5(config-emmg)#
D5(config-eis)#
D5(config-psig)#
<port> Select a port number to use.
port-selection-criteria destination-ip
Purpose Configures the algorithm for forwarding packets using the destination IP
address.
Syntax port-selection-criteria destination-ip
Port-channel Sub-interface D5(config-if)#
port-selection-criteria destination-mac
Purpose Configures the algorithm for forwarding packets using the destination MAC
address.
Syntax port-selection-criteria destination-mac
port-selection-criteria source-destination-ip
Purpose Configures the algorithm for forwarding packets using the source and destina-
tion IP address.
Syntax port-selection-criteria source-destination-ip
port-selection-criteria source-destination-mac
Purpose Configures the algorithm for forwarding packets using the source and destina-
tion MAC address.
Syntax port-selection-criteria source-destination-mac
port-selection-criteria source-ip
Purpose Configures the algorithm for forwarding packets using the source IP address.
Syntax port-selection-criteria source-ip
port-selection-criteria source-mac
Purpose Configures the algorithm for forwarding packets using the source MAC
address.
Syntax port-selection-criteria source-mac
post
Purpose Enables the ability to run Power On Self Tests (POST) during system reboot.
Use the [no] version of the command to disable the POST during system
reboot.
Syntax [no] post <disable | enable | status>
<disable>
Future D5 UEQ reboots are executed without a POST. This is also known as a
quick reboot.
<enable> Future D5 UEQ reboots are executed featuring a POST.
<status> Displays the status of the POST feature.
primary
Purpose Makes the ECMG a primary. Use the [no] version of the command to set the
ECMG as backup.
Syntax [no] primary
privilege exec level
Purpose Sets the minimum level required to execute a command.
Syntax privilege exec level <0-15> [reset]
<0-15> Privilege levels.
[reset] Resets the minimum level required to execute a command.
protocol-mapping erm
Purpose Maps the specified ERM to an SDV protocol.
Syntax protocol-mapping erm <name>
<name> ERM name
protocol-mapping rpc input gigabitethernet
Purpose Specifies the primary input port for the QAM when using SDV RPC. Use the [no]
version of the command to reset the default input port for the QAM.
Syntax [no] protocol-mapping rpc input gigabitethernet <x/y>
QAM Card Interface
QAM Port Sub-Interface
D5(config-qam-card)#
D5(config-qam-if)#
<X/Y> Primary input port. Valid range is 0/1 or 0/2.
pwd
Purpose Displays the current directory.
Syntax pwd
Privilege EXEC D5#
radius-server host
Purpose Configures a Radius server. Use the [no] version of the command to remove a
specific Radius server.
Syntax [no] radius-server host <ip_addr>
<ip_addr> IP address of the Radius server (in a.b.c.d form)
radius-server key
Purpose Configures the Radius encryption key. Use the [no] version of the command to
remove a specific Radius encryption key.
Syntax [no] radius-server key <input>
<input>
Key used to set authentication and encryption. This key must match the key
used on the Radius daemon.
radius-server retransmit
Purpose Configures the number of transmissions for each Radius request. Use the [no]
version of the command to reset the number of transmissions.
Syntax [no] radius-server retransmit <0-5>
<0-5> Number of retransmissions. Default value is set at 3.
radius-server source-address
Purpose Configures the source IP address of the outbound Radius packets. Use the [no]
version of the command to remove the source IP address of the outbound
Radius packets.
Syntax [no] radius-server source-address <ip_addr>
<ip_addr> IP address of the Radius server (in a.b.c.d form)
radius-server timeout
Purpose Configures the global timeout. Use the [no] version of the command to delete
the global Radius timeout.
Syntax [no] radius-server timeout <0-1000>
<0-1000> Timeout value in seconds. Valid range is 0-1000. Default is set at 5 seconds.
reboot
Purpose Reboots the D5 UEQ WAN.
Syntax reboot <post | nopost>
Privilege EXEC D5#
post Reboots the D5 UEQ WAN with POST
nopost Reboots the D5 UEQ WAN without POST
redundancy-group
Purpose Adds the ECMG to a specified redundancy group. Use the [no] version of the
command to remove ECMG from its current grouping and put it into the default
redundancy-group.
Syntax [no] redundancy-group <group>
<group> Group name
reload
Purpose Restarts the D5 UEQ. If changes to the configuration file have been made, the
D5 UEQ will prompt the user to save the running configuration to the startup
configuration. If the user chooses not to save the running configuration to the
startup configuration, the D5 UEQ appends a copy of the running configuration
to the shut downdebug. l og file on the Compact Flash disk.
WARNI NG
This command restarts the D5 UEQ.
Syntax reload [at <hh:mm> [reason] | cancel | in <hh:mm> [reason]
| nopost | post]
Example To restart the D5 UEQ, use the following command:
D5# reload
Save configuration when rebooting (Y/N)?Y
Ar e you sur e you want t o r eboot t he syst em( Y/ N) ?N
Privilege EXEC D5#
at <hh:mm> [reason]
Specifies the clock time, in <hh:mm> notation, to reboot the D5 UEQ. You can
add an optional reason string, describing why the reboot was necessary.
cancel Cancels a scheduled reboot.
in <hh:mm> [reason]
Specifies the amount of time, in <hh:mm> notation, to wait before rebooting
the D5 UEQ (max of 99:59). You can add an optional reason string, describing
why the reboot was necessary.
nopost
Reboots the D5 UEQ without performing any Power-On-Self-Tests (POST).
The result is a quicker reboot sequence.
post Reboots the D5 UEQ and performs the Power-On-Self-Tests (POST).
rename
Purpose Changes the name of a specified file name to a new file name on the Compact
Flash dish.
CAUTI ON
Use caution when renaming boot image or startup configuration files.
Syntax rename <OLD_FILENAME> <NEW_FILENAME>
Privilege EXEC D5#
<OLD_FILENAME> Old name of file to be changed.
<NEW_FILENAME> New file name.
revertive
Purpose Forces a switchover to the primary DTI link whenever it recovers after a failure.
Use the [no] version of the command to disable and force the D5 UEQ to
remain on its current DTI link without switching back to any recovering links.
Syntax [no] revertive
DTI Interface D5(config-dti}#
rmdir
Purpose Removes the specified directory.
NOTE
The D5 UEQ will not remove a directory until the contents in it are deleted.
Syntax rmdir <DIRNAME>
Privilege EXEC D5#
<DIRNAME> Name of directory
rtsp connection-timeout
Purpose Sets the RTSP TCP timeout in seconds.
Syntax rtsp connection-timeout <1-65535>
<1-65535> The RTSP Connection timeout in seconds.
rtsp message-timeout
Purpose Sets the maximum time in seconds allowed between RTSP request and
response messages.
Syntax rtsp message-timeout <1-65535>
<1-65535> The RTSP message timeout in seconds.
rtsp port
Purpose Sets the RTSPTCP listening port number.
Syntax rtsp port <1-65535>
<1-65535> The RTSP TCP listening port number.
rtsp session-timeout
Purpose Sets the maximum time in seconds an RTSP session may persist without an
RTSP PING message.
Syntax rtsp session-timeout <1-65535>
<1-65535> Time in seconds.
script execute
Purpose Executes a recorded script in the specified file.
Syntax script execute <string>
Privilege EXEC D5#
<string> Name of file containing script.
script start
Purpose Begins recording a command script to the specified file.
Syntax script start <string>
Privilege EXEC D5#
<string> Name to call recorded script file.
script stop
Purpose Finishes recording a command script.
Syntax script stop
Privilege EXEC D5#
send
Purpose Sends a text message to the specified CLI user logged into the D5 UEQ.
Syntax send {all | console | ssh <0-3> | vty <0-3>} <string>
Example
D5# send all testing
***
***
*** Message f r omvt y0 t o al l t er mi nal s:
***
t est i ng
Privilege EXEC D5#
all Sends a message to all users.
console Sends a message to the console user.
ssh <0-3>
Sends a message to the SSH user on specified session. Valid session number
is 0 to 3.
vty <0-3> Sends a message to the specified VTY. Valid range is 0 to 3.
<string> Message to be sent.
service
Purpose Enables scrambling on specific or all QAM channels. There are no default
values. This command can be repeated for different combinations of Service
and Transport Stream IDs. Use the [no] version of the command to enable
scrambling on all programs on all QAM channels.
Syntax [no] service <1-65535 | all> transport {1-65535 | all>
[exclude]}
<1-65535> Service or Transport Stream ID.
<all> All channels or transport streams
[exclude] Excludes specified channel or stream
Example To enable scrambling on all programs on all QAM channels, use the following
command:
D5(config)# video scg <name>
D5(config-scg)# network id 1234
D5(config-scg)# cp-duration 120
D5(config-scg)# ecm group 1 super-cas-id 8100.0001
D5(config-scg)# service all transport all
D5(config-scg)# no shutdown
D5(config)# exit
service-id
Purpose Assigns a common service-id for replicated programs. Use the [no] version of
the command to remove the assigned service-id for replicated programs.
Syntax [no] service-id <1-65535>

<1-65535> Program number
service-use docsis
Purpose Reserves the QAM channel bandwidth.
Syntax service-use docsis <name> bandwidth <bits/s>
QAM Channel Sub-interface D5(config-qam-if)#
<name> CMTS hostname
<bits/s> Maximum allowed bitrate
show aaa line console
Purpose Displays the console method list configuration.
Syntax show aaa line console
show aaa line console
Purpose Displays the console method list configuration.
Syntax show aaa line console
Privilege EXEC
D5#
D5(config)#
show aaa line http
Purpose Displays the HTTP (web manager) method list configuration.
Syntax show aaa line http [<0-3>[ [<0-3>]
Privilege EXEC
D5#
D5(config)#
<0-3> First line number.
<0-3> Last line number
show aaa line ssh
Purpose Displays the SSH method list configuration.
Syntax show aaa line ssh {<0-3>] [<0-3>]
Privilege EXEC
D5#
D5(config)#
<0-3> First line number
show aaa line vty
Purpose Displays the VTY (telnet) method list configuration.
Syntax show aaa line vty [<0-3>] [<0-3>]
Privilege EXEC
D5#
D5(config)#
<0-3> First line number
show aaa methods-list
Purpose Displays the method lists defined in the AAA subsystem.
Syntax show aaa methods-list <aacounting | authorization | all |
authentication>
Privilege EXEC D5#
accounting Displays the accounting method lists
authorization Displays the authorization method lists
all Displays all AAA method lists.
authentication Displays the authentication method lists
show aliases
Purpose Displays any defined aliases for commands.
Syntax show aliases
User EXEC
Privilege EXEC
D5>
D5#
show all-commands
Purpose Displays all commands available in the D5 UEQ CLI.
NOTE
This command will produce a large amount of output. To reduce the output,
filter the information.
Syntax show all-commands
Privilege EXEC D5#
show arp
Purpose Displays the associated MAC and IP addresses for interfaces or addresses,
learned through ARP.
Syntax show arp
User EXEC
Privilege EXEC
D5>
D5#
show bootvar
Purpose Displays the current boot image device and filenames.
Syntax show bootvar
User EXEC
Privilege EXEC
D5>
D5#
show bridge
Purpose Displays the WAN-side bridging details.
Syntax show bridge
Privilege EXEC D5#
show calendar
Purpose Displays the current date and time known to the D5 UEQ.
Syntax show calendar
User EXEC
Privilege EXEC
D5>
D5#
show cli accounts
Purpose Displays configured user accounts.
Syntax show cli accounts
Privilege EXEC D5#
show cli host
Purpose Displays which WAN is hosting the CLI session.
Syntax show cli host
Privilege EXEC D5#
show cli logging session
Purpose Displays contents of the command log files for the specified session.
Syntax show cli logging [session [<0-8>]]
Privilege EXEC D5#
<0-8> Session number.
show clock
Purpose Displays the current date and time known to the D5 UEQ.
Syntax show clock [timezone]
User EXEC
Privilege EXEC
D5>
D5#
[timezone] Displays the current time zone and its offset from GMT.
show configuration
Purpose Displays system configuration.
Syntax show configuration
Privilege EXEC D5#
show context
Purpose Displays context information about recent system crashes.
Syntax show context
Privilege EXEC D5#
show controllers
Purpose Displays hardware controller status.
Syntax show controllers [fastethernet <x/y> | <type x/y>]
Privilege EXEC D5#
fastethernet <x/y> Slot and port of the fastEthernet.
type x/y> Interface <port/slot>
show crypto key mypubkey
Purpose Displays the SSH server host public key.
Syntax show crypto key mypubkey <dsa | rsa>
User EXEC
Privilege EXEC
D5>
D5#
<dsa> Displays this system's DSA public key.
<rsa> Displays this system's RSA public key.
show crypto key pubkey-chain rsa
Purpose Displays the installed RSA public key for the specified D5 UEQ user ID.
Syntax show crypto key pubkey-chain rsa <name>
User EXEC
Privilege EXEC
D5>
D5#
<name> Userid
show debug history
Purpose Displays buffered debug output.
Syntax show debug history
Privilege EXEC D5#
show debug logging
Purpose Displays debug logging configuration.
Syntax show debug logging
Privilege EXEC D5#
show depi control-plane connection
Purpose Displays the specified DEPI L2TP control-plane connection information.
Syntax show depi control-plane connection <1-65535> [verbose]
Privilege EXEC D5#
<1-65535>] Local connection ID
show depi sessions
Purpose Displays all configured depi sessions.
Syntax show depi sessions [verbose]
Privilege EXEC D5#
[verbose] Displays all DEPI sessions and counters.
show environment
Purpose Displays telemetry data that has been recorded in the current minute, past
minutes (up to 1440) and the minimum and maximum thresholds that have
occurred over a 24 hour period. This command is robust and has numerous
variants because it is designed for monitoring critical D5 UEQ information on
temperatures of various subsystems, fan speeds, and voltages of different
hardware components. This information can be compared against thresholds
and displayed to the user in a variety of ways. Telemetry data from the QAMs,
WANs, MON, PMODs, power supplies, fans, voltage sensors and temperature
sensors all report to the user via this command
Syntax show environment
Privilege EXEC D5#
show environment minmax all
Purpose Displays past minimum and maximum information for installed modules.
Syntax show environment minmax all <all | mon | pmod | qam | wan>
Privilege EXEC D5#
all All installed cards
mon All MON modules
pmod All PMOD modules
qam All QAM modules
wan All WAN modules
show environment minmax speed
Purpose Displays past minimum and maximum speed information.
Syntax show environment minmax speed
Privilege EXEC D5#
show environment minmax temperature
Purpose Displays past minimum and maximum temperature information.
Syntax show environment minmax temperature <all | mon | pmod | qam
| wan>
Privilege EXEC D5#
all All installed modules
mon All MON modules
qam All QAM modules
wan All WAN modules
show environment minmax voltage
Purpose Displays past minimum and maximum voltage information.
Syntax show environment minmax voltage <all | mon | pmod | qam |
wan>
Privilege EXEC D5#
all All installed modules
mon All MON modules
qam All QAM modules
wan All WAN modules
show environment speed threshold
Purpose Displays environment speed information based on threshold levels.
Syntax show environment speed threshold
Privilege EXEC D5#
show environment speed time
Purpose Displays speed information for a specified time period.
Syntax show environment speed time {current | past <1-1439>}
Privilege EXEC D5#
current Displays information for the current time period.
past <1-1439>
Displays information in minutes for a time period in the past. Valid range is 1-
1439 minutes.
show environment temperature all threshold
Purpose Displays temperature information for all installed cards based on threshold
levels.
Syntax show environment temperature all threshold <all | up_warn
| up_fatal>
Privilege EXEC D5#
<all | up_warn | up_fatal> Threshold type.
show environment temperature all time
Purpose Displays temperature information for all installed cards for a specified time
period.
Syntax show environment temperature all time {current | past <1-
1439>}
Privilege EXEC D5#
past <1-1439>
1439 minutes.
show environment temperature mon * threshold
Purpose Displays temperature information for the MON board based on threshold
levels.
Syntax show environment temperature mon <psu> threshold <all |
up_warn | up_fatal>
Privilege EXEC D5#
<psu> Test point.
show environment temperature mon * time
Purpose Displays temperature information for the MON board for a specified time
period.
Syntax show environment temperature mon <psu> time {current | past
<1-1439>}
Privilege EXEC D5#
<psu> Test point.
past <1-1439>
1439 minutes.
show environment temperature pmod * * threshold
Purpose Displays temperature information for the power module in the specified slot
based on threshold type.
Syntax show environment temperature pmod <1 | 2> <center>
threshold <all | up_warn | up_fatal>
Privilege EXEC D5#
<1 | 2> Slot number.
<center> Test point.
show environment temperature pmod * * time
Purpose Displays temperature information for the power module in the specified slot for
a specified time period.
Syntax show environment temperature pmod <1|2> <center> time
{current | past <1-1439>}
Privilege EXEC D5#
<center> Test point.
past <1-1439>
1439 minutes.
show environment temperature qam * * threshold
Purpose Displays temperature information for the QAM module in the specified slot
based on threshold levels.
Syntax show environment temperature qam <1-6> <all|phy|psu>
threshold <all|up_warn|up_fatal>
Privilege EXEC D5#
<1-6> Slot number.
<all|phy|psu> Test point.
<all|up_warn|up_fatal> Threshold type.
show environment temperature qam * * time
Purpose Displays temperature information for the QAM module in the specified slot for
Syntax show environment temperature qam <1-6> <all|phy|psu> time
Privilege EXEC D5#
<1-6> Slot number.
<all|phy|psu> Test point.
past <1-1439>
1439 minutes.
show environment temperature wan * * threshold
Purpose Displays temperature information for the WAN module in the specified slot
based on threshold levels.
Syntax show environment temperature wan <7>
<all|front|back|middle> threshold <all | up_warn |
up_fatal>
Privilege EXEC D5#
<7> Slot number.
<all|front|back|middle> Test point.
show environment temperature wan * * time
Purpose Displays temperature information for the WAN module in the specified slot for
Syntax show environment temperature wan <7>
<all|front|back|middle> time {current | past <1-1439>}
Privilege EXEC D5#
<7> Slot number.
<all|front|back|middle> Test point.
past <1-1439>
1439 minutes.
show environment voltage all threshold
Purpose Displays voltage information for all installed cards based on threshold levels.
Syntax show environment voltage all threshold
<all|up_warn|low_warn|up_fatal|low_fatal>
Privilege EXEC D5#
<all|up_warn|low_warn|
up_fatal|low_fatal>
Threshold type.
show environment voltage all time
Purpose Displays voltage information for all installed cards for a specified time period.
Syntax show environment voltage all time {current | past <1-1439>}
Privilege EXEC D5#
{current | Displays information for the current time period.
past <1-1439>}
1439 minutes.
show environment voltage mon * threshold
Purpose Displays voltage information for the MON board based on threshold levels.
Syntax show voltage temperature mon <all|5.0|3.3|2.5|1.2>
threshold <all|up_warn|low_warn|up_fatal|low_fatal>
Privilege EXEC D5#
<all|5.0|3.3|2.5|1.2> Test point.
up_fatal|low_fatal>
Threshold type.
show environment voltage mon * time
Purpose Displays voltage information for the MON board for a specified time period.
Syntax show environment voltage mon <all|5.0|3.3|2.5|1.2> time
Privilege EXEC D5#
<all|5.0|3.3|2.5|1.2> Test point.
past <1-1439>
1439 minutes.
show environment voltage pmod * threshold
Purpose Displays voltage information for the power module in the specified slot based
on threshold levels.
Syntax show environment voltage pmod <1 | 2>
<all|12.0(2)|9.0|5.0> threshold
Privilege EXEC D5#
<all|12.0(2)|9.0|5.0> Test point.
up_fatal|low_fatal>
Threshold type.
show environment voltage pmod * * time
Purpose Displays voltage information for the power module in the specified slot for a
specified time period.
Syntax show environment voltage pmod <1 | 2>
<all|12.0(2)|9.0|5.0> time {current | past <1-1439>}
Privilege EXEC D5#
<all|12.0(2)|9.0|5.0> Test point.
past <1-1439>
1439 minutes.
show environment voltage qam * * threshold
Purpose Displays voltage information for the QAM module in the specified slot based on
threshold levels.
Syntax show environment voltage qam <1-6>
<all|11.0|9.0|5.0|3.3(4)|2.5|1.5> threshold
Privilege EXEC D5#
<1-6> Slot number.
<all|11.0|9.0|5.0|3.3(4)|2.5|
1.5>
Test point.
up_fatal|low_fatal>
Threshold type.
show environment voltage qam * * time
Purpose Displays voltage information for the QAM module in the specified slot for a
Syntax show environment voltage qam <1-6>
<all|11.0|9.0|5.0|3.3(4)|2.5|1.5> time {current | past <1-
1439>}
Privilege EXEC D5#
<1-6> Slot number.
<all|11.0|9.0|5.0|3.3(4)|2.5|
1.5>
Test point.
past <1-1439>
1439 minutes.
show environment voltage wan * * threshold
Purpose Displays voltage information for the WAN module in the specified slot based on
threshold levels.
Syntax show environment voltage wan <7> <all|5.0|3.3|3.25|2.5|
1.25|1.2> threshold <all|up_warn|low_warn|
up_fatal|low_fatal>
Privilege EXEC D5#
<7> Slot number.
<all|5.0|3.3|3.25|2.5|
1.25|1.2>
Test point.
up_fatal|low_fatal>
Threshold type.
show environment voltage wan * * time
Purpose Displays voltage information for the WAN module in the specified slot for a
Syntax show environment voltage wan <7> <all|5.0|3.3|3.25|2.5|
1.25|1.2> time {current | past <1-1439>}
Privilege EXEC D5#
<7> Slot number.
<all|5.0|3.3|3.25|2.5|
1.25|1.2>
Test point.
past <1-1439>
1439 minutes.
show exception
Purpose Displays information from the autopsy file.
Syntax show exception
Privilege EXEC D5#
show file descriptors
Purpose Displays all open file descriptors.
Syntax show file descriptors
Privilege EXEC D5#
show file systems
Purpose Displays all file systems and information.
Syntax show file systems
Privilege EXEC D5#
show history
Purpose Displays a list of recently entered commands
Syntax show history
User EXEC
Privilege EXEC
D5>
D5#
show images
Purpose Displays all software versions present on the D5 UEQ flash card.
Syntax show images
Privilege EXEC D5#
show interfaces
Purpose Displays information for all interfaces present on the D5 UEQ.
Syntax show interfaces
Privilege EXEC D5#
show interfaces dti
Purpose Displays information for specified DTI on the D5 UEQ.
Syntax show interfaces dti <counters | 1-2>
Privilege EXEC D5#
<counters> Displays the statistics counters
<1-2> Displays the counters for the specific port number.
show interfaces fastethernet
Purpose Displays information for all fastEthernet interfaces present on the D5 UEQ.
Syntax show interfaces fastethernet <X/Y> [stats]
Privilege EXEC D5#
<X/Y> Slot and port of the fastEthernet.
[stats] Count of packets in and out
show interfaces gigabitethernet
Purpose Displays information for all gigabitEthernet interfaces present on the D5 UEQ
including IP bundle membership and whether a port has failed over or is a
spare port.
Syntax show interfaces gigabitethernet <X/Y> [stats]
Privilege EXEC D5#
<X/Y> Slot and port of the gigabitEthernet.
[stats] Count of packets in and out
show interfaces internal
Purpose Displays information for all SDV sessions.
Syntax show interfaces internal
Privilege EXEC D5#
show interfaces loopback
Purpose Displays information for all loopback interfaces present on the D5 UEQ.
Syntax show interfaces loopback <1-31>
Privilege EXEC D5#
<1-31> Loopback number.
show interfaces output-port * video sdv session
Purpose Displays information for all SDV sessions by session ID.
Syntax show interfaces output-port <input> video sdv session
[verbose]

Privilege EXEC D5#
[verbose] Displays detailed information.
show interfaces output-port * video sdv shell-session
Purpose Displays information for all SDV shell sessions.
Syntax show interfaces output-port <input> video sdv shell-
session [active | verbose]

Privilege EXEC D5#
[active] Displays only shell sessions with active sessions.
[verbose] Displays detailed shell session information.
show interfaces port-channel
Purpose Displays information for all port channels.
Syntax show interfaces port-channel <X>
Privilege EXEC D5#
<X> Channel number.
show interfaces qam channel modes
Purpose Displays a summary of the channel modes of all Quad-Port QAM Module (QPM
8DX4) ports on the D5 UEQ (or currently assigned to the WAN being used).
Syntax show interfaces qam channel modes
Privilege EXEC D5#
show interfaces qam * diagnostics
Purpose Displays the diagnostics results last performed on the specified QAM card
insertion, reset or at system startup if a card was present.
Syntax show interfaces qam {<X> | <X/Y> | <X/Y.Z>} diagnostics
<bootup | category <1-3> | complete>
Privilege EXEC D5#
<X/Y.Z> Card/Port.Channel of QAM
bootup QAM card diagnostics results
category <1-3>
This is the QAM card manufacturing test category where:
Category 1 covers QPM QAM Card POST
Category 2 covers QPM QAM Manufacturing tests (opens & shorts)
Category 3 covers QPM QAM Manufacturing Demod loopback tests
complete QPM QAM card complete diagnostic results
show interfaces qam * stats
Purpose Displays the usage information of the specified QAM. If the channel ID is
omitted, all configured channels for the QAM port are displayed.
Syntax show interfaces qam {<X> | <X/Y> | <X/Y[.Z]>} stats
Privilege EXEC D5#
<X/Y[.Z]> Card/Port ID[.Channel ID] of QAM
show interface qam * tech-support
Purpose Displays actual QPM runtime information, any crash info, the bootloader log,
and any post results on the D5 UEQ.
Syntax show interface qam <X | X/Y | X/Y.Z> tech-support
Privilege EXEC D5#
<X> QAM card slot.
<X/Y> QAM card slot and port.
<X/Y.Z> QAM card slot, port and channel.
show interfaces qam * version
Purpose Displays the FPGA and microcontroller version running on the specified QAM
card.
Syntax show interfaces qam {<X> | <X/Y> | <X/Y.Z>} version
Privilege EXEC D5#
show interfaces qam * video
Purpose Displays the video usage information of the specified QAM.
Syntax show interfaces qam {<X> | <X/Y> | <X/Y.Z>} video [filter
| filter-pid [<0-8191>] | filter-program [<1-65535>] |
ghost-pid <1-8191> | jitter-status | portmap | remap |
remap-pid [<16-8191>] | reserve | reserve-pid [<16-8191>]
| sdv {session [verbose] | shell-session {active [verbose]
| verbose}} | sessions {psi [verbose] | verbose} | si-
stream]
Privilege EXEC D5#
filter-program <1-65535> Filters program number
remap Remappings
remap-pid <16-8191> Remappings PID number
show interfaces qam * video ghost-pid
Purpose Displays the video usage information of the specified QAM.
Syntax show interfaces qam {<X> | <X/Y> | <X/Y.Z>} video ghost-
pid <1-8190>
Privilege EXEC D5#
<1-8190> PID number
show interfaces * stats
Purpose Displays a count of packets in and out.
Syntax show interfaces [X/Y] stats
Privilege EXEC D5#
<X/Y> Card/Port
show interfaces * video
Purpose Displays a count of packets in and out.
Syntax show interfaces [X/Y] video [filter | filter-pid [<0-
8191>] | filter-program [<1-65535>] | ghost-pid <1-8191> |
jitter-status | portmap | remap | remap-pid [<16-8191>] |
reserve | reserve-pid [<16-8191>] | sessions [psi
[verbose] | verbose] | si-stream]
Privilege EXEC D5#
<X/Y> Card/Port
show ip arp
Purpose Displays IP Address Resolution Protocol (ARP) related information.
Syntax show ip arp [fastethernet <X/Y> | gigabitethernet <X/Y> |
<H.H.H> | <N.N.N.N>
Privilege EXEC D5#
[fastethernet <X/Y>] The slot/port of the FastEthernet.
[gigabitethernet <X/Y>] The slot/port of the GigabitEthernet.
<H.H.H> MAC address
<N.N.N.N> IP address.
show ip bundles
Purpose Displays details on the IP bundles including policy, members, spare ports, links
up/down and failover revert times.
Syntax show ip bundles
Privilege EXEC D5#
show ip dhcp
Purpose Displays basic information on the management interface DHCP lease.
Syntax show ip dhcp [detail]
Example To display information on the management interface DHCP lease, use the
following command:
D5# show ip dhcp
Privilege EXEC D5#
[detail] Displays all information on the management interface DHCP lease.
show ip domain-name
Purpose Displays the configured Domain Name Servers.
Syntax show ip domain-name
Privilege EXEC D5#
show ip http
Purpose Displays Web Manager information.
Syntax show ip http <accounts | prefs>
Privilege EXEC D5#
accounts Displays the Web Manager Access accounts
prefs Displays the Web Manager preferences
show ip igmp groups
Purpose Displays all the multicast groups presently stored in the IGMP database.
Syntax show ip igmp groups {interface <gigabitethernet <X/Y> |
loopback <X>>} | <N.N.N.N>
Privilege EXEC D5#
gigabitethernet
Displays the number of multicast groups stored in the IGMP database
associated with the specified gigabitethernet subinterface.
loopback
Displays the multicast groups stored in the IGMP database associated with the
specified loopback subinterface.
<N.N.N.N>
Displays all the multicast groups stored in the IGMP database with a group
address of <N.N.N.N>.
Purpose Displays the IGMP attributes of all sub-interfaces running in video mode.
Syntax show ip igmp interface {gigabitethernet <X/Y> | loopback
<X>}
Privilege EXEC D5#
gigabitethernet Displays the IGMP attributes of the specified gigabitethernet sub-interface.
loopback Displays the IGMP attributes of the specified loopback sub-interface.
show ip interface brief
Purpose Displays basic IP interface status and configuration information.
Syntax show ip interface brief

Privilege EXEC D5#
show ip name-servers
Purpose Displays the configured Domain Name Servers.
Syntax show ip name-servers

Privilege EXEC D5#
show ip route
Purpose Displays the routing tables.
Syntax show ip route [connected | static | summary]
User EXEC
Privilege EXEC
D5>
D5#
connected Static connected entries
static Static entries
summary Summary
show ip ssh
Purpose Displays user SSH connections.
Syntax show ip ssh

User EXEC
Privilege EXEC
D5>
D5#
show ipc
Purpose Displays inter-process communications (IPC) information. This command is
intended for D5 UEQ debugging.
Syntax show ipc

User EXEC
Privilege EXEC
D5>
D5#
show linecard status
Purpose Displays the module types, versions, serial numbers, status, product codes and
revision numbers of each module installed in the D5 UEQ chassis.
Syntax show linecard status [0-8] [verbose]
Example The following is an example with 1:1 sparing and no QAMs in fail over.
D5# show linecard status
Car d Admi n Oper Dupl ex Ser i al Pr oduct Pr oduct Pr ov
Type St at e St at e St at e Number Code Revi si on Type
- - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - -
MON UP I S C41530A50040 MON_8 AB MON
QAM 1 UP I S Act i ve C35731190012 QAM_6DX2 CB QAM
QAM 2 UP I S St andby C35731190016 QAM_6DX2 CB QAM
Privilege EXEC D5#
Operation State Definition
IS In Service
IS ALRM In Service Alarmed
OOS DIS Out of Service Disabled
OOS PUMP Out of Service FPGA loading
OOS INIT Out of Service Initializing/Being Configured
OOS MAN Out of Service Manually
OOS FLT Out of Service Fault
OOS UEQ Out of Service Un-equipped
[0-8] Displays line card information for specified slot number.
verbose Verbose
QAM 3 UP I S Act i ve G02830E90044 QAM_6DX2 CB QAM
QAM 5 UP I S Act i ve C35731190028 QAM_6DX2 CB QAM
WAN 7 UP I S C34620B61028 WAN_4G2F BB WAN
PMOD 1 UP I S C35620B55014 PWR_CNV8 AB PMOD
PSU 1 UP I S
PSU 2 UP OOS- FLT
The duplex states are as follows:
Simplex - The QAM module is not part of a spare group.
Active - If the QAM module is a Primary QAM in a spare group, it is cur-
rently not in fail over. If the QAM module is a spare QAM in a spare group,
it is currently protecting a Primary QAM that has failed over.
Protected - The QAM module is a Primary QAM in a spare group and is cur-
rently in fail over.
Standby - The QAM module is a Spare QAM in a spare group and is cur-
rently not protecting a QAM that has failed over.
Example If you are running a dual QAN and want to display which QAM is assigned to
WAN 7 or WAN 8, use the verbose option.
D5# show linecard status verbose
Dual WAN mode i s enabl ed
- - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - -
MON I S T119B0J 50007 MON_8 AE MON
QAM 1 WAN 8 UP I S Si mpl ex C119A081E015 QAM_8DX4 BA QAM
QAM 2 WAN 7 UP I S Si mpl ex C188A0G90108 QAM_6DX2 EB QAM
PMOD 1 I S T119B0D60022 PWR_CNV8 AB PMOD
PSU 2 I S PSU
show logging
Purpose Displays event logging information.
Syntax show logging
Privilege EXEC D5#
show logging alarm
Purpose Displays the currently active alarms on the D5 UEQ.
Syntax show logging alarm [cleared]
Privilege EXEC D5#
[cleared] Displays the most recently cleared alarms on the D5 UEQ
show logging history
Purpose Displays event logging buffer information.
Syntax show logging history [last] [detail] [priority <priority-
string>] [module <module-nmemonic>]
Privilege EXEC D5#
last Displays the most recent first.
detail Displays detailed logging history.
priority <priority string> Displays the logging history with the specified priority-string or higher.
module <module-mnemonic> Displays the logging history for the specified module.
show memory
Purpose Displays system memory.
Syntax show memory
User EXEC
Privilege EXEC
D5>
D5#
show mib iftable
Purpose Displays SNMP MIB values.
Syntax show mib iftable
Privilege EXEC D5#
show ntp
Purpose Displays Network Time Protocol (NTP) server details.
Syntax show ntp
User EXEC
Privilege EXEC
D5>
D5#
show privilege exec
Purpose Displays the privilege level of all the commands in the command tree. If a
specific command (optional) is entered, only the privilege level for that
command will be displayed.
NOTE
Only commands that have access levels less than or equal to the current CLI
access level, will be displayed. For example if your CLI access level is 5, then
only those command nodes that have levels 5 and below will be displayed.
Syntax show privilege exec [<input>]
Privilege EXEC D5#
[<input>] The command whose privilege level you want to check.
show processes
Purpose Displays information about CPU time and processes and/or memory usage
information.
Syntax show processes [cpu | memory]
Privilege EXEC D5#
[cpu] Displays information about CPU time and processes.
[memory] Displays memory usage information about processes.
show qam-log
Purpose Displays the contents of the QAM log.
Syntax show qam-log [reverse]
Privilege EXEC D5#
[reverse] Displays the contents of the QAM log in reverse order (oldest first).
show radius
Purpose Displays the RADIUS server host and group information.
Syntax show radius <detail | groups | hosts>
Privilege EXEC D5#
detail Displays RADIUS information in detail.
group Displays RADIUS server group information.
hosts Displays RADIUS server host information.
show reload
Purpose Displays information about scheduled reloads.
Syntax show reload
Privilege EXEC D5#
show running-config
Purpose Displays information about the running configuration.
Syntax show running-config
Privilege EXEC D5#
show running-config interfaces fastethernet
Purpose Displays information about the running configuration for the specified inter-
face.
Syntax show running-config interfaces fastethernet <X/Y>
Privilege EXEC D5#
<X/Y> Slot/port
show running-config interfaces gigabitethernet
face.
Syntax show running-config interfaces gigabitethernet <X/Y>
Privilege EXEC D5#
<X/Y> Slot/port
show running-config interfaces loopback
face.
Syntax show running-config interfaces loopback <1-31>
Privilege EXEC D5#
<1-31> Loopback channel number
show running-config interfaces port-channel
face.
Syntax show running-config interfaces port-channel <X>
Privilege EXEC D5#
(X) Port-channel interface number
show running-config interfaces qam
face.
Syntax show running-config interfaces qam {<X> <X/Y> <X/Y.Z>}
Privilege EXEC D5#
<X> QAM Card interface string
<X/Y> QAM Port interface string
<X/Y.Z> QAM Channel interface string
show running-config video erm
Purpose Displays information about the running configuration for the specified ERM.
Syntax show running-config video erm <name>
Privilege EXEC D5#
<name> ERM name
show snmp
Purpose Displays the SNMP counters.
Syntax show snmp
Privilege EXEC D5#
show snmp-server
Purpose Displays information about the active SNMP server configuration.
Syntax show snmp-server
Privilege EXEC D5#
show snoop
Purpose Displays information about traffic snooping.
Syntax show snoop
Privilege EXEC D5#
show spare-group
Purpose Displays information about the current state and configuration of spare-groups
on the D5 UEQ. If no spare-groups are created, the command will not output
any details.
Syntax show spare-group
Example To display current information, use the following command:
D5# show spare-group
System response would look similar to:
Slot Spare Slot Mode
1 2
2 2 manual
3 4
4 4 manual
5 6
6 6 manual
Related Command(s) spare-group
interface qam
Privilege EXEC D5#
Table 17-1: Description of show spare-group fields
Field Description
Slot Identifies each QAM slot in the chassis.
Spare slot Identifies the Spare QAM associated with each QAM slot.
Mode
Identifies the fail back mode (auto|manual) associated with each spare
group. The mode is displayed with the spare QAM slot.
show ssh
Purpose Displays the version and configuration data for SSH.
Syntax show ssh
Privilege EXEC D5#
show startup-config
Purpose Displays the startup configuration on the console (CLI). Note that this informa-
tion is not necessarily the same as the running-configuration.
Syntax show startup-config
Privilege EXEC D5#
show system
Purpose Displays information about the compact flash disk.
Syntax show system [all | filesys]
Privilege EXEC D5#
all Displays all compact flash disk information.
filesys Displays file system information
show tacacs
Purpose Displays TACACS+ server host and group information.
Syntax show tacacs <detail | group | hosts>
Privilege EXEC D5#
detail Displays TACACS+ information in detail.
group Displays TACACS+ server group information.
hosts Displays TACACS+ server host information.
show tech-support
Purpose Displays system information for technical support.
NOTE
This command generates extensive output.
Syntax show tech-support
Privilege EXEC D5#
show terminal
Example Displays information about the terminal session environment, including the
terminal type and command history size.
Syntax show terminal
User EXEC
Privilege EXEC
D5>
D5#
show update
Purpose Displays information about the compact flash disk.
Syntax show update [all | filesys]
Privilege EXEC D5#
[all] Displays all compact flash disk information.
[filesys] Displays file system information
show users
Purpose Displays active management sessions on the D5 UEQ (serial, telnet or SSH).
This command will not display Web Manager or Tool Manager connections.
Syntax show users
User EXEC
Privilege EXEC
D5>
D5#
show version
Purpose Displays the software version running on the D5 UEQ and usage statistics for
the compact flash disk.
Syntax show version [detail]
Privilege EXEC D5#
[detail] Displays detailed information about software and compact flash disk.
show video cas
Purpose Displays complete DVB Simulcrypt configuration.
Syntax show video cas
Privilege EXEC D5#
show video channel-container
Purpose Displays video channel-container information.
Syntax show video channel-container [name]
Privilege EXEC D5#
[name] Channel-container name
show video ecmg
Purpose Displays status information for all ECMG channel connections, ECM-groups and
SCGs.
Syntax show video ecmg [name [channel [verbose] | stream [<input>]
| verbose]
Privilege EXEC D5#
name ECMG name
channel Display ECM channel information.
stream <input> Display all ECM stream information.
verbose Displays detailed information.
show video ecmg database
Purpose Displays status information for all ECMG channel connections, ECM-groups and
SCGs.
Syntax show video ecmg database [verbose]
Privilege EXEC D5#
show video eis
Purpose Displays the DVB-Simulcrypt EIS information.
Syntax show video eis [<name> [verbose]]
Privilege EXEC D5#
<name> The EIS name.
show video emmg
Purpose Displays the DVB-Simulcrypt EMMG delivery database information.
Syntax show video emmg [name [channel | stream [<input>] |
verbose]
Privilege EXEC D5#
name EMMG name
channel Display EMM channel information.
stream <input> Display all EMM stream information.
verbose Displays detailed information.
show video erm
Purpose Displays the ERM details.
Syntax show video erm <name> [verbose]
Privilege EXEC D5#
[name] ERM name
show video filter
Purpose Displays filter information.
Syntax show video filter
Privilege EXEC D5#
show video filter-pid
Purpose Displays the filter Packet Identifier.
Syntax show video filter-pid [<16-8191>]
Privilege EXEC D5#
<16-8191> Packet Identifier
show video filter-program
Purpose Displays the filter program rules.
Syntax show video filter-program [<1-65535>]
Privilege EXEC D5#
<1-65535> Program number.
show video ghost-pid
Purpose Displays all ghost PID configuration details.
Syntax show video ghost-pid

Privilege EXEC D5#
show video jitter-status
Purpose Displays the video jitter-status.
Syntax show video jitter-status

Privilege EXEC D5#
show video multicast-transport
Purpose Displays the specified video redundant-stream.
Syntax show video multicast-transport <all | mapping>
Privilege EXEC D5#
all Displays all video redundant stream.
mapping Displays all video redundant stream mappings.
show video psig
Purpose Displays PSIG interface details.
Syntax show video psig [active sections | pending
activation_timers | verbose | <input> [verbose]]
Privilege EXEC D5#
[active sections] Displays sections currently being carouselled by the D5 UEQ.
[pending activation_timers] Displays pending mux timers.
<input> Displays single PSIG interface details.
[verbose] Displays all PSIG interface details
show video redundancy-group
Purpose Displays ECM redundancy group configuration.
Syntax show video redundancy-group [<name>]
Privilege EXEC D5#
<name> Group name.
show video redundant-stream
Purpose Displays ECM redundancy group configuration.
Syntax show video redundant-stream <all | mapping>
Privilege EXEC D5#
all Displays all video redundant-stream-groups
mappings Displays all video redundant-stream-group mappings
show video redundant-stream-group
Purpose Displays the specified video redundant-stream-group.
Syntax show video redundant-stream-group <input>
Privilege EXEC D5#
<inpu>t Redundant-stream-group name
show video remap
Purpose Displays remapping information.
Syntax show video remap
Privilege EXEC D5#
show video remap-pid
Purpose Displays PID remapping information.
Syntax show video remap-pid [<16-8191>]
Privilege EXEC D5#
<16-8191> Packet identifier
show video reserve
Purpose Displays reserved remapping information.
Syntax show video reserve
Privilege EXEC D5#
show video reserve-pid
Purpose Displays reserved PID remapping information.
Syntax show video reserve-pid [<16-8191>]
Privilege EXEC D5#
<16-8191> Packet identifier
show video scg
Purpose Displays complete DVB Simulcrypt SCG configuration.
Syntax show video scg [<name> | all] [verbose]
Privilege EXEC D5#
<name> SCG name.
[all] Displays static and dynamic SCGs.
[verbose] Verbose
show video sdv
Purpose Displays specified SDV details.
NOTE
If no bandwidth signalled in the SDV session create, then the actual
bandwidth displayed by the show video sdv session verbose will appear as
zero (0).
Syntax show video sdv {packet insertions [verbose] | rpc [verbose]
| session [all [verbose] | verbose | <input> [verbose]] |
shell-session [active [verbose] | verbose] | stream
[<input> [verbose] | verbose]}
Privilege EXEC D5#
[packet insertions] Displays SDV packet insertions
[rpc] Displays detailed SDV RPC status.
[session] Displays SDV sessions by session ID.
shell-session [active
[verbose]] | verbose]}
Displays SDV sessions with active sessions or session details.
stream [<input> [verbose]} Displays SDV sessions by IP address or session details.
show video sdv load-balance
Purpose Displays the SDV load-balance status of the four gigabitEthernet ports, their
link-status, their assignment as primary, secondary or none and the counts of
assigned SDV sessions and total bandwidth per gigabitEthernet port. The
optional verbose parameter will display the same basic information along with
details of each session assigned tot he gigabitEthernet port and bandwidth.
Syntax show video sdv load-balance [verbose]
Privilege EXEC D5#
[verbose] Verbose
show video sessions
Purpose Displays video streams.
Syntax show video sessions [psi [verbose] | verbose]
Privilege EXEC D5#
[psi] Displays (P)SI information.
show video si-stream
Purpose Displays incoming SI streams.
Syntax show video si-stream
Privilege EXEC D5#
show video snoop
Purpose Displays snooping configuration.
Syntax show video snoop [verbose]
Privilege EXEC D5#
[verbose] Displays snooping configuration and derived parameters.
show video udp
Purpose Displays information for the specified UDP port.
Syntax show video udp <1-65535> [src-ip <N.N.N.N> [dest-ip
<N.N.N.N>]] [ghost-pid <16-8191>] [filter-pid | filter-
program | ip |remap-pid | reserve-pid | sessions | si-
stream]
Privilege EXEC D5#
<1-65535> The UDP port number.
filter-pid <16-8191> Sets the filter PID range.
src-ip <N.N.N.N> [dest-ip
<N.N.N.N>]
Sets the source IP address and the destination IP address.
ghost-pid <16-8191> Ghost PID
filter-program <1-65535> Sets the program filtering range
ip IP address
remap-pid <16-8191> Sets remap PID number
reserve-pid <16-8191> Sets reserve PID number.
sessions <psi | verbose> Displays (P)SI sessions or verbose information.
si-stream Configures the stream as an SI table stream.
shutdown
Purpose Disables this interface. Use the [no] version of the command to enable this
interface.
Syntax [no] shutdown
All All
snmp-access-list *deny
Purpose Configures an SNMP access list to drop any matching packets on the specified
host. Use the [no] version of the command to remove the configured SNMP
access list.
Syntax [no] snmp-access-list <name> deny <N.N.N.N> <N.N.N.N>
[port <num> [<mask>]]
<name> SNMP access list name.
<N.N.N.N> Subnet Mask
<num> Port Number. Valid range is 0-65535.
<mask> IP port mask. Valid range is 0-65535.
snmp-access-list * deny any port
IP port. Use the [no] version of the command to remove the configured SNMP
access list.
Syntax [no] snmp-access-list <name> deny any [port <num>
[<mask>]]
<num> IP port number. Valid range is 0-65535.
snmp-access-list * deny host
host. Use the [no] version of the command to remove the configured SNMP
access list.
Syntax [no] snmp-access-list <name> deny host <hostname |
N.N.N.N> [port <num> [<mask>]]
<hostname or N.N.N.N> Defines a host name or IP address.
<num> Specify an IP port number.
snmp-access-list * permit
access list.
Syntax [no] snmp-access-list <name> permit <N.N.N.N> <N.N.N.N>
[port <num> [<mask>]]
<N.N.N.N> Subnet Mask
<num> Port Number. Valid range is 0-65535.
snmp-access-list * permit any port
access list.
Syntax [no] snmp-access-list <name> permit any [port <num>
[<mask>]]
<num> IP port number. Valid range is 0-65535.
snmp-access-list * permit host
access list.
Syntax [no] snmp-access-list <name> permit host <hostname |
N.N.N.N> [port <num> [<mask>]]
<hostname or N.N.N.N> Defines a host name or IP address.
<num> Specify an IP port number.
snmp-server community
Purpose Creates an SNMP community. Use the [no] version of the command to remove
the SNMP community.
Syntax [no] snmp-server community <string>
<string> SNMP community string.
snmp-server community-entry
Purpose Creates or modifies an entry in the snmpCommunityTable. Use the [no]
version of the command to remove the SNMP community entry.
Syntax [no] snmp-server community-entry <string>
<communityString> <securityName> [snmp-access-list
<listName>]
<string> Index string for snmpCommunityTable.
snmp-server contact
Purpose Sets the contact string for the D5 UEQ. Typically, the contact string contains
the name and number of the person or group that administers the D5 UEQ. An
SNMP manager can display this information. Use the [no] version of the
command to remove the SNMP contact.
Syntax [no] snmp-server contact <input>
<input> Index string for snmpCommunityTable.
snmp-server disable
Purpose Disables configured traps or informs.
Syntax snmp-server disable {informs <string1> | traps <string2>}
<string1> v2c, v3
<string2> v1, v2c, v3
snmp-server enable
Purpose Enables configured traps or informs.
Syntax snmp-server enable <informs | traps>
snmp-server engineboots
Purpose Sets the number of time the SNMP server is allowed to reboot.
Syntax snmp-server engineboots <reboots>
<reboots> Valid range: 1 - 2147483647.
snmp-server engineid remote
Purpose Configures a remote SNMPv3 engineID. The engineID octet string is in hexa-
decimal and each octet pair is separated by a colon. Use the [no] version of
the command to remove the remote SNMPv3 engineID.
Syntax [no] snmp-server engineid remote <engineId> <usernaame>
engineId Sets the remote engineID
username Sets the remote name
snmp-server group
Purpose Sets a User Security Model group. A group defines one or more transaction
types a user can perform: read transaction, write transaction, or notify
transaction. Each enabled transaction type must reference a view (defined
using view).
A group is identified by a group name (group-name), a security model, and
the referenced view.
In a group, you can set a read view, a write view, and a notify view. A read
view and a write view allow a user to respectively do SNMP GET and SNMP
SET transactions on some MIB families (defined by the respective views). The
notify view supports SNMP TRAP transactions.
The D5 UEQ predefines two groups, public and private, which correspond to
the public and private SNMP community strings. The public group has read
access; the private group has read and write access.
Syntax snmp-server group <name>
Example The following examples is focused on notification. For example, to disable the
default public and private community strings, use the following commands:
D5(config)# no snmp-server group public v1
no snmp-server group public v2c
no snmp-server group private v1
no snmp-server group private v2c
<name> Group name.
To enable them again, use the following commands:
D5(config)# snmp-server group public v1
snmp-server group public v1 read default
snmp-server group public v2c read default
snmp-server group private v1 read default write default
snmp-server group public v2c read default write default
NOTE
default is a predefined view in the D5 UEQ that allows access to all MIBs
under the ISO family tree. Similarly, public and private are pre-defined
group names allowing read access and read/write access, respectively.
NOTE
A user (created by snmp-server user) can only be part of a group if
they share the same security model.
Groups are unique and are stored in the SNMP table vacmAccessTable and
users are stored in vacmSecurityToGroupTable:
i so. dot . or g. dod. i nt er net . snmpV2. snmpModul es. snmpVacmMI B. v
acmMI BObj ect s. vacmSecur i t yToGr oupTabl e
and
i so. dot . or g. dod. i nt er net . snmpV2. snmpModul es. snmpVacmMI B. v
acmMI BObj ect s. vacmAccessTabl e
snmp-server host
Purpose Defines a host for each notification target or receivers. A host definition
requires a notification security model, a transport type, a host address and one
or more notification transport model tags.
The CLI command defaults the transport type to UDP, hence the host address
must be specified using an IP address and an optional UDP port (defaults to
162).
Syntax snmp-server host <notification-identifier> <security-
identification> <ipaddr> <trap | inform> [udp-port <port>
[timeout <sec> [retries <1-255>] [mms <48465535>]]]
Notification tags are specified by the traps or informs argument, which imply
the 'Trap' or 'Inform' notification transport model tag.
Hosts are stored in SNMP table:
iso.dot.org.dod.internet.snmpV2.snmpModules.snmpTar-
getMIB.snmpTargetObjects.snmpTargetAddrTable
<notification-identifier> A string identifying the notification device
<security-identification> The community string or password
ipaddr IP address of the host
hostname Qualified name of the host
udp-port <port> UDP port number (default 162). Valid range is 0-65535.
timeout <sec> 1-2147483647 seconds
retries <1-255> 1-255 retries
snmp-server location
Purpose Sets the system location string. Typically, the location string contains the phys-
ical location of the D5 UEQ. Use the [no] version of the command to remove
the system location string.
Syntax [no] snmp-server location <location string>
<location string> Location description
snmp-server notif-entry
Purpose Configures the notification entry in the snmpNotifyTable. Use the [no] version
of the command to remove the notification entry.
Syntax [no] snmp-server notif-entry <name | tag-value> <trap |
inform>
name
A name identifying the notification device. Must be a unique string, up to 32
characters long.
tag-value
The tag value that selects an entry in the snmpTargetAddrTable (created, for
example, by the snmp-server host command). Use an empty string () to
select no entry.
trap Messages generated for this entry are sent as traps.
inform Messages generated for this entry are sent as informs.
snmp-server notif-filter
Purpose Creates an SNMP MIB Notification Filter profile. Use the [no] version of the
command to remove the SNMP MIB Notification Filter profile.
Syntax [no] snmp-server notif-filter <profile-name> <MIB family
name> {included | excluded | mask <ff:ff:ff> <included |
excluded]}
<profile-name> The filter profile name
<MIB family name> The MIB family name
included Includes MIB family, matching OIDs or filter matches
excluded Excludes MIB family, matching OIDs or filter matches.
mask <ff:ff:ff>
A bit mask, used to create more complex rules. The mask is a list of
hexadecimal octets separated by colons, such as a0:ff. The most significant
bit of the first octet corresponds to the leftmost identifier in the OID. Thus, the
command snmp-server view test 1.3.5 mask A0 excluded matches
OIDs starting with 1.1.5, but not with 1.3.4 since the first and third bits of
the mask are ones.
snmp-server notif-sec-model
Purpose Configures the notification security model entry with identifier and assigns this
model to user-name-string.
Syntax snmp-server notif-sec-model <string> <name> <v1 | v2c | v3>
security-model <usm [auth | priv] | v1 | v2c>
<string> Notification Configuration Identifier
<name> Security name (e.g. username)
<v1 | v2c | v3>] MP Model
<usm> USM security model
<v1> SNMPv1 security model
<v2c> SNMPv2c security model
snmp-server notif-sec-model * notif-filter
Purpose Configures the notification security model entry with identifier and assigns this
model to user-name-string. Use the [no] version of the command to remove
the notification security model entry.
Syntax [no] snmp-server notif-sec-model <string> notif-filter
<name>
<string> Notification Configuration Identifier
<name> Filter profile name.
snmp-server user
Purpose Defines an SNMP user. Use the [no] version of the command to remove the
SNMP user.
Syntax For v1, v2c:
[no] snmp-server user <username> <groupname> <v1 | v2c>
[snmp-access-list <list>]
For v3:
[no] snmp-server user <username> <groupname> v3 [auth |
encrypted auth | snmp-access-list <list>]
<username> The user name string.
<v1 | v2c | v3>
Specifies the SNMP version (and security model) to use. The must match the
SNMP version specified in the group definition.
auth Enables authentication.
encrypted Inputs passwords as MD5 or SHA digests.
snmp-access-list <list>
Defines what ranges of IP addresses can perform gets/sets or receive
notifications from SNMP.
snmp-server view
Purpose Creates or adds to an existing SNMP MIB view. A view defines which MIB
subtree (MIB families) can be acted upon by an SNMP transaction. Use the
[no] version of the command to remove the SNMP MIB view.
Syntax [no] snmp-server view <view-name> <MIB family name>
[included | excluded | mask <ff:ff:ff> <included |
excluded]
<view-name> Name of the view
<MIB family name> The MIB family name
included Includes matches from the view
excluded Excludes matches from the view
mask <ff:ff:ff>
A bit mask, used to create more complex rules. The mask is a list of
hexadecimal octets separated by colons, such as a0:ff. The most significant
bit of the first octet corresponds to the leftmost identifier in the OID. Thus, the
command snmp-server view test 1.3.5 mask A0 excluded matches
OIDs starting with 1.1.5, but not with 1.3.4 since the first and third bits of
the mask are ones.
snmp trap link-status
Purpose Enables sending SNMP link traps when the operational state of the current
QAM channel has changed. Use the [no] version of the command to prevent
sending SNMP link traps when the operational state of the current QAM
channel has changed.
Syntax [no] snmp trap link-status
QAM Subinterface
D5(config-if)#
D5(config-gig-if)#
D5(config-qam-if)#
snoop interface gigabitethernet
Purpose Enables traffic snooping on the specified gigabitEthernet interface. Use the
[no] version of the command to disable traffic snooping on the interface.
Syntax [no] snoop interface gigabitethernet <X/Y> direction
<transmit | received | both>
Example The following sequence will result in traffic arriving on interface 0/1 being
replicated and forwarded out of interface 0/3:
D5(config)# interface gigabitethernet 0/3
D5(config-if)# snoop interface gigabitethernet 0/1 direction received
D5(config-if)# exit
D5(config)#
D5(config-if)#
D5(config-gig-if)#
<X/Y> Interface to be snooped.
transmit Snoops on the transmit direction
received Snoops on the received direction
both Snoops on both the transmit and received direction
spare-group
Purpose Configures which QAM card is nominated as a spare QAM card within a
sparing-group that comprises more than one QAM card. The number supplied
with the spare-group command is the actual QAM slot number of the QAM that
will be the backup or spare. The QAM card in that slot is configured as a spare
card whose fail-back mode is either manual or automatic. Use the [no] version
of the command to remove the specific QAM card from a spare group. This
command defaults to no spare-group.
Syntax [no] spare-group <1-6> [manual | auto]
Example The following example shows how two sparing groups are setup on the D5
UEQ. Group 1 uses QAM 3 as the spare and the other two QAMs (QAM 1 and
QAM 2) rely on it for redundancy purposes (2+1). Group 4 uses QAM 4 as a
spare and QAM 5 relies upon it for redundancy (1+).
D5( conf i g) #
D5( conf i g) # i nt er f ace qam1
D5( conf i g- i f ) # spar e- gr oup 3
D5( conf i g- i f ) # exi t
D5( conf i g) #
D5( conf i g) #
<1-6> QAM slot number and also defines which QAM card is designated as the spare.
manual Manual recovery of failed QAM
auto Auto recovery of failed QAM
D5( conf i g) #
D5( conf i g) #
D5( conf i g) #
speed
Purpose Sets the interface speed.
Syntax speed <1000>
D5(config-if)#
D5(config-gig-if)#
<1000> Mbps
streaming-zone
Purpose Configures the name of the streaming-zone. Use the [no] version of the
command to remove the streaming zone.
Syntax streaming-zone <string>
<string> Streaming zone name
super-cas-id
Purpose Sets the super_CAS_id of the ECMG-SCS. Use the [no] version of the command
to remove the super_CAS_id of the ECMG.
Syntax [no] super-cas-id <xxxx.yyyy>
<xxxx.yyyy>
The super_CAS_id. This is a 32 bit hex number where:
xxxx is the 16 bit CA-System-id
yyyy is the 16 bit CA-Subsystem-id
systat
Purpose Displays users currently logged into the D5 UEQ (serial, telnet or SSH). This
command will not display Web Manager or Application Manager connections.
Syntax systat
User EXEC
Privilege EXEC
D5>
D5#
tacacs host
Purpose Configures a TACACS+ server. Use the [no] version of the command to
remove a specific TACACS+ server.
Syntax [no] tacacs host <ip_addr>
<ip_addr> IP address of the TACACS+ server (in a.b.c.d form)
tacacs key
Purpose Configures the TACACS+ encryption key. Use the [no] version of the
command to remove a specific TACACS+ encryption key.
Syntax [no] tacacs key <input>
<input>
Key used to set authentication and encryption. This key must match the key
used on the TACACS+ daemon.
tacacs source-address
Purpose Configures the source IP address of the outbound TACACS+ packets. Use the
[no] version of the command to remove the source IP address of the outbound
TACACS+ packets.
Syntax [no] tacacs source-address <ip_addr>
<ip_addr> IP address of the TACACS+ server (in a.b.c.d form)
tacacs timeout
Purpose Configures the global timeout. Use the [no] version of the command to delete
the global TACACS+ timeout.
Syntax [no] tacacs timeout <0-1000>
<0-1000> Timeout value in seconds. Valid range is 0-1000.
tcp port
Purpose Sets the port number and optional IP address used for TCP/IP connections
from the EMMG. Use the [no] version of the command to clear TCP configura-
tion for EMMG.
NOTE
If no IP address is specified, the D5 UEQ will accept connections from any
EMMG on the specified port. If an IP address is specified, the D5 UEQ will
only accept connections from the specified IP address/port.
Syntax [no] tcp port <1-65535> [ip address <N.N.N.N>]
<1-65535> TCP Port number
ip address <N.N.N.N>
[Optional] EMMG TCP IP address for filtering. Only one IP address is
supported.
terminal length
Purpose Sets the number of lines that will be displayed before the user is prompted with
MORE to continue terminal output.
Syntax terminal length <num>
User EXEC
Privilege EXEC
D5>
D5#
<num>
Number of lines to be displayed. Valid range: 2 to 512, or 0 to disable
pagination.
terminal monitor
Purpose Directs debugging output to the terminal window (the default is to send debug
information only to the serial port). Use the [no] version of the command to
stop debugging information from being sent to the current terminal session.
Syntax [no] terminal monitor
User EXEC
Privilege EXEC
D5>
D5#
terminal pagination
Purpose Enables the pagination (--MORE--) prompt on terminal output. Use the [no]
version of the command to disable the pagination prompt on terminal output.
Syntax [no] terminal pagination
User EXEC
Privilege EXEC
D5>
D5#
terminal timeout
Purpose Automatically disconnects terminal sessions if left idle for more than the spec-
ified number of seconds. Use the [no] version of the command to disable auto-
matic inactive session disconnection.
Syntax [no] terminal timeout <sec>
User EXEC
Privilege EXEC
D5>
D5#
<sec>
Number of seconds (0 to 65500). Setting the timeout value to 0 (or using the
No form of this command). disables inactive session disconnection.
terminal vt100-colours
Purpose Enables ANSI color output. Use the [no] version of the command to disable
ANSI color output.
Syntax [no] terminal vt100-colours
User EXEC
Privilege EXEC
D5>
D5#
terminal width
Purpose Sets the width of displayed output on the terminal.
Syntax terminal width <n>
User EXEC
Privilege EXEC
D5>
D5#
<n> Valid range: 1 to 512.
traceroute
Purpose Records the source of each ICMP time exceeded message to provide a trace
of the path the packet took to reach the destination as well as where routing
breaks down.
Syntax traceroute <N.N.N.N>
User EXEC
Privilege EXEC
D5>
D5#
<N.N.N.N> The IP address of the route being traced.
trip connection-retry-timeout
Purpose Sets the maximum time allowed for the connection retry-backoff mechanism.
Syntax trip connection-retry-timeout <30-600>
<30-600> Maximum number of seconds to backoff. Default is 120 seconds.
trip hold-time
Purpose Sets the maximum seconds allowed between VREP KEEPALIVE/UDATE
messages.
Syntax trip hold-time <secs>
<secs> Maximum number of seconds to backoff.
trip port
Purpose Sets the TCP port number to use for DRRP connections.
Syntax trip port <port>
<port> The TCP port number
trip redundancy attempts
Purpose Sets the maximum number of redundancy attempts.
Syntax trip redundancy attempts <num>
<num> Number of attempts
udp port
Purpose Sets the port number and optional IP address used for UDP/IP connections
from the EMMG. Use the [no] version of the command to delete the setting.
NOTE
If no IP address is specified, the D5 UEQ will accept connections from any
EMMG on the specified port. If an IP address is specified, the D5 UEQ will
only accept connections from the specified IP address/port.
Syntax [no] udp port <1-65535> [ip address <N.N.N.N>]]
<1-65535> Local UDP port number
ip address <N.N.N.N>
[Optional] EMMG UDP IP address for filtering. Only one IP address is
supported.
undebug snmp
Purpose Debugs SNMP traffic.
Syntax undebug snmp
Privilege EXEC D5#
version
Purpose Sets the protocol version used when creating channels and streams with this
ECMG. Default is auto-negotiation of protocol version. Use the [no] version of
the command to reset to the default version.
Syntax [no] version <1-3>
<1-3> Protocol version. Default version is auto-negotiation of protocol version.
video
Purpose Allows user to move to other video configuration modes without exiting the
current mode.
Syntax video <channel-container | ecmg | eis | emmg | psig |
redundancy-group | scg>
video alarm qam-utilization-threshold
Purpose Enables the alarm when the QAM bandwidth exceeds the specified threshold.
The default mode is 0 (zero) at which the alarm is disabled. Use the [no]
version of the command to disable the alarm.
Syntax [no] video alarm qam-utilization-threshold <percentage>
QAM Interface
D5(config)#
<percentage> Bandwidth utilization threshold.
video annex
Purpose Configures the ITU-J .83 annex used by all channels in the QAM card.
NOTE
Changing the Annex setting is a lengthy operation as the QAM Card must be
reset and fully re-programmed and affects the allowed range of other
parameters which may be reset on changes (e.g. symbol rate, FED
interleaving, and spectral inversion).
Frequency range is also affected but will not be reset or defaulted. If the
current port frequencies are out of range for the new annex, the setting will
be rejected. This command has no default and must be set by the user in
order to enable QAM channels.
Syntax video annex <a | b | c>
<a> ITU-T J .83 Annex A (European)
<b> ITU-T J .83 Annex B (American)
<c> ITU-T J .83 Annex C (J apanese)
video ca-descriptor
Purpose Permits the configuration of the CA-descriptor insertion policy. Use the [no]
version of the command to remove the CA-descriptor insertion policy.
Syntax [no] video ca-descriptor [auto | both-levels | component-
level | service-level]
auto
Inserts CA-desc in PMT L1 for service level scrambling and L2 for component
level scrambling. This is the default setting.
both-levels Forces insertion of CA-descriptor in PMT descriptor and ES loops (L1 + L2)
component-level Forces insertion of CA-descriptor in ES loop (L2) only.
service-level Forces insertion of CA-descriptor in PMT descriptor loop (L1) only.
video channel-container
Purpose Configures a channel-container. Use the [no] version of the command to
remove the channel-container.
Syntax [no] video channel-container <name>
ECMG Configuration
EMMG Configuration
D5(config)#
D5(config-ecmg)#
D5(config-emmg)#
<name> Channel-container name.
video cw-conformance
Purpose Enables DVB CAS CW conformance mechanism (default). Use the [no] version
of the command to disable DVB CAS CW conformance.
Syntax [no] video cw-conformance
ECMG Configuration
EIS Configuration
EMMG Configuration
D5(config)#
D5(config-ecmg)#
D5(config-eis)#
D5(config-emmg)#
video cycle-output-pids
Purpose Enables automatic cycling of PID-values on the RF. Use the [no] version of
the command to disable the automatic cycling of PID-values on the RF.
NOTE
To ensure the same PID values are used for redundant sources and the PIDs
do not cycle to a new range when a redundant stream set stops/starts, video
cycle-output-pids must be turned off.
Syntax [no] video cycle-output-pids
Related Command(s) video default-pid-mapping program-base * count * pid-count *
video cypher-mode
Purpose Configures the video cypher mode.
Syntax video cypher-mode <1-3>
ECMG Configuration
EMMG Configuration
D5(config)#
D5(config-ecmg)#
D5(config-emmg)#
<1-3>
Mode: 1 = DVB-Simulcrypt
2 = PM
3 = testMode
video default-mapping-scheme udp
Purpose Enables the default UDP port to QAM mapping scheme. Use the [no] version
of the command to remove the UDP port to QAM mapping scheme.
Syntax [no] video default-mapping-scheme udp
video default-mapping-scheme udp-legacy
Purpose Enables the legacy UDP port to QAM mapping scheme. Use the [no] version of
the command to remove the legacy UDP port to QAM mapping scheme.
Syntax [no] video default-mapping-scheme udp-legacy
video default-pid-mapping program-base * count * pid-count *
Purpose Enables the modification of the default-pid-mapping scheme. When enabled,
static egress PID mapping will re-use the same PID set for a given program
number whenever assigned. Use the [no] version of the command to disable
the modification of the default-pid-mapping scheme and reset to the default
values of 1/63/16.
NOTE
The number-of-pids-per-program must include all associated PIDs (including,
but not limited to, the PMT PID, the ECM PID, etc.). Also, the total number of
assigned PIDs (<number-of-programs> X <number-of-pids-per-program>)
must not exceed 6,144.
Syntax [no] video default-pid-mapping program-base <1-65335>
count <1-2048> pid-count <2-31>
Related Command(s) video cycle-output-pids
<1-65335> Program number
<1-2048> Number of programs
<2-31> Number of pids per program (includes PMT PID)
video dest-ip
Purpose Configures the default UDP port streams to QAM mapping schemes. Use the
[no] version of the command to disable the automatic cycling of PID-values on
the RF.
Syntax [no] video dest-ip <N.N.N.N> [filter-pid <1-8191> |
filter-program <1-65535> | ghost-pid <1-8190> | remap-pid
in <1-8191> out <1-8191> | reserve-pid <1-8191> | video-
si-stream container <name> | virtual-program <name>]
filter-pid <1-8191> Sets the filter PID range.
filter-program <1-65535> Sets the program filtering range.
ghost-pid <1-8190> Manually configures ghost-pid mappings
remap-pid in <1-8191> Remaps incoming PID destinations.
out <1-8191> Remaps outgoing PID destinations.
reserve-pid <1-8191> Sets reserve PID number.
video-si-stream container
<name>
Replicates a stream to a named channel container.
virtual-program Replicates a stream to a named virtual-program.
video disconnect sessions qam
Purpose Shuts down incoming video streams on a specified QAM interface. If no inter-
face is specified, all sessions on the QAM will be shut down.
Syntax video disconnect sessions qam {<X> | <X/Y> | <X/Y.Z>}
Privilege EXEC D5#
<X> Interface string
<X/Y> Port interface string
<X/Y.Z> Channel interface
video disconnect sessions udp
Purpose Shuts down incoming video streams with a particular destination UDP port.
Syntax video disconnect sessions udp <1-65535> src-ip <N.N.N.N>
dest-ip <N.N.N.N>]
Privilege EXEC D5#
<1-65535>
Disconnects all sessions with a particular destination on the specified UDP
port.
<N.N.N.N> Source IP
<N.N.N.N> Destination IP
video ecmg
Purpose Configures a DVB-Simulcrypt ECMG server. Use the [no] version of the
command to remove the ECMG server.
Syntax [no] video ecmg <name>
NOTE
Within a video configuration sub-menu. it is possible to jump to another (and
different) video configuration sub-menu, by using the vi deo commands.
For example:
D5(config)#video ecmg testecmg <-- enters ECMG configuration mode
D5(config-ecmg)#video eis testeis <-- enters EIS configuration mode
D5(config-eis)#video emmg testEmmg <-- enters EMMG configuration mode
D5(config)#
ECMG Configuration
D5(config)#
D5(config-ecmg)#
<name> ECMG name
video eis
Purpose Configures a DVB-Simulcrypt EIS client. Use the [no] version of the command
to remove the EIS client.
Syntax [no] video eis <name> [scg-id <id> {ecm-id <id> shutdown |
service-id <id> transport-id <id> shutdown}]
NOTE
Within a video configuration sub-menu, it is possible to jump to another (and
For example:
D5(config)#
ECMG Configuration
EMMG Configuration
D5(config)#
D5(config-ecmg)#
D5(config-emmg)#
<name> EIS name
scg-id <id Scrambler control group ID. Valid range is 0-65535.
ecm-id <id> Ecm Group ID. Valid range is 0-65535.
service-id <id> Service ID. Valid range is 0-65535
video emmg
Purpose Configures a DVB-Simulcrypt EMMG client. Use the [no] version of the
command to remove the EMMG client.
Syntax [no] video emmg <name>
NOTE
Within a video configuration sub-menu, it is possible to jump to another (and
For example:
D5(config)#
ECMG Configuration
EMMG Configuration
D5(config)#
D5(config-ecmg)#
D5(config-emmg)#
<name> EMMG name
video emulation-mode bitwise
Purpose Enables NSG-compatible UDP port mapping. Use the [no] version of the
command to disable NSG-compatible UDP port mapping.
Syntax [no] video emulation-mode bitwise <1-6>
<1-6> Number of IP addresses to use.
video encryption-policy-strict
Purpose Enables DVB CAS strict encryption policy. Use the [no] version of the command
to disable DVB CAS strict encryption policy.
Syntax [no] video encryption-policy-strict
ECMG Configuration
EIS Configuration
EMMG Configuration
D5(config)#
D5(config-ecmg)#
D5(config-eis)#
D5(config-emmg)#
video erm
Purpose Configures a DVB-Simulcrypt ERM client.
Syntax video erm <name>
ECMG Configuration
EMMG Configuration
D5(config)#
D5(config-ecmg)#
D5(config-emmg)#
<name> ERM name
video es-type pmt-reordering
Purpose Configures elementary-stream types and reorders the input PMT ES-loop by
ES-type.
Syntax video es-type pmt-reordering <0-255>
<0-255> Elementary stream type
video fast-psi-updates
Purpose This command impacts the timing of how the PSI tables (which are shared
between programs) are updated on the QAM RF. The only time you should
notice between the feature being turned on/off is at the point when new
programs are started up or old programs are shutdown and the shared tables
(PAT/CST/NIT/SDT) get updated.
When fast-psi-updates is turned on, it allows your set-top-box to tune to a new
program faster as the PSI is available on the RF sooner. Use the [no] version
of the command to disable the fast updates.
Syntax [no] video fast-psi-updates

video filter-descriptor ca-desc
Purpose Enables filtering of CA-Descriptors from incoming streams. Use the [no]
version of the command to disable the filtering of CA-Descriptors.
Syntax [no] video filter-descriptor ca-desc [ca-system-id
<xxxx.xxxx>] [pmt-only | cat-only]

QAM Interface
D5(config)#
D5(config-qam-if)#
ca-system-id <xxxx.xxxx>
Enables filtering of CA-Descriptors from CAT & PMT with the specified
conditional access system ID <in hex>
pmt-only Enables filtering of CA-Descriptors from PMT only.
cat-only Enables filtering of CA-Descriptors from CAT only.
video filter-pid
Purpose Enables manual PID filtering. An operator can filter certain input ES from
programs so they are not transmitted on the output QAM channel. This could
be to remove a private ES or to remove alternative audio streams, etc. These
ESs are filtered by specifying their input PID values. The MPEG Manager is
configured to never remap these filtered PIDs when they are detected in the
input stream. However, this command allows the operator to configure PID
filter rules. Use the [no] version of the command to disable manual PID
filtering.
The D5 UEQ also allows for Global manual configuration of PID filters rather
than just configuring them on the UDP/IP level.
It is important to remember that PID remapping and reservation occurs on the
outgoing PID, whereas filtering occurs on the incoming PID values.
Syntax [no] video filter-pid <16-8191>
<16-8191> PID filtering range.
video filter-program
Purpose Enables manual program filtering. Use the [no] version of the command to
disable manual program filtering.
Syntax [no] video filter-program <1-65535>
<1-65535> Program
video format
Purpose Configures the video modulation format. Use the [no] version of the command
to set the video modulation format back to the default.
Syntax [no] video format <64 | 128 | 256>
<64> 64 QAM Modulation
<128> 128 QAM Modulation
<256> 256 QAM Modulation. This is the default value
video frequency
Purpose Configures the center frequency (Hz) of the first bonded carrier. The resolution
of this command is in Hertz; however, hardware capability may not allow such
resolution which means that the value will be rounded out to the nearest
supported value when applied to a QAM card (although the configured value
stays unchanged). To display the actual frequency, use the show interface
qam <x/y[.z] to display the actual frequency used by the hardware. This
command has no default and must be set by the user in order to enable chan-
nels of a QAM port.
Syntax video frequency <frequency>
<frequency>
Specify the frequency. The valid ranges are:
<57000000-999000000> - single carrier center frequency (Hz) for Annex A
<57000000-999000000> - single carrier center frequency (Hz) for Annex B/C
<57000000-991000000> - lowest carrier center frequency (Hz) for Annex A dual
<57000000-993000000> - lowest carrier center frequency (Hz) for Annex B/C dual
<57000000-975000000> - lowest carrier center frequency (Hz) for Annex A quad
<57000000-981000000> - lowest carrier center frequency (Hz) for Annex B/C quad
<57000000-969000000> - lowest carrier center frequency (Hz) for Annex B hex
video generate-cc
Purpose Generates continuity counts in the QAM. Use the [no] version of the command
to disable continuity counts on the QAM.
[no] video generate-cc
video generate-psi
Purpose Enables auto-generation of PSI tables. Use the [no] version of the command
to disable auto-generation of PSI tables.
Syntax [no] video generate-psi [cat | pat [force-nit-entry] | pmt]
Related Command(s) video original-network-id
QAM Channel Sub-interface Configuration
D5(config)#
D5(config-qam-if)#
cat Conditional Access Table
pat [force-nit-entry]
Program Association Table. If the force-nit-entry option is configured,
then the NIT PID entry in the egress PAT is forced to the value specified by
the video nit-pid configuration.
pmt Program Map Table
video generate-si
Purpose Enables auto-generation of SI tables. Use the [no] version of the command to
disable auto-generation of SI tables.
Syntax [no] video generate-si [nit | sdt]
nit Network Information Table
sdt Service Description Table
video ghost-pid
Purpose Configures the ghost PID rules for the specified ingress video stream. Use the
[no] version of the command to remove the ghost PID rules.
Syntax [no] video ghost-pid <id>
QAM Port Configuration D5(config-qam-port)#
<id> Packet Identifier. Valid range is 16-8191. Default is 16.
video interleave level
Purpose Configures the FEC interleave level (Annex B only). Use the [no] version of the
command to return to the default value.
Syntax [no] video interleave level <1-2>
<1-2> FEC interleave level (Level 1 is for QAM64 Annex B only). The default level is 2.
video interleave mode
Purpose Configures the FEC interleave codeword (Annex B only). Use the [no] version
of the command to return to the default value.
Syntax [no] video interleave mode <0-14>
<0-14>
There are 15 interleave Available in Mode(s)to choose from. Default is mode 6. Valid
range is:
0 - I=128 J =1
1 - I=128 J =1
2 - I=128 J =2
3 - I=64 J =2
4 - I=128 J =3
5 - I=32 J =4
6 - I=128 J =4 (default)
7 - I=16 J =8
8 - I=128 J =5
9 - I=8 J =16
10 - I=128 J =6
12 - I=128 J =7
14 - I=128 J =8
video interval
Purpose This command sets the transmission intervals, in milliseconds, between trans-
missions of various (P)SI MPEG tables and DVB-SI tables. Use the [no]
version of the command to restore the default values.
NOTE
The intervals can be configured at either this Global configuration mode or
within a QAM interface configuration.
Syntax [no] video interval {cat <sec> | nit <sec> | pat <sec> |
pmt <sec> | sdt <sec>}

cat <sec> Conditional Access table in milliseconds. Valid range is 50-2000.
nit <sec> Network Information table in milliseconds. Valid range is 50-10000.
pat <sec>
Program Association table in milliseconds. Valid range is 50-2000. Default interval
is 100ms.
pmt <sec>
Program Map table in milliseconds. Valid range is 50-2000. Default interval is
100ms.
sdt <sec> Service Description table in milliseconds. Valid range is 50-2000.
video jitter-depth
Purpose Configures the amount of delay allowed for dejittering.
Syntax video jitter-depth <sec> [bitrate <0-65535> <0-65535>]
<sec> Milliseconds. Valid range is 0-500.
[<0-65535>
Qualifies this rule with a per-program bitrate range. The lower bit-rate
threshold is in Kbps.
<0-65535>] The upper bit-rate threshold is in Kbps.
video max-stream
Purpose Enforces a maximum number of programs per QAM-channel. Use the [no]
version of the command to restore the default values.
Syntax [no] video max-stream <0-63>
<0-63> Number of programs.
video network-id
Purpose Configures the DVB Network Identifier used in the output QAM(s). The default
is 4369. This would only be used to provide arbitration if incoming transport
streams are being mapped to the same downstream QAM do not have the
same original_network_id. Use the [no] version of the command to restore the
default value.
Syntax [no] video network-id <0-65535>
<0-65535> Network ID
video network-name
Purpose Configures the DVB Network name used in the output QAM(s). The default is
set to D5NET. Use the [no] version of the command to restore the default
value.
Syntax [no] video network-name <name>
<name> The DVB Network name
video nit-pid
Purpose Configures the DVB NIT packet identifier used in the output QAM(s). This
command can be configured Globally or on an individual QAM. Globally
enabling or disabling the NIT will override individual QAM provisioning.
Syntax video nit-pid <id> <enable | disable>
<id> Packet Identifier. Valid range is 16-8191. Default is 16.
video original-network-id
Purpose Configures the DVB original network identifier used in the output QAM(s). Use
the [no] version of the command to restore the default value.
Syntax [no] video original-network-id <0-65535>
<0-65535> Network ID. Default is 4370
video over-subscription margin
Purpose Configures a safety margin for the video bandwidth over-subscription settings.
Use the [no] version of the command to restore the default value.
Syntax [no] video over-subscription margin <0-65535>
<0-65535> Safety margin in Kbps
video over-subscription program
Purpose Manages the handlings of program queues within the QAM modules. There are
three variants of the command, alert which is used to enable/disable the
generation of alerts, interval which is used to program the period of the
program bandwidth moving average, and threshold which is sued to set the
percent bandwidth threshold that would trigger an alert. Use the [no] version
of the command to restore the default value.
Syntax [no] video over-subscription program {alert | interval
<secs> | threshold <percent>}
secs
60-30000
Sets the interval over which the program bandwidth is averaged in seconds.
Default is set at 60 seconds.
percent
0-100
Sets the bitrate threshold used to trigger a program over-subscription alert.
Default value is 0%.
video over-subscription recovery
Purpose Enables auto-recovery when subscription settings have been over-subscribed.
Use the [no] version of the command to disable auto-recovery.
Syntax [no] video over-subscription recovery
video pass-through mpts
Purpose Configures the QAM to pass-through mode. The MPTS pass-through mode
uses a single de-jitter queue for the entire MPTS and supports only Annex B
deployments that do not require D5 UE encryption. Use the [no] version of the
command to disable the pass-through mode.
Syntax [no] video pass-through mpts
video pcr-drift-correction
Purpose Configures correction of input PCR drift. The default is on (and switchable)
for channels delivering SDV & MPTS pass-through traffic. Use the [no] version
of the command to turn it off (and not switchable) for everything else.
Syntax [no] video pcr-drift-correction
video power
Purpose Configures the video power level (.1dBmV) per carrier. Use the [no] version of
the command to return to the default value.
Syntax [no] video power <level>
<level>
Power level (.1dBmV) per carrier. The default value is the lowest power for the
mode. Valid levels are:
<520-600> - in single channel mode
<480-560> - in dual channel mode
<440-550> - in quad channel mode
<420-530> - in hex channel mode
video program-conflict ignore-source-ip
Purpose Enables the ability to handle the source IP address changing while the desti-
nation IP and UDP port remain the same. Use the [no] version of the command
to disable this feature. This behavior is off by default.
Syntax [no] video program-conflict ignore-source-ip
video psig
Purpose Enters the PSIG configuration mode.
Syntax video psig <name>
Video Channel Configuration
ECMG Configuration
EMMG Configuration
D5(config-video-channel)#
D5(config-ecmg)#
D5(config-emmg)#
<name> PSIG config mode
video redundancy-group
Purpose Configures an ECMG redundancy group. Use the [no] version of the command
to disable the redundancy group.
Syntax [no] video redundancy-group <name>
ECMG Configuration
EMMG Configuration
D5(config)#
D5(config-ecmg)#
D5(config-emmg)#
<name> Group name
video redundant-stream
Purpose Configures a redundant stream. Use the [no] version of the command to
disable the redundancy stream.
Syntax [no] video redundancy-stream <name> {<channel-container
<name>> | <qam <x/y.z>>}
<name> Redundant stream group name
channel-container <name> Enter the channel container to use with this redundant stream
qam <x/y.z> Enter the QAM to use with this redundant stream
video redundant-stream-group
Purpose Configures a redundant stream group. Use the [no] version of the command
to disable the redundancy stream group.
Syntax [no] video redundancy-stream-group <name>
<name> Redundant stream group name
video remap-pid
Purpose Configures the PID of an incoming program on the interface. Use the [no]
version of the command to remove the remapping.
Syntax [no] video remap-pid in <16-8191> out <16-8191>
<16-8191> PID
<16-8191> PID
video reserve-dvb-pids
Purpose Disables DVB reserved PIDS from being used for elementary streams. Use the
[no] version of the command to enable DVB reserved PIDs to be used for
elementary streams.
Syntax [no] video reserve-dvb-pids
video reserve-pid
Purpose PID reservation is a special-case of PID remapping that occurs when the
incoming PID value is the same as the outgoing PID value. It is possible that
a reserved PID value does not appear in any PSI table. This is referred to a s
a ghost PID. Such PID values can be programmed in the D5 UEQ so that they
are always allowed to pass through unchanged. This command reserves the
specified PID on the specified channel. Use the [no] version of the command
to release the reserved PID.
Syntax [no] video reserve-pid <16-8191>
<16-8191> PID
video revert-staticgroup
Purpose Configures the input name of redundant group to revert to highest priority
transport. Use the [no] version of the command to go back to the default
value.
Syntax [no] video revert-saticgroup <name>
Privilege EXEC D5#
<name> Input name of redundant group
video scg
Purpose Configures a DVB Simulcrypt SCG. Use the [no] version of the command to
disable the DVB Simulcrypt SCG.
Syntax [no] video scg <name>
ECMG Configuration
EMMG Configuration
D5(config)#
D5(config-ecmg)#
D5(config-emmg)#
<name> SCG name
video scg-close-cleanup
Purpose Removes SCGs from EIS if connection is closed. Use the [no] version of the
command to stop the removal of SCGs from EIS if the connection is closed.
Syntax [no] video scg-close-cleanup
ECMG Configuration
EMMG Configuration
D5(config)#
D5(config-ecmg)#
D5(config-emmg)#
video scg-loss-cleanup
Purpose Removes SCGs from EIS if connection is lost. Use the [no] version of the
command to stop the removal of SCGs from EIS if the connection is lost.
Syntax [no] video scg-close-cleanup
ECMG Configuration
EMMG Configuration
D5(config)#
D5(config-ecmg)#
D5(config-emmg)#
video scs-id
Purpose Sets the system scs_id. This identifier is used to ensure that the
ecmg_stream_id created by each D5 UEQ is unique. For example, if two D5
UEQs with host names, D5-One and D5-Two respectively, shared the same
ECMG, they would each need to be configured with unique scs_ids. Use the
[no] version of the command to remove the system scs_id
Syntax [no] video scs-id <0-255>
<0-255> System scs_id.
video sdv alt-wildcard-prog
Purpose Enables the alternative wildcard program number (1). Use the [no] version of
the command to disable the alternative wildcard program number (1).
Syntax [no] video sdv alt-wildcard prog
video sdv enhanced-bw-checking
Purpose Configures whether to extend bandwidth checking to measure actual traffic
values on the QAM. Use the [no] version of the command if you do not want
to check the actual traffic values on the QAM, just the configured ones (this is
the default).
Syntax [no] video sdv enhanced-bw-checking
video sdv interface gigabitethernet
Purpose Configures which of the four gigabitethernet ports to utilize as primary,
secondary or exclude altogether from GQI usage.
Syntax video sdv interface gigabitethernet <0/x> [primary |
secondary | none]
<0/x> GigabitEthernet slot/port
[primary | secondary | none} Sets the port utilization.
video sdv policy-active
Purpose Configures the SDV transport redundancy. The use of hot-hot will enable hot-
hot operation in GQI using both primary and secondary assigned GigabitEth-
ernet ports, while hot-warm will only use primary assigned gigabitethernet
ports. The default is set to hot-warm. Use the [no] version of the command to
return to the default setting.
Syntax [no] video sdv policy-active <hot-hot | hot-warm>
hot-hot Sets the SDV transport redundancy to hot-hot.
hot-warm Sets the SDV transport redundancy to hot-warm.
video sdv policy-load-balance forced
Purpose This command will override incoming input port numbers that are treated as 0
(zero) by the GQI/RPC SDV sessions. Using this option allows the D5 UEQ to
control the session placement entirely (in the form of forcing load balancing
decisions across the available GE ports) and enables more control of giga-
bitEthernet failure (e.g. if USRM signaled sessions are placed on specific giga-
bitEthernets, then these can not be moved. If the D5 UEQ assumes this
control from the USRM, then it can place sessions on any active primary giga-
bitEthernet port, as well as recover a session to active primary gigabitEthernet
port from failed sessions recovered by re-load balancing across available band-
width on remaining gigabitEthernet ports). Use the [no] option returns the D5
UEQ to obeying the session input ports supplied by the SDV server.
NOTE
This command is only available for use when the GQI SDV system is
shutdown/disabled/stopped.
NOTE
Normal load-balancing, where sessions are presented with input port=0, are
not affected by this command.
Syntax [no] video sdv policy-load-balance forced
video sdv rpc
Purpose Enables the Switched Digital Video RPC interface. Use the [no] version of the
command to disable the SDV RPC interface.
Syntax [no] video sdv rpc [announce-messages] [dncs-
compatibitility-mode | master-srm <N.N.N.N> <tcp | udp>]
[persistent] [reset-indicator interval <1-20>] [timeout
<default | 0-65535>]
[announce-messages] Enables GQI/RPC announce messages.
[dncs-compatibility-mode] Sets the Master SRM for Edge Reset Indications
[master-srm <N.N.N.N> <tcp |
udp>]
Sets the Master SRM for Edge Reset using the Master SRM IP address and
designating either TCP or UDP indications
[persistent] Sets the RPC client connection to persistent
[reset-indicator interval
<1-20>]
Sets the SDV RPC reset-indicator interval in seconds. Valid range is 1-20
seconds.
[timeout <default> | <0-
65535>
Sets the SDV RPC timeout back to the default or the RPC timeout in
milliseconds.
video sdv rpc qam-model
Purpose Enables the SDV RPC QAM model (48/72/192 QAM channels). The default
value is the 2x6-QAM.
Syntax video sdv rpc qam-model <2x4-QAM | 2x6-QAM | 4x8-QAM>
<2x4-qam> Configures SDV PC QAM model 2 ports 4 channels
video sdv session
Purpose Manually restores an SDV session to the specified primary transport.
Syntax video sdv session <NNMMMMMM | XXXX.XXXX.XXXX.XXXXXXXX>
[switch-to-primary]
<NNMMMMMM |
XXXX.XXXX.XXXX.XXXXXXXX>
Primary transport
[switch-to-primary] Manually restores an SDV session to its primary transport.
video sdv session setup-policy
Purpose Configures the SDV session setup transport selection policy.
Syntax video sdv session setup-policy <first-available> | <wait-
for-primary>
<first-available>
Configures to start on first available source rather than first source in session
list.
<wait-for-primary> Configures SDV session setup policy to ignore.
video sdv session-timeout
Purpose Configures the interval in which a bind/rebind can succeed.
Syntax video sdv session-timeout <600-30000>
<600-30000> Sets the session-timeout in milliseconds.
video sdv source-timeout
Purpose Configures the round-robin interval before trying another source.
Syntax video sdv source-timeout <600-5000>
<600-5000> Sets the source-timeout in milliseconds.
video sdv video-pid-detect
Purpose Enables the D5 UEQ to report stream errors associated with missing video or
PCR PIDs. Use the [no] version to disable unwanted alarms and syslogs.
Syntax [no] video sdv video-pid-detect
video serving-group
Purpose Sets the serving-group name for either an entire QAM module, a QAM port (on
a QAM module) or a specific QAM channel. The same name may be used for
QAM modules/ports/channels within a D5 UEQ. The no version of the
command removes the video serving-group from the QAM module/port/
channel. This results in the QAM channel being marked as VREP Withdrawn-
Route if it was previously advertised as a VREP ReachableRoute.
Setting the video serving-group <name> on the QAM module level (e.g.
QAM 1) results in the same name being applied to all QAM channels on that
module. Setting the video serving-group <name> on a QAM port level
(e.g. QAM 1/1) results in the same name being applied to all QAM channels on
that port, (ignoring the QAM module video serving-group <name>, if
set). Setting the video serving-group on a QAM channel level (e.g. QAM
1/1.1) will result in the <name> being applied to the QAM channel, even if a
QAM module or port video serving-group command exists.
NOTE
The video serving-group <name> is not the same as the qam-list,
which refers to the video channel-container listing the QAM channels.
Syntax [no] video serving-group <name>
Example The following example illustrates how the video serving-group name is set on
a QAM module. The value is set to hub2. This applies to all QAM channels on
the QAM module:
D5(config)# interface qam 2
NOTE: Configuration changes will be applied after the
exit command is given.
D5(config-qam-card)# video serving-group hub2
<name> Name of the video serving-group that is set on the associated QAM channels
Example The next example shows how the video serving-group <name> is set on a
QAM port. The value is set to hub2. This applies to all QAM channels on the
QAM port.
D5(config)# interface qam 2/1
D5(config-qam-port)# video serving-group hub2
Example The final example shows how the video serving-group <name> is set on a
QAM channel. The value is set to hub2.
D5(config-qam-channel)# video serving-group hub2
Related Command(s) interface qam
qam-list
video snoop qam * post-mux ip
Purpose Enables video snooping on a specified QAM. Use the [no] version of the
command to disable video snooping.
Syntax [no] video snoop qam <X/Y.Z> post-mux ip <N.N.N.N> udp <1-
65535>
<X/Y.Z> Slot/port.qam
<N.N.N.N> Sends the snooped data to the specified destination IP for snooped TSID
<1-65535> Destination UDP port for snooped TSID
video snoop tos
Purpose Sets the IP TOS value for all snooped data. Use the [no] version of the
command to remove the IP TOS value for all snooped data.
Syntax [no] video snoop tos <1-255>
<1-255> IP TOS value
video snoop tsid * post-mux ip
Purpose Enables video snooping on a specified TSID. Use the [no] version of the
command to disable video snooping.
Syntax [no] video snoop tsid <1-65535> post-mux ip <N.N.N.N>

<1-65535> TSID of QAM
<N.N.N.N> Destination IP address for snooped TSID
video snoop vlan-priority
Purpose Sets the 802.1P Vlan priority for all snooped data. Use the [no] version of the
command to remove the 802.1P Vlan priority.
Syntax [no] video snoop vlan-priority <1-7>
<1-7> 802.1P Vlan Priority
video spectral-inversion
Purpose Configures the format of I/Q symbols transmitted on this QAM channel, the
format of which is dependant on PHY modulation. This command defaults to
no video spectral-inversion when unspecified. Use the [no] version
of the command to disable spectral inversion.
Syntax [no] video spectral-inversion
video src-ip
Purpose Overrides the default mapping to a specified QAM program. Use the [no]
version of the command to return to the default.
Syntax [no] video src-ip <N.N.N.N> [dest-ip <N.N.N.N>] [filter-
pid <1-8191> | filter-program <1-65535> | ghost-pid <1-
8190> | remap-pid <1-8191> | reserve-pid <1-8191> | video-
si-stream [remap-tsid] | virtual-program <name>]
N.N.N.N Source IP address
dest-ip <N.N.N.N> Destination IP address
program <1-65535> Manually maps to a specific QAM and program.
video-si-stream [remap-tsid]
Configures this stream as a video-si stream. If the remap-tsid option is
configured, the TSID value in the egress PAT will be set to the value specified
by the video tsid setting in the QAM channel configuration.
video symbol-rate
Purpose Configures a custom video symbol rate using a (10.24 Mhz * M/N) ratio. Use
the [no] version of the command to remove the video symbol rate.
Syntax [no] video symbol-rate <rate>
<rate>
Video symbol-rate. Valid ranges are:
<3450000-7040000> - range for Annex A (symbol/s)
<3450000-5415000> - range for Annex C (symbol/s)
video timeout
Purpose Configures the Transport Stream close timeouts in seconds. Use the [no]
version of the command to disable the Transport Stream close timeouts.
NOTE
For SDV services, ARRIS recommends setting to 20 seconds
Syntax [no] video timeout session close <1-65>
<1-65> Seconds. Default is 10 seconds.
video tsid
Purpose Configures the Transport Stream ID (TSID) and allows it to override the default
mapping. This is used when generating the PAR to identify the particular trans-
port stream. Use the [no] version of the command to return to the default
TSID.
Syntax [no] video tsid <1-65535>
<1-65535>
Transport stream ID. The default TSID values correspond to the QAM
slot/port.chan numbering e.g. QAM 2/1.1 = TSID 20101, QAM 3/2.5 = TSID
30205, etc.
video tsid-duplication
Purpose Allows duplicate TSIDs to be configured. Use the [no] version of the command
to disallow duplicate TSIDs to be configured.
Syntax [no] video tsid-duplication
video udp
Purpose Configures the Transport Stream ID (TSID) and allows it to override the default
mapping. This is used when generating the PAR to identify the particular trans-
port stream. Use the [no] version of the command to automatically shut down
a specific video stream.
Syntax [no] video [udp <1-65535>] [src-ip <ip_addr>] [dest-ip
<ip_addr>] [filter-pid <1-8191>] [filter-program <1-
65535>] [ghost-pid <1-8190>] [remap-pid {in <1-8191>}]
[reserve-pid <1-8191>] [video-si-stream container <name>]
[video-si-stream [remap-tsid]] [virtual-program <name>]
1-65535> UDP port number.
src-ip <ip_addr> Source IP address in the form N.N.N.N
dest-ip <ip_addr> Destination IP address in the form N.N.N.N
filter-pid <1-8191> Manually sets the PID filtering to the specified PID
filter-program <1-65535> Manually sets the program filtering to the specified program
remap-pid {in <1-8191>} Manually remaps the PID in the specified PID.
reserve-pid <1-8191> Manually reserves the PID
filter-program <1-65535> Manual mapping to a specific QAM and Program.
video si-stream container
<name>
Replicates the video-si-stream to the specified channel-container.
video si-stream [remap-tsid] Allows the PAT TSID remapping.
use Specifies multiple mappings.
[virtual-program <name> Replicates the stream to a specified channel-container.
NOTE
A unique IP stream must be specified. Any version of this command that does
not explicitly define all of the parameters (e.g. udp, src-ip, dest-ip) will not
automatically shutdown the video-stream.
If multiple sessions are created using a single video rule, then you must use
the video disconnect command to stop them. If the rule does not have
src-ip and dest-ip specified, then the rule is considered ambiguous and
the above is true.
Related Command(s) video disconnect qam
video disconnect udp
video video-si-stream ghost-pid
Purpose Configures the number of PIDs which are present in an si-stream and are not
signalled via any DVB descriptors to be passed through to QAM queue-0,
unmodified. Use the [no] version of the command to remove the ghost PID
rule.
NOTE
An explicit PID reserved range rule must now be used to allow ghost-pids to
operate in the extended range. The no video reserve-dvb-pids
command must be used before using extended ghost-pids.
Syntax [no] video video-si-stream ghost-pid <1-8191>
Related Command(s) video reserve-dvb-pids
1-8191 UDP port number.
virtual-interface
Purpose Enables the use of loopback interfaces as virtual interfaces to enable port
redundancy on the D5 UEQ. Typically the virtual-interface will be used on loop-
backs for management purposes. There can be up to two separate virtual-
interfaces configured. A virtual interface is created by configuring a loopback
interface with the virtual-interface command. The no virtual-interface
<instance> version of the command destroys the virtual-interface while the
no virtual-interface gigabitethernet <X/ Y> removes the specified port
from the virtual interface.
The virtual-interface command come in two different forms; with one form
applicable in three different interfaces.
The virtual-interface [instance] version of the command can be applied to the
interface loopback, interface gigabitethernet and interface fastethernet inter-
faces. When used in interface loopback, it creates an instance of a virtual-inter-
face, defined by the supplied identifier. When used in the ethernet interfaces,
it is used to mark the interface as part of the specified virtual-interface.
The virtual-interface {[gigabitethernet | fastethernet] x/y [priority]} version is
used only within the interface loopback configuration mode and allows an
operator to manage the membership of the required physical interface in one
location. The use of the priority field enables the operator to choose the correct
priority to assign to the physical interface.
NOTE
Any physical ethernet port on the D5 UEQ can only be configured to be a
member of just one virtual-interface.
Syntax [no] virtual-interface {instance <1-2>} | {activate
<highest-priority <priority>} | <gigabitethernet <x/y>
<priority <1-6> [vlan <1-4094>]} |
{fastethernet <x/y> <priority <1-6> [vlan <1-4094>]}
GigabitEthernet Sub-interface
Loopback Sub-interface
D5(config-gig-if)#
D5(config-if)#

Example The following example shows how a loopback is configured to include two
gigabitethernet interfaces as part of a virtual-interface. The virtual interface is
configured with the IP address of 1.1.1.1.
D5(config)# interface loopback 1
"exit" command is given.
D5(config-if)# virtual-interface 1
D5(config-if)# ip address 1.1.1.1 255.255.255.0
D5(config-if)#
D5(config-if)# virtual-interface gigabitethernet 0/1 1
D5(config-if)# virtual-interface gigabitethernet 0/2 2
D5(config-if)# exit
NOTE
Any physical ethernet port on the D5 UEQ can only be configured to be a
member of just one virtual-interface
Related Command(s) show interface loopback
show interface virtual-interface
instance <1-2> Virtual interface number
activate <highest-priority
<priority>>
Administratively activate the highest priority subinterface.
gigabitethernet
<x/y> <priority <1-6> [vlan
<1-4094>]}
Specific gigabitethernet interface to be used in virtual-interface. The use of
the priority field enables the operator to choose the correct priority to assign
to the virtual interface. Use the vlan parameter and vlan tag to specify
encapsulation to be used over the gigabitethernet link.
fastethernet
<x/y> <priority <1-6> [vlan
<1-4094>]}
Specific fastethernet interface to be used in virtual-interface. The use of the
priority field enables the operator to choose the correct priority to assign to
the virtual interface. Use the vlan parameter and vlan tag to specify
encapsulation to be used over the fastethernet link.
write
Purpose Writes the running configuration, or erases the startup configuration, based on
the argument. If no argument is used, this command saves the running config-
uration to the startup configuration (to disk).
Syntax write [erase | memory | terminal | network <tftp: |
TO_FILENAME>]
Privilege EXEC D5#
erase
Erases startup-configuration on the Compact Flash disk. If you do not create
a new startup configuration, the D5 UEQ uses the factory default configuration
at the next reload.
memory Saves the running-configuration to the startup configuration.
terminal Displays the running-configuration on the terminal.
network <tftp: |
TO_FILENAME>
Saves the running-configuration to a specified file. The file may be a path on
the Compact Flash disk, or you can specify tftp:/ / n.n.n.n/ filename to copy
the configuration to a TFTP server.
D5 UEQ
Release 3.0.1 ARRIS PROPRIETARY All Rights Reserved CLI -1
List of CLI Commands
1 aaa accounting commands default 17-3
2 aaa accounting exec default 17-4
3 aaa authentication banner 17-5
4 aaa authentication enable 17-6
5 aaa authentication fail-message 17-7
6 aaa authentication login 17-8
7 aaa authentication password-prompt 17-9
8 aaa authentication prompt 17-10
9 aaa authorization commands default 17-11
10 aaa authorization exec default 17-12
11 aaa group server 17-13
12 aaa new-model 17-14
13 activation-time 17-15
14 alias 17-16
15 arp 17-17
16 arp * * fastethernet 17-18
17 arp * * gigabitethernet 17-19
18 arp timeout 17-20
19 assign slot * wan * 17-21
20 authorization exec * 17-22
21 auto 17-23
22 bandwidth 17-24
23 banner 17-25
24 boot 17-26
25 bridge aging-time 17-27
26 bw-interval 17-28
27 bw-threshold 17-29
28 ca-descriptor 17-30
29 calendar set 17-32
30 cancel 17-33
CLI-2 ARRIS PROPRIETARY All Rights Reserved J uly 22, 2010
31 ca-system-id 17-31
32 cd 17-34
33 channel-container 17-35
34 channel delay 17-37
35 channel-group 17-36
36 channel mode 17-38
37 channel qam 17-39
38 channel spacing 17-40
39 channel test 17-41
40 channel-test-period 17-42
41 channel-test-timeout 17-43
42 channel timeout 17-44
43 channel tsid 17-45
44 channel width 17-46
45 chkdsk system 17-47
46 clear arp-cache 17-48
47 clear counters depi 17-49
48 clear counters qam 17-50
49 clear ip igmp group 17-51
50 clear ip igmp group interface gigabitethernet 17-52
51 clear ip igmp group interface loopback 17-53
52 clear logging history 17-54
53 clear mac-address 17-55
54 clear mac-address-table 17-56
55 clear qam-log 17-57
56 clear screen 17-58
57 clear video psig active sections 17-59
58 cli account 17-60
59 client-id 17-62
60 cli logging 17-61
61 clock set 17-63
62 clock summer-time <timezone> date 17-64
63 clock summer-time <timezone> recurring 17-65
64 clock timezone 17-66
65 component-name 17-67
66 component <pid> transport 17-68
D5 UEQ
67 configure debug 17-69
68 configure terminal 17-70
69 connection-timeout 17-71
70 copy 17-72
71 cost 17-73
72 cp-duration 17-74
73 crypto key generate 17-75
74 crypto key import rsa <input> pem url 17-76
75 crypto key zeroize 17-77
76 data-id 17-78
77 data-type 17-79
78 debug module aaa 17-80
79 debug module alarms 17-81
80 debug module cas ecm 17-82
81 debug module cas eis 17-83
82 debug module cas emm 17-84
83 debug module cas mux 17-85
84 debug module cli 17-86
85 debug module depi control-plane 17-87
86 debug module dhcpc 17-88
87 debug module dns 17-89
88 debug module dti 17-90
89 debug module ecl 17-91
90 debug module httpd 17-92
91 debug module igmp 17-93
92 debug module ip-bundle 17-94
93 debug module ipproc 17-95
94 debug module mon 17-96
95 debug module mpeg 17-97
96 debug module ntp 17-98
97 debug module qam 17-99
98 debug module radius 17-100
99 debug module rtsp connections 17-101
100 debug module rtsp msg 17-102
101 debug module sdv 17-103
102 debug module snmp 17-104
103 debug module tacacs 17-105
104 debug module timerlib 17-106
105 debug module vrep connections 17-107
106 debug module vrep fsm 17-108
107 debug module vrep msg 17-109
108 debug snmp 17-110
109 default-cp-duration 17-111
110 delete 17-112
111 depi control-plane 17-113
112 depi disconnect connection 17-114
113 depi dmpt dest-ip * * sessionid 17-115
114 depi dmpt dest-ip * * udp 17-117
115 depi timeout session close 17-119
116 description 17-120
117 diagnostics bootup level 17-121
118 diagnostics enable module qam 17-122
119 diagnostics ondemand iteration 17-123
120 diagnostics start module qam 17-124
121 diagnostics stop module qam 17-125
122 diagnostics su qam * do 17-126
123 diagnostics su qam * show 17-127
124 dig 17-128
125 dir 17-129
126 disable 17-130
127 disconnect 17-131
128 dti offset 17-132
129 dualwan 17-133
130 duplex 17-134
131 ecm-group * super-cas-id 17-135
132 ecm-group * transport 17-136
133 ecm-wakeup 17-137
134 enable 17-138
135 enable authentication default 17-139
136 enable-login 17-140
137 encapsulation dot1q 17-141
138 end 17-142
D5 UEQ
139 erase startup-config 17-143
140 erm 17-144
141 exception auto-reboot 17-145
142 exception auto-reboot mon 17-146
143 exit 17-147
144 file prompt 17-148
145 format system 17-149
146 gratuitous arp 17-150
147 hostname 17-151
148 interface 17-152
149 ip address 17-153
150 ip broadcast-address 17-154
151 ip bundle fastethernet 17-155
152 ip bundle gigabitethernet 17-156
153 ip bundle policy non-revertive 17-157
154 ip bundle policy revertive 17-158
155 ip bundle revert 17-159
156 ip domain-name 17-160
157 ip http authentication aaa login-authentication 17-161
158 ip http enable 17-162
159 ip igmp 17-163
160 ip igmp process-remote-queries 17-164
161 ip igmp query-max-response-timeout 17-165
162 ip igmp robustness 17-166
163 ip igmp static-group 17-167
164 ip igmp static-group source 17-168
165 ip igmp verify ip-router-alert-option 17-169
166 ip igmp version 17-170
167 ip local-address 17-171
168 ip name-server 17-172
169 ip remote address 17-173
170 ip route 17-174
171 ip routing 17-175
172 ip ssh authentication-retries 17-176
173 ip ssh authentication-timeout 17-177
174 ip ssh port 17-178
175 ip ssh server 17-179
176 ip ssh version 17-180
177 ip telnet server disable 17-181
178 line 17-182
179 load-balancing 17-184
180 load-interval 17-185
181 logging alarm clear 17-186
182 logging buffered 17-187
183 logging console 17-188
184 logging monitor 17-189
185 logging ngod 17-190
186 logging on 17-191
187 logging override event 17-192
188 logging override event * trap 17-193
189 logging override event * trap none 17-194
190 logging severity 17-195
191 logging syslog 17-196
192 logging syslog host 17-197
193 logging thresh all 17-198
194 logging thresh at 17-199
195 logging thresh below 17-200
196 logging thresh interval 17-201
197 logging thresh none 17-202
198 logging trap 17-203
199 logging trap-control 17-204
200 login authentication 17-205
201 login user name 17-206
202 login user password 17-207
203 logout 17-208
204 mac-address 17-209
205 mac-address-table static 17-210
206 management-access 17-211
207 mkdir 17-212
208 more 17-214
209 mpeg-section 17-213
210 network-id 17-215
D5 UEQ
211 ntp server 17-216
212 pid 17-217
213 ping 17-218
214 port 17-220
215 port-selection-criteria destination-ip 17-221
216 port-selection-criteria destination-mac 17-222
217 port-selection-criteria source-destination-ip 17-223
218 port-selection-criteria source-destination-mac 17-224
219 port-selection-criteria source-ip 17-225
220 port-selection-criteria source-mac 17-226
221 post 17-227
222 primary 17-228
223 privilege exec level 17-229
224 protocol-mapping erm 17-230
225 protocol-mapping rpc input gigabitethernet 17-231
226 pwd 17-232
227 radius-server host 17-233
228 radius-server key 17-234
229 radius-server retransmit 17-235
230 radius-server source-address 17-236
231 radius-server timeout 17-237
232 reboot 17-238
233 redundancy-group 17-239
234 reload 17-240
235 rename 17-241
236 revertive 17-242
237 rmdir 17-243
238 rtsp connection-timeout 17-244
239 rtsp message-timeout 17-245
240 rtsp port 17-246
241 rtsp session-timeout 17-247
242 script execute 17-248
243 script start 17-249
244 script stop 17-250
245 send 17-251
246 service 17-252
247 service-id 17-254
248 service-use docsis 17-255
249 show aaa line console 17-256
250 show aaa line console 17-257
251 show aaa line http 17-258
252 show aaa line ssh 17-259
253 show aaa line vty 17-260
254 show aaa methods-list 17-261
255 show aliases 17-262
256 show all-commands 17-263
257 show arp 17-264
258 show bootvar 17-265
259 show bridge 17-266
260 show calendar 17-267
261 show cli accounts 17-268
262 show cli host 17-269
263 show cli logging session 17-270
264 show clock 17-271
265 show configuration 17-272
266 show context 17-273
267 show controllers 17-274
268 show crypto key mypubkey 17-275
269 show crypto key pubkey-chain rsa 17-276
270 show debug history 17-277
271 show debug logging 17-278
272 show depi control-plane connection 17-279
273 show depi sessions 17-280
274 show environment 17-281
275 show environment minmax all 17-282
276 show environment minmax speed 17-283
277 show environment minmax temperature 17-284
278 show environment minmax voltage 17-285
279 show environment speed threshold 17-286
280 show environment speed time 17-287
281 show environment temperature all threshold 17-288
282 show environment temperature all time 17-289
D5 UEQ
283 show environment temperature mon * threshold 17-290
284 show environment temperature mon * time 17-291
285 show environment temperature pmod * * threshold 17-292
286 show environment temperature pmod * * time 17-293
287 show environment temperature qam * * threshold 17-294
288 show environment temperature qam * * time 17-295
289 show environment temperature wan * * threshold 17-296
290 show environment temperature wan * * time 17-297
291 show environment voltage all threshold 17-298
292 show environment voltage all time 17-299
293 show environment voltage mon * threshold 17-300
294 show environment voltage mon * time 17-301
295 show environment voltage pmod * threshold 17-302
296 show environment voltage pmod * * time 17-303
297 show environment voltage qam * * threshold 17-304
298 show environment voltage qam * * time 17-305
299 show environment voltage wan * * threshold 17-306
300 show environment voltage wan * * time 17-307
301 show exception 17-308
302 show file descriptors 17-309
303 show file systems 17-310
304 show history 17-311
305 show images 17-312
306 show interface qam * tech-support 17-325
307 show interfaces 17-313
308 show interfaces dti 17-314
309 show interfaces fastethernet 17-315
310 show interfaces gigabitethernet 17-316
311 show interfaces internal 17-317
312 show interfaces loopback 17-318
313 show interfaces output-port * video sdv session 17-319
314 show interfaces output-port * video sdv shell-session 17-320
315 show interfaces port-channel 17-321
316 show interfaces qam channel modes 17-322
317 show interfaces qam * diagnostics 17-323
318 show interfaces qam * stats 17-324
319 show interfaces qam * version 17-326
320 show interfaces qam * video 17-327
321 show interfaces qam * video ghost-pid 17-328
322 show interfaces * stats 17-329
323 show interfaces * video 17-330
324 show ip arp 17-331
325 show ip bundles 17-332
326 show ipc 17-342
327 show ip dhcp 17-333
328 show ip domain-name 17-334
329 show ip http 17-335
330 show ip igmp groups 17-336
331 show ip igmp interface 17-337
332 show ip interface brief 17-338
333 show ip name-servers 17-339
334 show ip route 17-340
335 show ip ssh 17-341
336 show linecard status 17-343
337 show logging 17-345
338 show logging alarm 17-346
339 show logging history 17-347
340 show memory 17-348
341 show mib iftable 17-349
342 show ntp 17-350
343 show privilege exec 17-351
344 show processes 17-352
345 show qam-log 17-353
346 show radius 17-354
347 show reload 17-355
348 show running-config 17-356
349 show running-config interfaces fastethernet 17-357
350 show running-config interfaces gigabitethernet 17-358
351 show running-config interfaces loopback 17-359
352 show running-config interfaces port-channel 17-360
353 show running-config interfaces qam 17-361
354 show running-config video erm 17-362
D5 UEQ
355 show snmp 17-363
356 show snmp-server 17-364
357 show snoop 17-365
358 show spare-group 17-366
359 show ssh 17-367
360 show startup-config 17-368
361 show system 17-369
362 show tacacs 17-370
363 show tech-support 17-371
364 show terminal 17-372
365 show update 17-373
366 show users 17-374
367 show version 17-375
368 show video cas 17-376
369 show video channel-container 17-377
370 show video ecmg 17-378
371 show video ecmg database 17-379
372 show video eis 17-380
373 show video emmg 17-381
374 show video erm 17-382
375 show video filter 17-383
376 show video filter-pid 17-384
377 show video filter-program 17-385
378 show video ghost-pid 17-386
379 show video jitter-status 17-387
380 show video multicast-transport 17-388
381 show video psig 17-389
382 show video redundancy-group 17-390
383 show video redundant-stream 17-391
384 show video redundant-stream-group 17-392
385 show video remap 17-393
386 show video remap-pid 17-394
387 show video reserve 17-395
388 show video reserve-pid 17-396
389 show video scg 17-397
390 show video sdv 17-398
391 show video sdv load-balance 17-399
392 show video sessions 17-400
393 show video si-stream 17-401
394 show video snoop 17-402
395 show video udp 17-403
396 shutdown 17-404
397 snmp-access-list *deny 17-405
398 snmp-access-list * deny any port 17-406
399 snmp-access-list * deny host 17-407
400 snmp-access-list * permit 17-408
401 snmp-access-list * permit any port 17-409
402 snmp-access-list * permit host 17-410
403 snmp-server community 17-411
404 snmp-server community-entry 17-412
405 snmp-server contact 17-413
406 snmp-server disable 17-414
407 snmp-server enable 17-415
408 snmp-server engineboots 17-416
409 snmp-server engineid remote 17-417
410 snmp-server group 17-418
411 snmp-server host 17-420
412 snmp-server location 17-421
413 snmp-server notif-entry 17-422
414 snmp-server notif-filter 17-423
415 snmp-server notif-sec-model 17-424
416 snmp-server notif-sec-model * notif-filter 17-425
417 snmp-server user 17-426
418 snmp-server view 17-427
419 snmp trap link-status 17-428
420 snoop interface gigabitethernet 17-429
421 spare-group 17-430
422 speed 17-432
423 streaming-zone 17-433
424 super-cas-id 17-434
425 systat 17-435
426 tacacs host 17-436
D5 UEQ
427 tacacs key 17-437
428 tacacs source-address 17-438
429 tacacs timeout 17-439
430 tcp port 17-440
431 terminal length 17-441
432 terminal monitor 17-442
433 terminal pagination 17-443
434 terminal timeout 17-444
435 terminal vt100-colours 17-445
436 terminal width 17-446
437 traceroute 17-447
438 trip connection-retry-timeout 17-448
439 trip hold-time 17-449
440 trip port 17-450
441 trip redundancy attempts 17-451
442 udp port 17-452
443 undebug snmp 17-453
444 version 17-454
445 video 17-455
446 video alarm qam-utilization-threshold 17-456
447 video annex 17-457
448 video ca-descriptor 17-458
449 video channel-container 17-459
450 video cw-conformance 17-460
451 video cycle-output-pids 17-461
452 video cypher-mode 17-462
453 video default-mapping-scheme udp 17-463
454 video default-mapping-scheme udp-legacy 17-464
455 video default-pid-mapping program-base * count * pid-count * 17-465
456 video dest-ip 17-466
457 video disconnect sessions qam 17-467
458 video disconnect sessions udp 17-468
459 video ecmg 17-469
460 video eis 17-470
461 video emmg 17-471
462 video emulation-mode bitwise 17-472
463 video encryption-policy-strict 17-473
464 video erm 17-474
465 video es-type pmt-reordering 17-475
466 video fast-psi-updates 17-476
467 video filter-descriptor ca-desc 17-477
468 video filter-pid 17-478
469 video filter-program 17-479
470 video format 17-480
471 video frequency 17-481
472 video generate-cc 17-482
473 video generate-psi 17-483
474 video generate-si 17-484
475 video ghost-pid 17-485
476 video interleave level 17-486
477 video interleave mode 17-487
478 video interval 17-488
479 video jitter-depth 17-489
480 video max-stream 17-490
481 video network-id 17-491
482 video network-name 17-492
483 video nit-pid 17-493
484 video original-network-id 17-494
485 video over-subscription margin 17-495
486 video over-subscription program 17-496
487 video over-subscription recovery 17-497
488 video pass-through mpts 17-498
489 video pcr-drift-correction 17-499
490 video power 17-500
491 video program-conflict ignore-source-ip 17-501
492 video psig 17-502
493 video redundancy-group 17-503
494 video redundant-stream 17-504
495 video redundant-stream-group 17-505
496 video remap-pid 17-506
497 video reserve-dvb-pids 17-507
498 video reserve-pid 17-508
D5 UEQ
499 video revert-staticgroup 17-509
500 video scg 17-510
501 video scg-close-cleanup 17-511
502 video scg-loss-cleanup 17-512
503 video scs-id 17-513
504 video sdv alt-wildcard-prog 17-514
505 video sdv enhanced-bw-checking 17-515
506 video sdv interface gigabitethernet 17-516
507 video sdv policy-active 17-517
508 video sdv policy-load-balance forced 17-518
509 video sdv rpc 17-519
510 video sdv rpc qam-model 17-520
511 video sdv session 17-521
512 video sdv session setup-policy 17-522
513 video sdv session-timeout 17-523
514 video sdv source-timeout 17-524
515 video sdv video-pid-detect 17-525
516 video serving-group 17-526
517 video snoop qam * post-mux ip 17-528
518 video snoop tos 17-529
519 video snoop tsid * post-mux ip 17-530
520 video snoop vlan-priority 17-531
521 video spectral-inversion 17-532
522 video src-ip 17-533
523 video symbol-rate 17-534
524 video timeout 17-535
525 video tsid 17-536
526 video tsid-duplication 17-537
527 video udp 17-538
528 video video-si-stream ghost-pid 17-540
529 virtual-interface 17-541
530 write 17-543
18. System Monitoring
Topics Page
I ntroduction 1
How Event Messages are Generated 2
How Event Messages are Routed 2
Event Management Subsystems 3
Support for Alarms 4
Event Management CLI 4
About Centralized Management 7
SNMP MIBs Used for Monitoring 7
MI B Overview 8
SNMP Traps and Notifications 11
I ntroduction
In order to provide maintenance personnel with real-time and historical
operational state data, the D5 UEQ must proactively monitor and route
event messages. Operators can use several CLI commands to access event
messages. This chapter first describes the logging mechanisms and then
commands used to generate, filter, and collect these important status
messages.
How Event Messages are Generated
The D5 UEQ generates asynchronous event messages, or events, in two
ways: as part of normal operations and in response to error conditions.
Network management personnel can define and route event messages to
several management subsystems. These subsystems include:
One or more Syslog servers
One or more SNMP management stations
The local log: volatile and non-volatile (also found in the docsDe-
vEventTable MIB table)
The D5 UEQ console
Zero or more Telnet sessions
Other logging functionality can be managed through the DOCS-CABLEDE-
VICE-MIB
Each of these management subsystems is described later in this chapter.
How Event Messages are Routed
Event messages are routed according to their priority values. They are
logged and subsequently used during system maintenance or network
troubleshooting activities.
All events carrying a routable priority are also stored in the volatile logging
history buffer.
Priority-based Event Routing
Each event is assigned an event priority. The event priority indicates the
type and impact of the event on the D5 UEQ operations.
Value Name
1 Emergency
2 Alert
3 Critical
Event Management Subsystems
Syslog Syslog is a standard protocol for centralized reporting of system events.
Its roots are in the Unix environment but most modern devices use the
Syslog protocol to report important events, operating parameters and
even debug messages. A Syslog message has a priority ranging from
emergency up to debug, a header which includes a timestamp, an IP
address and message text in ASCII format.
SNMP Traps The Simple Network Management Protocol Management station is an
application that uses SNMP protocol to manage a device. The SNMP
Management station receives and processes traps (also known as events)
originating from the D5 UEQ. Traps are useful for reducing the length of
time between when an event occurs and when it is noticed by a manager.
Events are routed first according to their priority, then they are under
throttle control before arriving at the SNMP Management Station.
Local Log The D5 UEQ has a local log buffer that contains the most recent events
generated by the system. The log buffer can be controlled via CLI
commands, MIB or Web Manager.
Local Log (non-volatile) The non-volatile log events are stored in
persistent storage (compact flash) physically located on the MON card. On
startup, the D5 UEQ reads the contents of the non-volatile log into the
volatile buffer.
Local Log (volatile) The volatile log stores messages in RAM on the
WAN card and can be viewed via CLI, SNMP and Web Manager. The CLI
command is show logging history.
Console Management access via the Serial Console Port directly on the D5 UEQ.
Logged events can be displayed as they occur.
CLI Management access via a telnet session. Events are seen only by the telnet
session (monitor) that requested them via the terminal monitor
command.
4 Error
5 Warning
6 Notice
7 Informational
8 Debug
Value Name
Support for Alarms
Alarms are persistent indications of faults in the system and can be raised
when a fault occurs. Alarms are auto-clearing. For example, if the fault is
resolved, then the alarm is cleared automatically. Alarms are non-volatile
and do not persist across D5 UEQ reboots.
show logging alarm The show logging alarm command provides a mechanism to list the
currently active alarms on the D5 UEQ. To see which alarms have been
cleared, use the show logging alarm cleared command.
logging alarm clear When the operator has an occasion to manually clear an active alarm,
there are two commands available. To clear all active alarms, use the
logging alarm clear all. Or, to manually clear an individual active
alarm, use the logging alarm clear <alarmId> command.
logging override event To customize or reclassify the severity of an individual existing event, use
the logging override event command. This will allow an operator to
fine tune the logging and transmission of events to remote syslog servers.
It will allow a specific event to be given a much higher individual severity
if it is of particular interest and not visible at the desired logging configu-
ration or a lower severity if it is being logged too frequently.
(config)# logging override event [eventId]
[inhibit|severity] {severity-value}
Event Management CLI
Displaying Logging Information
show logging The show logging command displays all event management subsys-
tems and features available for logging configuration on the D5 UEQ. See
the example output below for this command.
D5#show logging
Loggi ng: enabl ed
Sysl og l oggi ng: di sabl ed
Consol e l oggi ng: di sabl ed
Moni t or l oggi ng: di sabl ed
Loggi ng Thr ot t l i ng Cont r ol : unconst r ai ned
Event Repor t i ng Cont r ol :
Event Local - l og Tr ap Sysl og Local - l og
Pr i or i t y Non- vol at i l e Vol at i l e
1( emer genci es) yes yes yes yes
2( al er t s) yes yes yes yes
3( cr i t i cal ) yes yes yes yes
4( er r or s) yes yes yes yes
5( war ni ngs) yes yes yes yes
6( not i f i cat i ons) yes yes yes yes
7( i nf or mat i onal ) no no no no
8( debuggi ng) no no no no
Log Buf f er : 300 l i nes
Displaying Logging History
show logging history The show logging history command displays system status events.
D5#show logging history
J UN 07 11: 07: 50: %CARDMGR- 6- ENTCHG: CARDMGR: WAN 7 car d oper at i onal st at e/ sub- st at e changed t o I S
J UN 07 11: 07: 50: %CARDMGR- 7- ENTCHG: CARDMGR: Car d i nser t i on event
J UN 07 11: 07: 50: %CARDMGR- 6- I NSERT: CARDMGR: MON0 was i nser t ed ( 2 l ogged)
J UN 07 11: 07: 50: %CARDMGR- 6- ENTCHG: CARDMGR: MON 0 car d oper at i onal st at e/ sub- st at e changed t o I S
J UN 07 11: 07: 50: %CARDMGR- 6- I NSERT: CARDMGR: QAM3 was i nser t ed ( 2 l ogged)
J UN 07 11: 07: 50: %QAMMGR- 8- CARDI NI T: QAM Mgr : I ni t i al i zi ng QAM2
J UN 07 11: 07: 50: %CARDMGR- 6- I NSERT: CARDMGR: PCCARD17 was i nser t ed ( 5 l ogged)
J UN 07 11: 07: 51: %GE_PORT- 8- LI NKUP: Gi gabi t Et her net Por t 15 Li nkup
J UN 07 11: 07: 57: %CARDMGR- 6- ENTCHG: CARDMGR: QAM 2 car d oper at i onal st at e/ sub- st at e changed t o I S ( 2
l ogged)
J UN 07 11: 07: 57: %QAMMGR- 8- CARDREADY: QAM Mgr : QAM2 i s enabl ed and r eady f or use
J UN 07 11: 07: 58: %QAMMGR- 8- CARDI NI T: QAM Mgr : I ni t i al i zi ng QAM3
J UN 07 11: 07: 59: %GE_PORT- 8- LI NKUP: Gi gabi t Et her net Por t 17 Li nkup
J UN 07 11: 07: 59: %CARDMGR- 6- ENTCHG: CARDMGR: QAM3 car d oper at i onal st at e/ sub- st at e changed t o OOS I NI T
J UN 07 11: 08: 00: %CARDMGR- 7- ENTCHG: CARDMGR: Mul t i pl e car d conf i gur at i on l ogs t hr ot t l ed
J UN 07 11: 08: 05: %CARDMGR- 6- ENTCHG: CARDMGR: QAM 3 car d oper at i onal st at e/ sub- st at e changed t o I S
J UN 07 11: 08: 05: %QAMMGR- 8- CARDREADY: QAM Mgr : QAM3 i s enabl ed and r eady f or use
D5#
show logging history detail By adding the optional detail parameter, additional information available
with each individual event log will be displayed.
show logging history detail
Fi r st Occur ed: Last Occur ed: Count <Event I d> Ar ea- Sev- Mnemoni c: Event Descr i pt i on
- - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - -
APR 14 14: 02: 49: APR 14 14: 02: 49: 1 <2417168149> %REBOOT- 1- NOW: Reboot now ( user i s ' conf i gur e' , i p
i s ' 10. 17. 42. 10' , r eason i s ' none' )
APR 14 14: 05: 12: APR 14 14: 05: 12: 1 <2417176583> %NTP- 6- SET_TI MEZONE: NTP: set t i ng t i mezone t o UTC
( 0: 00 f r omUTC)
APR 14 14: 05: 12: APR 14 14: 05: 12: 1 <2417177440>%I P_BUNDLE- 6- CREATE: Por t GI G- 3 - has been conf i gur ed
as a spar e por t
APR 14 14: 05: 12: APR 14 14: 05: 12: 1 <2417165329> %QAMMGR- 6- DEBUG: QAM Mgr : QAM3 Admi n- > Di sabl ed
Oper - > Not Pr esent not i f yCar dSt at e ADMI NCHANGE
APR 14 14: 05: 13: APR 14 14: 05: 13: 1 <2417166858>%CARDMGR- 6- I NI TI ALI ZE: CARDMGR: WAN7 car d oper at i onal
st at e/ sub- st at e i ni t i al i zed t o OOS- I NI T
APR 14 14: 05: 22: APR 14 14: 05: 22: 1 <2417168483> %P. O. S. T- 5- SKI P: P. O. S. T: CLK_PLL : SKI PPED
APR 14 14: 05: 22: APR 14 14: 05: 22: 1 <2417168487> %P. O. S. T- 5- SKI P: P. O. S. T: 5690 : SKI PPED
APR 14 14: 05: 22: APR 14 14: 05: 22: 1 <2417168490> %P. O. S. T- 5- SKI P: P. O. S. T: HI GI G : SKI PPED
APR 14 14: 05: 22: APR 14 14: 05: 22: 1 <2417168495> %P. O. S. T- 5- SKI P: P. O. S. T: I 2C BUS 0 devi ce di scover
: SKI PPED
APR 14 14: 05: 22: APR 14 14: 05: 22: 1 <2417168513> %P. O. S. T- 5- SKI P: P. O. S. T: sf p l oopback : SKI PPED
APR 14 14: 05: 22: APR 14 14: 05: 22: 1 <2417166851> %CARDMGR- 6- OPER: CARDMGR: WAN 7 car d oper at i onal
st at e/ sub- st at e changed t o I S
APR 14 14: 05: 22: APR 14 14: 05: 22: 1 <2417166858>%CARDMGR- 6- I NI TI ALI ZE: CARDMGR: MON0 car d oper at i onal
st at e/ sub- st at e i ni t i al i zed t o I S
APR 14 14: 05: 22: APR 14 14: 05: 22: 1 <2417166858> %CARDMGR- 6- I NI TI ALI ZE: CARDMGR: PMOD9 car d
oper at i onal st at e/ sub- st at e i ni t i al i zed t o I S
APR 14 14: 05: 22: APR 14 14: 05: 22: 1 <2417166858>%CARDMGR- 6- I NI TI ALI ZE: CARDMGR: QAM1 car d oper at i onal
st at e/ sub- st at e i ni t i al i zed t o OOS- MAN
APR 14 14: 05: 22: APR 14 14: 05: 22: 1 <2417166858>%CARDMGR- 6- I NI TI ALI ZE: CARDMGR: QAM2 car d oper at i onal
st at e/ sub- st at e i ni t i al i zed t o OOS- MAN
APR 14 14: 05: 22: APR 14 14: 05: 22: 1 <2417166858> %CARDMGR- 6- I NI TI ALI ZE: CARDMGR: FAN11 car d
APR 14 14: 05: 22: APR 14 14: 05: 22: 1 <2417166858>%CARDMGR- 6- I NI TI ALI ZE: CARDMGR: PSU1 car d oper at i onal
st at e/ sub- st at e i ni t i al i zed t o I S
APR 14 14: 05: 22: APR 14 14: 05: 22: 1 <2417166857> %CARDMGR- 3- ABSENT: CARDMGR: PSU 2 not pr esent
APR 14 14: 05: 22: APR 14 14: 05: 22: 1 <2417166858> %CARDMGR- 6- I NI TI ALI ZE: CARDMGR: CHASSI S15 car d
APR 14 14: 05: 22: APR 14 14: 05: 22: 1 <2417166858> %CARDMGR- 6- I NI TI ALI ZE: CARDMGR: FPD16 car d
APR 14 14: 05: 22: APR 14 14: 05: 22: 1 <2417166858> %CARDMGR- 6- I NI TI ALI ZE: CARDMGR: PCCARD17 car d
APR 14 14: 05: 22: APR 14 14: 05: 22: 1 <2417165329> %QAMMGR- 6- DEBUG: QAMMgr : QAM1 Admi n- > Enabl ed Oper -
> Unknown not i f y
About Centralized Management
The D5 UEQ uses a centralized management scheme. In centralized
management, the WAN card acts as a standalone SNMP agent. If you wish
to manage the D5 UEQ using SNMP, you must designate at least one inter-
face per card for management access. The MGT FastEthernet interface on
the WAN card is intended for system management access.
SNMP MIBs Used for Monitoring
The following MIB groups and tables may be useful for monitoring the
status of D5 UEQ components. This list is not exhaustive.
dcxSubI ntTableinformation and status of each configure sub-inter-
face.
docsDevEventTablethe local event log (see Local Log Buffer below
for more information).
dot3StatsTablelow-level Ethernet statistics.
ifTableper-interface status. In particular, see the ifAdminStatus and
ifOperStatus variables
MIB Overview
The following section lists the MIBs supported by the WAN agent.
ARRI S-C3-I F-MI B.myThis MIB manages the proprietary interface
table on the ARRIS D5 UEQ
ARRI S-C3-NTP-MI B.myManages the NTP software on the ARRIS
D5 UEQ
ARRI S-C3-SM-MI B.myManages the System Manager software on
the ARRIS D5 UEQ
ARRI S-C3-SUBI NT-MI B.myManages the SUB-Interface software
on the ARRIS D5 UEQ
ARRI S-D5-ALARM-MI B.myARRIS D5 UEQ QAM alarm MIB
ARRI S-D5-CHANNEL-MODE-LOG-MI B.myThis MIB contains
objects to monitor QAM channel mode changes on the D5 UEQ
ARRI S-D5-DTI -EXT-MI B.myThis MIB manages the DTI client
interface on the D5 UEQ
ARRI S-D5-DVB-EI S-MI B.myThis MIB contains objects related to
configured D5 UEQ video encryption configuration
ARRI S-D5-DVB-PSI G-MI B.myThis MIB manages the PSIG inter-
face software on the ARRIS D5 UEQ WAN
ARRI S-D5-ENT-CHASSI S-MI B.myThis is an extension to RFC
2737 ENTITY-MIB to support chassis management information.
ARRI S-D5-ENT-SENSOR-THRESH-MI B.myThis is an extension
module to RFC 3433 ENTITY-MIB.
ARRI S-D5-I P-MI B.myThis MIB manages the proprietary IP
configuration of the D5 UEQ
ARRIS-D5-LICENSE-MIB.myThis MIB contains objects to
configure and monitor licensing of features on the D5 UEQ
ARRI S-D5-QAM-EXT-MI B.myThis MIB contains objects related
to the D5 UEQ QAM card
ARRI S-D5-QAM-MI B.myARRIS D5 UEQ QAM Management MIB
ARRI S-D5-QAM-POST-MI B.myARRIS D5 UEQ QAM Manufac-
turing MIB
ARRI S-D5-SFP-MI B.myThis MIB contains objects related to the
D5 UEQ SFP modules
ARRI S-D5-SLOT-EXT-MI B.myThis MIB manages the slot assign-
ments on the D5 UEQ
ARRI S-D5-SOFTWARE-MGR-MI B.myThis MIB manages the
software on the D5 UEQ products
ARRI S-D5-TEST-MI B.myThis MIB returns a table of test results
that have been run on the D5-UEQ QAM. It reports general pass or fail
test results as well as test specific result information. It also allows for
tests to be configured and run to support diagnostics and the manu-
facturing process.
ARRI S-D5-VI DEO-ERM-MI B.myThis MIB manages the ERM
software on the D5 UEQ
ARRI S-D5-VI DEO-I P-BUNDLE-MI B.myThis MIB manages the
IP-bundles on the D5 UEQ
ARRI S-D5-VI DEO-MI B.myThis MIB manages the MPEG/VIDEO
software on the D5 UEQ
ARRIS-D5-VI DEO-SESSION-MIB.myThis MIB contains objects
to display video sessions and control switched digital video RPC on the
D5 UEQ
ARRI S-D5-VI DEO-VI F-MI B.myThis MIB manages the virtual-
interfaces on the D5 UEQ
ARRI S-D5-WAN-POST-MI B.myThis MIB reports POST results on
the D5 UEQ WAN card
ARRI S-MI B.myThis is a header for the ARRIS enterprise MIB. All
objects appear elsewhere
ARRI S-TACACS-CLI ENT-MI B.myIn cmtsC3TacacsServerEntry
table, replaced round trip time with server unreachables count
BRI DGE-MI B.mybridge configuration and management
CADANT-PRODUCTS-MI B.myContains object identifiers of
Cadant products
CADANT-TC-MI B.myThis MIB modules contains textual conven-
tions that are shared among two or more Cadant MIBs
CLAB-DEF-MI B.myThis MIB module supplies the basic manage-
ment object categories for CableLabs
DOCS-CABLE-DEVI CE-MI B.myThis MIB module is for MCNS-
compliant cable modems and cable-modem termination systems
DOCS-CABLE-DEVI CE-TRAP-MI B.myThis MIB is an extension
of the CABLE-DEVICE-MIB defined in RFC 2669. It defines various trap
objects for both cable modem and cable modem termination systems.
DOCS-DTI -MI B.myThis MIB module provides the management
objects necessary to configure and manage the DOCSIS Timing Inter-
face devices
DOCS-I F-M-CMTS-MI B.myThis MIB module contains the
management objects for the configuration and management of the
External PHY interface (DEPI) of the M-CMTS architecture (Modular
CMTS)
DOCS-I F-MI B.myMIB module for DOCSIS 2.0 compliant Radio
Frequency interfaces in Cable Modems and Cable Modem Termination
Systems.
DOCS-QOS-MI B.myThis is the management information for
Quality of Service (QOS) for DOCSIS 1.1
ENTI TY-MI B.myMIB module for representing multiple logical enti-
ties supported by a single SNMP agent
ENTITY-SENSOR-MI B.myextensions to the ENTITY-MIB for
physical sensors (part of RFC 3433)
EtherLike-MI B.myMIB module to describe generic objects for
Ethernet-like network interfaces
I ANAifType-MI B.myThis MIB module defines the IANAifType
Textual Convention, and thus the enumerated values of the ifType
object defined in MIB-II's ifTable.
I F-MI B.mygeneric objects for network interface sub-layers
IGMP-STD-MIB.myMIB module for IGMP management
INET-ADDRESS-MI B.myThis MIB module defines textual conven-
tions for representing Internet addresses. An Internet address can be
an IPv4 address, an IPv6 address or a DNS domain name. This module
also defines textual conventions for Internet port numbers, autono-
mous system numbers and the length of an Internet address prefix
IP-MI B.myThe MIB module for managing IP and ICMP implemen-
tations, but excluding their management of IP routes.
P-BRI DGE-MI B.myThe Bridge MIB Extension module for
managing Priority and Multicast Filtering, defined by IEEE 802.1D-
1998
Q-BRI DGE-MI B.myThe VLAN Bridge MIB module for managing
Virtual Bridged Local Area Networks, as defined by IEEE 802.1Q-1998
RMON-MI B.myRemote network monitoring devices, often called
monitors or probes, are instruments that exist for the purpose of
managing a network. This MIB defines objects for managing remote
network monitoring devices
RMON2-MI B.myThe MIB module for managing remote monitoring
device implementations. This MIB module augments the original
RMON MIB as specified in RFC 1757
SI M-MI B.myDefines DVB Simulcrypt Conditional Access system
configuration information
TCP-MI B.myobjects for TCP implementation
TOKEN-RING-RMON-MI B.mya collection of Mac-Layer statistics
kept for a particular Token Ring interface
UDP-MI B.myobjects for UDP implementation
d5DepiMib.myThis MIB manages the global control-plane config-
uration settings
d5RedundantMulticadtStreamMib.myThis MIB contains
objects to control the D5 UEQ Redundant Multicast Stream Feature
SNMP Traps and Notifications
All SNMP managers can handle traps. SNMPv2 and later managers can
handle both traps and notifications.
Common Notifications The following notifications may be sent by the WAN card. This list is not
exhaustive.
alarmNotification
An alarmable event was generated.
Objects sent: docsDevEvLevel, docsDevEvId, docsDevEvText
entConfigChange
The value of entLastChangeTime changed. It can be utilized by an
NMS to trigger logical/physical entity table maintenance polls.
linkDown
The SNMPv2 entity, acting in an agent role, has detected that the ifOp-
erStatus object for one of its communication links is about to enter the
down state from some other state (but not from the notPresent state).
This other state is indicated by the included value of ifOperStatus.
Objects sent: ifIndex, ifAdminStatus, ifOperStatus
linkUp
The SNMPv2 entity, acting in an agent role, has detected that the ifOp-
erStatus object for one of its communication links left the down state
and transitioned into some other state (but not into the notPresent
state). This other state is indicated by the included value of ifOper-
Status.
Objects sent: ifIndex, ifAdminStatus, ifOperStatus
Environmental Monitor
Traps
d5EnvMonAlarmOffTrap
An environmental monitor alarm has been cleared.
Objects sent: docsDevEvLevel, docsDevEvId, docsDevEvText, ent-
PhysicalIndex, entPhysicalContainedIn
d5EnvMonFanErrorTrap
An environmental monitor fan error is detected.
PhysicalIndex, entPhysicalContainedIn, entPhySensorValue
d5EnvMonFanWarningTrap
An environmental monitor fan warning is detected.
d5EnvMonVoltErrorTrap
An environmental monitor voltage error is detected.
d5EnvMonTempErrorTrap
An environmental monitor temperature error is detected.
d5EnvMonTempWarningTrap
An environmental monitor temperature warning is detected.
d5EnvMonPsuErrorTrap
An environmental monitor PSU error is detected.
d5EnvMonPsuWarningTrap
An environmental monitor PSU warning is detected.
d5EnvMonSysFatalTrap
An environmental monitor system error event is detected.
d5EnvMonSysRecoverTrap
The system has recovered from an environmental monitor event.
MPEG Management Traps d5MpegMgtProgErrorTrap
An MPEG Management program error is detected.
Objects sent: docsDevEvLevel, docsDevEvId, docsDevEvText,
d5vIpSrcIndex, d5vIpDestIndex, d5vIpUdpIndex, d5QamIndex,
d5vStreamProgIndex
d5MpegMgtProgPidErrorTrap
An MPEG Management program pid error is detected.
d5vStreamProgIndex
d5MpegMgtProgOversubsTrap
An MPEG Management program oversubscription event is detected.
d5vStreamProgIndex
d5MpegMgtProgStartTrap
An MPEG Management program start event is detected.
d5vStreamProgIndex
d5MpegMgtProgStopTrap
An MPEG Management program stop event is detected.
d5vStreamProgIndex
d5MpegMgtProgErrorTrap
An MPEG Management program error is detected.
d5vStreamProgIndex
d5MpegMgtQamErrorTrap
An MPEG Management QAM error event is detected.
d5StreamMax
d5MpegMgtQamOversubsTrap
An MPEG Management QAM oversubscription event is detected.
d5QamIndex, d5QamBandwidth, d5QamBandwidthActual
d5MpegMgtQamOversubsFilterTrap
An MPEG Management QAM oversubscription filter event is detected.
d5vStreamProgIndex
d5MpegMgtQamOversubsRecoveryTrap
The system has recovered from a QAM oversubscription event.
Objects sent: docsDevEvLevel, docsDevEvId, d5QamIndex,
d5QamBandwidth, d5QamBandwidthActual
d5MpegMgtSessStartTrap
Video has started for this session.
Objects sent: docsDevEvLevel, docsDevEvId, d5vIpSrcIndex,
d5vIpDestIndex, d5vIpUdpIndex
d5MpegMgtSessStopTrap
All video streams for this session have stopped.
d5MpegMgtTableErrorTrap
An MPEG Management error is detected.
d5MpegMgtProgUnderflowTrap
An underflow is detected in an MPEG jitter buffer.
Objects sent: docsDevEvLevel, docsDevEvId, docsDevEvText, alar-
mAsserted, d5vIpSrcIndex, d5vIpDestIndex, d5vIpUdpIndex,
d5QamIndex, d5vStreamProgIndex
d5MpegMgtProgOverflowTrap
An overflow is detected in an MPEG jitter buffer.
mAsserted, d5vStreamProgIndex
Session Management Traps d5SessMgtConnectTrap
A Session Management connect event is detected.
d5SessMgtDisconnectTrap
A Session Management disconnect event is detected.
mAsserted
d5SessMgtGenErrorTrap
A Session Management error event is detected.
d5SessMgtI gmpErrorTrap
A Session Management IGMP error event is detected.
d5SessMgtMsgI nfoTrap
A Session Management info event is detected.
Objects sent:docsDevEvLevel, docsDevEvId, docsDevEvText
d5SessMgtProgOversubsTrap
A Session Management program oversubscription event is detected.
Objects sent: docsDevEvLevel, docsDevEvId, docsDevEvText,alar-
d5SessionId, d5QamIndex, d5ProvisionedBandwidth,
d5ActualBandwidth
d5SessMgtQamOversubsTrap
A Session Management QAM oversubscription event is detected.
mAsserted
d5SessMgtSessGroupOversubsTrap
A Session Management connect group oversubscription event is
detected.
Objects sent: alarmIndex, alarmVariable, alarmSampleType, alarm-
Value, alarmRisingThreshold
d5SessMgtQamErrorTrap
A Session Management QAM error event is detected.
d5SessMgtSessI nfoTrap
A Session Management info event is detected.
d5SessionId
d5SessMgtSessErrorTrap
A Session Management error event is detected.
d5SessionId
d5SessMgtSessGroupErrorTrap
A Session Management group error event is detected.
d5SessionId, d5QamIndex
d5SessMgtShutdownTrap
A Session Management shutdown event is detected.
mAsserted, d5ShutdownReason
d5SessMgtStartupTrap
A Session Management startup event is detected.
d5SessMgtTimeoutResetTrap
A Session Management timeout reset event is detected.
d5SessMgtStreamUnavailTrap
Detects that a stream is not available.
d5SessionId
d5SessMgtStreamLostTrap
Detects that a stream is no longer available.
d5SessionId, d5QamIndex, d5vStreamProgIndex
DVB Simulcrypt Traps d5CasEcmgErrorTrap
A DVB ECMG PSIG error is detected.
d5CasEisErrorTrap
A DVB CAS EIS error is detected.
d5CasEmmgErrorTrap
A DVB CAS EMMG error is detected.
d5CasPsigErrorTrap
A DVB CAS PSIG error is detected.
Miscellaneous d5SystemRebootTrap
A D5 reboot event is detected.
d5TacacsErrorTrap
A TACACS error event is detected.
d5TacacsI nfoTrap
A TACACS info event is detected.
d5HardwareMismatchTrap
A hardware mismatch is detected.
d5DtiTrap
A DTI trap is detected.
Objects sent: docsDevEvLevl, docsDevEvld, docsDevEvText
19. Service Procedures
Topics Page
Removing Power Before Servicing 2
Front Panel Removal and Replacement 2
Replacing a Power Supply (PSU) 3
Power Converter Module I nstallation/ Replacement 4
Replacing Fuses 5
Fan Tray Replacement 7
Replacing Modules 9
MON Module Replacement 10
Compact Flash Card 14
This chapter discusses basic maintenance, replacement, and upgrading
tasks for the D5 UEQ.
Removing Power Before Servicing
Procedure 19-1 To disconnect power from the D5 UEQ for servicing:
1 Remove one or both power plugs (AC and/or DC) from the rear of the
chassis.
CAUTI ON
The D5 UEQ does not have a power switch.
End of procedure
Front Panel Removal and Replacement
Procedure 19-2 Remove/ Replace Front Panel
1 Locate the tabs on both sides of the D5 UEQ front panel.
Figure 19-1: Front Panel
2 Press the tabs simultaneously to release the latches and then pull the
faceplate away from the D5 UEQ. Removing the faceplate can be done
during normal system operation without any adverse impact.
3 To reinstall the faceplate, place it against the front of the D5 UEQ. Mate
the faceplate properly with the connectors on the front of the D5 UEQ.
4 Press the faceplate in firmly to latch it to the D5 UEQ.
End of procedure
Front Panel Release Tabs
Replacing a Power Supply (PSU)
The D5 UEQ can support two fully redundant, load sharing PSUs. A user
can also replace one PSU without powering down the D5 UEQ.
NOTE
If only one PSU is installed and active, the D5 UEQ shuts down once that
PSU has been removed.
Figure 19-2: Power Supply Units 1 and 2 (AC or DC Power)
Procedure 19-3 Removing and replacing a power supply unit
1 Remove the front panel as described in Front Panel Removal and
Replacement, page 19-2.
2 Loosen the screw in each power supply latch.
3 Pull the supply toward the front of the D5 UEQ using the latches.
The power supply slides out of the chassis.
CAUTI ON
Do not touch the connection terminal on the back of the PSU for at least
one minute after the PSU is removed.
4 Line up the replacement power supply with the slot, then push the power
supply firmly into the slot.
5 Use the screws on each latch to secure the replacement power supply.
6 Replace front panel (Front Panel Removal and Replacement, page 19-2).
PSU 1 PSU 2
Power Converter Module I nstallation/ Replacement
The D5 UEQ Power Converter Modules (PMOD) are located on the far left
of the chassis. PMOD 1 is located behind the fan tray assembly bar. PMOD
2 is directly above PMOD 1. PMOD1 is accessed by taking off the front
panel, unscrewing the fan thumbscrew (PMOD1), releasing the fan latch,
pulling the fan tray unit out, then unscrewing 2 lock screws on the PMOD1
faceplate, depressing a thumb release and pulling the PMOD straight out.
For PMOD2 simply unscrew the two lock screws and pull out.
WARNI NG
Power down D5 UEQ prior to removing a PMOD. Removal of the PMOD
while the D5 UEQ is powered up will cause the DPM 4DX2 in Quad Mode
and the DPM 6DX2 in Hex Mode to go out of service. Removal of the
PMOD will have no impact on the QPM 8DX4; however, the system will
lose the ability to read the fan speeds.
Figure 19-3: PMOD 1 and 2
Figure 19-4: PMOD Thumb Lock and Lock Screws
PMOD 1 PMOD 2
PMOD Lock Screws
Thumb Locks
Procedure 19-4 Remove/ Replace PMOD 1
WARNI NG
The fan tray is removed during this process. If you do not power down
the D5 UEQ prior to removing the PMOD, then the following procedure
needs to be completed within a two minute timeframe or the system
may go into thermal shutdown.
2 Remove fan tray assembly as described in D5 UEQ Fan Tray Assembly,
page 19-7.
3 Remove two lock screws located on opposite sides of PMOD 1, in the front,
by turning counter-clockwise and depress the thumb lock by pushing to
the right.
End of procedure
Replacing Fuses
The D5 UEQ has two fuses located on the power connectors on the back
of the chassis.
Figure 19-5: Location of Fuses
Procedure 19-5 Replacing the D5 UEQ Fuses
1 Use a flathead screwdriver to push-in and turn fuse screw 1/4 turn counter
clockwise until fuse holder assembly mates with the release slot.
2 Remove the fuse holder assembly from chassis by pulling it straight out.
3 Replace fuse by pulling it from the fuse holder assembly and inserting new
fuse.
4 To return the fuse holder assembly to the D5 UEQ chassis, use a flathead
screwdriver to push-in, turn the fuse screw 1/4 turn clockwise until fuse
hold assembly locks into the chassis.
End of procedure
NOTE
If both fuses blow immediately, please call your next level of technical
support.
RF1
RF1
RF2
RF1
RF2
RF2
RF3
RF3
RF3
RF4
RF4
RF4
RF1
RF1
RF2
RF1
RF2
RF2
RF3
RF3
RF3
RF4
RF4
RF4
O O
S
P O
W E R
O
O S
PO W
ER
O
O S
P OW
ER
A
R
R
IS
A
R
R
I S
A
R
R
I S
D 5 Q
AM 8DX4
OOS
POW
ER
D5 Q AM
8DX
4
O O S
PO W
ER
D5 Q
AM 8DX 4
OOS
POWE
R
A
R
R
I S
A
R
R
I S
A
R
R
I
S
D5 QAM 8DX4
D5 QAM 8DX4
D5 QAM
8DX4
Rear of Chassis
Fuse 1 protects
PSU 1 100V -
250v\8A Fast
Acting (F)
Ceramic
Fuse 2 protects
PSU 2 100V -
250v\8A Fast
Acting (F)
Ceramic
Rear of Chassis
Fuse 2 protects
PSU 2 100V -
250v\8A Fast
Acting (F)
Ceramic
Fuse 1 protects
PSU 1 100V -
250v\8A Fast
Acting (F)
Ceramic
Fuse Requirements Replace F1 (AC fuse) only with: 250V/8A Fast Acting (F) Ceramic
(F8AH250V).
Replace F2 (AC fuse) only with: 250V/8A Fast Acting (F) Ceramic
(F8AH250V).
CAUTI ON
For continued protection against risk of fire, replace only with same type
and ratings of fuses.
Fan Tray Replacement
The D5 UEQ fan tray is located on the far left of the front chassis. It is
accessed by taking off the front panel, releasing a locking knob and pulling
the five-fan assembly tray straight out.
The fan tray can be removed while the D5 UEQ is running, as long as the
replacement fan tray is inserted within two minutes. If the fan tray is left
out for more than two minutes, the rising temperatures can cause the
PMOD to shut down.
CAUTI ON
If the PMOD shuts down due to a thermal event, power will be lost to the
DPM 4DX2 in Quad Mode and the DPM 6DX2 in Hex Mode, and the QAMs
will shut down. Although the D5 UEQ will remain powered-up and
accessible via telnet. all video transmission will cease. Removal of the
PMOD has no impact on the QPM 8DX4 module.
Figure 19-6: D5 UEQ Fan Tray Assembly
Fan Tray Assembly
CAUTI ON
Though it may not seem obvious, removing the fan tray is simply a matter
of pulling firmly on the fan tray assembly bar as described below. Resist
the urge to remove Phillips head screws because this can damage the D5
UEQ and plays no part in removing the fan tray assembly
Do not attempt to loosen any of these screws in an attempt to remove the
fan tray. Damage to the D5 UEQ may result.
Figure 19-7: Avoiding Damage to the D5 UEQ
Procedure 19-6 Replacing the Fan Tray
2 Turn the black locking latch located on the front of the fan tray counter-
clockwise. This latch rotates 90 degrees to unlock the fan tray, it does not
come out of the unit.
Figure 19-8: Fan Tray Locking Device
Do NOT Remove these Screws
Fan Tray Assembly
Black Locking Latch Silver Locking Latch
3 Loosen the silver locking latch, located on the front of the fan tray
assembly bar, counter-clockwise. This latch loosens to allow the technician
to disengage the fan tray assembly from the PMOD module. The silver
locking latch does not screw entirely out of the unit.
4 Grasp the Fan Tray assembly between your thumb and fore finger and
firmly pull the fan tray out.
5 The fan tray will unseat from the fan tray PMOD module.
6 Replace by reversing removal steps.
End of procedure
Replacing Modules
Procedure 19-7 Remove (WAN or, QAM) module from the D5 UEQ chassis.
1 Ground yourself properly with an ESD strap.
2 Unscrew card thumb latch and locking screw on either the WAN or QAM
module.
Figure 19-9: Removing WAN or QAM Modules
3 Release the thumb latch lock by applying pressure to the red PRESS
button on thumb latch.
4 Press thumb latch outward to unseat card.
5 Pull card straight out and remove from chassis.
End of procedure
RF1
RF1
RF2
RF1
RF2
RF2
RF3
RF3
RF3
RF4
RF4
RF4
RF1
RF1
RF2
RF1
RF2
RF2
RF3
RF3
RF3
RF4
RF4
RF4
O
O
S
P
O
W
E
R
O
O
S
P
O
W
E
R
O
O
S
P
O
W
E
R
A
R
R
I
S
A
R
R
I
S
A
R
R
I
S
D
5
Q
A
M
8
D
X
4
O
O
S
P
O
W
E
R
D
5
Q
A
M
8
D
X
4
O
O
S
P
O
W
E
R
D
5
Q
A
M
8
D
X
4
O
O
S
P
O
W
E
R
A
R
R
I
S
A
R
R
I
S
A
R
R
I
S
D
5 Q
A
M
8D
X
4
D
5 Q
A
M
8
D
X
4
D
5
Q
A
M
8
D
X
4
Red Press
Release Button
Thumb Latch
Locking Screw
MON Module Replacement
The D5 UEQ MON card is located on the far left of the chassis below the
PMOD 1. It is accessed by taking off the front panel, unscrewing the two
lock screws, depressing a thumb release, and pulling the card straight out.
Figure 19-10: MON Card and Locking Screw
Procedure 19-8 Remove/ Replace MON Module
2 Remove the two lock screws (located on opposite sides of the MON Card
in the front) by turning counter-clockwise and then depress the thumb lock
by pushing it to the right.
3 Line up the MON Card with the insertion guide tracks to reinstall it into the
D5 UEQ chassis. Push unit into place until it automatically seats and the
thumb lock clicks securely. Screw the lock screws back into their original
locations and secure them tightly.
4 Replace front panel as described in Front Panel Removal and Replacement,
page 19-2
End of procedure
Reconfiguring the MON to Boot from Image on Compact Flash
If you have replaced the MON in your system and it is not configured to
boot from the image on the compact flash card, use the following proce-
dure.
MON Module Lock Screws
Procedure 19-9 Post Replacement MON Configuration
1 Using the console cable that shipped with the D5 UEQ, connect the cable
from the serial interface on the D5 UEQ (the left-most RJ 45 receptacle on
the front panel) to an asynchronous terminal or a PC running terminal
emulation software. Configure the terminal session as follows:
Baud rate: 38400
Data bits: 8
Parity: None
Stop bits: 1
Flow Control: None
2 Once connected, hit return and you should see the following MON
bootloader menu
Main menu (User permission level)
1. Continue boot process
2. Show boot configuration
3. Show bootLoader info
4. Show CompactFlash
5. Enter configuration menu (Supervisor only)
6. Reboot
Choice :
3 If you are unsure what images are on the compact flash, select option 4
to have them listed.
Choice : 4
The following is an example of output from the D5 UEQ:
Fi l e Name Si ze
- - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - -
l ocal l og <di r >
cur r ent <di r >
backup <di r >
l ocal l og. ol d <di r >
2. 6. 0. 66. t r s 19858009
bkup. t r s 22889129
2. 5. 0. 73. t r s 19486756
4 To reconfigure the MON to boot from the image on the compact flash,
2.6.0.66.trs in the case of this example, select Option 5:
Mai n menu ( Super vi sor per mi ssi on l evel )
1. Cont i nue boot pr ocess
2. Show boot conf i gur at i on
3. Show boot Loader i nf o
4. Show Compact Fl ash
5. Ent er conf i gur at i on menu
6. Reboot
Choi ce : 5
No super vi sor l evel passwor d set
Super vi sor per mi ssi on enabl ed
Pr ess a key . . . <hit return>
5 The Configuration Menu will be displayed and you should choose Option 1
Conf i gur at i on menu ( Super vi sor per mi ssi on l evel )
1. Change boot conf i gur at i on
2. Set I P addr ess of Test por t
3. Change passwor d
4. Upgr ade f i r mwar e
5. Ent er Shel l
0. Exi t
Choi ce : 1 <hit return>
6 This will bring up the boot configuration menu. Choose Option 1.
Boot conf i gur at i on menu ( Super vi sor per mi ssi on l evel )
1. Boot f r omCompact Fl ash
2. Boot f r omTest por t
0. Exi t
Choi ce : 1
Fi l ename : 2.6.0.66.trs <enter an image name that
resides on compact flash)
Pr ess any key. . . <hit return>
7 To exit from the Boot Configuration menu, choose Option 0.
Boot conf i gur at i on menu ( Super vi sor per mi ssi on l evel )
1. Boot f r omCompact Fl ash
2. Boot f r omTest por t
0. Exi t
Choi ce : 0
8 To exit from the Configuration menu, choose Option 0.
Conf i gur at i on menu ( Super vi sor per mi ssi on l evel )
1. Change boot conf i gur at i on
2. Set I P addr ess of Test por t
3. Change passwor d
4. Upgr ade f i r mwar e
5. Ent er Shel l
0. Exi t
Choi ce : 0
9 You will be prompted to save these modifications. Enter Y for yes.
Do you want t o save modi f i cat i ons ? ( Y/ N) ? Y
Modi f i cat i on saved.
10 To complete the change, select Option 6 at the Main menu. The D5 UEQ
will now reboot the MON.
Mai n menu ( Super vi sor per mi ssi on l evel )
1. Cont i nue boot pr ocess
3. Show boot Loader i nf o
5. Ent er conf i gur at i on menu
6. Reboot
Choi ce : 6 <the D5 UEQ will reboot
the MON>
End of procedure
Compact Flash Card
The D5 UEQ Compact Flash card slot is located on the far left of the chassis
on the MON Module. It is accessed by taking off the front panel.
To install the Compact Flash card make sure the Compact Flash card
release button is fully extended when the Compact Flash card is seated.
Figure 19-11: Compact Flash Card
Procedure 19-10 Installing the Compact Flash Card:
1 Remove the front panel as described in the Front Panel Removal and
2 Carefully align the Compact Flash card up along the guide tracks and push
it into the slot until it seats. Make sure the Compact Flash card release
button to the right of the card slot is fully extended. The Compact Flash
card is then securely installed.
Compact Flash
Card
3 Replace the front panel as described in Front Panel Removal and
End of procedure
Procedure 19-11 Removing the Compact Flash Card
CAUTI ON
Compact Flash Card Pops Out Quickly! Depressing the Compact Card
Release button may cause the card to exit the slot quickly.
2 Press the Compact Flash card release button to remove the card.
Figure 19-12: Compact Flash Release Button
3 Replace front panel as described in Front Panel Removal and Replacement,
page 19-2.
End of procedure
Files on the Compact Flash The configuration files are stored in the /backup directory on the
compact flash. This directory is mirrored onto the MON. When executing
the dir command, the output is from the mirror image, not the /backup
directory. The D5 UEQ will compare the contents of the mirror image with
the contents of the /backup directory every ten minutes. If there are any
differences, then the mirror will overwrite the /backup directory.
Compact Flash
Card Release Button
Procedure 19-12 To load a saved configuration from the compact flash to the D5
UEQ, follow these steps:
1 Copy the saved configuration to the root directory on the compact flash.
In this example, we will call the file Test. If the file is on the root
directory, then it wont be overwritten.
2 Insert the compact flash into the MON Module.
3 Execute dir /system. The output will list Test.
4 To load the configuration onto the D5 UEQ, execute copy
/system/Test running-configuration
End of procedure
The D5 UEQ will load the configuration straight into its running-configura-
tion and will adopt the commands. It can take a few minutes for the QAMs
to load.
Release 3.0.1 ARRIS PROPRIETARY All Rights Reserved A-1
A. D5 UEQ Event Logs
Event Logs
The following table lists the attributes of each event as well as impact,
cause, and suggested resolutions.
Here is a brief explanation of the color coding used in the table below:
The green/yellow is an aid for ease of reading. It simply divides the
blocks of events into functional groups (e.g. there are about thirty
events in the function group of MON over-voltage warnings that share
the same trap).
The red means that the event is an alarm (and not a simple trap) and
that it was a condition that was asserted and later cleared.
NOTE
In the table below, the Action column could specify either Alarm, Clear,
Clear & Log, Log-Only or Discard. Valid comments in the Severity (or
Alarm to Clear) column could contain Critical, Major, Minor, the Alarm
to Clear, or n/ a (if Log-only or Ignore). The varBind(s) column shows
the value in hex and the decimal equivalent in brackets [].
Trap Name varBind(s) Action Severity
Alarm
Title
Symptoms Probable Cause
Recommended
Action
linkDown ifIndex Alarm Major
The communication
link is down
Communication Link is
down for one of its
interfaces
Cable has been
disconnected.
Remote device has been
powered off.
Verify that the cable is firmly
plugged into the port and is not
damaged.
Verify that the remote device
connected to the port is running.
linkUp ifIndex Clear linkDown n/a n/a n/a n/a
warmStart n/a Clear
D5 Reboot
Trap
n/a D5 has rebooted
The system was reset or a
reboot command was
issued.
If this reboot was unexpected, then
the power supply to the D5 chassis
needs to be checked.
A-2 ARRIS PROPRIETARY All Rights Reserved J uly 22, 2010
A D5 UEQ Event Logs
coldStart n/a Alarm Critical D5 Reboot Trap D5 has rebooted
The system was power
cycled or experienced a
power failure
If this reboot was unexpected then
the power supply to the D5 chassis
needs to be checked.
entConfig
Change
n/a Alarm Major
D5 Hardware
Configuration Trap
D5 Hardware
configuration has
changed in some way
Cards may have been
inserted or removed from
the system or a card may
have been shutdown or
enabled.
If a hardware configuration change
has not been expected, the chassis
should be examined to ensure all
cards are correctly seated, etc.
d5QamSpare
GroupFailOver
n/a Alarm Major
D5 QAM Spare
Group Notification
Trap
Momentary interruption
of video services while
the D5 switches over to
spare QAM card.
An operational QAM card
has failed and is being
replaced by a spare one.
The failed QAM card needs to be
examined and possibly replaced.
d5Qam Spare
GroupFailBack
n/a Clear
D5 QAM
Spare Group
Notification
Trap
n/a
Momentary interruption
of video services while
the D5 switches back
from spare to primary
QAM card.
The original failed QAM
card is now operational
again and is being brought
back into service.
n/a
alarmNotification
0x90130323 -
[2417165091]
MPEGMGR_1_
PASSTHRU
Alarm Minor D5 Pass-thru Alarm None
MPTS pass-thru is in use
and the D5 has detected a
significant change in PCR
values with a discontinuity
or the PID line-up has
changed.
This is not an issue if it occurs
occasionally but could indicate a
problem with the incoming MPTS if
it occurs continuously in an MPTS.
There should not be logs of PID
lineup changes or PCR
discontinuities.
alarmNotification
0x90130324 -
[2417165092]
MPEGMGR_2_
PASSTHRU
Clear
D5 Pass-thru
Alarm
N/A N/A N/A N/A
alarmNotification
0x90130402 -
[2417165314]Q
AMMGR_QAM
FAIL
Alarm Critical
D5 QAM
Initialization Trap
The QAM card in
question does not
become operational.
A failure has been detected
on an operational QAM card
due to failure of RF power
or loss of communications.
If operating QAM redundancy, the
card will be replaced by a spare,
otherwise it may need to be
replaced physically.
alarmNotification
0x90130403 -
[2417165315]Q
AMMGR_
FPGAFAILED
Alarm Critical
D5 QAM
Initialization Trap
The QAM card in
question does not
become operational.
The QAM card has failed to
program its FPGA
alarmNotification
0x90130404 -
[2417165316]Q
AMMGR_
LINKFAILED
Alarm Critical
D5 QAM
Initialization Trap
The QAM card in
question does not
become operational.
The QAM card failed to
establish its gigabit
ethernet link.
alarmNotification
0x90130405 -
[2417165317]
QAMMGR_
ECLFAILED
Alarm Critical
D5 QAM
Initialization Trap
The QAM card in
question does not
become operational.
The QAM card has detected
ethernet communication
failures.
alarmNotification
8x90130406 -
[2417165318]
QAMMGR_
RS232FAILED
Alarm Critical
D5 QAM
Initialization Trap
The QAM card in
question does not
become operational.
The QAM card has detected
internal communication
failures.
alarmNotification
0x90130407 -
[2417165319]Q
AMMGR_
POSTFAILED
Alarm Critical D5 QAM POST Trap
The QAM card in
question does not
become operational.
Power On Self Test has
failed on the QAM card and
is therefore not
operational.
alarmNotification
0x90130408 -
[2417165320]Q
AMMGR_
ANNEXFAILED
Alarm Critical
D5 QAM
Initialization Trap
The QAM card in
question does not
become operational.
The QAM card has been
unable to switch annex.
Certain models of QAM cards are
designed to operate in a single
annex and therefore will not switch
annexes. However, if the card is
designed to support multiple
annexes and fails, then it may need
to be replaced.
alarmNotification
0x90130409 -
[2417165321]Q
AMMGR_
CARDRESET
Alarm Critical
D5 QAM
Initialization Trap
The QAM card in
question does not
become operational.
Switchover to a spare QAM
card is not successful and
the QAM card is reset in an
attempt to make it
operational.
n/a
Alarm
Title
Recommended
Action
alarmNotification
0x9013040c -
[2417165324]Q
AMMGR_
MISMATCH
Log-only n/a n/a
The QAM card in
question does not
become operational.
An attempt was made to
configure a QAM in HEX
mode but the QAM card
hardware cant support that
mode.
Do not attempt to configure HEX
mode on a QAM card that cant
support this mode. (DRFI card
6DX2, universal card product rev
CB are required for HEX mode
operation.)
alarmNotification
0x90130802 -
[2417166338]M
ULTIPLE_FAN_ER
ROR
Alarm Critical
D5 Fan Notification
Trap
Temperatures read by
sensors in the D5 will
begin to show higher
values.
Multiple fans are showing
degraded performance due
to an impending failure or
an obstruction preventing it
from rotating at its
optimum speed.
Check the fan for obstruction and
remove if present, otherwise
remove the fan tray and replace
with a spare fan tray.
alarmNotification
0x90130a01 -
[2417166849]
CARDMGR_
REMOVE
Log-only Major
D5 Card Removal
Trap
D5 may not operate
correctly and could
possibly shutdown.
A non-QAM module has
been removed from the 5
or has otherwise failed.
Re-insert removed module or
replace failed module.
alarmNotification
0x90130a03 -
[2417166851]C
ARDMGR_
ABSENT-
alarmAsserted==
1
Alarm Major
D5 Card Missing
Trap
D5 system will overhead
and shutdown
The fan tray is missing on a
D5 since it was booted
A fully functional fan tray should be
inserted in the D5.
alarmNotification
0x90130a03 -
[2417166851]C
ARDMGR_
ABSENT-
alarmAsserted==
2
Clear Major
D5 Card Present
Trap
None
A fan tray has been
inserted into the D5 and it
has returned to normal
operation so the Card
Missing alarm has been
cleared.
None
alarmNotification
0x90130a08 -
[2417166856]C
ARDMGR_
DUALWAN_
ENABLE
Log-only Critical N/A
Both WAN modules in
the D5 will be
operational.
Operator has reconfigured
this D5 chassis, enabling
the WAN module in slot 8.
This will not happen under normal
operational conditions. No action
should be necessary as this trap is
generated only in response to
operator configuration of the D5,
for audit purposes only.
alarmNotification
0x90130a09 -
[2417166857]
CARDMGR_
DUALWAN_
DISABLE
Both WAN modules will
no longer be
operational; just the
module in slot 7 will be
accessible.
this D5 chassis disabling
the QAN module in slot 8.
operator configuration of the D5 for
auditing purposes only.
alarmNotification
0x9130a0a -
[2417166858]
CARDMGF
Log-only Minor N/A
As QAM modules are
assigned to different
WAN modules, service
will be interrupted on
these QAM modules.
this D5 chassis, QAM
module assignments to
dual WAN modules has
changed.
operator configuration of the D5,
for audit purposes only.
alarmNotification
0x9130a0b -
[2417166859]
CARDMGF
Log-only Minor N/A
The D5 will fail to save
configuration files and
possibly non-volatile
event logfiles.
In a field deployment
setting this is most likely as
a result of downloading too
many images to the D5
which can consume 25MB
each.
Delete unnecessary files from the
/update directory. The largest files
stored here are typically images
which should be kept to a
minimum, ideally the currently
running firmware and the
previously used one.
alarmNotification
0x90130a0c -
[2417166860]
CARDMGR_
QAMREMOVE
Log-only Minor
D5 QAM Card
Removal Trap
Video delivered via this
QAM card will fail.
A WAM module has been
removed from the D5
Re-insert removed QAM module or
replace failed QAM module.
alarmNotification
0x90130b19 -
[2417167129]F
PGADL_
PROGRAMMING_
FAILED
Alarm Critical
D5 QAM
Initialization Trap
The QAM card in
question does not
become operational.
The QAM card has failed to
program its FPGA or
possibly the appropriate
FPGA image was not
available.
The failed QAM card needs to e
examined and possibly replaced, or
the file system may need to be
checked for integrity.
alarmNotification
0x90130e01 -
[2417167873]I
PPROC_
DOWNLOAD_
FAILURE
Alarm Critical
D5 WAN
Initialization Trap
The D5 did not become
operational following
system reload.
(1) Communications issued
between MON and WAN
cards.
(2) Programming failure
due to invalid or corrupted
software bundle.
Reboot the D5. If the problem
persists, verify the software image
on the D5.
Alarm
Title
Recommended
Action
A D5 UEQ Event Logs
alarmNotification
0x90130e02 -
[2417167874]
IPPROC_
INVALID_
DEFAULT_
RATE_LIMIT
Alarm Critical
D5 WAN
Initialization Trap
The D5 did not become
operational following
system reload.
The WAN card has failed to
program its FPGA.
Rebooting the D5 may alleviate the
problem, otherwise the hardware
may need to be examined.
alarmNotification
0x90130e04 -
[2417167876]
TFTP_
FAILURE
Alarm Critical
D5 WAN
Initialization Trap
The D5 does not
become operational.
There may be
communications problems
between the MON and WAN
card.
problem otherwise the hardware
alarmNotification
0x90130e0a -
[2417167882]
NFS_FAILURE
Alarm Critical
D5 WAN
Initialization Trap
The D5 does not
become operational.
There may be
card.
alarmNotification
0x90130e0b -
[2417167883]
FLASH_FAILURE
WAN may, in the future,
fail to complete boot up
sequence so the D5 may
not become operational.
WAN module has failed an
attempt to program an
updated bootloader in the
WAN module flash
memory. Under normal
circumstances, this should
always succeed as part of a
normal D5 upgrade and
reboot sequence. It may
indicate a hardware failure.
RMA the WAN module.
alarmNotification
0x90130f01 -
[2417168129]
IPPROC_
ALERT
Alarm Critical
D5 WAN
Initialization Trap
The D5 does not
become operational.
An FPGA on the WAN card
is not responding.
problem.
alarmNotification
0x90130f09 -
[2417168137]
IPPDEVENT_
IPP_LOC
Alarm Critical
D5 WAN
Initialization Trap
The D5 does not
become operational.
There may be
card.
alarmNotification
0x90130f13 -
[2417168147]
VERSION_
MISMATCH
Alarm Critical
D5 WAN
Initialization Trap
The D5 does not
become operational.
MON/WAN software
version mismatch
Reboot D5. Verify that the software
image in use has not been
corrupted.
alarmNotification
0x90130f14 -
[2417168148]
CONFIGFILE_
READ_FAIL
Alarm Critical
D5 WAN
Initialization Trap
The D5 does not
become operational.
An error occurred while
attempting to load the D5
startup configuration.
The FLASH memory card on the
WAN needs to be examined and
possibly replaced.
alarmNotification
0x90131030 -
[2417168432]
POST_RESULT_
FAIL_START
Alarm Critical D5 WAN POST Trap
The D5 does not
become operational.
A hardware test during
system startup failed.
The card in question needs to be
alarmNotification
0x90131031 -
[2417168433]
POST_CPU_
CACHE_FAIL
The D5 does not
become operational.
alarmNotification
0x90131032 -
[2417168434]
POST_SDRAM_
BANK_FAIL
The D5 does not
become operational.
alarmNotification
0x90131033 -
[2417168435]
POST_CLK_PLL_
FAIL
The D5 does not
become operational.
alarmNotification
0x90131034 -
[2417168436]
POST_MIIM_
FAIL
The D5 does not
become operational.
alarmNotification
0x90131035 -
[2417168437]
POST_PCI_FAIL
The D5 does not
become operational.
Alarm
Title
Recommended
Action
alarmNotification
0x90131036 -
[2417168438]
POST_BCM5690_
FAIL
The D5 does not
become operational.
alarmNotification
0x90131037 -
[2417168439]
POST_IPP_FAIL
The D5 does not
become operational.
alarmNotification
0x90131038 -
[2417168440]
POST_SERDES_
INTERNAL_FAIL
The D5 does not
become operational.
alarmNotification
0x90131039 -
[2417168441]
POST_HIGIG_
FAIL
The D5 does not
become operational.
alarmNotification
0x9013103a -
[2417168442]
POST_HIGIG_
FAIL
The D5 does not
become operational.
alarmNotification
0x9013103b -
[2417168443]P
OST_IPP_DDR_
SDRAM_FAIL
The D5 does not
become operational.
alarmNotification
0x9013103c -
[2417168444]
POST_IPP_ZBT_
RAM_FAIL
The D5 does not
become operational.
alarmNotification
0x9013103d -
[2417168445]
POST_CLK_PLL_
LOCK_FAIL
The D5 does not
become operational.
alarmNotification
0x9013103e -
[2417168446]
POST_I2C_BUS_
0_1_FAIL
The D5 does not
become operational.
alarmNotification
0x9013103f -
[2417168447]P
OST_I2C_BUS_0_
FAIL
The D5 does not
become operational.
alarmNotification
0x90131040 -
[2417168448]P
OST_I2C_BUS_1_
FAIL
The D5 does not
become operational.
alarmNotification
0x90131041 -
[2417168449]
POST_NOISE_
GEN_FAIL
The D5 does not
become operational.
alarmNotification
0x90131042 -
[2417168450]
POST_I2C_BCM_
CMIC_FAIL
The D5 does not
become operational.
alarmNotification
0x90131043 -
[2417168451]
POST_I2C_SFP_
CPLD_FAIL
The D5 does not
become operational.
alarmNotification
0x90131044 -
[2417168452]
POST_PCI_BCC_
CMIC_FAIL
The D5 does not
become operational.
alarmNotification
0x90131045 -
[2417168453]P
OST_MII_BUS_0_
FAIL
The D5 does not
become operational.
Alarm
Title
Recommended
Action
A D5 UEQ Event Logs
alarmNotification
0x90131046 -
[2417168454]P
OST_MII_BUS_1_
FAIL
The D5 does not
become operational.
alarmNotification
0x90131047 -
[2417168455]P
OST_I2C_BCM560
00_FAIL
The D5 does not
become operational.
alarmNotification
0x90131048 -
[2417168456]
POST_PCI_BCM56
000_FAIL
The D5 does not
become operational.
alarmNotification
0x90131049 -
[2417168457]P
OST_ETH0_LB_
FAIL
The D5 does not
become operational.
alarmNotification
0x9013104a -
[2417168458]
POST_ETH1_LB_
FAIL
The D5 does not
become operational.
alarmNotification
0x9013104b -
[2417168459]
POST_MON_LB_
FAIL
The D5 does not
become operational.
alarmNotification
0x9013104c -
[2417168460]
POST_MGMT_
LB_FAIL
The D5 does not
become operational.
alarmNotification
0x9013104d -
[2417168461]
POST_IPP1_LB_
FAIL
The D5 does not
become operational.
alarmNotification
0x9013104e -
[2417168462]
POST_IPP2_LB_
FAIL
The D5 does not
become operational.
alarmNotification
0x9013104f -
[2417168463]P
OST_IPP3_LB_
FAIL
The D5 does not
become operational.
alarmNotification
0x90131050 -
[2417168464]
POST_IPP4_LB_
FAIL
The D5 does not
become operational.
alarmNotification
0x90131051 -
[2417168465]
POST_SFP_LB_
FAIL
The D5 does not
become operational.
alarmNotification
0x90131162 -
[2417168738]
TRUNK_
STANDBYFAIL
The D5 does not
become operational.
alarmNotification
0x90131502 -
[2417169666]
GIG_MAC_
FAILED
Alarm Critical
D5 WAN
Initialization Trap
The D5 does not
become operational.
A problem occurred while
programming the MAC
address of a GigE port.
The configuration of the D5 should
be verified.
alarmNotification
0x90130402 -
[2417165314]
QAMMGR_
QAMFAIL
Alarm Critical
D5 WAN
Initialization Trap
The QAM card in
question does not
become operational.
A QAM has failed due to a
programming error.
Alarm
Title
Recommended
Action
alarmNotification
0x90131270 -
[2417169008]
CAS_ECM_
CONN_FAIL
alarmAsserted==
1
Alarm Critical
D5 CAS ECM
Unavailable
The D5 will transmit
video streams
unscrambled because
there is no ECM
available to scramble
them with.
Failure to receive an ECM
from the ECMG which
makes it impossible to
scramble the stream. In
this situation the D5 will
transmit the stream but it
will be unscrambled.
The operation of the ECMG needs
to be examined and check that
network connectivity exists
between the ECMG and D5.
alarmNotification
0x90131270 -
[2417169008]
CAS_ECM_
CONN_FAIL
alarmAsserted==
2
Clear
D5 CAS ECM
Unavailable
n/a
ECMG is now fully
operational and the DS5
has received a valid ECM
to scramble the video
stream with.
n/a n/a
alarmNotification
0x90131271 -
[2417169009]
CAS_EMM_
CONN_DOWN
alarmAsserted==
1
Alarm Critical
D5 CAS EMM
Connection Down
The configured EMMG
has not connected with
the D5 which can result
in the inability of STBs
decrypting video due to
the lack of appropriate
EMM tables
An EMMG has been
configured on the D5 but
has not established a
connection with the D5.
This may be due to a
misconfiguration of the D5,
a network issue or an issue
with the EMMGs operation
The operation of the EMMG needs
to be examined and check that
between the EMMG and D5.
alarmNotification
0x90131271 -
[2417169009]
CAS_EMM_
CONN_DOWN
alarmAsserted==
2
Clear
D5 CAS EMM
Connection
Down
n/a
EMMG is now fully
operational and has
connected successfully
with the D5.
n/a n/a
alarmNotification
0x90131272 -
[2417169010]
CAS_EIS_
CONN_DOWN
alarmAsserted==
1
Alarm Critical
D5 CAS EIS
Connection Down
The configured EIS has
not connected with the
D5 which can result in
the video traffic being
transmitted in
unscrambled because
the appropriate SCGs
have not been delivered
to the D5 to define the
video streams to be
scrambled.
An EIS has been configured
on the D5 but has not
established a connection
with the D5. This may be
due to a misconfiguration
of the D5, a network issue
or an issue with the EISs
operation.
The operation of the EIS needs to
be examined and check that
between the EIS and D5.
alarmNotification
0x90131272 -
[2417169010]
CAS_EIS_
CONN_DOWN
alarmAsserted==
2
Clear
D5 CAS EIS
Connection
Down
n/a
EIS is now fully
operational and has
connected successfully
with the D5
n/a n/a
alarmNotification
0x901333070 -
[2417177456]
DEPI_SESSION_
START
Log-only n/a n/a
DOCSIS data traffic
begins to transmit on
the corresponding QAM
channel.
Not applicable. This is not a
problem as such but an
indication that a major
event (DEPI session
starting) has occurred.
n/a
alarmNotification
0x90133371 -
[2417177457]
DEPISESSION_
STOP
Log-only n/a n/a
DOCSIS data traffic
stops transmitting on
the corresponding QAM
channel.
This may be expected as a
result of the M-CMTS Core
stopping the DEPI session.
Check network connectivity
between M-CMTS Core and D5 as
well as operation on the M-CMTS
Core output if this trap is expected.
alarmNotification
0x90133372 -
[2417177458]
DEPI_M_AVP_UN
RECOGNIZED
Log-only n/a n/a
Dynamic DEPI session
configuration possibly
fails.
Misconfiguration of the M-
CMTS Core or message
corruption,
Check operation of M-CMTS Core.
alarmNotification
0x90131281 -
[2417169025]
PME_EQM_CONN
_FAIL
alarmAsserted
==1
Alarm Critical
D5 PME ECM
Unavailable
The D5 will not transit a
VOD stream because
there is no ECM
available to scramble
the stream with.
Failure to receive an ECM
from the EQM which makes
it impossible to scramble
the stream. In this
situation, the D5 will not
transmit the stream
unscrambled.
The operation of the EQM needs to
be examined to ensure it can
connect to the ERS. Also check that
between the EQM and D5.
Alarm
Title
Recommended
Action
A D5 UEQ Event Logs
alarmNotification
0x90131281 -
[2417169025]
PME_EQM_CONN
_FAIL
alarmAsserted ==
2
Clear
D5 PME ECM
Unavailable
n/a
EQM is now fully
operational and the D5
has received a valid ECM
to scramble the stream
with.
n/a n/a
alarmNotification
0x90131281 -
[2417169025]
PME_EQM_CONN
_FAIL
alarmAsserted
==1
Alarm Warning
D5 PME ECM
Connection Fail
The D5 has an ECM
which may or may not
be valid but it cant
establish a connection
with the EQM to renew
or revalidate it.
D5 cant connect to the
EQM. The EQM may not be
currently operational or
may not be reachable from
the D5.
be examined, to ensure it can
alarmNotification
0x90131281 -
[2417169025]
PME_EQM_CONN
_FAIL
alarmAsserted ==
2
Clear
D5 PME EQM
Connection
Fail
n/a
EQM is now fully
operational and the D5
been able to renew the
ECM to scramble the
stream.
n/a n/a
alarmNotification
0x90131282
[2417169026]
PME_EQM_CW_
PROV_FAIL
alarmAsserted ==
1
Alarm Warning
D5 PME CW
Provision Fail
The D5 has an ECM
which is known not to
be valid but it cant
establish a connection
with the EQM to
revalidate it. There is
potential here for the D5
to be scrambling VOD
streams that cant be
decoded by the target
STBs.
D5 cant connect to the
EQM. The EQM may not be
currently operational or
may not be reachable from
the D5.
be examined, to ensure is can
alarmNotification
0x90131282
[2417169026]
PME_EQM_CW_
PROV_FAIL
alarmAsserted ==
2
Clear
D5 PME CW
Provision Fail
n/a
EQM is now fully
operation and the D5
been able to renew the
ECM to scramble the
stream
n/a n/a
d5TacacsErrorTrap
0x90132000
[2417172480]
TACACS_SRVR_
UNREACH
Log-only n/a n/a
CLI user may
experience slow
performance when
connecting via
TACACS+ as the D5 has
to try multiple servers.
The TACACS+ server may
not be operating for the
network between it and the
D5 may be experiencing
problems.
Check functioning of TACACS+
server and the connectivity
between it and the D5.
d5TacacsErrorTrap
0x90132001
[2417172481]
TACACS_GRP_
UNREACH
Log-only n/a n/a
CLI user will not be able
to connect to the D5 via
TACACS+.
All TACACS+ servers in the
group are not contactable.
This is likely to be a
network issue if more than
one server is configured in
the group or simply all
servers may not be
functioning correctly.
Check functioning of TACACS+
servers and the connectivity
between them and the D5.
d5TacacsErrorTrap
0x90132003
[2417172483]
AAA_AUTHEN_
FAIL
Log-only n/a n/a
CLI user has failed to
connect to the D5 via
TACACS+ or RADIUS.
AAA Server may be
incorrectly configured or
this may be a valid user
rejection.
Check configuration of AAA Server.
d5TacacsErrorTrap
0x90132005
[2417172485]
AAA_ENABLE_
FAIL
Log-only n/a n/a
CLI user has failed to
establish privilege mode
when connecting to the
D5 via TACACS+ or
RADIUS.
AAA Server may be
rejection.
d5TacacsErrorTrap
0x90132007
[2417172487]
AAA_AUTHORIZE
_FAIL
Log-only n/a n/a
CLI user command has
been rejected as the
user was not authorized
to run the command.
AAA Server may be
rejection.
d5TacacsErrorTrap
0x90132009
[2417172489]
AAA_SHELL_
AUTHORIZE_FAIL
Log-only n/a n/a
Failure to authorize
access to login shell for
CLI user.
AAA Server may be
rejection.
Alarm
Title
Recommended
Action
d5TacacsErrorTrap
0x9013200b
[2417172491]
AAA_COMMAND_
ACCOUNTING_
FAIL
Log-only n/a n/a
Failure to log/account of
command execution for
CLI user.
AAA Server may be
there may be a network
issue that prevented the
logging/accounting of login
shell access.
d5TacacsErrorTrap
0x9013200d
[2417172493]
AAA_SHELL_ACC
OUNTING_FAIL
Log-only n/a n/a
Fail to log/account of
login shell access for CLI
user.
AAA Server may be
there may be a network
issue that prevented the
logging/accounting of
command execution.
d5TacacsErrorTrap
0x9013200e
[2417172494]
RADIUS_SRVR_
UNREACH
Log-only n/a n/a
CLI user may
experience slow
performance when
connecting via RADIUS
as the D5 has to try
multiple servers.
The RADIUS server may
not be operating or the
network between it and the
D5 may be experiencing
problems.
Check functioning of RADIUS
server and the connectivity
d5TacacsErrorTrap
0x9013200f
[2417172495]
RADIUS_SRVR_
UNREACH
Log-only n/a n/a
CLI user will not be able
to connect to the D5 via
RADIUS>
All RADIUS servers in the
group are not contactable.
This is likely to be a
network issue if more than
one server is configured in
the group or simply all
servers may not be
functioning correctly.
Check functioning of RADIUS
servers and the connectivity
between then and the D5.
d5TacacsInfoTrap
0x90132002
[2417172482]
AAA_AUTHEN_OK
Log-only n/a n/a n/a
CLI user successfully
logged on via TACACS+ or
RADIUS.
n/a
d5TacacsInfoTrap
0x90132004
[2417172484]
AAA_ENABLE_OK
established privilege mode
on via TACACS+ or
RADIUS.
n/a
d5TacacsInfoTrap
0x90132006
[2417172486]
AAA_COMMAND_
AUTHORIZE_OK
authorized a command via
TACACS+ or RADIUS.
n/a
d5TacacsInfoTrap
0x90132008
[2417172488]
AAA_SHELL_
AUTHORIZE_OK
authorized for login shell
access via TACACS+ or
RADIUS.
n/a
d5TacacsInfoTrap
0x9013200a
[2417172490]
AAA_COMMAND_
ACCOUNTING_OK
Successful
logging/accounting of CLI
user command execution.
n/a
d5TacacsInfoTrap
0x9013200c
[2417172492]
AAA_SHELL_
ACCOUNTING_OK
Successful
logging/accounting of CLI
user login shell access.
n/a
d5SystemReboot
Trap
0x90130f15 -
[2417168149]
REBOOT_NOW
Alarm Major D5 Reboot Trap n/a
An operator has performed
a D5 reload command.
Expect the D5 to shutdown
and restart.
n/a
d5SystemReboot
Trap
0x90130f16 -
[2417168150]R
EBOOT_
SCHEDULED
Alarm Major D5 Reboot Trap n/a
An operator has performed
a D5 reload command.
Expect the D5 to shutdown
and restart at the
scheduled time.
n/a
d5SystemReboot
Trap
0x90130f17 -
[2417168151]
REBOOT_
CANCEL
Clear
D5 Reboot
Trap
n/a n/a
An operator has cancelled a
previously requested D5
reload command.
n/a
Alarm
Title
Recommended
Action
A D5 UEQ Event Logs
d5SessMgtMsgInfo
Trap
0x90131350
[2417169232]
VREP_SENT_NOT
IFICATION
Log-only n/a n/a
The D6 connection
terminates as the D5
sent a NOTIFICATION
message.
The D5 may have
shutdown or it may have
received a message from
the ERM that it could not
handle.
The operation of the ERM needs to
be examined.
d5SessMgtMsgInfo
Trap
0x90131351
[2417169233]
VREP_RECEIVED_
NOTIFICATION
Log-only n/a n/a
The D6 connection
terminates as the ERM
sent a NOTIFICATION
message.
The ERM may have
the D5 that it could not
handle.
be examined.
d5CasEmmgError
Trap
0x90131108
[2417168648]
CAS_EMM_UNKN_
DATA_ID
Log-only n/a n/a
Failure to establish EMM
Stream, possibly
resulting in STB failure
to de-crypt video due to
missing EMM tables.
Misconfiguration between
D5 and EMMG.
Check configuration of EMMG on
D5
d5CasEmmgError
Trap
0x90131109
[2417168649]
CAS_EMM_UNKN_
CLIENT_ID
Log-only n/a n/a
Stream, possibly
missing EMM tables.
D5 and EMMG.
D5
d5CasEmmgError
Trap
0x9013110a
[2417168650]
CAS_EMM_UNKN_
CLIENT_ID
Log-only n/a n/a
Stream, possibly
missing EMM tables.
D5 and EMMG.
D5
d5CasEmmgError
Trap
0x9013110b
[2417168651]
CAS_EMM_BW_
EXCEEDED
Log-only n/a n/a
The bandwidth
consumed by EMM data
received from the EMMG
exceeds the threshold
established.
D5 and EMMG.
D5
d5CasEmmgError
Trap
0x90131110
[2417168656]
CAS_EMM_
UNSUPP_DATA_
TYPE
Log-only n/a n/a
Stream, possibly
missing EMM tables.
D5 and EMMG.
D5
d5CasEmmgError
Trap
0x90131111
[2417168657]
CAS_EMM_UNKN_
_DATA_CHAN_ID
Log-only n/a n/a
Stream, possibly
missing EMM tables.
D5 and EMMG.
D5
d5CasEmmgError
Trap
0x90131112
[2417168658]
CAS_EMM_STRMS
_EXCEEDED
Log-only n/a n/a
Stream, because the
maximum number has
been exceeded. This
may result in STB failure
missing EMM tables.
D5 and EMMG.
D5
d5CasEmmgError
Trap
0x90131113
[2417168659]
CAS_EMM_CHANS
_EXCEEDED
Log-only n/a n/a
Stream, because the
maximum number has
been exceeded. This
may result in STB failure
missing EMM tables.
D5 and EMMG.
D5
d5CasEisError
Trap
0x9013113b
[2417168669]
CAS_EIS_SCG_
FAIL
Log-only n/a n/a
Failure to accept SCG
from EIS which may
result in video streams
being transmitted
unscrambled when the
intention was to
scramble them.
D5 and EIS.
Check configuration of EIS on D5
d5CasPsigError
Trap
0x90131126
[2417168678]
CAS_PSIG_STR_
FAIL
Log-only n/a n/a
Failure to establish PSIG
Stream which can result
in the failure to deliver
the expected PSI/SI
tables to QAM channels.
D5 and PSIG.
Check configuration of PSIG on D5
Alarm
Title
Recommended
Action
d5CasEisError
Trap
0x9013113d
[2417168701]
CAS_EIS_CONN_
ERR
Log-only n/a n/a
Failure to establish the
connection to the EIS
which may result in
video streams being
transmitted
unscrambled when the
intention was to
scramble them.
D5 and EIS.
Check configuration of EIS on D5
d5CasEcmgError
Trap
0x90131146
[2417168710]
CAS_ECM_CHAN_
TEST_FAIL
Log-only n/a n/a
An ECMG Channel Test
message has failed
because the ECMG did
not respond with a
Status message in a
timely manner.
Possible network issue
between D5 and ECMG, or
the ECMG is not able to
respond quickly due to
loading issues.
Check network between ECMG and
D5 and loading on ECMG.
d5CasEcmgError
Trap
0x9013114a
[2417168714]
CAS_ECM_CV_
TIMEOUTL
Log-only n/a n/a
An ECMG did not
respond to a CV
Provision message with
an ECM Response
message in a timely
manner.
Possible network issue
between D5 and ECMG, or
the ECMG is not able to
respond quickly due to
loading issues.
Check network between ECMG and
D5 and loading on ECMG.
d5Hardware
MismatchTrap
0x90131503 -
[2417169667]
SFP_MISMATCH
Alarm Major
D5 SFP Mismatch
Trap
Problems with GigE links
after a power brownout.
Unsupported SFP in use.
Use an SFP from the supported SFP
list.
d5EnvMonSys
RecoverTrap
0x90130710 -
[2417166096]
PWRCNV_
RECOVER
Clear
D5 PWR
Auto-
shutdown
Trap
n/a n/a
The POWER CONVERTOR
has recovered from an
earlier failure.
n/a
d5EnvMonSys
RecoverTrap
0x90130711 -
[2417166097]
QAM_RECOVER
Clear
D5 QAM
Auto-
shutdown
Trap
n/a n/a
The QAM card has
recovered from an earlier
failure.
n/a
d5EnvMonSys
RecoverTrap
0x90130712 -
[2417166098]
WAN_RECOVER
Clear
D5 WAN
Auto-
shutdown
Trap
n/a n/a
The WAN card has
recovered from an earlier
failure.
n/a
d5EnvMonSys
FatalTrap
0x9013070c -
[2417166092]
SYSTEM_
SHUTDOWN
Alarm Critical
D5 Auto-shutdown
Trap
The D5 has shut down
Critical alerts were raised
on the card and corrective
action as been taken.
The card in question should be
examined and replaced if
necessary.
d5EnvMonSys
FatalTrap
0x9013070d -
[2417166093]
PWRCNV_
SHUTDOWN
Alarm Critical
D5 PWR Auto-
shutdown Trap
A power converter
module has shutdown
necessary.
d5EnvMonSys
FatalTrap
0x9013070e -
[2417166094]
QAM_
SHUTDOWN
Log-only Critical
D5 QAM Auto-
shutdown Trap
A QAM card has
shutdown
necessary.
d5EnvMonSys
FatalTrap
0x9013070f -
[2417166095]
WAN_
SHUTDOWN
Log-only Critical
D5 WAN Auto-
shutdown Trap
A WAN card has
shutdown
necessary.
d5EnvMonPsu
WarningTrap
0x9013070b -
[2417166091]
PSU_DEGRADE
Alarm Major
D5 PSU Notification
Trap
none
A Power Supply has
degraded operation,
possibly due to a hardware
fault or to excessive
environmental
temperature.
Monitor for failure and replace if
required.
d5EnvMonPsu
ErrorTrap
0x9013070a -
[2417166090]
PSU_FAIL
Alarm Critical
D5 PSU Notification
Trap
none A Power Supply has failed. Replace failed Power Supply
d5EnvMonPsu
WarningTrap
0x90130713 -
[2417166099]
PSU_INCOM
Log-only Minor N/A N/A
The D5 has multiple QPM
modules installed but is
running a 500W PSU.
This is informational only to identify
500W PSUs.
Alarm
Title
Recommended
Action
A D5 UEQ Event Logs
d5EnvMonTemp
WarningTrap
0x90130100 -
[2417164544]
MON_TEMP_W
Alarm Minor
D5 Temperature
Notification Trap
none
A temperature sensor on
the MON card is showing a
warning. This can be
caused by fan failure, a
hardware fault or excessive
environmental
temperature.
Verify fans are working and
environmental temperatures are
normal. Monitor for further
problems.
d5EnvMonTemp
WarningTrap
0x90130200 -
[2417164800]
QAM_PHYTEMP_
W
Alarm Minor
D5 Temperature
Notification Trap
none
the QAM card is showing a
environmental
temperature.
problems.
d5EnvMonTemp
WarningTrap
0x90130201 -
[2417164801]
QAM_PSUTEMP_
W
Alarm Minor
D5 Temperature
Notification Trap
none
environmental
temperature.
problems.
d5EnvMonTemp
WarningTrap
0x90130202 -
[2417164802]
QAM_RFTEMP_W
Alarm Minor
D5 Temperature
Notification Trap
none
environmental
temperature.
problems.
d5EnvMonTemp
WarningTrap
0x9013021d -
[2417164829]
QAM_GEN_
TEMP_W
Alarm Minor
D5 Temperature
Notification Trap
None
the QPM QAM module is
showing a warning. This
can be caused by fan
failure, a hardware fault or
excessive environmental
temperature.
problems.
d5EnvMonTemp
WarningTrap
0x90130500 -
[2417165568]
WAN_
FRONTTEMP_W
Alarm Minor
D5 Temperature
Notification Trap
none
the WAN card is showing a
environmental
temperature.
problems.
d5EnvMonTemp
WarningTrap
0x90130501 -
[2417165569]
WAN_
BACKTEMP_W
Alarm Minor
D5 Temperature
Notification Trap
none
environmental
temperature.
problems.
d5EnvMonTemp
WarningTrap
0x90130502 -
[2417165570]
WAN_
MIDTEMP_W
Alarm Minor
D5 Temperature
Notification Trap
none
environmental
temperature.
problems.
d5EnvMonTemp
WarningTrap
0x90130700 -
[2417166080]
PWR_
CENTERTEMP_W
Alarm Minor
D5 Temperature
Notification Trap
none
the Power Converter
module is showing a
environmental
temperature.
problems.
Alarm
Title
Recommended
Action
d5EnvMonTemp
ErrorTrap
0x90130105 -
[2417164549]
MON_
TEMP_F
Alarm Major
D5 Temperature
Notification Trap
If sufficient temperature
sensors exceed their
maximum temperature,
then the D5 will begin its
shutdown sequence to
self protect. This will
lead to a loss of service.
the MON card is showing a
environmental
temperature.
If fan operation and environmental
temperature have been verified as
normal, then the MON card
possibly needs to be replaced.
d5EnvMonTemp
ErrorTrap
0x9013020e -
[2417164814]
QAM_
PHYTEMP_F
Alarm Major
D5 Temperature
Notification Trap
environmental
temperature.
normal, then the QAM card possibly
needs to be replaced.
d5EnvMonTemp
ErrorTrap
0x9013020f -
[2417164815]
QAM_
PSUTEMP_F
Alarm Major
D5 Temperature
Notification Trap
environmental
temperature.
d5EnvMonTemp
ErrorTrap
0x90130210 -
[2417164816]
QAM_
RFTEMP_F
Alarm Major
D5 Temperature
Notification Trap
environmental
temperature.
d5EnvMonTemp
ErrorTrap
0x9013021f -
[2417164831]
QAM_GEN_
TEMP_F
Alarm Major
D5 Temperature
Notification Trap
self protect that will lead
to a loss of service.
the QPM QAM is showing a
environmental
temperature.
normal, then the QPM QAM module
d5EnvMonTemp
ErrorTrap
0x9013050f -
[2417165583]
WAN_
FRONTTEMP_F
Alarm Major
D5 Temperature
Notification Trap
environmental
temperature.
normal, then the WAN card
d5EnvMonTemp
ErrorTrap
0x90130510 -
[2417165584]
WAN_
BACKTEMP_F
Alarm Major
D5 Temperature
Notification Trap
environmental
temperature.
d5EnvMonTemp
ErrorTrap
0x90130511 -
[2417165585]
WAN_
MIDTEMP_F
Alarm Major
D5 Temperature
Notification Trap
environmental
temperature.
d5EnvMonTemp
ErrorTrap
0x90130705 -
[2417166085]
PWR_
CENTERTEMP_F
Alarm Major
D5 Temperature
Notification Trap
the Power Convertor
module is showing a
environmental
temperature.
normal, then the Power Convertor
module possibly needs to be
replaced.
Alarm
Title
Recommended
Action
A D5 UEQ Event Logs
d5EnvMonTemp
ErrorTrap
0x9013021f-
[2417165831]
QAM_GEN_
TEMP_F
Alarm Major
D5 Temperature
Notification Trap
maximum temperature
self protect that will lead
to a loss of service.
the QPM QAM module is
showing an error. This can
be caused by fan failure, a
hardware fault, or
excessive environmental
temperature.
normal, then the QPM QAM
modules possibly needs to be
replaced.
d5EnvMonVolt
WarningTrap
0x90130101 -
[2417164545]
MON_
CHAN0_5V_W
Alarm Minor
D5 Voltage
Notification Trap
None
A voltage sensor on the
MON card is showing a
caused by power supply
degradation or other
hardware fault.
The power supplies should be
checked. Monitor for other
problems.
d5EnvMonVolt
WarningTrap
0x90130102 -
[2417164546]
MON_
CHAN1_3_3V_W
Alarm Minor
D5 Voltage
Notification Trap
None
hardware fault.
problems.
d5EnvMonVolt
WarningTrap
0x90130103 -
[2417164547]
MON_
CHAN2_2_5V_W
Alarm Minor
D5 Voltage
Notification Trap
None
hardware fault.
problems.
d5EnvMonVolt
WarningTrap
0x90130104 -
[2417164548]
MON_
CHAN3_1_2V__W
Alarm Minor
D5 Voltage
Notification Trap
None
hardware fault.
problems.
d5EnvMonVolt
WarningTrap
0x90130203 -
[2417164803]
QAM_
CHAN0_5V_W
Alarm Minor
D5 Voltage
Notification Trap
None
QAM card is showing a
hardware fault.
problems.
d5EnvMonVolt
WarningTrap
0x90130204 -
[2417164804]
QAM_
CHAN1_3_3V__W
Alarm Minor
D5 Voltage
Notification Trap
None
hardware fault.
problems.
d5EnvMonVolt
WarningTrap
0x90130205 -
[2417164805]
QAM_
CHAN2_11V_RF_
W
Alarm Minor
D5 Voltage
Notification Trap
None
hardware fault.
problems.
d5EnvMonVolt
WarningTrap
0x90130206 -
[2417164806]
QAM_
CHAN3_9V_RF_W
Alarm Minor
D5 Voltage
Notification Trap
None
hardware fault.
problems.
d5EnvMonVolt
WarningTrap
0x90130207 -
[2417164807]
QAM_
CHAN4_3_3V_W
Alarm Minor
D5 Voltage
Notification Trap
None
hardware fault.
problems.
d5EnvMonVolt
WarningTrap
0x90130208 -
[2417164808]
QAM_
CHAN5_3_3V_
VCX0_W
Alarm Minor
D5 Voltage
Notification Trap
None
hardware fault.
problems.
Alarm
Title
Recommended
Action
d5EnvMonVolt
WarningTrap
0x90130209 -
[2417164809]
QAM_
CHAN6_3_3V_
0SC_W
Alarm Minor
D5 Voltage
Notification Trap
None
hardware fault.
problems.
d5EnvMonVolt
WarningTrap
0x9013020a -
[2417164810]
QAM_
CHAN7_2_5V_W
Alarm Minor
D5 Voltage
Notification Trap
None
hardware fault.
problems.
d5EnvMonVolt
WarningTrap
0x9013020b -
[2417164811]
QAM_
CHAN8_3_3V_
DACA_W
Alarm Minor
D5 Voltage
Notification Trap
None
hardware fault.
problems.
d5EnvMonVolt
WarningTrap
0x9013020c -
[2417164812]
QAM_
CHAN9_3_3V_
DACB_W
Alarm Minor
D5 Voltage
Notification Trap
None
hardware fault.
problems.
d5EnvMonVolt
WarningTrap
0x9013020d -
[2417164813]
QAM_
CHAN10_1_5V_W
Alarm Minor
D5 Voltage
Notification Trap
None
hardware fault.
problems.
d5EnvMonVolt
Warning Trap
0x9013021e-
[2417164830]
QAM_GEN_
VOLT_W
Alarm Minor
D5 Voltage
Notification Trap
None
QPM QAM module is
can be caused by power
supply degradation or other
hardware fault.
checked. Monitor for further
problems.
d5EnvMonVolt
ErrorTrap
0x90130220
[2417164834]
QAM_GEN_
VOLT_F
Alarm Major
D5 Voltage
Notification Trap
If over-voltage or
under-voltage is
detected by a voltage
sensor, it will cause
module shutdown and
QPM QAM module is
hardware fault.
If no fault can be found on the
power supply, then the QPM QAM
module possibly needs to be
replaced.
d5EnvMonVolt
WarningTrap
0x90130503 -
[2417165571]
WAN_
CHAN0_5V_W
Alarm Minor
D5 Voltage
Notification Trap
None
WAN card is showing a
hardware fault.
problems.
d5EnvMonVolt
WarningTrap
0x90130504 -
[2417165572]
WAN_
CHAN1_3_3V_W
Alarm Minor
D5 Voltage
Notification Trap
None
hardware fault.
problems.
d5EnvMonVolt
WarningTrap
0x90130505 -
[2417165573]
WAN_
CHAN2_3_0V_
VCCOPC1_W
Alarm Minor
D5 Voltage
Notification Trap
None
hardware fault.
problems.
d5EnvMonVolt
WarningTrap
0x90130506 -
[2417165574]
WAN_
CHAN3_3_0V_
VCCOGMII_W
Alarm Minor
D5 Voltage
Notification Trap
None
hardware fault.
problems.
Alarm
Title
Recommended
Action
A D5 UEQ Event Logs
d5EnvMonVolt
WarningTrap
0x90130507 -
[2417165575]
WAN_
CHAN4_3_3V_
VCCOREF_W
Alarm Minor
D5 Voltage
Notification Trap
None
hardware fault.
problems.
d5EnvMonVolt
WarningTrap
0x90130508 -
[2417165576]
WAN_
CHAN5_3_3V_
VCXO_W
Alarm Minor
D5 Voltage
Notification Trap
None
hardware fault.
problems.
d5EnvMonVolt
WarningTrap
0x90130509 -
[2417165577]
WAN_
CHAN6_3_25V_V
CCOSC_W
Alarm Minor
D5 Voltage
Notification Trap
None
hardware fault.
problems.
d5EnvMonVolt
WarningTrap
0x9013050a -
[2417165578]
WAN_
CHAN7_2_5V_W
Alarm Minor
D5 Voltage
Notification Trap
None
hardware fault.
problems.
d5EnvMonVolt
WarningTrap
0x9013050b -
[2417165579]
WAN_
CHAN8_1_2V_W
Alarm Minor
D5 Voltage
Notification Trap
None
hardware fault.
problems.
d5EnvMonVolt
WarningTrap
0x9013050c -
[2417165580]
WAN_
CHAN9_1_25V_W
Alarm Minor
D5 Voltage
Notification Trap
None
hardware fault.
problems.
d5EnvMonVolt
WarningTrap
0x9013050d -
[2417165581]
WAN_
CHAN10_1_5V_W
Alarm Minor
D5 Voltage
Notification Trap
None
hardware fault.
problems.
d5EnvMonVolt
WarningTrap
0x9013050e -
[2417165582]
WAN_
CHAN11_3_3V_V
CCHGREF_W
Alarm Minor
D5 Voltage
Notification Trap
None
hardware fault.
problems.
d5EnvMonVolt
WarningTrap
0x90130701 -
[2417166081]
PWR_
CHAN0_5V_W
Alarm Minor
D5 Voltage
Notification Trap
None
PWR card is showing a
hardware fault.
problems.
d5EnvMonVolt
WarningTrap
0x90130702 -
[2417166082]
PWR_
CHAN1_9V_W
Alarm Minor
D5 Voltage
Notification Trap
None
hardware fault.
problems.
d5EnvMonVolt
WarningTrap
0x90130703 -
[2417166083]
PWR_
CHAN2_12V_
QAM_W
Alarm Minor
D5 Voltage
Notification Trap
None
Power Convertor module is
hardware fault.
problems.
Alarm
Title
Recommended
Action
d5EnvMonVolt
WarningTrap
0x90130704 -
[2417166084]
PWR_
CHAN3_12V_
FAN_W
Alarm Minor
D5 Voltage
Notification Trap
None
hardware fault.
problems.
d5EnvMonVolt
ErrorTrap
0x90130106 -
[2417166086]
MON_
CHAN0_5V_F
Alarm Major
D5 Voltage
Notification Trap
If over-voltage or
under-voltage is
module shutdown and
hardware fault.
power supply, then the MON card
d5EnvMonVolt
ErrorTrap
0x90130107 -
[2417166087]
MON_
CHAN1_3_3V_F
Alarm Major
D5 Voltage
Notification Trap
If over-voltage or
under-voltage is
module shutdown and
hardware fault.
d5EnvMonVolt
ErrorTrap
0x90130108 -
[2417166088]
MON_
CHAN2_2_5V_
Alarm Major
D5 Voltage
Notification Trap
If over-voltage or
under-voltage is
module shutdown and
hardware fault.
d5EnvMonVolt
ErrorTrap
0x90130109 -
[2417166089]
MON_
CHAN3_1_2V_F
Alarm Major
D5 Voltage
Notification Trap
If over-voltage or
under-voltage is
module shutdown and
hardware fault.
d5EnvMonVolt
ErrorTrap
0x90130211 -
[2417164817]
QAM_
CHAN0_5V_F
Alarm Major
D5 Voltage
Notification Trap
If over-voltage or
under-voltage is
module shutdown and
hardware fault.
power supply, then the QAM card
d5EnvMonVolt
ErrorTrap
0x90130212 -
[2417164818]
QAM_
CHAN1_3_3V_F
Alarm Major
D5 Voltage
Notification Trap
If over-voltage or
under-voltage is
module shutdown and
hardware fault.
d5EnvMonVolt
ErrorTrap
0x90130213 -
[2417164819]
QAM_
CHAN2_11V_RF_F
Alarm Major
D5 Voltage
Notification Trap
If over-voltage or
under-voltage is
module shutdown and
hardware fault.
d5EnvMonVolt
ErrorTrap
0x90130214 -
[2417164820]
QAM_
CHAN3_9V_RF_F
Alarm Major
D5 Voltage
Notification Trap
If over-voltage or
under-voltage is
module shutdown and
hardware fault.
d5EnvMonVolt
ErrorTrap
0x90130215 -
[2417164821]
QAM_
CHAN4_3_3V_F
Alarm Major
D5 Voltage
Notification Trap
If over-voltage or
under-voltage is
module shutdown and
hardware fault.
d5EnvMonVolt
ErrorTrap
0x90130216 -
[2417164822]
QAM_
CHAN5_3_3V_
VCXO_F
Alarm Major
D5 Voltage
Notification Trap
If over-voltage or
under-voltage is
module shutdown and
hardware fault.
Alarm
Title
Recommended
Action
A D5 UEQ Event Logs
d5EnvMonVolt
ErrorTrap
0x90130217 -
[2417164823]
QAM_
CHAN6_3_3V_
OSC_F
Alarm Major
D5 Voltage
Notification Trap
If over-voltage or
under-voltage is
module shutdown and
hardware fault.
d5EnvMonVolt
ErrorTrap
0x90130218 -
[2417164824]
QAM_
CHAN7_2_5V_F
Alarm Major
D5 Voltage
Notification Trap
If over-voltage or
under-voltage is
module shutdown and
hardware fault.
d5EnvMonVolt
ErrorTrap
0x90130219 -
[2417164825]
QAM_
CHAN8_3_3V_
DACA_F
Alarm Major
D5 Voltage
Notification Trap
If over-voltage or
under-voltage is
module shutdown and
hardware fault.
d5EnvMonVolt
ErrorTrap
0x9013021a -
[2417164826]
QAM_
CHAN9_3_3V_
DACB_F
Alarm Major
D5 Voltage
Notification Trap
If over-voltage or
under-voltage is
module shutdown and
hardware fault.
d5EnvMonVolt
ErrorTrap
0x9013021b -
[2417164827]
QAM_
CHAN10_1_5V_F
Alarm Major
D5 Voltage
Notification Trap
If over-voltage or
under-voltage is
module shutdown and
hardware fault.
d5EnvMonVolt
ErrorTrap
0x90130512 -
[2417165586]
WAN_
CHAN0_5V_F
Alarm Major
D5 Voltage
Notification Trap
If over-voltage or
under-voltage is
module shutdown and
hardware fault.
power supply, then the WAN card
d5EnvMonVolt
ErrorTrap
0x90130513 -
[2417165587]
WAN_
CHAN1_3_3V_F
Alarm Major
D5 Voltage
Notification Trap
If over-voltage or
under-voltage is
module shutdown and
hardware fault.
d5EnvMonVolt
ErrorTrap
0x90130514 -
[2417165588]
WAN_
CHAN2_3_0V_
VCCOPCI_F
Alarm Major
D5 Voltage
Notification Trap
If over-voltage or
under-voltage is
module shutdown and
hardware fault.
d5EnvMonVolt
ErrorTrap
0x90130515 -
[2417165589]
WAN_
CHAN3_3_0V_
VCCOGMII_F
Alarm Major
D5 Voltage
Notification Trap
If over-voltage or
under-voltage is
module shutdown and
hardware fault.
d5EnvMonVolt
ErrorTrap
0x90130516 -
[2417165590]
WAN_
CHAN4_3_3V_
VCCOREF_F
Alarm Major
D5 Voltage
Notification Trap
If over-voltage or
under-voltage is
module shutdown and
hardware fault.
d5EnvMonVolt
ErrorTrap
0x90130517 -
[2417165591]
WAN_
CHAN5_3_3V_
VCXO_F
Alarm Major
D5 Voltage
Notification Trap
If over-voltage or
under-voltage is
module shutdown and
hardware fault.
Alarm
Title
Recommended
Action
d5EnvMonVolt
ErrorTrap
0x90130519 -
[2417165593]
WAN_
CHAN6_25V_
VCCOSC_F
Alarm Major
D5 Voltage
Notification Trap
If over-voltage or
under-voltage is
module shutdown and
hardware fault.
d5EnvMonVolt
ErrorTrap
0x9013051a -
[2417165594]
WAN_
CHAN7_2_5V_F
Alarm Major
D5 Voltage
Notification Trap
If over-voltage or
under-voltage is
module shutdown and
hardware fault.
d5EnvMonVolt
ErrorTrap
0x9013051b -
[2417165595]
WAN_
CHAN8_1_2V_F
Alarm Major
D5 Voltage
Notification Trap
If over-voltage or
under-voltage is
module shutdown and
hardware fault.
d5EnvMonVolt
ErrorTrap
0x9013051c -
[2417165596]
WAN_
CHAN9_1_25V_F
Alarm Major
D5 Voltage
Notification Trap
If over-voltage or
under-voltage is
module shutdown and
hardware fault.
d5EnvMonVolt
ErrorTrap
0x9013051d -
[2417165597]
WAN_
CHAN10_1_5V_F
Alarm Major
D5 Voltage
Notification Trap
If over-voltage or
under-voltage is
module shutdown and
hardware fault.
d5EnvMonVolt
ErrorTrap
0x9013051e -
[2417165598]
WAN_
CHAN11_3_3V_V
CCHGREF_F
Alarm Major
D5 Voltage
Notification Trap
If over-voltage or
under-voltage is
module shutdown and
hardware fault.
d5EnvMonVolt
ErrorTrap
0x90130706 -
[2417166086]
PWR_
CHAN0_5V_F
Alarm Major
D5 Voltage
Notification Trap
If over-voltage or
under-voltage is
module shutdown and
hardware fault.
power supply, then the Power
Convertor module possibly needs
to be replaced.
d5EnvMonVolt
ErrorTrap
0x90130707 -
[2417166087]
PWR_
CHAN1_9V_F
Alarm Major
D5 Voltage
Notification Trap
If over-voltage or
under-voltage is
module shutdown and
hardware fault.
to be replaced.
d5EnvMonVolt
ErrorTrap
0x90130708 -
[2417166088]
PWR_
CHAN2_12V_
QAM_F
Alarm Major
D5 Voltage
Notification Trap
If over-voltage or
under-voltage is
module shutdown and
hardware fault.
to be replaced.
d5EnvMonVolt
ErrorTrap
0x90130709 -
[2417166089]
PWR_
CHAN3_12V_
FAN_F
Alarm Major
D5 Voltage
Notification Trap
If over-voltage or
under-voltage is
module shutdown and
hardware fault.
to be replaced.
d5EnvMonFan
WarningTrap
0x90130801 -
[2417166337]
FAN_FAIL
Alarm Critical
D5 Fan Notification
Trap
values. If multiple fans
fail, then it is likely to
result in system
shutdown and loss of
service.
The fan hardware has
failed.
Remove the fan tray and replace
the failed fan.
Alarm
Title
Recommended
Action
A D5 UEQ Event Logs
d5EnvMonFan
ErrorTrap
0x90130800 -
[2417166336]
FAN_WARNING
Alarm Major
D5 Fan Notification
Trap
values.
The fan is showing
degraded performance due
to an impending failure or
an obstruction preventing it
from rotating at its
optimum speed.
Check the fan for obstruction and
remove if present, otherwise
remove the fan tray and replace
the degraded fan.
d5EnvMonAlarm
OffTrap
0x9013021c -
[2417164828]
ALARM_
LOWERED
Clear
D5 Voltage &
Temp
Notification
n/a n/a
This trap will clear any
alarm that is currently
asserted on a particular
card.
n/a
d5SessMgt
TimeoutReset Trap
0x90131333 -
[2417169203]
RSTP_CONN_
TIMEOUT_
RESET
This is informational only.
The ERM should
periodically send an
OPTIONS message to the
D5 to restart the
connection timeout to
ensure the connection
remains open.
N/A
d5SessMgtSess
GroupErrorTrap
0x90131323 -
[2417169187]
SDV_SHELLS
SESSGRP_ERR
Log-only n/a n/a
The D5 fails to create a
GQI Shell Session Group
or fails to delete one.
This is most likely caused
by an error on the
DNCS/GSRM trying to
exceed the 32 sessions per
QAM limit or trying to
delete a Shell Session
Group that does not exist.
Check the operation of the
DNCS/GSRM.
d5SessMgtSess
GroupErrorTrap
0x9013132a -
[2417169194]
SDV_POOL_
EMPTY_ERR
Log-only n/a n/a
The D5 fails to create all
sessions in a Shell
Session Group.
by an error on the
DNCS/GSRM trying to
exceed the 32 sessions per
QAM limit or trying to
delete a Shell Session
Group that does not exist.
DNCS/GSRM.
d5SessMgtSess
ErrorTrap
0x90131318 -
[2417169176]
SDV_SESSNOT
FOUND_ERR
Log-only n/a n/a none
delete, query, bind or
unbind a session-id that is
not available on the D5
DNCS/GSRM and SDV Server.
d5SessMgtSess
ErrorTrap
0x90131319 -
[2417169177]
SDV_SESS
EXISTS_ERR
Log-only n/a n/a
The D5 fails to create
the SDV session
requested.
create a session that
already exists on the D5.
DNCS/GSRM.
d5SessMgtSess
ErrorTrap
0x9013131b -
[2417169179]
SDV_INSUFF
CAP_ERR
Log-only n/a n/a
GQI Session or fails to
SETUP and NGOD
session.
by an error on the
DNCS/GSRM trying to
exceed the session limits of
the D5.
DNCS/GSRM, or the ERM in the
case of NGOD operation.
d5SessMgtSess
Error_Trap
0x9013131c -
[2417169180]
SDV_PRGM
CONFL_ERR
Log-only n/a n/a
session as the requested
Program Number is
already in use on the
specified QAM.
The fact that the requested
Program Number is not
available on the QAM in
question could be due to
invalid operation of the
DNCS (or ERM, or because
the Program Number is
already in use by an
unsignalled stream.
DNCS/GSRM, or the ERM in the
case of NGOD operation. Check
that the Program Number is not in
use by a stream that has not been
signalled via GQI (or R6).
d5SessMgtSess
ErrorTrap
0x9013131e -
[2417169182]
SDV_BINDFAIL_E
RR
Log-only n/a n/a
The D5 fails to bind a
GQI session.
Any failure other than
Program Number conflict
such as failure to find the
stream, etc.
Check the operation of the SDV
server.
d5SessMgtSess
ErrorTrap
0x9013131f -
[2417169183]
SDV_SESS
UNBND_ERR
Log-only n/a n/a
The D5 rejects the
request to unbind a CGI
session as it is not
currently bound.
The SDV Server attempted
to unbind a session that
was not currently bound in
the D5.
server.
d5SessMgtSess
Error_Trap
0x90131320 -
[2417169184]
SDV_SESS
UNAVAIL_ERR
Log-only n/a n/a
The D5 rejects the
request to bind a CGI
session as it is currently
bound.
The SDV Server attempted
to bind a session that was
already bound in the D5.
server.
Alarm
Title
Recommended
Action
d5SessMgtSess
Error_Trap
0x90131326 -
[2417169190]
SDV_CREATE
FAIL_ERR
Log-only n/a n/a
GQI session or fails to
SETUP an NGOD
session.
Any failure other than
Program Number conflict
such as failure to find the
stream, invalid parameters
in the message such as
invalid multicast address,
etc.
DNCS/GSRM or the ERM in the case
of NGOD operation.
d5SessMgtSess
Error_Trap
0x90131327 -
[2417169191]
SDV_REPLICATEF
AIL_ERR
Log-only n/a n/a
The D5 rejects the
request to replicate an
existing session on
another QAM channel.
The reason this would be
rejected is because the
multicast groups were the
same for the sessions being
replicated but the source IP
addresses of the stream
were not.
DNCS/GSRM and SDV Server or the
ERM in the case of NGOD
operation.
d5SessMgtSess
Error_Trap
0x90131331 -
[2417169201]
RTSP_PING_
ERR
Log-only n/a n/a none
The NGOD R6 connection
did not receive a PING
message for a particular
session.
Check ERM operation and verify the
network between it and the D5.
d5SessMgtQam
ErrorTrap
0x90131328 -
[2417169192]
SDV_QAM_
UNAVAILABLE
ERR
Log-only n/a n/a
An RPC CreateSession
or an R6 SETUP fails due
to the request
referencing an
unavailable QAM
channel.
The GSRM should be
provisioned with the
available QAMs on a D5 but
it is possible that it gets out
of sync as QAMs may be
physically removed or
shutdown; the GSRM may
therefore attempt to create
sessions on these
unavailable QAMs. Since
NGOD uses a D6 to allow
the ERM to discover
available QAMs, this trap
error should never occur
with an NGOD ERM.
Ensure that the GSRM provisioned
set of QAMs is accurate with
respect to the available QAMs on
the D5.
d5SessMgtQam
ErrorTrap
0x90131329 -
[2417169193]
QAM_SESSIONS_
FULL
Log-only n/a n/a
RPC Create Shell
Session Group or Create
Session fails as it would
exceed the limit of 32
session-ids per QAM.
For NGOD the SETUP
request will fail and
generate this trap if the
hardware limit of 63
streams per QAM is
exceeded.
This should never occur as
the GSRM and ERM should
respect their respective
limits, so this trap may
indicate an issue with the
operation of one of these
devices.
Check operation of ERM or
GSRM/SDV Server.
d5SessMgtQam
ErrorTrap
0x9013132b -
[2417169195]
SDV_
QUERYSESS_
ERR
Log-only n/a n/a
RPC QuerySession
requests fail due to the
request referencing an
unavailable QAM
channel.
The GSRM should be
provisioned with the
available QAMs on a D5 but
it is possible that it gets out
of sync as QAMs may be
physically removed or
shutdown; the GSRM may
therefore attempt to query
these unavailable QAMs.
Ensure that the GSRM provisioned
set of QAMs is accurate with
respect to the available QAMs on
the D5.
d5SessMgtSess
GroupOversubs
Trap
0x90131324 -
[2417169188]
SDV_GRPBWUNA
VAIL_ERR
Log-only n/a n/a
RPC BindSession
requests fail due to lack
of bandwidth
provisioned on the QAM
channel in ShellSession
Groups.
The RPC SDV Server should
manage bandwidth in the
ShellSessionGroups on
each QAM channel and
therefore should never
allow this situation to
occur. This may not
indicate a problem with the
operation of the RPC SDV
Server.
Check the operation of the RPC
SDV Server.
Alarm
Title
Recommended
Action
A D5 UEQ Event Logs
d5SessMgtQam
OversubsTrap
0x9013131d -
[2417169181]
SDV_BWUN
AVAIL_ERR
Log-only n/a n/a
An RPC Create Session
or an R6 SETUP fails due
to insufficient
bandwidth being
available.
The NGOD ERM (or RPC
GSRM) should manage
bandwidth on each QAM
channel and therefore
should never allow this
situation to occur.
However, this may not
indicate a problem with the
operation of the ERM (or
RPC GSRM); there may be
bandwidth consumed by
streams not managed by
the ERM (or RPC GSRM)
such as VOD.
Check the streams on the QAM
channel and ensure they match
those signalled by the ERM.
d5SessMgtMsg
InfoTrap
0x90131330 -
[2417169200]
RTSP_
RESPONSE_ERR
Log-only n/a n/a
R6 SETUP messages are
unsuccessful as the D5
times out waiting for the
message response from
the ERM.
There may be a
communication problem
between the ERM and D5,
perhaps causing
unexpected latency in the
connection.
It may be necessary to increase the
RTSP message timeout setting on
the D5 to compensate for network
latency.
d5SessMgtMsg
InfoTrap
0x90131334 -
[2417169204]
RTSP_FREQ_
MISMATCH
Log-only n/a n/a
This has no operational
impact on the D5 but is
merely a warning to
indicate that the
Frequency in the SETUP
message does not
match that of the QAM
in question. The SETUP
message will still be
processed.
This could indicate a
provisioning issue on the
ERM though unlikely to
occur where the ERM auto
discovers QAM channel
resources.
Check ERM configuration.
d5SessMgtMsg
InfoTrap
0x90131335 -
[2417169205]
RTSP_
TRANSPORT_
DUP_ERR
Log-only n/a n/a
R6 SETUP messages are
unsuccessful as the D5
rejects the request due
to the presence of
identical Transport
headers.
This is probably indicative
of a configuration issues at
the SRM or a problem with
how the ERM selects
Transports to include in the
Setup message.
Check the SRM configuration and
the ERM operation.
d5SessMgtMsg
InfoTrap
0x90131336 -
[2417169206]
RTSP_UNEXPECT
ED_FORMAT
Log-only n/a n/a
This has no operational
impact on the D5 but is
merely a warning to
indicate that the R6
message contains non-
fatal errors. The SETUP
message will still be
processed.
The most likely causes of
this are unsupported RTSP
Headers in the R6 message
which are ignored, the
format of the ODSI is not as
expected, the QAM Name
prefix does not match the
configured Streaming
Zone, the URL is not as
expected, etc.
Check ERM configuration.
d5SessMgtMsg
InfoTrap
0x90131340 -
[2417169216]
VREP_NOTIFI
CATION
Log-only n/a n/a
The D5 connection
sent a NOTIFICATION
message.
The ERM may have
handle.
be examined.
d5SessMgtMsg
InfoTrap
0x90131350 -
[2417169232]
VREP_SENT_
NOTIFI
CATION
Log-only n/a n/a
The D5 connection
terminates as the D5
sent a NOTIFICATION
message.
The D5 may have
the ERM that it could not
handle.
be examined.
d5SessMgtMsg
InfoTrap
0x90131351 -
[2417169233]
VREP_RECEIVED_
NOTIFI
CATION
Log-only n/a n/a
The D5 connection
sent a NOTIFICATION
message.
The ERM may have
handle.
be examined.
d5SessMgtIgmp
ErrorTrap
0X90131165 -
[2417168741]
IGMP_SWITCH_E
RROR
Alarm Major
D5 WAN
Configuration Trap
IGMP requests are not
being processed and so
multicast sessions are
not being processed as
expected.
This should never occur in
an operational release of
software but indicates and
internal failure in the D5
software.
Contact ARRIS Tech Support.
d5SessMgtGen
ErrorTrap
0x90131314 -
[2417169172]
DV_RPC_SRM_ER
R
Log-only n/a n/a
The D5 received a
negative response to an
RCP message from the
GSRM.
There is a problem
communicating with the
GSRM.
Configuration of the GSRM and RPC
interface on the D5 needs to be
verified.
Alarm
Title
Recommended
Action
d5SessMgtGen
ErrorTrap
0x90131315 -
[2417169173]
SDV_RPC_SRM_
ERR
Log-only n/a n/a
The D5 received a
negative response to an
RCP message from the
SDV Server.
There is a problem
SDV Server.
Configuration of the SDV Server
and RPC interface on the D5 needs
to be verified.
d5SessMgtGen
ErrorTrap
0x9013132d -
[2417169197]
SDV_RESET
INDICATION_
ERR
Log-only n/a n/a
The ResetIndication
message is not sent to
the GSRM so it will not
resync with the D5.
There is a problem
GSRM.
Configuration of the GSRM and RPC
interface on the D5 needs to be
verified.
d5SessMgtGen
ErrorTrap
0x90131332 -
[2417169202]
RTSP_
INTERNAL_
FAILURE
Alarm Major
D5 WAN
Configuration Trap
R6 requests are not
sessions are not being
established as expected.
This should never occur in
an operational release of
software but indicates an
internal failure in the D5
software.
Contact ARRIS Tech Support.
d5SessMgtGen
ErrorTrap
0x90131606
[2417169926]
NGOD_GEN_
ERROR
Log-only n/a n/a
R6 requests are not
sessions are not being
established as expected.
This is caused by a problem
with the R6 messages such
as mandatory parameters
not present in a SETUP
message, unknown
session-id, maximum
number of sessions
reached, RTSP parsing
error and socket errors.
be examined.
d5MpegMgtTable
ErrorTrap
0x90130307 -
[2417165063]
MPEGMGR_
SECTFAIL
Log-only n/a n/a
A video stream is not
delivered to a QAM as
expected.
The stream contains tables
that cant be correctly
parsed by the D5 because
of problems at the MPEG
section level. This could be
caused by section CRC
errors, invalid header
lengths or invalid
continuity-counters.
The source video streams need to
be checked for conformance to the
MPEG standard.
d5MpegMgtTable
ErrorTrap
0x90130308 -
[2417165064]
MPEGMGR_
TABFAIL
Log-only n/a n/a
A video stream is not
delivered to a QAM as
expected.
This is caused by a PAT or
CAT table being too large
(the section is greater than
1024 bytes), the CAT, PAT
or PMT table being on the
wrong PID or a PMT table
received that was not
signalled in the PAT.
The source video streams need to
be checked for conformance to the
MPEG standard. However, it is
possible that a PMT table failure
will be seen occasionally if the
stream is dynamically changing the
PMT PID in the PAT; this situation
has no operational impact.
d5MpegMgtSess
StopTrap
0x90130301 -
[2417165057]
MPEGMGR_
SESSCLOSE
All video streams in this
session have stopped.
n/a
d5MpegMgtSess
StartTrap
0x90130300 -
[2417165056]
MPEGMGR_
SESSOPEN
A video session is beginning
as a PAT table has been
detected but the video
stream is not yet being
delivered to the appropriate
QAM channel.
n/a
d5MpegMgtSess
StartTrap
0x90130321 -
[2417169185]
MPEGMGR_
DEPICONFLICT
Log-only n/a n/a
Dynamic DEPI sessions
fails to be established
resulting in loss of
DOCSIS data traffic.
Misconfiguration of the M-
CMTS Core, in particular
the assignment of QAM
channels to DEPI sessions,
has led to a conflict where
more than one session has
been assigned to the same
QAM channel.
Check configuration of M-CMTS
Core.
d5MpegMgtQam
OversubsFilter
Trap
0x90130317 -
[2417160317]
MPEGMGR_BW
OVERSUB
RECOVER
FILTPROG
Log-only n/a n/a
The video stream has
been removed from the
QAM channel to
alleviate the
oversubscription
condition.
The QAM channel has been
detected as being over-
subscribed and a video
stream has been removed
from it to address this.
Streams will be removed on
a LIFO basis. This filtering
operation only occurs if the
D5 has been configured to
perform over-subscription
auto-recovery.
The over-subscription condition
needs to be investigated; there
may have been too many streams
provisioned on the QAM channel or
some of those streams may have
been consuming more bandwidth
than expected.
Alarm
Title
Recommended
Action
A D5 UEQ Event Logs
d5MpegMgtQam
ErrorTram
0x90130304 -
[2417165060]
MPEMGR_PROGO
VERSUB
Log-only n/a n/a
The video stream is not
delivered to the QAM as
expected.
The maximum number of
streams on the QAM
channel has been reached.
The default for this is 63
but can be configured to be
lower.
It is not possible to pass more than
63 programs on one QAM channel
at present but the max-streams
configuration on the QAM channel
should be checked to see if it has
been unintentionally set lower than
this.
d5MpegMgtProg
StopTrap
0x90130319 -
[2417165081]
MPEGMGR_
PNSTOP
Log-only n/a n/a
The video stream is no
longer being delivered
to the QAM.
stopped being delivered.
n/a
d5MpegMgtProg
StartTrap
0x90130318 -
[2417165080]
MPEGMGR_
PNSTART
successfully start to be
delivered on the
appropriate QAM channel.
n/a
d5MpegMgtProg
PidErrorTrap
0x90130312 -
[2417165074]
MPEGMGR_PCRPI
DFILT
Log-only n/a n/a
expected.
This is caused by a
misconfiguration of PID
filters causing the PCR PID
in the stream to be filtered.
Reconfigure the PID Filters on the
D5.
d5MpegMgtProg
PidErrorTrap
0x90130311 -
[2417165073]
MPEGMGR_PCRPI
DFILT
Log-only n/a n/a
expected.
This is caused by a
filters causing the PCR PID
in the stream to be filtered.
Reconfigure the PID Filters on the
D5.
d5MpegMgtProg
PidErrorTrap
0x90130310 -
[2417165072]
MPEGMGR_PID
CONFLICT
Log-only n/a n/a
The video stream may
not be delivered to the
QAM as expected or
there may be missing
ES.
Two video streams on the
same QAM are mapping ES
to the same PID values
causing a clash. This can be
caused by incorrectly
configured PID Remap
rules, or if operating in
pass-through mode it
means two streams on the
same QAM are using the
same incoming PID values.
The PID Remap Rules need to be
examined and possibly modified to
ensure unique PID values. When
operating in pass-through mode
the incoming streams need to be
reconfigured to ensure unique PID
values in streams destined for the
same QAM channel.
d5MpegMgtProg
ErrorTrap
0x90130306 -
[2417165062]
MPEGMGR_PMTO
VERSUB
Log-only n/a n/a
expected.
The PMT is too large;
currently the D5 supports
up to 15 ES PID per PMT or
a max PMT section size of
1024 bytes.
The video streams PMT needs to
be either reduced in size or
otherwise have ES removed from
it.
d5MpegMgtProg
ErrorTrap
0x90130309 -
[2417165065]
MPEGMGR_PN
CONFLICT
Log-only n/a n/a
expected
This is caused by two
streams being mapped to
the same Program Number
on a QAM channel causing
a clash. This can be caused
by misconfigured program
remap rules or in the case
of SDV incorrect operation
of the ERM while managing
Program Number
resources.
The Program Remap Rules need to
be examined and possibly modified
to ensure unique Program
Numbers for all streams, or in the
case of SDV, the ERM operation
may need to be investigated.
d5MpegMgtProg
ErrorTrap
0x90130313 -
[2417165075]
MPEGMGR_ALL
PIDFILT
Log-only n/a n/a
expected.
This is caused by a
filters causing all PIDs in
the stream to be filtered.
Reconfigures the PID filters on the
D5.
d5SessMgt
StartupTrap
0x90131310 -
[2417169168]
SDV_RPC_
ADMINUP
Log-
only
n/ a n/ a n/ a
The GQI RPC interface
on the D5 has been
activated.
n/ a
d5SessMgt
StartupTrap
0x90131600 -
[2417169920]
SDV_RPC_
ADMINUP
Log-
only
n/ a n/ a n/ a
The NGOD ERM
interface on the D5 has
been activated.
n/ a
d5SessMgt
ConnectTrap
0x90131604 -
[2417169924]
NGOD_
CONNECT
Log-
only
n/ a n/ a
NGOD D6/ R6
protocols can now be
processed.
Communication with
ERM has been
established.
n/ a
Alarm
Title
Recommended
Action
d5SessMgt
ConnectTrap
0x90131310 -
[2417169168]
NGOD_
CONNECT
Log-
only
n/ a n/ a
NGOD D6/ R6
protocols can now be
processed.
Communication with
ERM has been
established
n/ a
d5SessMgt
ConnectTrap
0x90131310 -
[2417169168]
SDV_SRM_
CONNECT
Log-
only
n/ a n/ a
GQI GSRM/ DNCS
requests can now be
processed.
The GQI GSRM has
connected to the D5
n/ a
d5SessMgt
ConnectTrap
0x90131310 -
[2417169168]
SDV_SDV_
CONNECT
Log-
only
n/ a n/ a
GQI SDV Server
requests can now be
processed.
The GQI SDV Server has
connected to the D5
n/ a
d5SessMgt
ConnectTrap
0x90131312 -
[2417169170]
SDV_SDV_
CONNECT
Log-
only
n/ a n/ a
GQI GSRM/ DNCS
requests can now be
processed.
The GQI GSRM has
connected to the D5
n/ a
d5SessMgt
ConnectTrap
0x90131313-
[2417169171]
SDV_SDV_
CONNECT
Log-
only
n/ a n/ a
GQI SDV Server
requests can now be
processed.
The GQI SDV Server has
connected to the D5
n/ a
d5SessMgt
QamOversubs
Trap
0x90130303 -
[2417165059]
MPEGMGR_
BWOVERSUB
alarmAsserted
==1
Alarm Major
D5QAM
Oversubscription
Trap
All video streams on
the QAM channel
may be subject to
macro blocking.
There may have been
too many streams
provisioned on the QAM
channel or some of
those streams may have
been consuming more
bandwidth than
expected.
Ensure that there are not too
many streams provisioned on
the QAM channel and check
that those streams are
consuming no more than their
expected bandwidth.
d5SessMgt
QamOversubs
Trap
0x90130303 -
[2417165059]
MPEGMGR_
BWOVERSUB
alarmAsserted
=2
Clear
D5QAM
Oversubscr
iption
Trap
n/ a
The QAM channel
oversubscription
condition has been
fixed
This may be as a result
of the D5 stopping
streams, if it has been
configured to auto-
recover from over-
subscription. Or it is
possible that a
misbehaving stream is
now conforming to its
expected bandwidth
n/ a
d5MpegMgtProg
OverflowTrap
0x90230315 -
[2418213653]
MPEGMGR_
PROGRAM
OVERFLOW
alarmAsserted
==1
Alarm Major
D5 Program
Overflow Trap
The video stream
may experience
macro-blocking
when viewed, or in
severe cases may
stop being delivered.
The video jitter buffer
for this video stream is
overflowing. this can be
caused by excessive
jitter on the I P network
The IP network needs to be
assessed for excessive jitter.
Alternatively, the jitter buffer
depth can be increased on the
D5.
d5MpegMgtProg
OverflowTrap
0x90230315 -
[2418213653]
MPEGMGR_
PROGRAM
OVERFLOW
alarmAsserted
==2
Clear
D5
Program
Overflow
Trap
n/ a n/ a
The jitter buffer
overflow condition is no
longer being detected
by the D5 and so has
been cleared.
n/ a
d5MpegMgtProg
UnderflowTrap
0x90230314 -
[2418213652]
MPEGMGR_
PROGRAM
UNDERFLOW
alarmAsserted
==1
Alarm Major
D5 Program
Underflow Trap
The video stream
may experience
macro-blocking
when viewed, or in
severe cases may
stop being delivered.
The video jitter buffer
for this video stream is
underflowing. This can
be caused by excessive
jitter on the I P network.
The IP network needs to be
assessed for excessive jitter. It
is also possible that the
bitrates of the stream has
dropped significantly which
may need to be investigated.
d5MpegMgtProg
UnderflowTrap
0x90230314 -
[2418213652]
MPEGMGR_
PROGRAM
UNDERFLOW
alarmAsserted
==2
Clear
D5
Program
Underflow
Trap
n/ a n/ a
The jitter buffer
underflow condition is
no longer being
detected by the D5 and
so has been cleared.
n/ a
Alarm
Title
Recommended
Action
A D5 UEQ Event Logs
d5MpegMgtProg
OversubsTrap
0x90230316 -
[2418213654]
MPEGMGR_
PROGBW
OVERSUB
alarmAsserted
==1
Alarm Major
D5 Program
Oversubscription
Trap
This may have no
operational impact
but if the QAM
channel utilization is
quite high then it
could cause macro-
blocking on all video
streams.
The bandwidth
consumed by a video
stream is more than
that signalled in the
SDV protocol (RPC or
NGOD). This may be as a
result of a provisioning
error at the SRM.
Stop the session in question to
avoid causing quality issues
for other video streams on the
same QAM channel. Check the
configuration of the stream at
the GQI SDV Server or NGOD
SRM.
d5MpegMgtProg
OversubsTrap
0x90230316 -
[2418213654]
MPEGMGR_
PROGBW
OVERSUB
alarmAsserted
==2
Clear
D5
Program
Oversub-
scription
Trap
n/ a n/ a
The bandwidth
consumed by a video
stream has returned to
that signalled in the
SDV protocol (RPC or
NGOD) so the alarm has
been cleared.
n/ a
d5SessMgt
StreamUnavail
Trap
0x90131166 -
[2417168742]
SDV_STREAM_
UNAVAIL
alarmAsserted
==1
Alarm Critical
D5 Stream
Unavailable Trap
For a particular SDV
session, the
expected stream is
not delivered to the
specified QAM
channel as it has not
been detected. I t is
possible that a
redundant source for
this stream will be
used to create the
session, if available.
The most likely cause is
the particular stream
not available on the
network as the D5 could
not detect it after
joining the appropriate
multicast group.
It is necessary to find the
cause of the stream outage;
this could be a network issue
or a provisioning issue on the
GQI SDV Server or NGOD SRM.
d5SessMgt
StreamUnavail
Trap
0x90131166 -
[2417168742]
SDV_STREAM_
UNAVAIL
alarmAsserted
==2
Clear
D5 Stream
Unavailabl
e
Trap
n/ a n/ a
The stream is now
available
n/ a
d5SessMgt
StreamLostTrap
0x9013116 -
[2417168743]
SDV_STREAM_L
OST
alarmAsserted
==1
Alarm Critical
D5 Stream
StoppedTrap
A stream that was
currently is use by an
SDV session as
stopped and is no
longer available. This
may be caused by a
service outage if
there is a redundant
source available for
this session.
The most likely cause is
the particular stream is
no longer available on
the network.
It is necessary to find the
cause of the stream outage.
d5SessMgt
StreamLostTrap
0x90131167 -
[2417168743]
SDV_STREAM_L
OST
alarmAsserted
==2
Clear
D5 Stream
Stopped
Trap
n/ a n/ a
The stream is now
available
n/ a
d5SessMgtShut
downTrap
0x90131311 -
[2417169169]
SDV_RPC_
ADMINDOWN
alarmAsserted
==1
Alarm Critical
D5 GQI
Configuration
Trap
The D5 no longer
responds to RPC
requests.
The GQI RPC interface
on the D5 has been
deactivated.
Re-activate the QGI RPC
interface.
d5SessMgtShut
downTrap
0x90131311 -
[2417169169]
SDV_RPC_
ADMINDOWN
alarmAsserted
==2
Clear
D5 GQI
Configura-
tion Trap
n/ a n/ a
The RPC interface on
the D5 has been
reactivated.
n/ a
d5SessMgtShut
downTrap
0x90131341 -
[2417169217]
ERM_ADMIN
DOWN
alarmAsserted
==1
Alarm Critical
D5 ERM
Configuration
Trap
The D5 no longer
responds to R6
requests or
generates D6
updates.
The ERM interface on
the D5 has been
deactivated.
Re-activate the NGOD ERM
interface.
Alarm
Title
Recommended
Action
d5SessMgtShut
downTrap
0x90131341 -
[2417169217]
ERM_ADMIN
DOWN
alarmAsserted
==2
Clear
D5 ERM
Configura-
tion Trap
n/ a n/ a
The ERM interface on
the D5 has been
reactivated.
n/ a
d5SessMgt
Disconnect Trap
0x90131605 -
[2417169925]
NGOD_
DISCONNECT
alarmAsserted
==1
Alarm Critical
D5 NGOD
LinkDown Trap
The D5 no longer
responds to R6
requests or
generates D6
updates.
There is a
communication
problem between the
D5 and the ERM. The
ERM may have been
shutdown or there is a
network problem
ERM, the network connection
and the management interface
on the D5.
d5SessMgt[]
Disconnect Trap
0x90131605 -
[2417169925]
NGOD_
DISCONNECT
alarmAsserted
==2
Clear
D5 NGOD
LinkDown
Trap
n/ a n/ a
Communication
between the ERM and
the D5 has been re-
established.
n/ a
d5SessMgt
Disconnect Trap
0x90131342 -
[2417169218]
SDV_
DISCONNECT
alarmAsserted
==1
Alarm Critical
D5 GQI
LinkDown Trap
The D5 no longer
responds to GQI SDV
Server requests.
There is a
communications
problem between the
D5 and the SDV Server.
The SDV server may
have been shutdown or
there is a network
problem between it and
the D5.
Server, the network
connection and the
management interface on the
D5.
d5SessMgt
Disconnect Trap
0x90131342 -
[2417169218]
SDV_
DISCONNECT
alarmAsserted
==2
Clear
D5 GQI
LinkDown
Trap
n/ a n/ a
Communication
between the SDV server
and the D5 has been re-
established.
n/ a
d5SessMgt
Disconnect Trap
0x90131343 -
[2417169219]
SRM_
DISCONNECT
alarmAsserted
==1
Alarm Critical
D5 GQI
LinkDown Trap
The D5 no longer
responds to GQI
GSRM/ DNCS
requests.
There is a
communications
problem between the
D5 and the
GSRM/ DNCS. The
GSRM/ DNCS may have
been shutdown or there
is a network problem
GSRM/ DNCS, the network
connection and the
management interface on the
D5.
d5SessMgt
Disconnect Trap
0x90131343 -
[2417169219]
SRM_
DISCONNECT
alarmAsserted
==2
Clear
D5 GQI
LinkDown
Trap
n/ a n/ a
Communication
between the
GSRM/ DNCS and the D5
has been re-
established.
n/ a
Alarm
Title
Recommended
Action
A D5 UEQ Event Logs
Release 3.0.1 ARRIS PROPRIETARY All Rights Reserved B-1
B. D5 UEQ Upgrade Procedures
Overview
This Appendix provides details specific to upgrading an individual D5 UEQ
system.
For networks with several D5 UEQ system deployed, operators may wish
to review D5 Application Manager Documentation for information on auto-
mating multiple system upgrades.
The procedures outlined below are for systems currently running with D5
Release 2.6.0.94. These procedures are equally applicable to systems
running 2.3.0.70 as well as all other 2.4, 2.6, 3.0 and 3.0.1 software
releases.
This procedure involves placing the ARRIS D5 UEQ software image
(obtained from ARRIS) on a TFTP server. The software image is then
downloaded to the compact flash on the ARRIS D5 UEQ and assigned as
the Boot Image. The ARRIS D5 UEQ system is then rebooted.
It is the users responsibility to acquire and deploy a TFTP server. The
ARRIS D5 UEQ software image must be placed in an accessible TFTP
server directory.
NOTE
The ARRIS D5 UEQ will experience approximately 10 minutes of
service interruption for the required system reboot.
B-2 ARRIS PROPRIETARY All Rights Reserved J uly 22, 2010
Upgrade Preparations
To upgrade the ARRIS D5 UEQ software you must have the following
basic configuration:
Verify IP connectivity to the WAN interface ETH 0/1 or connectivity to
the serial port on the front of the D5 UEQ system.
Obtain the D5 UEQ Release 3.0.1.XX software image from ARRIS.
Place the software image on an accessible TFTP server and verify file
permissions.
Verify the D5 UEQ meets minimum hardware compatibility (see Table
B-1). The hardware information can be verified by logging into the D5
UEQ system, entering Privilege Mode and executing the show
version detail command and the CLI prompt. Compare the
Product Code and Product Revision of the output to this table.
Table B-1: Minimum Hardware Compatibility
Module Order Code
Product
Code
Product
Revision
Monitor Card (MON) 716626 MON_8 AB
WAN Card (Higher FPGA Capacity) 722012 WAN_4G2F CA
WAN Card (Dual-DTI) 728906 WAN_4G2F CB
DPM QAM Card (Annex-A, B, C) 716604 QAM_4DX2 AC
DPM QAM Card (Annex-B only) 721936 QAM_6DX2 CB
DPM QAM Card (Annex-A, B, C) 772080 QAM_6DX2 EB
QPM QAM Card 780274 QAM_8DX4 BB
AC Power Supply Unit (500W PSU) 722058 N/A -
DC Power Supply Unit (500W PSU) 716631 N/A -
AC Power Supply Unit (600W PSU) 780280 PSU_AC AA
DC Power Supply Unit (600W PSU) 780281 PSU_DC AA
Power Module (P-Mod) 721112 PWR_DNV8 AB
Front Panel 716628 DISP_8 AB
Chassis (AC-500W) 722050 CHA_8 AA
Chassis (DC-500W) 721114 CHA_8 AA
Chassis (AC-600W) 780276 CHA_8 BA
Chassis (DC-600W) 780277 CHA_8 BA
Fan Tray 721931 FAN_8 AA
NOTE
Newly supported hardware should not be inserted into the D5 UEQ
chassis until the chassis has been upgraded to the release which provides
support for that hardware. Failure to upgrade the chassis first could
result in a failure to upgrade.
Performing the Software Upgrade via CLI
Procedure B-1 Performing the upgrade via CLI .
NOTE
It will take approximately 30 minutes per chassis to complete the
upgrade.
1 Login to the D5 UEQ system. Log all session output for later review as
needed.
Logi n: <MyUser Name>
Passwor d: <MyUser Passwor d>
ARRI S D5 Uni ver sal EdgeQAM Command Li ne I nt er f ace
( S/ Wver si on: 2. 6. 0. 94
D5> enabl e
Passwor d: : <MyUser Enabl ePasswor d>
D5#
2 Save existing configuration and prepare a back up of current running and
startup configuration settings.
D5#wr i t e memor y
D5#copy st ar t up- conf i gur at i on <st ar t up conf i g backup f i l ename>
3 Copy the D5 UEQ software update from the TFTP server to the compact
flash on the D5 UEQ.
NOTE
When upgrading, the D5 UEQ requires the upgrade image to be located
in the / system directory of the Flash drive.
D5#copy t f t p: / / <TFTP Ser ver I P Addr ess>/ D5_3. 0. 1. 54. t r s / syst em
Accessi ng t f t p: / / <TFTP Ser ver I P Addr ess>/ D5_3. 0. 1. 54. t r s. . .
! ! ! ! ! ! ! ! ! ! ! ! ! ! ! ! ! ! ! ! ! ! ! ! ! ! ! ! ! ! ! ! ! ! ! ! ! ! ! ! ! ! ! ! ! ! ! ! ! ! ! ! ! ! ! ! ! ! ! ! ! ! ! ! ! ! ! ! ! ! ! ! ! ! ! ! ! ! ! ! !
! ! ! ! ! ! ! ! ! ! ! ! ! ! ! ! ! ! ! ! ! ! ! ! ! ! ! ! ! ! ! ! ! ! ! ! ! ! ! ! ! ! ! ! ! ! ! ! ! ! ! ! ! ! ! ! ! ! ! ! ! ! ! ! ! ! ! ! ! ! ! ! ! ! ! ! ! ! ! ! !
! ! ! ! ! ! ! ! ! ! ! ! ! ! ! ! ! ! ! ! ! ! ! ! ! ! ! ! ! ! ! ! ! ! ! ! ! ! ! ! ! ! ! ! ! ! ! ! ! ! ! ! ! ! ! ! ! ! ! ! ! ! ! ! ! ! ! ! ! ! ! ! ! ! ! ! ! ! ! ! !
! ! ! ! ! ! ! ! ! ! ! ! ! ! ! ! ! ! ! ! ! ! ! ! ! ! ! ! ! ! ! ! ! ! ! ! ! ! ! ! ! ! ! ! ! ! ! ! ! ! ! ! ! ! ! ! ! ! ! ! !
[ OK - 26378310 byt es]
4 Query available images.
D5#show i mages
I mage Avai l abl e Bui l d Ti me Boot I mage
D5_2. 6. 0. 94. t r s MON AUG 17 10: 02: 43 2009 Yes
D5_3. 0. 1. 54. t r s WED J UN 23 09: 32: 04 2010 No
D5#
5 Assign the D5 UEQ boot image. This reassigns the default D5 UEQs
startup boot file.
D5#
NOTE
The D5 UEQ Boot command executes a CRC check on the file during the
TFTP download. If the upgrade file becomes corrupted, the D5 UEQ will
prevent it from being used. The user should attempt to download the
upgrade TFTP file again. (See Step 3 above.)
6 Reload the D5 UEQ to reboot the unit onto the new load. Answer Y to
each question to save configuration and complete the reload.
NOTE
The following steps will cause the D5 UEQ to experience a service
interruption for approximately ten (10) minutes.
D5# r el oad
Save conf i gur at i on when r eboot i ng( Y/ N) ? Y
Ar e you sur e you want t o r eboot t he syst em( Y/ N) ? Y
Backup syst em. . . Pl ease wai t
Checki ng i mage bef or e r eboot i ng. . . Pl ease wai t
7 After the system has recovered, login to the ARRIS D5 and verify all
services have been restored. Please review section 3.2 Upgrade
Considerations to verify all necessary items have been addressed.
End of procedure
Performing the Software Upgrade via the Web Manager
Procedure B-2 Performing the upgrade via Web Manager.
NOTE
It will take approximately 30 minutes per chassis to complete the
upgrade.
1 Login to the D5 UEQ system and select Boot Management from the
Startup Configuration menu.
2 Before proceeding, it is recommended that you save any configuration
changes made since the last system reload. To do this, click Save.
3 Copy the D5 UEQ software updated from the TFTP server to the compact
flash on the D5 UEQ. Enter the IP address of the TFTP server, the complete
file name of the source file as it is stored on the TFTP server, and the name
as it is to appear on the D5 UEQ (usually the same as the source file
name). Then click on the Upload button.
4 After clicking the Upload button, click OK to confirm. The Web Manager
will show progress of the upload and then refresh the page.
5 Verify the transferred load is among the list of available images. To assign
the new software load as the boot image, click on the associated radio
button (Active On Net Boot) and click Update.
NOTE
The following step will cause the D5 UEQ to experience a service
6 To reboot the D5 UEQ unit onto the new load, click Reload.
7 Reload the D5 UEQ to reboot the unit onto the new load. The Web
Manager will display a countdown while the D5 UEQ completes the restart.
8 After the system has completed the reload, the Web Manager will
automatically display the Login page. The user should log into the Web
Manager and verify all services have recovered properly.
End of procedure
Release 3.0.1 ARRIS PROPRIETARY All Rights Reserved C-1
C. D5 UEQ Downgrade
Procedures
Reverting to Prior Software Load
In the event that issues are encountered as part of the upgrade, the
following steps describe the necessary procedure to revert back to the
previous release (downgrade).
NOTE
Reverting to the prior software load must be done via CLI.
Downgrading to pre-3.0 Release Software Loads
The Quad-Port QAM Module (QPM 8DX4) should be removed from the D5
UEQ chassis prior to downgrading to a pre-3.0 software load. Failure to
remove the this card will cause the card to be put into an OOS-FLT state.
Once the system has been downgraded to a pre-3.0 software load, the
Dual WAN configuration file (/update/wan2/startup-configuration) will no
longer be available.
Procedure C-1 Use the following steps to revert back to the previous load.
1 Login to the ARRIS D5 system and log all session output for later review
as needed.
2 Locate the copies of the running and startup configuration files made as
part during the upgrade.
C-2 ARRIS PROPRIETARY All Rights Reserved J uly 22, 2010
3 Set the default load of the ARRIS D5s system:
D5(config)#boot system flash D5_2.6.0.94.trs
Checki ng i mage. . . Pl ease wai t
Updat i ng boot l oader command l i ne. . . Pl ease wai t
D5(config)#exit
D5# show images
I mage Avai l abl e Bui l d Ti me Boot I mage
D5_2. 6. 0. 94. t r s MON AUG 17 10: 02: 43 2009 Yes
D5_3. 0. 0. 96. t r s THU AUG 27 07: 30: 47 2009 No
D5#
4 Restore the backup copy of the startup configuration file.
D5#copy <startup config backup filename> startup-
configuration
5 Before continuing to the next step to reload, check the /update directory
file system does not exceed 10Meg bytes used.
D5#show version
ARRI S CLI ver si on . 02
Appl i cat i on i mage: 3. 0. 0. 96, Aug 27 2009, 13: 23: 32
VxWor ks5. 4. 2
Syst emupt i me i s: 0 weeks, 0 days, 0 hour s, 6 mi nut es
Syst emboot i mage f i l e f r omCompact Fl ash:
D5_2. 6. 0. 94. t r s
512 MB DDR SDRAM memor y
Compact Fl ash ( / syst em) :
147259392 byt es f r ee,
109092864 byt es used,
256352256 byt es t ot al
Updat e f i l esyst em( / updat e) :
128405504 byt es f r ee,
ARRI S D5Uni ver sal Edge QAM - Rel ease 3. 0. 0. 96
Rel ease Not es & Let t er of Oper at i onal Consi der at i on 28
2142208 byt es used,
130547712 byt es t ot al
Release 3.0.1 ARRIS PROPRIETARY All Rights Reserved C-3
NOTE
If the bytes used in the /update directory exceeds 10Meg, delete the
shutdownDebug.log.
D5#cd /update
D5#rm shutdownDebug.log
6 Reload the ARRIS D5WAN to reboot the unit onto the new load.
NOTE
The following steps will cause the ARRIS D5 to experience a service
NOTE
The user MUST answer N to the request to save configuration. An
answer of Y MAY lead to configuration errors as a result of this
downgrade.
D5# r el oad
Save conf i gur at i on when r eboot i ng( Y/ N) ? N
Ar e you sur e you want t o r eboot t he syst em( Y/ N) ? Y
7 After the system has recovered, login to the ARRIS D5 and verify all
services have been restored.
End of procedure
C-4 ARRIS PROPRIETARY All Rights Reserved J uly 22, 2010
Release 3.0.1 ARRIS PROPRIETARY All Rights Reserved DT-1
GL Glossary
D5 UEQ Glossary of Terms And Acronyms
1000Base-LX A fiber optic GigE standard. Also known as single mode.
1000Base-SX
A fiber optic GigE standard. It operates over multi-mode fiber using a 850 nm near
infrared (NIR) light wavelength.
AM Application Manager
ASM Any Source Multicast
BCT Batch Configuration Tool
CAS
Conditional Access System - used to control subscriber access to broadcast services
and events.
CC Continuity Counter
Channel-group
A command used within the GigE interface configuration menu for associating the
port to a particular port-channel instance.
CLI Command Line Interface - used to issue commands to the D5 UEQ.
CP Crypto Period
CPLD Complex Programmable Logic Device
CW Code Word - data object used for scrambling
CWDM
Coarse Wavelength Division Multiplexing, a method that allows up to 8 wavelengths
of light to be sent over a single fiber optic cable. Each wavelength can carry GigE
traffic. See WDM.
CWG
Code Word Generator - component that receives a CW request from the SCS and
returns a CW.
DAC Digital to Analog Converter
DEPI
Downstream External Phy Interface - Data plan interface for all DOCSIS frames
from M-CMTS Core to EQAM.
DOCSIS Data Over Cable Service Interface Specification
DRFI Downstream Radio Frequency Interface
DPM Dual-Port QAM Module. The DPM
DT-2 ARRIS PROPRIETARY All Rights Reserved J uly 22, 2010
GL Glossary
DTI DOCSIS Timing Interface
DVB Digital Video Broadcasting
DVB-C
Digital Video Broadcasting - Cable - broadcasting TV signals that comply with a
digital standard by cable (ETS 300 429). A system developed in Europe for digital
television transmission.
DVB SimulCrypt
DVB specification outlining the requirements for interoperability between two or
more conditional access systems at a head-end. It specifies the system
architecture, timing relationships, messaging structures, extended interoperability
and control.
DWDM
Dense Wavelength Division Multiplexing, a method that allows more than 8
wavelengths of light to be sent over a single fiber optic cable. Each wavelength can
carry Gigabit Ethernet traffic. See WDM.
ECM
Entitlement Control Message - private conditional access information which specify
control words and possibly other, typically stream-specific, scrambling and/or
control parameters.
ECMG
Entitlement Control Message Generator - generator that produces the ECM
messages but does not support ECM repetition.
EEPROM Electrically Erasable Programmable Read Only Memory
EIG Edge Input Groups
EIS
Event Information System - software system involved with issuing Scrambling
Control Group definitions to the SCS in order for scrambling sessions to be initiated.
EMM
Entitlement Management Message - private conditional access information which
specifies the authorization levels or the services of specific decoders. They may be
addressed to single decoders or groups of decoders.
EMMG
Entitlement Management Message Generator - generator that produces the EMM
messages and repeatedly plays them out at the appropriate times.
EPG
Electronic Program Guide - programming guide information that is stored on a
server that generates and assembles EPSs based on DVB-SI tables. These tables
allow any DVBA-compliant settop box to display and epg.
ES
Elementary Stream - a single stream of video or audio data taken from a video or
audio encoder.
ERM Edge Resource Manager
ERMI Edge Resource Manager Interface - Dynamic allocation of EQAMs.
FCAPS Fault, Configuration, Accounting, Performance & Security Management
FPGA Field Programmable Gate Array
GAS Generic Access Scheme
GQI Generic QAM Interface
GigE GigabitEthernet interface
GSRM Generic or Global Session Resource Management
GUI Graphical User Interface
HFC
Hybrid Fiber Coax network - the network architecture used preferentially by most
cable operators.
ICC Inter Card Communication
IGMP
Internet Group Management Protocol - used by IP hosts to report their multicast
group memberships to an adjacent multicast router.
IGMP Group
A holder that contains an IP multicast address, state data, ifIndex of associated
subinterface, IGMP v1 host timer, up time and last reporter IP address.
IP Internet Protocol
IP PROC IP Processor PFGA
IPv6 Internet Protocol, Version 6
ITC Inter Task Communication
LACP Link Aggregation Control Protocol
MIB Management Information Base
M-OSSI M-CMTS Operations Support System Interface - SNMP MIB extensions for M-CMTS.
MON D5 UEQ Chassis Monitor Module
MPEG Motion Pictures Experts Group
MPEG-2
Second generation of video coding and transport specification from the MPEG
committees
MPEG-4
A developing standard divided into a number of parts used primarily to compress
audio and visual (AV) digital data.
MPTS Multiple Program Transport Stream
MSO Multiple Systems Operator
Multiplexer Used by the D5 UEQ to merge VOD content with DVB (P)/SI tables.
MUX Multiplexer
NIT Network Information Table
NTP Network Time Protocol
OAMP Operations, Administration, Maintenance and Provisioning
PAT Program Association Table
PCR
Program Clock Reference - a time stamp in the Transport Stream from which
decoder timing is derived.
GL Glossary
PES
Packetized Elementary Stream - a stream consisting of PES packets, all of whose
payloads consist of data from a single elementary stream, and all of which have the
same stream_id. A PES consists of a single ES that has been made into packets,
each starting with an added packet header.
PHY Physical Layer Interface
PID
Packet Identifier - identifies, via the Program Specific Information (PSI) tables, the
contents of the data contained in the Transport Stream packet. Transport Stream
packets of one PID value carry data of one and only one elementary stream.
PMOD Power Management Module
PMT
Program Map Table (or Program Management Table). This identifies the locations
of the streams that make up each service and the location of the PCR fields for a
service.
PN Program Number
Port-channel
A term used to describe a collection of GigE ports that form a trunk. The port-
channel is identified using a number. Used interchangeably with the trunk term.
POST Power-on self-test
PSI
Program Specific Information, the PSI consists of normative data that is necessary
for the demultiplexing of Transport Streams and the successful regeneration of
programs. The PSI includes: PAT, PMT, NIT, CAT, ECM and EMM.
PSIG Program Specific Information Generator
PSU Power Supply Unit
QAM
D5 UEQ DS PHY/Upconverter Quadrature Amplitude Modulation Module. Converts
packet format to RF traffic and network traffic to DOCSIS traffic.
QPM Quad-Port QAM Module.
QPSK
Quadrature Phase Shift Keying - a phase modulation algorithm that is achieved by
use of a discrete number of states. Quad is in reference to four phases in which
a carrier is sent in QPSK.
Radius Remote Authentication Dial In User Service
RF Radio Frequency, typically in the D5 UEQ guides, 54-860MHz
RM Resource Management
RPC
Remote Procedure Call - technique for constructing distributed client-server
applications such that the local calling procedure need not exist in the same
address space as the calling procedure.
RSVP
Resource Reservation Protocol - the protocol that supports the reservation of
resources across an IP network. Applications running on IP end systems can use
RSVP to indicate to other nodes the nature (bandwidth, jitter, maximum burst, and
so on) of the packet streams they want to receive. RSVP depends on IPv6. Also
know as Resource Reservation Setup Protocol.
RTP
Real Time Transport Protocol - A standardized packet format for delivering audio
and video over the internet.
RTPC Real-time Transport Control Protocol - Used to monitor Quality of Service.
RTSP Real Time Streaming Protocol
Scrambler
This component is responsible for scrambling data in the MPEG2 Transport Stream
using received control words from the SCS.
SCG
Scrambling Control Group - data structure gathering together in one same logical
set the list of A/V streams scrambled at the same time with the same control word
and the list of ECMs that are going to be generated with the identifier of their CA
system and with their respective Access Criteria.
SCS
SimulCrypt Synchronizer - logical component that acquires control words, ECMs
and synchronizes their play-out for all the Conditional Access Systems connected.
SDT Service Descriptor Table
SDV Switched Digital Video
SFP
Small Form-factor Pluggable. SFP transceiver modules are hot-swappable
input/output (I/O) devices that plug into 100 Base-T and 1000 Base-T ports that
allow interfacing to fiber-optic and copper networks.
SI
Service Information. It is a structure of six tables (PAT, NIT, CAT, SDT, EIT, and
BAT) that provides information on services and events carried by different
multiplexes and even other networks.
SK
Service Key - used to descramble CW information stored within ECM messages.
Service keys are distributed using a per STB EMM message, issued to every STB in
the cable network. The service keys contained within EMM messages are scrambled
using one of the unique private keys stored in the STB smart card. Service keys are
maintained within STB smart cards, and are frequently updated through new EMM
messages to protect the security of the scrambling system.
SMS
Subscriber Management System - subscriber database containing all information
about registered subscribers, their TV services, any pay-per-view details, and CAS
smart card information.
SNMP Simple Network Management Protocol
SPTS Single Program Transport Streams
SRM Session Resource Manager
SSH
Secure Shell. It is a protocol used to connect and/or transfer files remotely. It is
similar to telnet but offers more security.
SSL
Secure Socket Layer - encryption technology for the Web used to provide secure
transactions, such as the transmission of credit card numbers for e-commerce.
SSM Source Specific Multicast. Also known as Source Specific Multicast
SSP-SIS Session Setup Protocol - Server Initiated Setup
GL Glossary
STB
Set Top Box - a device for receiving video material from the network and formatting
it for display on a television.
SW Software
TACACS+ Terminal Access Controller Access-Control System Plus
TCP
Transmission Control Protocol. Connection-oriented transport layer protocol that
provides reliable full-duplex data transmission. TCP is part of the TCP/IP protocol
stack.
TLS
Transport Level Scrambling - involves scrambling the entire transport stream
packet, ignoring any PES level boundaries. The entire 184 bytes of the MPEG
packet are scrambled.
Trunking
Trunking is a computer networking term which describes using multiple Ethernet
network cables/ports in parallel to increase the link speed beyond the limits of any
one single cable or port. Other terms for this also include ethernet trunk, NIC
teaming, port teaming, port trunking, and link aggregation, and is based on
a networking standard known as IEEE 802.3ad.
TS Transport Stream
UDP
User Datagram Protocol. Connectionless transport layer protocol in the TCP/IP
protocol stack. UDP is a simple protocol that exchanges datagrams without
acknowledgments or guaranteed delivery, requiring that error processing and
retransmission be handled by other protocols. UDP is defined in RFC 768.
VoD Video on Demand
VREP Video Registration Protocol
WAN D5 UEQ Wide Area Network Module
WDM
Wavelength-Division Multiplexing is a technology that multiplexes several optical
carrier signals on a single optical fibre by using different wavelengths (colors) of
laser light to carry different signals. This allows for a n-fold increase in capacity, in
addition to making it possible to perform bidirectional communications over one
strand of fibre.
ARRIS PROPRIETARY All Rights Reserved
Comments & Feedback Form
Your feedback will help us to improve the quality and usefulness of our publications.
Please rate this document (1 = Poor; 5 = Excellent):
Did you find errors in this document? If so, please specify the error(s) and page number(s).
_________________________________________________________________________________________
_________________________________________________________________________________________
_________________________________________________________________________________________
How does this documentation compare to that of other vendors?
_________________________________________________________________________________________
_________________________________________________________________________________________
_________________________________________________________________________________________
General Comments / Suggestions for improvement:
_________________________________________________________________________________________
_________________________________________________________________________________________
_________________________________________________________________________________________
Name: ____________________________________________________ Title: _____________________
Company: __________________________________ Department: ________________________________
Street: ________________________________________ City: ____________________________________
State/Prov: _____________________ Country: ___________________________ Zip:_______________
Date: _______________________________, 2010
Accuracy 1 2 3 4 5
Readability 1 2 3 4 5
Examples 1 2 3 4 5
Organization 1 2 3 4 5
Completeness 1 2 3 4 5
DO NOT CUT - FOLD AT LINE AND TAPE
ARRIS Group, Inc.
Attn: Documentation
2400 Ogden Avenue
Suite 180
Lisle, IL 60532-3999
DO NOT CUT - FOLD AT LINE AND TAPE
Postage
Required
Corporate Headquarters
ARRIS Suwanee Georgia 30024 USA
T: 1-678-473-2000 F: 1-678-473-8470
www.arrisi.com

d5 Ueq User Doc 3 0 1 Std (Arris Ipqam d5用户手册)

Încărcat de

Informații document

Titlu original

Drepturi de autor

Formate disponibile

Partajați acest document

Partajați sau inserați document

Opțiuni de partajare

Vi se pare util acest document?

Este necorespunzător acest conținut?

Drepturi de autor:

Formate disponibile

d5 Ueq User Doc 3 0 1 Std (Arris Ipqam d5用户手册)

Încărcat de

Drepturi de autor:

Formate disponibile

D5 Universal Edge QAM

Edge QAMs. Under this scheme the QAM card is deter-

ARRI S D5 Universal Edge QAM

S-ar putea să vă placă și